■>-5l»>'""^
B-^ i^l Commission, ?dlovlb's (Columbiau (!:vposition,
CHICAGO, 1893.
Offices of ihc ixecutivo Commissioner j
Chicago, ..^.f^.yZ>^= ^^^
forwarded tvith tJio C07nplim&nts of th&
Won. 4rthicr 0lcmvich^ JIM., &'.0l.G.S.,
idifiy , 11.^. i'y and (QX&cutiv& Gotnmission&r
for Jf&iv Soioth tOales.
Vlh 103—92
"'0
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
W
^?I7T7Xt5S
AN
AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE
AS SPOKEN BY THE
A^TV^^B^KA^L
THE PEOPLE OF
AWABA OR LAKE MACQUARIE
(NEAR NEWCASTLE, NEW SOUTH WALES)
BEING AN ACCOUNT OF
THEIR LANGUAGE, TRADITIONS, AND CUSTOMS
BY
L. E. THEELKELD.
Re-arranged, condensed, and edited,
WITH AN APPENDIX,
BY
JOHN ERASEE, BA., LL.D.,
Fellow of the Royal Sucietij of New South Wales;
Axsoeiate of the Victoria Institute of Great Britain ;
Deligue General Cpour I Oceanic J de V Alliance Scientijique de Paris;
Hon, Con. Member of the Celtic Socittij of Montreal ;
Author of
THE ETRUSCANS : WERE TIIEY CELTS ?
THE ABORIQISES OF ACSTRALIA : TUEIR ETHNIC POSITION AND RELATIONS.
CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER.
1892.
AN"
AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE
AS SPOKEX BY THE
AJ\\rj^:BJ^j^js^Tj
THE PEOPLE OF
AWABA OE LAKE MAC QUAE IE
(NEAE NEWCASTLE, NEW SOUTH WALES)
BEING AN ACCOUNT OF
THEIR LANGUAGE, TRADITIONS, AND CUSTOMS
BY
L. E. THEELKELD.
Be-arranged, condensed, and edited,
WITH AN APPENDIX,
BY
JOHN ERASER, BA., LL.D.,
Fellow of the Royal Society of New South Vales;
Assoriate of the Victoria Institute of Great Britain;
Selegtie General (pour I'Oceanie) de V Alliance Scientijtque tie Paris;
Hon, Con. Member of the Celtic Society of Montreal ;
Author of
THE ETRUSCANS : WERE THEY CELTS ?
THE ABORIGINES OF AUSTRALIA : TUEIR ETHNIC POSITION AND RELATIONS.
CHAELES POTTEE, GOVEENMENT PEINTEE.
IVBRSIT
s:^ 3/
?Lllol
i\'7 I&
THE EDITOR'S PREFACE.
This volume is issued by the Grovernment of New South Wales,
as a record of the language of native tribes that are rapidly dis-
appearing from the coasts of Eastern Australia. Presentation
copies will be sent to the chief learned societies at home and
abroad. The indigenes of the Sydney district are gone long ago,
and some of the inland tribes are represented now only by a few
families of wanderers. In all New South Wales, there are only
five thousand full-blood blacks ; only four or five hundred in
Victoria ; and in Tasmania the native race became extinct m
1S76. They have decayed and are decaying in spite of the
fostering care of our Colonial Governments.
A considerable portion of this volume consists of Mr. Threl-
keld's acquisitions in the dialect which I have called the Awabakal,
from Awaba, the native name for Lake Macquarie — his sphere of
labour. But we have now come to know that this dialect was
essentially the same as that spoken by the sub-tribes occupying
the land where Sydney now stands, and that they all formed
parts of one great tribe, the Kuriggai.
In an Appendix I have collected several Grammars and
Vocabularies as a contribution to a comparative knowledge of
the dialects. The map and other illustrations are new, and were
prepared for this work.
The Gospel by St. Luke herein is now of no practical value,
except to a linguist ; but it is unique, and it shows the structural
system of the language.
JOHN FEASEE.
Sydney,
May, 1892.
CONTENTS.
PAGES.
Introduction ... ... xi — Ixiv
Part I. — The Grammar and the Key ... ... 1-120
Grammar of the Awabakal Dialect ... i — 46
Vocabulary of the Awabakal Dialect ... 47 — 82
The Key to the Structure of the Awabakal
Dialect ... ... ... ... ... go-120
Part II. — Translation of the Gospel by St. Luke 128-196
Part III. — The Lexicon to the Gospel by St.
Luke ... ... ... ... ... ... 201-227
Part IV. — The Appendix
(A.) Grammar and Vocabulary of the
jMinyung Dialect ... ... ... 3 — 27
(B.) Grammar of the Narrinyeri and other
Dialects of South Australia ... ... 28 — 47
(C.) Grammar of a Dialect in Western
Australia ... ... ... ... 48 — 56
(D.) Grammar and Vocabulary of the
Wiradhari Dialect in New South Wales 56-1 20
(E.) Prayers in the Awabakal Dialect ... 120-127
(F.) Sentences in the Kamalarai Dialect 1 27-1 31
(G.) The Earliest Specimen of an Aus-
tralian Language ... ... ... 131-148
EEEATA.
rage G, line 28.
11,
17,
18,
19,
37,
137,
4.
26.
IG.
29.
Fo}' ' sine ' read ' shine.'
For gatoa read Bag.
Lei Norn. 1 and Nom. 2 cliange places, so that
bag and its line shall be Nom. 1.
JOet Nom. 1 and Nom. 2 change places, so that
bag and its line shall be Nom. 1.
Zet Nom. 1 and Nom. 2 change places, so that
unni and its line shall be Nom. 1.
For bag (his) read bag ^(hts).
The icord gatun seems to have dropped out
of the manuscript at * * *
Page 4, adfinem, T/n'sf recurs in the same sense on pp. 13, 14, IG.
„ 30, „ For apioendis read volume.
THE ILLUSTRATIONS.
->=<3-£l3-«e=i —
1. Map of Xew Soutk Wales as occupied by the t^atite
TRIBES Frontispiece
This map is the issue of ten years' thought and inquiry on the location
of our native triues ; nothing of the kind has ])een attempted before. The
basis of the wliole is the boundaries of the Kamalarai tribe, which were
marked out for me by a friend who knew the tribe Avell fifty years ago ; his
information I have tested and extended by answers I got from others, who
also knew tlie tribe about that time. The Walarai dialect differs only a
little from tlie Kamalarai proper ; so also the Waihvun, spoken by the
Kgaiamba blacks ; for this reason, and because they have the classification
of the Kamalarai, these are regarded as cndy subdivisions of the great Ka-
malarai trilje. The Walarai dialect extends into Queensland.
The next great tribe is the Kuringgai on the sea coast. Their 'taurai'
(hunting ground or territory) is known to extend north to the Macleay
Eiver, and I found that southwards it reached the Hawkesbury. Then,
by examining the remains of the language of the natives about Sydney and
southwards, and I>y other tests, I assured myself that the country there-
about was occui^ied by sub-tribes of the Kurringgai.
In a similar manner, I determined the territory of the Murrinjari on the
south-east coast.
The boundaries of the Wiradhari tribe have long been known. Probably
they did not extend quite to the ]\Iurray, but that river is their natural
limit on the south.
From Moulamein westwards, as shown on the map, or from a line drawn
from the Murruiiibidgee to the Murray somewhat farther east than that,
and on both side's of the Murray, there is a patch of associated tribes whose
dialects are called Yerry-yerry, Marrawarra, Yuyu, Tataty, Watty-watty,
&c. , all from the local words for ' no.' Their position in fragments there is
curious, and may be the result of some displacement from above by the in-
coming of stronger tribes, such as the Wiradhari.
The Bakanji is another strong tribe whose locality is well defined on the
east by the \Viradhari. A sub-tribe of it is the Berriait, bordering on the
Lachlan River and the Wiradhari frontier. A small portion of the north-
west of New South Wales and much more of the adjoining territory in
Queensland and South Australia has a tribe which some call the Kornu,
but I am not sure that that is the correct name for it.
The boundaries of the Paikalyung tribe were given me by the Rev. H.
Livingstone, who knows it well. Its territory runs along the coast up
nearly to Brisbane.
The next tribe (I have called it Wachigari) has its ' taurai ' limited by
the Paikalyung on the north and the Kuringgai on the south.
The Yakkajari speak the Pikambal dialect, and extend across our border
some distance into Queensland.
X THE ILLUSTRATIONS.
The New England tribe, the Yunggai, has caused me much perplexity.
There are scarcely any blacks of that territory now surviving ; but the
tribal language is quite different in its words from those around it ; I also
know for certain that the table-land of New England did not belong either
to the Kamalarai or the \Yalarai. I have, therefore, called this tribe the
Yung-gai, from Y''ung — the name which the coast tribes give to New
England.
The Ngarego tribe belongs rather to Victoria than to New South Wales.
Of these tribes, the Kamalarai, Walarai, Ngaiamba, Bakanji, Wiradhari,
the Associated Tribes, the Ngarego, the Kuringgai, are names already estab-
lished and in use ; and most of them are formed from the local word for
' no,' and thus describe more the speech than the people. The names,
Murrinjari, Wachigari, Paikalynng, Yakkajari, I have made ; for these
tribes have no general name for themselves. Wachi-gari and Yakka-jari
are legitimate formations from the local words for 'no'; Murrin-jari and
Paikal-yung mean the 'men,' which also is the meaning of the native
tribe-name Kuringgai — all from their distinctive tribal-Avords for ' man.
Tribes of aborigines, in many parts of the world, call themselves ' the men.
2. PoETEAiT or BiBABAN ... ... ... ... Page 88
This is the intelligent aboriginal who was so useful to Mr. Threlkcld.
The illustration is reproduced from the pencil sketch which was made by
Mr. Agate.
3. Portrait of " Old Margaret " — an ' Awabakalin,' or
woman of the Lake Macquarie sub-tribe ... Page 196
' Old Margaret ' is the last survivor of the Awabakal. She is now living
in her slab-hat on a piece of land near Lake Macquarie Heads, and supports
herself by her own industry. Slio had the advantage of early training in
an English home in the district ; she is respectable and respected.
Her features, as compared with those of other natives, show how much
the type varies ; and yet she is an Australian of pure origin. She was born
at Waiong, near the Hawkesbury River, and is now about 65 years of age.
4. BuNTiMAi — 'A Messenger' Page 212
This blackfellow is evidently on an errand which requires despatch.
The 'possum cloak, the hair, and the general cast of the figure are true to
nature, but the calves of the legs are stouter than usual.
OP thr"^^
EESIT7]
INTRODUCTION.
I. The Gbammahs.
No large effort lias yet been made to master the difBculties that
present themselves in the study of the comparative grammar of
the Australian languages. The only thing in this direction, that
is known to me, is a paper on the "Position of the Australian Lan-
guages, by W. H. J. Bleek, Esq., Ph.D.," published in L871. Dr.
Bleek was a philologist who, in 1858, assisted in cataloguing the
Library of His Excellency Sir Geo. Grey, K.C.B.,theu Governor
of Cape Colony. Twenty years previously, Sir George (then
Captain Grey), as leader of an expedition into the interior of our
continent, had excellent opj^ortunities of seeing the native tribes
in their original condition ; and the knowledge thus gained was
enlarged by him and matured, while he was Governor of South
Australia. The records of the knowledge of so intelligent an
observer as Sir George Grey are sure to be valuable. These
records are now in the South African Public Library, Cape Town,
having been presented to that Library by him, along with his col-
lection of books and other manuscripts.
The catalogue of Sir George Grey's Library was published hj
Triibner & Co., London, and Dr. Bleek devotes a portion of the
second volume to the philology of the Australian languages.*
The earliest of individual efforts to deal with any single lan-
guage of the Australian group was made by the Eev. L. E.
Threlkeld, who, for many years, was engaged as a missionary
among the blacks of the Lake Macquarie district, near Newcastle,
New South Wales. His Grammar of their language was printed
in Sydney in 1834, at the " Herald O^ce, Lower George Street."
A few years previously, Mr. Threlkeld had translated the Gospel
by St. Luke into the same language. This translation remained
in manuscript and had disappeared ; recently I discovered that
it still exists, and is now in the Public Library of Auckland. This
" Grammar " and the " Key " and the " Gospel," and some smaller
fruits of Mr. Threlkeld's labours on that language, are now pub-
lished in a collected form in the present volume. But Threlkeld's
Grammar deals with only one dialect, and, for the purposes of
comparative grammar, more languages than one are required.
* Throughout this Introduction I say "languages," although, in fact, there
is but one Australian language with many dialects ; I also use the word
" language " instead of dialect, wherever the meaning is clear.
SU IXTEODUCTIOy.
In lonliing about for anofher Grammar, I remembered that Mr.
Horatio Hale, the philologist of the United States' Exploring Ex-
pedition, had, in his A'olume on the Ethnography and Philology
of the Expedition-*, made a short synopsis af two of our dialects.
"When in this colony, he got access to the Eev. William AVatson,
then missionary to the aborigines at "Wellington Valley," who
drew up for him "nn account of the most important peculiarities
of the Wiraduri language, modelled as nearly as possible on
the Grammar of Mr. Threlkeld, for the purpose of comparison."
Purther search disclosed the fact that, as early as 1835, a
Dictionary and a Grammar had been prepared there, and the
Gospel by St. Luke had been translated. How valuable these
materials would now be, to illustrate the Awabakal of Lake
Macquarie ! but Mr. Watson had no relatives in this colony, and
on his death his manuscripts were sold as waste paper; so I am
told. Fortunately, the late Archdeacon Giinther, of Mudgee,
wrote a Grammar of the Wiradhari and collected a copious
A^ocabulary about the year 1838. The Vocabulary I found to be
in the hands of his son, the present Archdeacon of Camden, and
it is here published, along with a short introductory Grammar
wdiich forms part of the manuscript Vocabulary. A longer
Grammar was, many years ago, sent to the home country, and
I fear that it cannot now be recovered.
The next labourers in the field of Australian grammar were the
Liitheran Missionaries, Messrs. Teichelmann (E, G.) and Schiir-
mann (C. W.) In 1840 they published a " Grammar, Vocabulary,
and Phrase-book" of the aboriginal language of the Adelaide tribe.
Then, in 185G, appeared the primer, " Gurre Kamilaroi," by the
Eev. W. Eidley. Mr. Ridley, who was a man of rare devotedness
and self-denial, went among the aborigines of Liverpool Plains and
shared the privations of their wandering life, in order that he
might learn their language, and so be able to teil them the message
of the Gospel. In 1866 (2nd edition, 1875), our Government
Printing Olflce issued his book on the " Kamilaroi, Dippil, and
Turrubul languages."
A Grammar of some of the dialects spoken in South Australia
is contained in Taplin's " Folk Lore," which was published in
1879. This Grammar is given here in a condensed form.
II. Mr. Threlkeld.
Lancelot Edward Threlkeld, the pioneer in the field of Aus-
tralian language, died in Sydney on the morning of the lOtli
October, 1859, having on the previous day preached twice in his
own church — the church of the Bethel Union there.
* See pp. 479-531 of " United States' Exploring E.xpedition during the
years 1838-42, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. — Vol. VI.,
Ethnography and Ethnology : By Horatio Hale, philologist of the Expedi-
tion. /-"AiYatZe/p/i/a .• Lea and Blanchard. 1846."
I>'TEODUCTIO>". XIU
Mr. Tlirelkeld's birthplace was Hatlierleigh, iii Devon, but the
family belonged originally to the county of Cumberland, and there
to the village of Threlkeld, which either had its name from them
or gave its name to them. In " Burke's Peerage," we read of
Threlkeld of Threlkeld in the time of Edward I. That family
became extinct in the male line in the reign of Edward IV, but
the name was continued through a younger branch, Threlkeld* of
Melmerly, in the same county.
A romantic story from the Wars of the Roses connects itself
with a Sir Lancelot Threlkeld by his marriage with the widow of
Lord Clifibrd. Clifford had much power in Yorkshire, wliere
his estates were, but, although related to the House of York, he
was a keen supporter of the Lancastrians, and with his own hand
be killed the youngest son of the Duke of York in cold blood after
the battle of Sandal, in revenge for an injury he had received
The sanguinary conduct of Lord Clifford on this occasion is com-
memorated by our poet, Drayton, in his ' Polyolbion,' in the lines
beginning : — -
" ^Vhere York himself before his castle gate,
Mangled with wounds, on his own earth lay dead,
Upon whose body Clifi'ord down him sate,
Stabbing the corpse, and, cutting off' his head,
Crowned it with paper, and, to wreak his teene.
Presents it so to his victorious Queene."
Three months after this, Clifford was himself shot through with
an arrow in the battle of Towton, and the Yorkists, being now
victoi'lous, stripped the Clifford family of all their estates and
possessions; this happened in the year 1470. The heir to Lord
Clifford's name and fame was a little boy then six years old. His
mother feared that the House of York would seek to avenge on
him the murder of their own boy, the young Earl of Rutland ;
she had now no powerful friends to protect her and her son, and
she knew that her movements were watched ; in these circum-
stances she resolved, for safety, to commit her boy to the care of
her faithful retainers, and have him brought up as a shepherd on
his own estates. Meanwhile, the report was spread that he had
been sent to Holland and had died there. When he had reached
the age of twelve years, his widowed mother married Sir Lancelot
Threlkeld. This was a fortunate thing for the lad, for it led
to his removal from the neighbourhood of his own home to places
of greater security among the mountains of Cumberland ; and his
new father, being entrusted with the secret, faithfully assisted in
watching over the life of the orphan heir. To avert suspicion, it
was still found necessary to continue his disguise ; but, although
he was thus left without education, and could neither read nor
wi'ite till happier days had come, yet the culture of his race showed
XIV IITTEODUCTIOX.
itself in his natural intelligence and his jjersonal demeanour. He
grew u}) a tall and handsome youth, with the features and com-
manding mien of his grandfather, who had been much loved
and regretted. While still living in obscurity as a shepherd, he
gained such a knowledge of astronomy as made him a wonder to
many in later years, and his gentle manners so shone through
rustic attire that he secured the affection of a lady of rank, well
known at that time as the " nut-brown maid "■ — the daughter of
Sir John St. John; her he married. When the "Wars of the
Roses " were ended by the accession of Henry VII., and peace was
again come, the young Lord Clifford, now 32 years of age, asserted
his right to the Londesborough estates, and, on petition to the
King, was restored to his title and his lands. The men of the time
called him the " Shepherd Earl." In addition to Londesborough,
the place of his birth, he was owner of Brougham and Skipton,
but he usually resided near Bolton, and there, after many years,
he died, and was buried in the choir of the Abbey. His son was
created Earl of Cumberland ; and a grandson was a naval com-
mander in Elizabeth's reign. In 1742 the heiress of the Cliffords
married an ancestor of the present Duke of Devonshire, and with
her the estates in Yorkshire passed over to that family.
This incident has only a remote connection with the Threlkeld
family, but I have given it here as an interesting glimpse into the
private history of noble families in those troublous times.
Our author was born in 1788 at the village of Hatherleigh,
and, while still a boy, he experienced deep religious convictions
under the ministry of the vicar of the parish. This ultimately led
to his offering himself to the London Missionary Society for work
in the foreign field, and so, after sevei'al years of instruction and
training at Gosport under Mr. Bogue, he was ordained, along wdth
Mr. Ellis, on the 8th November, 1815, and appointed to labour at
Rai-atea, in the ' Society ' group of the South Seas. Towards the
end of that month he embarked in a government vessel, the
" Atlas," which was aboiit to proceed to Sydney. At Eio de
Janeiro, his wife fell ill, and for nearly a year he had to remain there,
all the while acting as the first Protestant minister whom the
English residents at Eio ever had. On 22nd January, 1817, he
sailed again, along with Messrs. John Williams, Darling, Bourne,
and Piatt, all bound for missionary work in the islands of the
South Seas.
After a short stay at Hobart, they reached Sydney on the 11th
May, 1817, and Mr. Threlkeld proceeded to Eaiatea soon after.
The death of his wife led him to return to Sydney in 1824.
Next yeai', the London Missionary Society established a mission
to our native blacks at Lake Macquarie under the care of
Threlkeld, and there, with assistance subsequently from the
lyTRODUCTION. XV
Government of the Colony of New South Wales, the mission
was maintained till December 31, 1841, when the number
of the natives there had so declined that it had to be
abandoned. It was during those seventeen years of labour that
Mr. Threlkeld acquired so much experience in the use of the
native dialect of the tribe, that he was enabled to prepare the
works which form the bulk of this volume. The year 1842 and
the surrounding years were a time of terrible commercial distress
in the colony, and, when the mission station was abandoned, Mr,
Threlkeld lost all his property there. But, in 1845, he was
appointed minister of the Mariners' Church, Sydney, and in that
otfice he continued till his death. By his first wife he had one
son and three daughters ; by his second wife — a daughter of Dr.
Arndell, the Colonial surgeon of the time — he had two sons and
three daughters. Those of his children who still survive occupy
honourable positions in this colony.
The following is believed to be a complete list of Mr. Threlkeld's
labours in the dialect which I have called the ' Awabakal ' : —
1827.- — "Specimens of the Aboiiginal Language"; printed then.
1829. — First draft of the Translation of the Gospel by St. Luke.
1832. — Translation of Prayers for Morning and Evening Service
from the Bitual of the Church of England ; these were selected
by Archdeacon Broughton.
1834.— "The Australian Grammar" published. Mr. Threlkeld's
memoranda show that at the beginning of this year the follow-
ing subjects were occupying his attention : — •
1. Specimens of the Language.
2. The Australian Grammar.
3. The Gospel by St. Luke, under revisal.
5. The Gospel by St. Mark, in preparation. The first rough
translation was completed in 1837.
.5. The Gospel by St. Matthew, just commenced.
6. The instruction of two native youths in writing and read-
ing their own language.
7. Beading lessons selected from the Old Testament.
8. An Australian Spelling Book.
1836.— "The Spelling Book" printed.
1850. — " The Key to the Aboriginal Language" published.
1859. — At the time of his death he was engaged in completing
the translation of the four Gospels ; and was proceeding with
the " Lexicon to the Gospel by St. Luke." Thus our author's
life closed in the midst of 'labours many,'
XVI INTEODUCTIOK.
III. Ikfluexces affecting the Laxgvage.
The position of our Australian dialects in their relation to the
great families of langua^re has not yet been determined. That
task demands leisure, labour, and skill. A collection of carefully
prepared Grammars and Vocabularies would make the task much
easier ; but where are these to be had ? With the exception of
those that I have named, I know of none. Australian Vocabu-
laries have been collected in abundance, but, for the most part,
these are quite useless to the philologist ; they consist of dialect-
names for native customs and weapons, for the birds of the air,
the beasts of the field, and the trees of the forest. All this is
mistaken labour which yields no fruit. "What we want is to get
from each dialect a sufficient number of words expressing the
ideas essential to a language, in the form of substantive, adjec-
tive or verb, and a sufficient number of simple sentences ; this
would enable the philologist to ascertain what is the structure of
its grammar and its vocables.
The Australian languages are subject to a principle of change
which it is worth our pains to consider here. The native tribes
name their children from any ordinary occurrence, which may
have taken place at the birth or soon after it. Por instance, if
a kangaroo-rat were seen to run into a hollow log at that time,
the child would be named by some modification of the word for
kangaroo-rat. At a later period of the boy's life, that name might
be changed for another, taken from some trivial circumstance in his
experience ; just as our own boys get by-names at school. "When
a man or woman dies, his family and the other members of the
tribe, as far as possible, never mention his name again, and dis-
continue the use of those ordinary words which formed part of
his name ; other words are substituted for those common ones,
and become permanently established in the daily language of the
clan or sub-tribe to which the deceased belonged.* In this way
new words arise to designate those familiar objects, the previous
names for which have been cast aside ; and these new words are
formed regularly from other root-words, that describe probably
another quality inherent in the thing in question. Let me illus-
trate this matter by examples. A man or a woman may get a
name from some peculiar physical feature, such as a large mouth,
or chin, or head ; or a name taken from an animal or tree, or
.any similar object, animate or inanimate, which iiad some relation
to his birth. A Tasmanian woman was called Eamanalu, ' little
gull,' because a gull fiew by at the time of the child's birth.
After her death, the word ram a would never be used again for
'a gull '; a new name for ' gull ' would be invented, forrfied, it
* It is possible that the discaixled word resumes its place in the language
after a while ; this point I have not ascertained ; at all events, the adopted
word remains.
INTRODUCTION. XVll
may be, from a root-word meaning ' white,' Lecause of the white-
ness of the bird. This new word would be used by all the
kindred and acquaintances of the deceased, and would ere long
establish itself in the language of that portion of the tribe as the
right name for ' gull.' Again, a boy of the Dungog tribe of
blacks, in our own colony, was receiving instruction from the old
men of the tribe ; he was required to make a spear, and was sent
into the bush to select a suitable piece of wood ; he cut off and
brought to them a piece of the ' cockspur ' tree ; this choice was
so absurd, that forthwith his instructors dubbed him Bobin-
kat, and that was his name ever after. When he died, the
word bo bin would disappear, and some other name be found
for the cockspur tree. A}id the operation of this principle is not
confined to Australia ; it is found also in Polynesia ; but there
it has respect to the living, not the dead. High chiefs there
are regarded as so exalted personages, that common people must
not make use of any portion of their names in ordinary talk,
for fear of giving offence. If, for example, a chiefs name con-
tains the word pe'a, ' bat,' the tribe calls the 'bat,' not pe'a, but
manu-o-le-lagi, ' bird of the sky.' In languages which are
not subject to these influences, the derivation of such a word is
usually very plain; the Latin vespertilio, ' bat,' for instance,
bears its origin on its very face ; but if a philologist, not knowing
the history of the word manu-o-le-lagi, were to find it to mean
a ' bat ' in a Polynesian tongue, he would be puzzled to explain
how it is that a creature so peculiar as the ' bat,' should have
been named by a w^ord having so indefinite a meaning as the ' bird
of the sky.' Any one who may have had the curiosity to look
into lists of names for common things in Australian vocabularies,
must have been surprised to see how diverse are these names
in the various tribes, but your wonder ceases to be wonder when
the cause is known. In fact, we do find that amono: conter-
minous tribes, and even in the sub-sections of the same tribe, these
words vary greatly; for the presence of death from time to time
in the encampments kept up a frequent lapse of words.
To show how much a native language may be effected by this
cause of change, I quote here a few sentences from Taplin, who,
for many years, was in daily contact with the black natives of
>South Australia. In his Vocabulary he says : —
"Therto, 'head'; obsolete on account of death. Koninto, 'stomach';
obsolete on account of death. Muna, ' hand '; not used on account of
the death of a native of that name. When any one dies, named after
anything, the name of t'^at thing is at once changed. For instance, the
name for ' water ' was changed ninr f lines in about five years on accoant of
the death of eight men who bore the name of ' water.' The reason of this
is that the name of the departed is never mentioned because of a super-
stitious notion tliat his spirit would immediately appear, if mentioned in
any wav."
[IB]
XVlll UTTEODFCTIOX.
It may possibly be asked why our blackfellou-s bad so strong a
disiuclinatiou to mention the name of a friend who had died.
We ourselves have a feeling of the same kind. "We speak of cur
friend as ' the deceased,' ' the departed,' 'him who has gone ' ; and
if we must mention his name, we apologise for it by saying ' poor '
Mr. So-and-so, and seem afraid to use the simple word ' dead.'
But our indigenes have a stronger reason than that. They believe
tliat the spirit of a man, especially if he is killed by violence, is
excessively uncomfortable after death, and malicious, and in its
fretfulness ready to take offence at anything, and so pour out its
Avrath on the living. Even the mention of the dead man's name
would offend, and bring vengeance on them in the night time.
Our blacks seem also to have the idea that the deceased, for a
certain number of days after death, has not 3'et got his spiritual
body, which slowly grows upon him, and that, while in this un-
developed state, he is like a child, and is specially querulous and
vengeful.
lY. Tests in ExAMiKiNa Languages.
I now proceed to show some results which may be obtained
even from our Australian words, by comparing them with others
elsewhere. It is agreed among philologists, that there is no surer
test of the afBuity of different languages than that which comes
through the identification of their pronouns, numerals*, and, to a
less extent, their prepositions. To this I would add, in our present
inquiry, the identity of such common words as 'eye, foot, hand,
tire, sun, moon,' and the like ; for these words cannot have
been \ised much in the names of individuals, and are therefore
not likely to have suffered from the fluctuations which I have
already explained. It is true that, in all languages, the pronouns
and the numerals are sul)ject to abrasion and decay, from the
frequency and rapidity with which they are pronounced, and from
a natural tendency everywhere to shorten the words which are
most in use. But it is the function of the philologist, not only to
understand these causes of decay, but to show the process by
which the words fell away, and to restore them to their original
forms for the purpose of identification.
It is agreed, then, that the numerals, the pronouns, and, to
some extent, the prepositions, are a strong test of the affinity of
languages. On this principle, such languages as the Sanskrit, the
Greek, the Latin, the German and Gothic, the Lithuanian, the
Keltic, have been tested and proved to be so much akin that they
are grouped as a well-defined family of languages — the Aryan.
Some anthropologists, especially when they are not linguists them-
selves, sneer at the labours of philology as deceptive and liable to
* Bopp says that the lowest numerals can never be introduced into any
country by foreigners.
INTRODrCTIOy. XIX
serious error; so are all sciences, If not managed with care and
ability. A student in chemical analysis and synthesis may get
results which are clearly erroneous ; instead of declaring the pre-
scribed methods to be faulty or his materials to be bad, he ought
to blame only his own want of skill in manipulation. As to the
utility of philology, I would only remark that it was by the study
of languages that the place o£ Sanskrit (and consequently of the
Hindu race) was determined in its relation to the other members
of the family I have named, and it was philology alone that
settled the claim of the Keltic, and consequently of the Kelts, to be
regarded as one of the most ancient members of the Aryan family.
In the case of the cuneiform inscriptions, the services which
philology has rendered are inestimable. And It is quite possible
that, amid the conflicting opinions as to the origin of our
Australian race, the via prima salutis, the first dawn of a sure
daylight, may in the future arise from a careful examination of
their language.
As is well known, the Australian numeral system Is very limited
in its range ; our natives say ' one,' ' two ' ; sometimes ' three ' ;
occasionally 'hand' for 'five'; all else is 'many,' 'a great number.'
It was alleged by Sir John Lubbock, and has since been repeated
by everybody, that their having separate words only for 'one' and
' two ' is a proof that Australians possess very limited mental
powers, since they cannot count higher than 'two.' Every colonist,
who has been much in contact with the blacks, can addtice proofs
to show that their mental powers are not so limited, and that,
when our indigenes are taken out of their adverse environment
and encouraged to cultivate their intellectual faculties, they
readily develope a decided capacity for improvement. A friend
of mine, fifty years ago, taught two young black boys to play
chess ; they soon acquired a liking for the game, and learned
to play with caution and skill, and even with success. If it
were possible to surround the blacks with favourable influences
continued from generation to generation, I have no doubt that
their whole position would be altered ; but any final separation
from their ancestral habits would lead to their S2:)cedy extinction
as a race ; this was the issue that was rapidly approaching after
the last remnants of the Tasmanians were removed to Flinders'
Island. But, for many hundreds of years, no one can tell how
many, i\\e Australian race has lived in the midst of adverse
surroundings, tribe warring against tribe, each, tribe restricted
to its own boundaries, the supply of food in our precarious
climate often scanty, the paralysing terror produced by their
strong belief in the supernatural power of demons and of their
own wizards, the ravages of Avaves of disease and death sweeping
over them from time to time ; all these and other causes com-
pelled them to think only of their daily subsistence and the
XX INTRODUCTION.
preservation o£ their lives, fixed and deepened their degradation,
and prevented even the possibility of amelioration and elevation.
The natives of the 8outh Sea islands, whose lot has been a fairer
one, have had many yams and. cocoa-nuts and bananas and other
things to count, and so have developed a wide system of
numbers ; but our poor blackfellows, whose only personal
property is a few spears or so, have not felt it necessary to speak
of more than ' one,' ' two,' or ' three ' objects at once. Then, as
to the linguistic question on which Sir John Lubbock builds his
charge, I think it could be shown that even the Aryan system of
numbers — the most highly developed system of any — is founded
on the words for ' one,' ' two,' ' three,' and no more, all the rest
being combinations of these by addition or by multiplication.
Further, the Aryans have singular and dual forms for nouns and
pronouns, that is, they have number-forms for ' one ' and ' two,'
but all the rest beyond that is included in the general name of
plural, that is 'more'; indeed the Sanskrit uses its word for
' four ' in a general way to mean a considerable number, exactly
as to our blackfellows all else beyond two or three is bula,
' many.' For these reasons I think that this charge against our
blackfellows ought to be laid on better ground than that afforded
by their numerals.
Y. The Australian Numerals.
If Bopp's dictum is well founded, the numerals 'one,' ' two,'
' three,' Avhen tested, may tell us something about the origin of
our Australian blacks. I, therefore, now proceed to examine
these numerals. And here I may be permitted to say that I alone
am responsible for the arguments drawn from the evidence pro-
duced in this inquiry. So far as I know, these arguments have
never been advanced previously ; indeed, I am convinced that
no one has ever discussed these numerals before, for it is com-
monly alleged that it is impossible to give any account of them.
1. The Numeral 'One.'
(a.) Of the words for ' one,' T take up first that which is least
common, pir, ' one.' It is used in the Walarai country (see map).
It must be an old and genuine word, for I know that, in another
dialect, the word piriwal means 'chief,' and pir seems to me to
bear the same relation to piriwal that the Latin primus,
' first,' bears to princeps, ' chief,' ' first,' or the Latin preposi-
tion pro, ' before,' to proceres, ' chiefs,' or our English word
'first' to the German fiirst, 'aprince.' In fact, I regard pro
and pir as the same word originally.
Now, do not mistake me here ; I'or I do not assert that the
languages spoken by our Australians are uterine brothers to the
Latin and the Greek ; but I do assert that all languages have
INTRODUCTION". XXI
one common, althougli ancient, origin, and t^^at, in the essential
Avords of these languages, there are proofs of that common origin.
Pir, then, as allied to pro, means the number which comes
' before ' all others in the row, the one that comes ' first.' The
Latin primus is for pri-imus {cf. Sk. pra-thamas, 'first'), in
which the root pri, not unlike pir, is the same as the Latin pro
andprae. In the Aryan family, the nearest approach to the
Australian pir is the Lithuanian pir-mas, 'first,' and pir-m (a
preposition), 'before'; other remote kinsmen are the Greek
pro-tos, ' first,' pru-tanis, 'aprince,' 'a president' {cf. piriwal),
prin, ' before'; the Gothic fru-ma, 'first'; the Aryan prefixes
pra, fra, pro, pru, prae, pre, and fore as in our English
'fore-ordain.' The Keltic languages drop the initial p ov f,
and say ro, ru, air, ari, to mean ' before.' In the Malay region
ar-uug is a 'chief,' and in Polynesia ari-ki is 'a chief,' which
the Samoans change into ali'i ; these words, I would say, come
from eastern forms corresponding to the Keltic ro, air, 'before.'
In Samoau i lu-ma means ' in front,' and in Malay de-ahi-wan ;
these are like ru ; in Aneityum, a Papuan island of the New
Hebrides, a ' chief is called natimi arid, where natimi means
'man,' and arid is 'high,' 'exalted,' doubtless from the same
root asariki; and arid is to ariki as the Latin procerus,
' tall,' to proceres, ' chief's.' Prom the abraded from ru I take
the New Britain* word lua (Samoan lua'i;, ' first.'
In the Dravidian languages of India, from which quarter, as I
suppose, our Australian languages have come, there is a close
parallel to our word pir, for pir a means 'before,' and pir an
is ' a lord.' Dravidian scholars themselves acknowledge that
pir an comes from the Sanskrit preposition pra, ' before'; this
corroborates my derivation of the Australian word piriwal and
the Maori ariki. The Aroma dialect of New Guinea says pira-
na, ' face'; and in my opinion this pirana bears the same rela-
tion to the Dravidian pira that the Latin frons has to the pre-
position pro, the Samoan mua-ulu to mua, 'first,' and the
English fore-head, to be-fore. The Motu dialect says vaira
for ' face, front'; I take this to be a metathesis of pira, for the
Motu also says vaira-nai, 'before'; another dialect says vari ;
with this compare pro, para, and frons. The negroes, to the
west of Khartoum, also say ber, bera, for ' one.'
The Australian postposition bir-ung, ' away from,' seem.s to be
connected with this root in the same way as the Greek para.
The dictionary meanings of the Sanskrit preposition pra are
"■ before,' ' away,' 'beginning'; now, if these three meanings were
* New Britain and New Ireland are two tolerably large islands lying to the
east of New Guinea, aiid Duke of York Island — a name corrupted by the
natives into Tukiok — is a small island in the straits between these two.
The natives of all these are Papuans.
XXU INTRODrCTION.
carried to Australia throu, h, m may interchansje, and may
easily become/, ivh, v, xc. There can be no doubt, for instance,
that the Latin pater, the German vater, aud the English
father are the same word ; there ^;=/=v; and in one district
in Scotland the people always say fat for what and far for
where ; so also the Maori whatu is the Samoau f atu ; that is
f:=ivh ; h and m also are interchangeable, in Oriental languages
especially, for m is only the sound of the letter b modified by the
emission of a breathing through the nose ; m is therefore re-
garded as a h nasalized. I note also that the words under con-
sideration all begin with the cognate sound of m, b, or w, except
yalla; and this example 1 think must have been at onetime
walla, that is, uala, of which the u has obtained the sound of
^ (y); or wa-la may come from the same root as wa-kul, the
difference lying only in the termination. The other vowels of
root word are o, u, e, i, ai, all of which in Australian are modi-
fications of the original sound «.
Having now discovered the root-germ from which our Sydney
friend Avakul proceeded, and having noted the various guises
which he has assumed in these colonies, we must next ask where
he came from, and see if he has any kinsmen in other lands ; for,
when by searching we find that out, we may perhaps be justified
in saying that the Australians brought the root-word with them
from those lands. Before setting out on this quest, I observe
that when a number of men are arranged in a row, he who is
number one is (1) 'before' all the others, and 'in front' of them ;
he is thereby (2) 'first or foremost'; he has (3) the 'pre-eminence'
in honour or authority, and (4) he may be regarded as the ' begin-
ning or origin' of all the others.* We may therefore reasonably
expect that words for 'one' will be akin to other words, bearing
some one or other of these four meanings. I have already shown
that the Kamalarai numeral pir, 'one,' is related to Aryan pre-
positions meaning 'before,' and to the Maori word ariki (Samoan
ali'i), 'a chief,' as one having authority and eminencet ; I shall
now show that the kindred of wakul have the other meanings as
well. And, first, I note that the word bokol is used for 'one' in
the island of Santo, one of the New Hebrides. Bokol is so like
wogul, the Port Jackson word, that I cannot doubt their identity;
and yet it is impossible to suppose that the one word can be
borrowed from the other. The islanders of Santo can never have
had any intercourse with the blacks of Sydney ; nor, if they had
in any past time, can we believe that either language was so
* Cf. the H eh. .Ihadh, kedam, rosh, aftl or yaal, for these meanings.
t The Insular-Keltic words for 'chief,' 'principal,' are prionih, ard,
araid; and roimh is 'before.' It is evident that these are only cor-
ruptions of the root pri, pro, prae, pra, 'hefore.' In Ku, a Dravidian
dialect, 'one' or 'first' is ra (rf. Sk. pra) and in Duke of York Island
(New Britain Group), 'one' is ra, re.
INTEODUCTION. XXV
miserably poor as to be without a word of its own for ' one.' The
blacks of Santo are a frizzly-haired negroid race ; I therefore argne,
from the evidence of this word, that these blacks and our blacks
have, in some way, one common origin.
I next take you to another Papuan region having a negroid
population — a group of islands off the east end of New Guinea
and consisting of New Britain, New Ireland, and some others.
In the Duke of York Island there, I find the following words, all
akin to wakul, viz., makala, 'for the 'first' time' mara, ma-
ra-kam, 'forthe 'first' time,' marua, 'tobear fruit for the 'first'
time, to enter on a new course, to begin,' mara, 100 (= the
'beginning' of a new reckoning), muka, 'first,' muka-na, 'first-'
born son,' muka-tai, 'first,' mun, 'to go first.'* In all these, the
rootis ma, mu, asin Australia, and the abundance of these derived
forms in this Tukiok language proves that the root is indigenous,
not borrowed. Among them I observe mara, 'for the ' first ' time,'
and mara, 100, and this is exactly the Tasmanian word (mara-
wa) for 'one'; another of them is muka, 'first,' and this word, by
dropping the k, which is neverf sounded in Samoan, becomes the
Samoan niua, 'first,' and mua-ulu, 'thefore-head.':j: Mua also is
very common in Samoan (as in f oe-mua, 'the 'first' or stroke oar,'
a-fiia, 'to begin'), and thus proves itself to be native to the
language. Further, you may have observed that some of the
Australian words for 'one' are mo, mata. AVith mo compare the
Santo word mo-ig,'to begin,' — another proof that the Santoans
and the Australians are kinsmen; with mata compare the Motu
word mata-ma, 'abeginning,' and mata-mata, 'new,' 'fresh';
theFijiau matai, 'first,' and tau-mada 'before-hand'; the Maori
ti-mata, 'to begin'; the Samoan a-mata, 'to begin'; the New
Britain a-ma-na, 'before, in front,' mata-na, 'the front,' biti-na
'the commencement'; the Motu badi-na, 'origin,' andthe Aneit-
yumese ni-mti-din, 'the front'; with mu compare the Fijian
vuna, 'to begin,' and the New Britain wa-vuua, 'to begin,' and
the Santo mul, 'a chief,' as being the 'first' man. All these I
* Compare with this the Tamil postposition mun, 'before.'
t The one solitary exception is puke, 'catch you'! — a child's play- word.
+ An uncommon form of the root ba is va ; and from it the Mangaians
(Hervey Islands) say va-ri, 'a beginning'; but in the Koiari dialect of
New Guinea this same word means 'the forehead,' 'the face.' This word
thus illustrates the procession of meanings from the root pra (para),
pro, 'before'; for vari is equivalent to 'that which is before,' hence 'a
beginning,' 'the forehead' as the 'front' part of tlie human body, 'the
face ' ; it also throws some light on the derivation of frons, which has
so puzzled Latin etymologists that some of them derive it from the Greek
ophrus, 'the eyebrow'! The Motumotu dialect of New Guinea says
hali, instead of vari, for 'forehead'; sevei'al other dialects there say
i-piri-ti, paru, para-na, pira-na, for 'face'; these are all connected
with the Dravidian pira, 'before.' The Brahui of Afghanistan says mun,
' the face,' which is the same word as the Tamil, mun, ' before.'
5;XV1 IK^THOBUCTIOK.
have noticed in the course of my reading, but I believe there are
many other words in these islands which are of the same origin
as our Australian word wakul.* 1 pray you to remember that,
with the exception of Samoa and New Zealand, these words all
come from Papuan regions and afford indirect evidence that our
Australians are allied to the Papuans.
As to the Maori and Samoan congeners that I have quoted, it
is commonly alleged that these races are Malayo-Polyuesians, on
the theory that their languages are of Malay origin f; but let us
look at this theory in the light of our present inquiry. It is
said that the Polynesians are Malays. WeJl, let us see. If the
Samoans are Malays, then the Duke of York Islanders are
Malays; for the word mu a, which is essential to the Samoan
language, is the same word as the Tukiok muka ; therefore the
Papuans of that island also are jNIalays ! But the corresponding
Malay word is mu la, 'in front,' ' foremost,' 'at first,' and it is
certain that muka can never be formed from mula ; for, while
Tc may become Z, the letter Z, when once established in a word,
cannot revert to h. Thus the Malay language might be said to
have come from the Duke of York Island, as least so lar as the
evidence of this word goes ! But I acknowledge that they may
both be taken from one common source, and this, I believe, is the
true solution of the question. Where shall we find that common
source? The root-form of mula, muka, mua, and of all the
others, is ma, mu, and if we can find that root, it will be easy to
understand how all these words have been formed independently
from that original root ; and it will then be unnecessary to say
that the Samoan language is of Malay origin, or that the
Papuans of the New Britain isles are using a Malay language. I
now take you to Southern India, to a group of languages called
the Dravidian, occupying the mountains of the Dekkan, and the
coasts both to the east and the west of that. Some of these
Dravidian tribes are considered by the best authorities to be
certainly negroid, and, in England, Prof. Plower, from an exami-
nation of their crania, has classed them r.s kinsmen of the
Australians. One of the most cultivated languages of the group
is the Tamil, and the Tamilians are known to have class-marriage
laws similar to those in Fiji and Australia. Now for ' first' the
Tamil says mudal, and this mudal is a verbal noun meaning 'a
beginning,' ' priority ' in time or place. The root is mu, and dal
is a formative syllable. The m u is, without doubt, our Australian
* These anJ all other words from the New Britain ami Duke of York
Islands I quote from manuscript dictionaries of these languages, prepared
by the missionaries there.
t The name and authority of K. Wilhelm von Humboldt first gave this
theory a standing ; but we have now miach fuller materials on which to
form an independent judgment.
IXTEODrCTIOJf. ' XXVU
root ma, mo, mu. The late Bishop Caldwell says* — "Mudal is
connected with the Tamil postposition miin, 'before'; mudal is
used as the root of a new A-erb ' to begin.' Mu evidently signifies
'priority,' and may be the same as the Tamil mu, 'to be old,'
mudu, ' antiquity.' " I think there is a better derivation than
that. The Sanskrit miila means ' origin, cause, commencement,'
and is the same word as the Malay mul a already referred to,
aud both of these I take from the Sanskrit root-word bhii, 'to
begin to be, to become, to be,' with which is connected the Latin
fore (fuere), 'to be about to be,' fui, &c. From bhu come
such Sanskrit words as bhava, ' birth, origin,' bhavana, 'caus-
ing to be,' b huvauytt, 'a master or lord ' (rf. piran, &c.), and
many other words in the Aryan languages. At all events,
wakul and these other Australian words for ' one ' are assuredly
from the same root as the Dravidian mu-dal, 'first,' 'a begin-
nig.' I, for one, cannot believe that words so much alike both in
root and meaning should have sprung up by accident over so vast
an area as India, Malaya, Kew Gruinea, Fiji, Samoa, and back
again to the New Hebrides and Australia. The only rational
explanation seems to me to be that these races were all at one
time part of a common stock, that in their dispersion they carried
with them the root-words of the parent languages, and that in
their new habitations they dressed out these root-words with
j)refixes and affixes by a process of development, just as circum-
stances required.
Results. — The root in its simplest form is ha, ' to begin to be,'
* to begin'; other forms are ho, bu, hi ; ma, mo, mu ; fa,fu, vu ;
wa. The nearest approach to the Australian ?«fl^?;/, 'one,' is
the Ebudan hoJcol, 'one,' and the Tukiok maTcal-a, 'for the
first time,' but many other cognate words are found all over the
South Seas in the sense of 'first,' 'begin.' The Tasmanian
mara-wa, 'one,' is the same as the Tukiok mar a, ' for the first
time,' and mara, 100; and in New South AVales, mara-gai
means ' first ' in the Mudgee dialect.
2. Tlie Numeral Tico.
Almost the only other Australian numeral is b til a, ' two.' It is
true that several tribes have a distinct word for ' three,' and a few
have a word for ' five ' taken from the word ' hand,' but in most
parts of Australiii the number ' three ' is expressed by ' two-one,'
four ' by ' two-two,' ' five ' by ' two-two-one ' and so on. But the
wore bula is universal ; with various changes of termination, it
exists from Tasmania in the extreme south, right on to the Gulf
*A11 my knowledge of the Dravidian race and language comes from Dr.
Caldwell's "Comparative Dictionary of the Dravidian or South Indian
Family of Languages ; second edition ; London : Triibner and Co., lS7i>." In
this Introduction, I quote from the notes which I made when I read the
book some years ago, and now I cannot always tell whether I am quoting
his words or only my own statement of them.
XXVin INTEODUCTIOX.
of Carpentaria. If you ask me why there is only one word for
' two,' while the words for ' one ' are so numerous and different,
I reply that, in other languages, and especially in those of the
Turanian family, there is a similar diversity in the words for
'one'; and the reason is this, that, wherever there is a con-
siderable number of words for ' origin,' ' commencement.'
' before,' &c., there will be a similar variety in the words for
' one,' which are formed from them. But the range of ideas for
' two ' is somewhat limited ; the only ideas possible are ' repe-
tition,' or 'following,' or something similar. Let me show you
this by a few examples. The Hebrew s hen aim, ' two,' is a dual
form, and is connected with the verb shanah, ' to repeat;' the
Latins also say 'vigesimo altero anno' to mean in the
'twenty second year;' but alter is 'the other of two,' and in
^French and English it means to 'change;' and secundus in
Latin comes from sequor, 'I follo\y.' Thus we shall find that
words for 'two' are the same as words for ' follow,' ' repeat,'
' another,' ' again,' ' also,' ' and,' and the like ; and most of these
ideas are usually expressed by forms of the same root-word.
As to the form of the word bula*, we have here no friendly
karaji to tell us whether the -la is radical or not. I think that
the -la is formative. The Tasmanian bu-ali (Milligan writes
it pooalih) is probably the nearest approach to the original
form, the bu being the root and the -ali the affix. In the
Tasmanian pia-wa, the pia seems to me to be only a dialect form
of bula, for the liquid I easily drops out, and in the Aryan
languages a modified ?< approaches very nearly to the sound of *
(cf. Eng., sir) ; in the Polynesian, i often takes the place of u.
Thus bula would become bu-a, bi-a, pia. The syllable tea in
pia-wa, as in marawa, 'one,' is only a suffix, the same as ba
in our colony. All the other words for ' two ' are only lengthened
forms of bula.
As to the kindred of bula, I find that, in the Papuan island of
Aneityum (New Hebrides), the word in-mul is ' twins'; there,
in is the common prefix used to form nouns; the mul that
* In my manuscript nobes I have the following forms : — From Tasmania,
bura, pooali, piawah ; Victoria, buliim, pollit; South Australia,
bulait, purlaitye ; New South Wales, blula, buloara, bul]oara-bo;
Southern Queensland, bular, pubul, bularre, bulae; Northern Queens-
land, bularoo. It is evident that some of these words have been written
down by men who were not acquainted with the phonology of languages,
and that the spelling does not adequately represent the real sounds. This
is generally the case in vocabularies of Australian words, and is a source of
much perplexity to linguists. One of the commonest mistakes is bular for
bula. In pronouncing that word, our blackfellows let the voice dwell on
the final a, and an observer is apt to think that this is the sound of ar ;
just as a Cockney will say ' idear ' for ' idea,' ' mar ' for ' ma,' or ' pianer '
for 'piano.' In one vocabulary that I have seen almost every word
terminates with r on this principle 1
IKTBODUCTIOX. 5X1X
remains is bul, 'two'; there also um, for mu. is 'and'; in the
other islands it is ma, mo. In New Britain, bal-et is 'again,'
bul-ug, 'again,' 'also,' 'another,' mule, 'again,' biila, ' another,'
' an additional one ' (cf. ma, ' and '), bula, ka-bila, ' also' (with
-bila c/! Tasm. pia), muru, 'to follow.' In Samoan, muli is
'to follow,' f o'i is ' also,' ulu-ga (for f ulu-) is a ' couple.' The
Fijian has tau-muri, 'behind ' in the sense of ' following,' just
as tau-mada in Fijian means 'first' or 'before.' The Malay-
has ulang, 'to repeat,' and pula, 'again, too, likewise.' In
some of the Himalayan regions, to which a portion of the
aboriginal inhabitants of India was driven bj the Aryan invasion,
buli, pli, bli means ' four,' that is, as I suppose, ' two-twos,' — a
dual form of ' two.'
It seems to me that the Dravidian words maru, 'to change,'
muru, 'to turn,' muri, 'to break in two,' are from the same
root as bula, and that root is to be found in Aryan words also,
such as Lat. mu-to, mu-tu-us; for there is a Sk. root ma, ' to
change.' It is known that the Sanskrit dvi, dva, ' two,' gives
the Greek dis (for dvis), 'twice,' and the adjective diss os,
' double,' and that dvi s gives the Latin bis; but the Sk. dva
also gives the Grothic twa, 'other,' 'different,' and the Eug.
twain, 'two,' as well as words for 'two' in many languages.
Hence I think that our root bu, b a, gives the Samoan vae-g a
' a division,' vaega-lerau, ' the half,' and other words ; because
Avben people are 'at one' on any subject they are agreed, but
when they are at 'twos and threes' they are divided in opinion ;
and in the same sense sense I would connect the Lat. divide
with the Sk. root dvi. Probably the Latin varius and the
English variance are connected with the root ba in that same
sense.
I would only add a line to say that our blackfellows use the
word bula also to mean 'many.' I do not believe that this is
the same word as bula, 'two.' I consider it to come from the
same root as the Sanskrit pulu, puru, ' many,' and that root,
under the form of par, pi a, pie, plu, has ramifications all
through the Aryan languages in the sense of ' fill, full, much,
more,' &c. The eastern form of this root gives, in New Britain,
bula,' more,' mag,' many,' b u k a, ' full ' ; in Motu, b a d a is ' much,'
and hutu-ma, 'many,' ' multitude '; in Aneityum, a-lup-as
(lup=plu), 'much'; in Fiji, vu-ga, ' many'; in Duke of York
Island, bu-nui, 'to increase.' In Dravidian, pal is 'many,'
pal-gu, ' to become many, to multiply, to increase.' It thus ap-
pears that the Australian bula, 'many,' has kindred, not only in
Melanesia and the Dekkan, but also all through the Aryan region.
Results. — The root is hu, which denotes ' repetition,' ' change,'
and this is the idea which resides in the Hebrew numeral ' two,'
and in the Latin alter, ' second '; another, but cognate, idea for
XXX INTRODUCTION.
'two' or 'second' is 'that which /b7Zoi<'.?'; of the root hu other
forms are hu, hi, j)i, ma, ono, mn, fu, fo, and it ; from via, mu,
come Dravidian words meaning ' to turn,' ' to change '; and from
the same root-forms there are, in the JSew Hebrides, New Britain,
and Polynesia, numerous words in the sense of 'follow,' 'again,'
' another,' "^a couple,' 'also.' The Melanesian word mu-le, 'again,'
and the Malay ^;?f-Zrr, 'again,' connect themselves, not only with
the Dravidian via-ru, mu-ru, but also with the Sanskrit word
2)u-nar, 'back,' 'again,' and also with the Greek ^ja-Z/w, 'again.'
YI. Other Test-words.
Words for ' Water; 'Blind; 'Eye:
(a). lu dealing with the Australian words for 'water,' 'fire,'
'sun,' 'eye,' &e., I must use brevity. All these can be proved to
have their roots in India, and to have stems and branclies from
these roots in Aryan Europe, in Malay lands, and in the islands
of the South Seas. ¥irst, let US'* take uj) the word for ' water.'
Collins quotes bado as the Port Jackson word for 'water';
others write it badu ; it is found in various parts of our colony
and in AYestern Australia. The root is ba, ma, and the du is a
suffix; du is also in Dravidian a formative to neuter nouns. The
root ma means 'to be liquid,' 'to flow.' It is a very old word;
for the Assyrian cuneiform inscriptions have mami, 'waters,'
and this is a plural by reduplication; the Hebrew has mo, ma(i),
'water,' mo a, 'to flow'; the ancient Egyptian has mo, 'water,'
Avhence, according to some, the name Moses ; the Sanskrit has
ambu (am ^or ma, by metathesis), 'water;' the Keltic has
amhainn, abhuinn, 'a river,' whence comes the river-name,
'Avon.' From ma come the words wai and vai which are so
common for 'water' in the J>J^ew Hebrides and in the Polynesian
islands, and from the same root, in a sense known to the Arabs,
by an appropriate euphemism, as 'the water of the feet,' come the
Melanesian and Polynesian words mi, mim, mi mi, miaga, &c.,
the Sanskrit mih and the Keltic mun. From am (=rab = ap)
comes tlie Sanskrit plural form tip as, 'water,' while from ma
may come the Latin mad-idiis, 'wet.' We found that wa-kul,
'one,' comes from root ba, ma; so, from the root of ba-du, comes
the Australian word wa-la, which means 'rain,' and in some
places, ' water.'
As to the kindred of our Sydney badu, I would remind you
that ' water,' ' rain,' ' sea,' and ' wave,' are cognate ideas ; hence
the Samangs, who are the jS'egritos of the peninsula of Malacca,
say bat-eao for 'water'; the Motu of New Gruinea say medu,
'rain,' batu-gu, 'shower'; the Aneityumese in-cau-pda,* 'rain';
* Call is the Fijian tan, 'to fall as rain,' and -pda is the same as the
New Britain word Lata, 'rain'; au in Samoan is 'a current.'
rS'TEODirCTIOX. XXXI
Ne^v Britain says bata, 'to rain,' ta-va, 'sea,' and the Maori say
awa, 'water.' As a coincidence, it is remarkable that the old
high Grerman word awa {cf. the Ger. wasser, Eug. water)
means 'water,' and bedu is quoted as an old Phrygio-Macedoniau
word meaning ' water.'
Some observers have remarked that our blacks soon master the
dialects spoken b7other tribes, and have ascribed this to a natural
readiness in learning languages. But the present inquiry shows
that there is another cause for this. A man or woman of the
Sydney tribe, which said ba-du for 'water,' would easily recognize
ba-na in an adjacent tribe as the same word, the termination
only being different, just as it is not hard for Englishmen to re-
member that the German wasser is water, and that brennen
means burn. 80 also, a Ivamalarai black, who says mu-ga, would
soon know the Wiradhari mu-pai; and elsewhere mat a, 'one,' is
not much different from meta and matata for 'one,' or even
from the Tasmanian mar a.
Results. — Ba, ma, mo, am, ap are forms of an original root
meaning 'water,' 'that wdiich is liquid and flows'; derived forms
are mi, me, tea; from ba comes the Sydney word ha-clu, 'water';
the du here is a suffix in Dravidian also, and exists in the New
Guinea word ba-tu, elsewhere ba-ta; the Samang Negritos say bat-
eao ; the old language of Java has banii, 'water,' where the n has
the liquid sound of (jn, and takes the place of d in the suffix du.
Erom all this it is clear that our Australian badu is of good and
ancient lineage.
(i.) In the Maitland district of New Soutb Wales a ' blind '
man is called boko; in Polynesia poko is 'blind,' or, more
fully, mata-poko, mata-po, 'eyes-blind.' As there can be no
suspicion of borrowing here, how is so striking a resemblance
to be accounted for? Do you say that it is a mere coincidence?
AVell, if so, let us examine the matter. In the Ivamalarai region,
(see map) mu-ga means 'blind,' and in the Mudgee district,
mu-pai is 'dumb'; in Santo (New Hebrides), mog-moga is
'deaf; in Erromanga, another island of that group, busa is
'dumb' ; in Eiji, bo-bo is 'blind'; in Duke of York Island, ba-ba
is 'deaf; in Sanskrit, mu-k a is 'dumb'; in Greek, mu-dos, mu-tis
is 'dumb,' Lat. mut-us. In Keltic, bann is 'to bind, tie,'
balbh is 'dumb,' and bodhar is 'deaf.' Now, there can be little
doubt that in all these words the root is the same (mu, mo ; ba,
bo, bu; po), and yet these words extend over a very wide area
indeed, from Tahiti rii;'ht across through India to Greece, Italy,
and even to John o' Groat's. The meanings are ' blind,' ' deaf,'
' dumb,' and yet the root is the same. The general root-meaning
which suits them all is 'to close,' ' to bind' ; this meaning shows
itself in the Greek verb mu-G — from which mudos comes —
* to close the eyes or mouth,' and in the Sanskrit mu, 'to bind';
OF THR
'TJiri7BE
XXXU INTEODUCTION.
similarly the Hebrew (a) illiim, 'dumb,' comes from the verb
alam, 'to bind,' 'to be silent'; in the Gospels, the blind man's
eyes were ' opened,' and Zacharias, who had been for a time
dumb, had ' his mouth opened and his tonj^ue loosed.' The root
of our Australian words boko, muga, is therefore the same as
the Sanskrit mu, 'to bind.' Trom the same source come the
Samoan pu-puni, 'to shut,' po, 'night'; the Aneityumese
at-apn-es (apn=pan), 'to shut,' na.-poi, 'dark clouds'; the
I^ew Britain bog, 'clouded,' and the Tukiok bog, 'to cover
up'; c/! the Sanskrit bhuka, 'darkness.' In Aneityum, a-pat
is 'dark,' 'deaf,' and po-p is 'dumb.' In Malay, puk-kah
(c/!mu-ga) is 'deaf,' and bu-ta is 'blind'; ba-bat {cf. ba-ba,
bo-bo) is to ' bind '; Fiji has bu-ki-a, ' to tie,' ' to fasten '; New
Zealand has pu-pu, 'to tie in bundles,' pu, ' a tribe,' 'bunch,'
'bundle.' It is even possible that our English words bind,
bunch, bundle, come, through the Anglo-Saxon, from this
same root, ba, bu, mu.
I suppose that these examples will sufEce to prove that the
similarity between the Australian boko and the Polynesian,
poko is not a mere coincidence. AVhere have we room now for
the theory that the natives of the South Sea Islands are of Malay
origin ? I might, with equal justice, say that they came from
the Hunter Eiver district in Australia, if I were to look only at
the words boko and poko !
JResiiUs. — The ideas ' blind,' ' deaf,' ' dumb,' may be reduced
to the simple idea ' bound ' — the eyes, ears, mouth, or tongue
'closed, bound, tied.' This idea is, in the Aryan languages,
expressed mostly by mu, but, in our Eastern languages, by ha,
ho; mu, mo \ pu, po ; all these root-forms ai'e identical, and are
the basis of cognate words spreading from the region of ' ultima
ThuJe'' across the world to Tahiti. Can this be the result of
accident, or of the spontaneous creation of language in several
different centres ? Is it not rather proof of a common origin ?
Even in the development of the root, there is a singular corres-
pondence; for the Sanskrit adds -ka, and so do the Malay, the
Kamalarai, the Santoan, and the Polynesian; others use t for Jc.
(c.) The word for ' eye ' also may be useful as a sample test-word,
for it is not likely to be subject to the influences of change to
which I have already referred. In Tasmania a word for ' eye ' is
mongtena, and the common word in all Australia is mi or mil,
or some other simple derived form from the root mi. Mongtena
is in ]VIilligan's "Vocabulary of the Dialects of the Aboriginal
Tiibes of Tasmania," but I have never found that Vocabulary to
be satisfactory either as to its jdionetics or its critical sagacity. I
therefore suppose that the real form is ma-ag-ta-ua ; for mong-ta-
linna is there the word for 'eyelash,' and mong-to-ne is 'to see';
at all events, I consider ma to be its original stem, while the
INTKODrCTIOIf. XXXIU
Australian stem is mi, although there are, in varioiis parts of the
continent, words with the ma stem. The Australian words for
' eye,' then, are mi, mia, mikal, miki, rair, mil, mial, mina,
minuk, miko, mirang; maal, mail ; meur, mobara. These
words extend from Port Darwin right across to Bass's Straits.
Several Avords formed from the same root mean the ' face,' and
compound words are: — wirtin-mirnu, 'eyelid,' turna-mirnu,
'lower eyelid,' wicin-mir, 'eye-lash,' genin-mir, 'eye-brow,'
kraji-mring, 'white of the eye,' daami-mir, 'the temples,'
katen-mirnu, ' a tear.'
Now, it is evident that all these words for ' eye ' come from the
root ma, mi, me, mo, and that those formed from mi are the
most common. This ma is quite sporadic ; for, in Samoan, which
I take to be original and typical Polynesian, ma means ' clean,'
'pure,' 'bright-red,' main a is 'to shine,' said of fire ; ma-lama
means either ' the moon' or ' a light'; va-ai is ' to see,' and so on ;
the Ebudan ma is ' to see'; in New Britain me-me is 'scarlet,'
' bright-red,' and with the meaning of ' red ' the Ebudan has
me-me-a, miel, mial a; in Samoan, mu-mvi is 'to burn bi'ightly,'
aud mii-mu is 'red,' and the Aneityumese ama-mud is 'to burn '
transitively; the Maori has ma-hana, 'warm'; Papuan for 'eye'
is mata, mara, maka, mana; the Malay has mata, 'eye,' and
this is the sporadic word used everywhere for ' eye.'
From all these words, it appears that ' see,' ' clear, ' shine,'
'eye,' 'burn,' 'tire,' 'red,' are allied terms, and that the root-idea
from which they all proceed is that of ' shining brightly.' Now,
so far as the eye is concerned, that is an appropriate designation for
it ; and this appropriateness is elsewhere confirmed by language ;
for the Sanskrit akshi, 'eye,' Latin oculus, and the Latin acer,
' sharp,' are founded on the root ak, meaning ' keenly bright' or
'sharp,' and the English word 'sheen' is, in Lowland Scotch, ap-
plied to the ' bright' part of the eye. Now, I find that meaning
in the Sanskrit bha,, 'to shine,' which is just our root ma.
Sanskrit derivatives from this bha are bha, 'a star' (with which
compare the Australian mirri, 'the stars'), bhaga, 'the sun,'
and bha, 'light,' bhanu, bhfima, 'light,' 'the sun,' ' passion.'
The Greek phai-no is from the same root.
The Dra,vidian language, like the Australian, seems to prefer
the form mi ; it has min, 'to glitter,' and hence mina is ' a fish,'
so called from its phosphorescent scales.
A Samoan word 'to glisten,' 'to shine,' is ila-i la, applied to
the^ eyes, and in the Papuan of Tagula (south-east cost of New
Guinea) ira is 'bright'; at Port Essington (north coast of
Australia) ira is the 'eye,' and in some parts of New South
Wales ire, yir-oka is the 'sun.' In the Wiradhari dialect,
iradu is 'day,' and the Ebudan of Erromanga has ire, ' to-day.'
Further, a common word for 'eye' in Queensland is dilli ; and
[c]
XXXIV IXTRODrCTIOX.
I liavo no doubt that this is the same Dravidian termination
-illi which -we shall tind in ta-killi-ko and in many other Awa-
bakal words, but here added on to the same root which we find in
the Sanskrit di(p), 'to shine.'
The Ebudan of Baki has sembi to mean 'fire'; now sembu
in Dravidian means 'red.' In Australia, a very genei'al word for
'fire' is wi, win ; in the north-west of Tasmania it is win-alia ;
these I take to be from the same root as our mil, 'the eye,' and
the Dravidian min. In Tasmania also, tintya means 'red';
to which cognates are the Sanskrit damh, dah, ' to burn,' dams,
dame, 'to bite,' 'to see'; in Tamil tind-u, is 'to kindle,' tittu,
'to whet'; cf. Anglo-Saxon tendan, 'to kindle,' English tinder.
Besides mata, the Maoris have another word for 'eye,' kanohi,
which much resembles the Dravidian kan, 'the eye,' k an, 'to
see '; and the root of kan may be the same syllable as in Sanskrit
ak-shi, 'eye,' the ak being by metathesis changed into ka. At
all events, the root kan is abundantly prevalent in the sporadic
languages; for the Maori itself has kana, 'to stare wildly,' that
is, ' to look keenly'; ka, 'to burn'; ka-ka, 'red-hot'; kana-pa,
'bright,' 'shining'; kana-ku, 'fire'; and cognate Polynesian
dialects have kano-i-mata, 'the pupil (i.e., 'the sheen") of the
eye'; 'a'ano, certain ' red berries,' ' the flesh of animals,' from its
redness; ka-napa-napa, 'to glitter'; ka-n a pa, 'lightning.' The
simple root ka gives la, ra, 'the sun,' and all the Polynesian
words connected with these forms.
Nor is this root-word ka, kan confined to Polynesian dialects ;
in Ebudan, ' fire ' is in-caj), kapi, kapu, gapu, av, avi; and
the Papuan dialects have for 'fire,' kova, kai-wa ; for ' burn,'
ogabu, igabi. xVnd kai-o in Greek is ' I burn.'
It is interesting to know, also, that in the states which form
the Himalayan boimdary of India the woi-ds for ' eye ' are m i,
mik, mighi, mak, mo, mak, mo; and, farther east, in Cochin-
China and Tonkin, mot, mok, mu. It thus appears that, on the
wliole our common word mil, 'the eye,' is more akin to the non-
Aryan races of India — the representatives of its earlier population.
In closing this section of my subject, I presume I need scarcely
say that the evidence before us drawn from the words for ' water,'
' blind,' and ' eye,' fully justifies the opinion that the Australian
languages are not isolated, but that, in their essential root-words,
they have a close relation to the languages of the Southern Seas
and to similar root-words in the languages of the great peninsula of
India. I cannot conceive it to be possible that our blackfellows
should have, by chance, invented words which, when analysed,
show the underlying ideas ex])ressed by them to be the same as
those root-words spread overso vast an area elsewhere.
iNTEODrcTiON". xxxr
YII. MlSCELLAIfEOUS TeST "WoRDS.
(a.) There are just two or three other words which I would
glance at very rapidly. The Malay kutu means ' louse '; in all
Polynesia also that word means 'louse'; therefore, as some
persons say, the South 8ea Islanders inust be Malay-Polynesians.
But I find that in Aueityum also, a Papuan region, in-ket is
'louse,' and in South Australia kiita, and in other parts of
Australia, kii-lo, gullun. To complete the analogy, tliese per-
sons should now say that the Papuans of the New Hebrides and
the blacks of South Australia are Malay. This looks like a
reductio ad absurdum.
(5.) The word kutu reminds me that there are some very un-
savoury words, which are a strong proof of identity of origin
among races ; for, if these words have not come from one common
source, it is scarcely possible to imagine how they are so much
alike. For instance, gu-nung here means stercus Jiominis aut
hesfiac ; in Sanskrit the root-verb is gu. In Samoan, (k)i-no is
' excrement,' the same word as gu-nung. Among our Port
Stephens blacks, the worst of the evil spirits is called gunuug-
dh.a]iia^^'' sfercus edens.' In Hebrew, a variant for the name
Beelzebub is Beelzebiil, which means dominus stercoris.
Again, kak is an Aryan root-verb; in New Gruinea it becomes
tage {t for k, as is common) ; in New Britain, tak ; in Samoa,
ta'e ; m Aueityum, no-hok and na-heh. The Sanskrit bhaga,
which I need not translate, is in Piji maga ; and in Tasmania
maga; and pi, mi, as I have already shown, is as old as the
Assyrians.
(c.) The Tasmanian word for ' sun ' is pugganubrana or
pukkanebrena or pallanubrana or panubrana, according
to Milligan's list. Of these, the first is clearly the original form,
for the last is merely a contraction of it, and the third substitutes
liorg. The last syllable -n a is formative, and is exceedingly
common in Tasmanian Avords ; it is, I may observe in passing,
exactly the same syllable which is used as a common sufiix to
form nouns in New Guinea and in the Albannic group, and
in a slightly different way also in Aueityum. The remainder of
the Tasmanian word is pugga and nubra. Now, nubra or
nubre in Tasmanian is ' the eye,' but the vocabularies of that
language do not enlighten me as to the meaning of pugga. I
■would write it biig-a, and connect it with the New Britain word
bug (pronounced bung), which means ' day'; thus biiganubra
would mean ' the eye of day,' that is, ' the sun '; and that is
exactly the meaning of mata-ari, the Malay word for the ' sun.'
The Ebudan of Santo has bog, ' day,' and the Fijian for ' sun'
is mata-ni-senga. Bug is allied to the Dravidian pag-al,
* day.' Bug I take from the Sk. bha, ' to shine '; with this com-
pare the derivation of the English word ' day.'
5XXV1 INTRODUCTION.
((?.) In the Kamalarai dialect (N.S.W.), kagal means 'bad,'
'no good'; the -gal here, as elsewhere, is formative, and ka is
the root. Now ka is a ►Sk. prefix meaning ' bad '; in Tiji, 'bad' is
ca, and in the New Hebrides, sa ; in New Britain it is a-ka-ina,
{e.) The Awabakal word for ' good ' is murrarag ; in Wirad-
hari, it is marang ; in Kamalarai, it is murraba; the Port
Jackson tribe at Sydney called it bujari. The root is ma, mu,
bn ; Mr, Threlkeld's spelling should thus have been ma-ra-rag,
that is, ma-ra with the last syllable reduplicated and -ag added ;
and murraba should be ma-ra-ba ; in bu-jari, the -jari is a very
common formative. Analogues to these are: — Albannic, bo-ina,
'good'; Ebudan (Aneityum), up-ene (u p /or bu) ; Malay, ba-ik;
Papuan, mage, bo-en a, na-mo, na-ma. The Sanskrit bha-dra
means 'best,' ' happy,' ' well '; and the insular Keltic ma-th is
'good,' 'wholesome,' 'happy.' I believe that the Latin bonus
(of which Latin etymologists cannot trace the origin) is connected
with these ancient roots; for the Keltic ma-th, z.e., mad, would
easily give bon-us.
{/.) The Wiradhari balun, 'dead,' seems to be the same word
as the Dra vidian ma-1, 'to die,' and of the same origin as the
Polynesian ma-te, ' dead,' and the Malay ma-ti, mang-kat, 'dead.'
The old Assyrian has maatu, 'to die,' and the Sanskrit mri
(mar), the Malay mi-ta, the Hebrew miith, miitli, are all cognate
verbs. The Keltic has bath, bas, 'death.'
((/.) Korien is an Awabakal negative. If it were an Ebudan
word, its form in -en would make it a verbal noun equivalent to
' the denying.' Now, it happens that, in the Motvi dialect of New
Guinea, gorea means ' to deny,' and the Maori ha-hore or here
means 'no' (A for k), and whaka-kore-kore, 'to deny.' The
Ebudan of Efate has koro, 'to deny.' Another Awabakal nega-
tive is kya-wai, where the kya is for ka. The Maori ka-ua
(imperative or optative) also means 'not.'
(h.) Wiyalli is to 'speak.' The Sanskrit vad, va^, 'to
spei ,k,' would give the wiy a, and the -alii is the usual verbal foi-m.
The Albannic has veti, 'speak.' Fiji has va-ka, 'to say,' and
vei wall, 'to joke,' where vei is a reciprocal. The Awabakal wi-
ya means ' say,' ' tell'; New Britain has wi, ' to tell, to inform.'
{k.) The Awabakal bun means 'to strike,' 'to beat,' ' to kill.'
With this compare the Malay bunoh, 'to kill'; the Albannic
bua-tari, 'to destroy,' and we-umi, 'to fight,' 'to kill,' of which
the we is reciprocal.
(Z.) For an adult ' woman,' the Wiradhari says inar ; the Port
Jackson (Sydney) sub-tribe said din or dhin* ; other localities say
yinan, ina ; thus the J is radical. Several districts, far apart, in
*Hence comes the word jin — so commonly used in Australia to mean
the 'wife' of a black man (kuri).
INTEODTTCTIOlf. XXXVH
British ISTew Guinea say ina-gu, 'my mother,' ia ina-na, 'his
mother,' in e, 'mother,' where the ina is our Australian word;
and, in Samoa, tina is 'mother.' Are these languages not akin?
Is it possible that the Papuans, the Polynesians, and the Australians
could have bori'owed from one another so essential a woi'd as
' woman,' ' mother "? Moreover, in Tamil, inu means 'to bring
forth young' [cf. Eng. yean), and in Malay Induis a word for
'mother.' Are these, too, not akin to our Australian word 1
VIII. The Pronouns as Test Words.
There are few languages in which the pronouns of the first and
the second persons are declined throughout by the inflexion of the
same base-stem. In the Aryan family, there are at least two
bases for each of them, and these are often so disguised by the
inflexions that it is diflicult to detect them. In English, for
instance, there does not seem to be any etymological connection
between / and me and loe, and a similar diversity exists in the
Latin ego, mihi and oios, tu and vos ; in the Greek ego, viou, noi,
hemeis ; in the Sanskrit aham, mam, vayam, or tvad and yush-
mad. In Melanesian regions, the corresponding Papuan, Albannic
and Ebudan pronouns are apparently considered so volatile and
evanescent that a strong demonstrative is added as a backbone
for their support, and thus the pronoun itself almost disappears
from view. But many of these Melanesian pronouns usually have
two forms — a longer and a shorter ; the longer and stronger is used
for emphasis and can stand alone ; the shorter is suffixed to verbs
and nouns, and it commonly shows the stem of the pronoun in its
primary state. In Latin and Greek, we are already familiar with
the strengthening use of demonstratives as regards these two
personal pronouns, for we know that ego-ipse, ego-met, vos-met-
ipsi, ego-ge, and the like, are used. As examples of the shorter
Melanesian forms, I cite the Aneityumese etma-k, ' my father,'
etma-m, 'thy father,' etma-n, 'his father,' where the k, m, and
n repx-esent the three pronouns of which the longer possessives are
iinyak, unyum, o un; corresponding suffixes are seen in the
Papuan (Murua Is.) nima-gu ' my hand,' nima-mu, ' thy hand,'
nima-na, 'his hand.' In Melanesian languages generally, either
the separable possessive or its suffix form is used with nouns,
although the one and the other use convey a slightly different shade
of meaning; thus, the Tukiok dialect says either a nug ruma
or a ruma-ig, 'my house,' and the Fijian something similar; but
the Papuans say ia nima-na, 'his hand,' ina-gu, 'my mother.'
Each dialect in this volume has some peculiarity ; for the
Wiradhari has something which looks like suffixed . pronouns,*
* See girugal-dw on page 111 of this Appendix, gaddal-rf^on page 112,
,and other instances in the same section.
SXXVm INTRODUCTION.
and the Awabakal has a 'conjoined dual'; yet they all have long
forms of the first and the second ])ronouns to be used alone or
for the sake of emphasis, while other short forms always go with
a verb as its subject. I add a list of the pronouns found in
the whole of the Australian, Papuan, and Melanesian regions,
so far as they are as yet known to linguists ; for, although I shall
make only a limited use of this list at present, yet it may be
useful to students of language in Britain and elsewhere, esjtecially
as the sources fi-om which I have compiled it are not generally
accessible,
Australian Pronouns.
The Awabakal pronouns are : —
Singular. Dual. Plural.
1st. — G-atoa, bag, emmo-ug, tia Bali, gali Geen, gear-un
2nd. — G-into, bi, giro-ug Bula Nura
3rd. Masc- — Niuwoa, noa, gi- '\
ko-ug, bon (_ Buloara
3rd. Fem. — Boun-toa, boun-
1
Bara
For the purpose of comparison, I give the forms of these two
pronouns as found in other parts of Australia : —
New South Wales.
1st Pronoun.
Sing. — Gaiya, ga, gaan, gai, iya, gata, gaiagug ; gadthu, nathu,
nathuna, athu, addu, thu, athol ; mi, mina, mitua, motto; imigdu,
ganna, nanna; gera ; maiyai; iaka ; giamba; gulagi.
2nd Pronoun.
Sing. — Gind-a, (-u), yind-a, (-u), ind-a, (-e, -o, -u), nind-a, (-u); idno ;
numba; wonda; nindrua, natrua ; yindigi, indiga ; youra; beai,
biibla ; wiya, Avalbo ; gin ; imiba ; gindigug ; nagdu ; gulaga.
3rd Pro. ; Si^ig. — Genua, noa, niuoa ; Plu. — Garnia, bara.
Victoria.
1st Pronoun.
/S'm^r.— Gaddo, nadtha, gio, gain, gatiik; waan, aan, winnak; yatti,
yanga, yandog, nitte ; naik, naic, niak, ge, gen ; wokok, yer-
rowik, wolunyek, tiarmek ; biirdop.
2nd Pronoun.
Sing. — Gind-a, (-e, -i,- o, -u), ginduk; nind-i, (-e); ginna, ginya; nin,
nindo, ninan, niam, winiain; yerrowin; tiarmin; waar, waanyen;
wolanig ; nutuk, utiik; mirambina ; gulum ; yerally.
3rd Pro.; Sing. — Nunthi, munniger, kiga; Plu. Murra-milla,kinyet.
rUTEODUCTIOK. XXXIX
I'asmania.
Lst Pro.; Sing. — Mina, mana, mena. 2nd Pro.; Sing. — Nina.
Central and South Australia.
1st Pronoun.
Sing. — Gai, gann-a, (-i), ginyi, onye, yiga, yinna, ini, unnyi ;
gapp-a, (-U), gaap, appa, aupa ; gatto, attlio, attu, autu, altliu ;
guca; ti; iyie.
2ncl Pronoun.
Sing. — Grina, nia, nini, nina, yina ; giniba, imba, umpu, unga,
unni, yinyi ; nindo, yundo ; tidni, yidni, yundru, andru, gundru ;
wuru, nuru, nuni ; canna.
3rd Pro.; Sing. — Nulia, kitye, pa, panna, ninni ; Plu. — Kinna(r),
ka(r), pa(r)na, nana, ya(r)dna.
Western Australia.
1st Pronoun.
Sing. — Gatlia, gatuko, natto, gadjo, ajjo, ganya, guanga, ganga,
gana, gonya, nanya, nunna ; garmi, geit ; gi, gida, gika, gig.
2nd Pronoun.
Sing. — Ginda, ginna, yinda, yinna, nini, ninya, niya ; ginduk,
yinnuk, nonduk, nundu, nunda, nunak; janna. Plural — NuraL
3rd Pro.; Sing. — Bal ; /%(.— Balgun, bullalel.
Queejisland.
1st Pronoun.
Sing. — Gaia, gia, gio, nigo ; ganga, ongya, unoa ; nutta, uttliu,.
uda ; yundu, giba, ipa ; nia, ia, niu, iu, iuwa, yo ; biivko ;
kuronya; giingiil.
2nd Pronoun.
Shig. — Ninda, inda, imba; yinda, (-i), ind-a, (-i); yindua, yiindu,
indu ; innu, iu ; inknu, ingowa, enowa, nowa ; nino ; nay on ;
nomun ; yuniir ; tini ; Av^ologa.
3rd Pro.; Sing. — Ugda, unda ; Flu,. — Ganna.
With tliese Australian Pronouns, compare the
Dravidiax Proxouxs.
1st Pronoun.
Sing. — Tamil — Niin, yan, en, en ; Canarese — an, yan, na, nanu, en,
ene ; Tulu — -yan, yen, e ; Malayalam — alam, nan, en, en, ena, eni,
ini ; Telugu — nenu, ne, enu, e, na, nu, ni ; Tuda — an, en, eni,
ini ; Kota — ane, en, eni, ini ; Gund — anna, na, a]i, na ; Ku —
anu, na, in, e; Rajmaha,!- — en; Oraon — enan.
Plu. — Memu, amat, yam, am, amu, nam, njingal, navu, iivu.
Xl INTBODUCTION.
2nd Pronoun.
Sivfj. — Tamil — Ni, nin, nun, oi, i, ay, oy ; Canarese — nin, ni,
ninu, nin, ay, e, iye, i, i ; Tulu, i, nin, ni ; Malayjilam — ni, nin ;
Telugu — nivu, ivu, ni, nin, vu, vi ; Tuda — ni, nin, i; Kota — ni,
nin, i; Gond — imma, ni, i; Ku — inu, ni, i; Oraon — nien; Rajma-
hal — nin. The Scythic of the Behistun tables has ni ; the Brahui
of AfFghanistan has ni, na. Plu. — Miru, imat, nir, nivu, ii'u.
With these compare corresponding pronouns from several places
in British New Guinea, thus : —
Papuan Pronouns.
1st.
Sing. — Gai, nidu, da, yau, ye-gu, nau, nana, ara ; Dual — Gaba-
gaba, ni-mo-to, noni, kaditei, vagewu ; Plu. — Ga-1-pa-ga-l-pa,
'we three,' ni-mo, 'we,' no-kaki, kita, ya-kaimi, ita.
2nd.
Sing. — Gido, gi, rOu, koa, ya-kom, oa, goi, oi ; Dual — Gipel, ni-
go-to, ka-mitei ; Flu. — Gita, nigo, yana, komiu, ya-kamiyi, um-
ui, omi.
3rd.
Sing. — la, goi, ndu, au-kaki, tenem ; Plu. — lamo, tana, nei, ya-
buia, sia, idia, ila, ira, isi.
Possessive forms are : —
1st.
Sing. — Lau-apu, gau, moro, dai-ero, yo-gu, ge-gu, egu ; Plu. — Lai
emai-apumai. ga-l-pan, yo-da, la-nambo.
2nd.
Sing. — la-apuga, eke-ero, apui-ero, li-nambo, gninu, oi-amu; Plu. —
Komiai, gita-munu, yai-ero, amui, ami, gami.
Ebudan Pronouns.
Corresponding Ebudan pronouns are : —
1st.
Sing.—Ei-waM., iau, na-gku, avau, ain-yak ; short forms, na, a, ku,
ne, iya, k ; Plu. — Endra, hida, riti, kito, a-kity, a-kaija,
2nd.
Siiig. — Eg-ko, e-nico, jau, aiko, yik, aiek ; Plu. — Kamim, hamdi,
ituma, akaua, aijaua.
INTEODUCTION.
xli
Possessive forms are —
1st.
Sing. — No-ku, his-ug, kana-ku, kona-gku, rahak, tio-ku, unyak ;
Plu. — No-ra, isa-riti, kana-dro, kona-ra, otea, uja.
2nd.
Sing. — No-m, liisa-m, kana-mo, kona-rai, raha-m, o un ; Plu. —
No-iiim, isa-hamdi, kana-miu, kona-munu, ana, un-yimia.
Fijian Proxouns.
Fijian pronouns are : —
Singular. Binal,
First.
I inchi. Koi-l--e -darn
\ rxclu. Koi-keivsLV.
inclu. I-ke-darvL
exclu. /-keirau
inclu. Kedaru
exclu. Keirau
Second.
Koi-ke-mu-dvaM
/-ie-mudrau
Kemudrau
Third.
Koi-rniM
I-rau ; drau
Nom. — Kol-a-\v\
Poss. nku
Obj. — Au
Nom. — Ko-i-ko
Poss. — -mu
Obj. — Iko
Ternal.
Koi-h-e-diAou
iToJ-keitou
/-i'e-datou
/-keitou
Kedatou
Keitou
Koi-he-mu-do\\
/-Z;e-mudou
Kemudou
Plural.
Koi-ke-da.
A'oi-keimami
I-ke-da.
/-keimami
Keda
Keimami
iToi-kemuni
J-ke-ranni
Kemuni
Nom. — Ko-koya
Poss. — I-keya; -na
Obj. — Koya.
Kau
A'o-iratou Ko-i-va.
I-ratou ; dratou I-ra ; dra
I-ratou I-ra.
t Those syllables which are printed in italics maj- be dropped off in succession for various
uses of the pronouns.
Demonstratives ax^e : —
guo, ' this, these ' ; o koya o guo, (sing.) ' this ' ; o ira o guo,
'these.' O gori, 'that, those'; o koya o gori (sing.), 'that';
o ira o gori (plu.), 'those.'
Albannic Pronouns.
In the Albannic (Tukiok) dialect, the pronouns are : — •
Singular.
Binal.*
Ternal.
Plural.
1st — lau, io, yo
/ inclu.
\ exclu.
da-ra
mi-ra
da-tul
mi-tul
dat
me-at
2nd — U 01' ui
mvi-ru
mu-tul
mu-at
3rd — la or i
dia-ra
di-tul
di-at
This is a long list, and yet it may be useful, as showing how-
great a variety there is in the pronominal forms of the Australian
and Melanesian languages. But these forms, if subjected to
analysis and comparison, will be found to resolve themselves into
a few simple elements. In examining the Australian pronouns
now given, we must bear in mind that they are subject to some
* I lyreiev Binal and Ternal, because they signify 'two (three) each time.'
xlii INTEODUCTION.
degree of error, wliicli affects also iiiauy other lists of Australian
words. Australian vocabularies are made often by Englishmen,
■who, in wi-iting the words, follow the sounds of the vowels as used
in English, and sometimes even their own vices of pi'onunciation ;
for instance, k inner is written down for kinna, and i-ya for
ai-ya. Again, a blackfellow, when asked to give the equivalents
for English words, sometimes fails to understand, and so puts one
word for another ; thus, in some lists that I have seen, the word
for ' I ' is set down as meaning ' thou '; and even in printing mis-
takes occur ; for, in Mr. Taplin's list of South Austi-alian dialects
' we ' is gun, and ' you ' is gun also ; the former should probably
be gen ; and kambiyanna is made to mean both 'your father'
and 'his father.'
The Fh'st Pronoun. — Making all due allowance for such defects,
I pi'oceed to examine the Australian pronouns, an;l I find that,
notwithstanding the multitude of their dialect-forms, they have
only a very few bases. These are, for the first pronoun — Ga-ad,
ga-ta, ga-ad-du, ba, mi, mo; and, for the second pronoun —
(jin, gin-da, gin-du, bi, bu, gula. I leave the demonstrative
or third pronoun out of account, as it is not of so much importance
to our inquiry. Now, the existence of' the base ga-ad is proved
by the forms (given above), ga-an, ga-na ; the base ga-ta recurs
in gatha, ga-ya, ni-te ; ga-ad-du, in gad-thu, na-thu, a-thu,
ga-tu-ko, ifec. ; ba gives wa-an, a-an, and, in South Australia, ga-
pa, ga-ap, a-pa; mo and mi are merely softened forms of ba, and
are found in mo-to, wo-kok, mi-na, wi-nak, ga-mi. Even so
unpromising a form as un-ca (Queensland) connects itself with the
base ga-ta through gii-ca (South Australia); for some Melanesiaii
dialects prefer to begin words with a vowel, and so transpose
the letters of an initial dissyllable; thus, lin-ca is for ug-ca^
gu-ca:=ga-ta.* Most of the dialect fonns of this pronoun given
above arise from the interchange of ng, n, and y ; the Wiradhari
dialect, for example, has gaddu, naddu, yaddu, 'I,' and these
become more liquid still in yallu, -ladu.f Let us observe here,
also, that the Tasmanian forms ma-na, mi-na, ' I,' come from the
base ma, mi. I have above given six bases for the first pronoun in
Australian, and yet there are only two — ad or ta and ba; for mi
and mo are only ba differently vocalised, and, in the other three,
ga- is a prefix, as will be shown further on, while the -du of ga-
ad-du is an emphatic suffix.
* The Aneityumese (Ebudan) language is so fond of an initial vowel that
it constantly dislocates a consonant in favour of a vom'cI. Our Australian
Vocabularies in this volume have very few words beginning with vowels.
+ .See Appendix, page (iO. Dr. Caldwell was led into error by the form
gadlu, wliich an authority told him meant ' we ' in South Australia. Used
alone, it is only 'I,' for gaddu.
INTEODUCTION. xliii
Here comes in a most important question. Are tliese bases ta
and ba exclusively Australian 1 Emphatically I say, No ; for I
know that, in Samoan, ta is the pronoun ' I,' and ta (for ta-ua)
is 'we two,' 'itais 'me,' and ta-tou is 'we'; la'u (i.e., ta-ku, I
for d) is ' my.' I quote the Samoan as the representative of the
Polynesian dialects. And yet the Maori pronouns of the first
and second pronouns present some interesting features. They
are : —
' I,' ' me ' — Ahau, au, awau.
' We two ' — Taua, maua.
' We ' — Tatou, matou, matau.
' My '- — Taku, toku, aku, oku, ahaku.
'Thou' — Koe ; dual, korua, j;?«., koutou.
' Your ' — -Tau, tou, au, on, takorua, takoutou.
Here in 'we two,' 'we,' and 'my,' I see both of our Australian base-
forms ta and ma; in 'my' I find the Australian possessive genitive
suffix ku, gu* ; and in ' we ' I take the -tou to bo for tolu the
Polynesian for 'three,' three being used in an indefinite way to mean
any number beyond two.f Then, in Fiji, I find that 'I,' ' me ' is
au, which may be for ta-u, for the binal form of it is -da-ru (i.e.,
da-frua, 'two'), the ternal is -da-tou (i.e., da-ftolu, 'three'),
and the plural is da. In the Motu dialect of New Guinea, ' I ' is
la-u, of which the plural is {inclusive) ai (for ta-i?) &n(\. {exclusive)
i-ta. In other parts of New Guinea, ' I ' is d a, ya-u, na-u, na-na,
la-u, and, for the plural, ki-ta, i-ta {cf. Samoan). Ebudan parallels
are — ' I,' e-nau, iau, ain-ya-k ; for the plural, hi-da, ki-to, a-kity ;
possessive forms are tio-ku, otea, u-ja. The Tukiok forms iau,
io, yo ; da-ra, da-tul, dat, correspond mainly with the Fijian,
and are all from the root da, ta.
I think that I have thus pi'oved that our Australian base ta is
not local, but sporadic, and that, so far as this evidence has any
weight, the brown Polynesians have something in common with
the Melanesian race.
My next inquiry is this — Has this base, ta, da, ad, any connec-
tion with the other race-languages 1 And at once I remember
that the old Persian for ' I ' is ad-am, and this corresponds with
the Sanskrit ah-am, of which the stem is agli-, as seen in the
Grseco-Latin ego and the Germanic ich. I assume an earlier
form of this base to have been ak-, but, whether this Indian ak-
orthe Iranian ad- is the older, I cannot say. At all events, the
change of ak into at and then into ad, and conversely, is a com-
mon phonetic change, and is at this moment going on copiously in
Polynesia. The ak is now in present use in the Malay aku, ' I.'
*The possessive termination for persons in Awabakal is -umba; tliis I
take to be for gu-mba, the gu being the possessive formative in Wiradhari ;
it corresponds to the Ebudan ki, which is used in the same way.
•\Cf. Singular, Dual, and (all else) Plural.
xliv INTEODUCTIOir.
Tho other Australian base-fomi of tlie first pronoun is ba, and
this, in the forms of nia, me, mi, mo, is so common in all
languages that I need scarcely quote more than Sanskrit mad (the
base), 'I'; the Grjeco- Latin emou, mou ; mihi, me; and the
English, ' we.' This base, ba, gives us the Awabakal simple nomi-
native bag (for ba-ag), -ag being one of the most common of
Australian formatives. Then, of the possessive form, emmo-iig,
which I would write emo-ug, I take the e to be merely enuncia-
tive, the -ug being a possessive formation ; the mo that remains is
the same as in the Australian mo-to, wo-kok, ' I,' the Papuan,
mOu, 'I.' The Awaliakal ba-li, 'we two '(both being present),
is ba + li, where the -li is probably a dual form.
The Awabakal accusative of the fii'st pronoun is tia, or, as I
would write it, tya or ca ; cf. guca and unca. This tia appears
again in tlie vocative ka-tio-u, and is, I think, only a phonetic
form of the ta which I have already examined.
I think, also, that the Hebrew pronoun an-oki, ' I,' is connected
with our root ak, at, ta ; for it seems to be pretty well assured
that the an- there is merely a demonstrative particle placed before
the real root-form -ok-i ; for the Egyptian pronouns of the first
and second persons have it (-an, -ant, -ent) also. And this quite
corresponds with our Awabakal pronouns of the first and second
})ersons, ga-toa and gin-toa; for, in my view, they both begin
with a demonstrative ga, which exists also in Polynesian as a pro-
thetic nga, nge.* In Awabakal, I see it in ga-li, 'this,' ga-Ia,
' that,' and in the interrogative gan, ' who ' % for interrogatives
come from a demonstrative or indefinite base (cf. the word
minyug on page 3 of the Appendix). Here again, in the Awa-
bakal word gan, ' who ' ? we are brought into contact with Aryan
equivalents ; for, if gan is for ka-an, as seems likely, then it leads
us to the Sanskrit ka-s, ' who' % Zend, cvaht = Latin quan-tus %
Latin, quod, ubi, itc, Gothic, livan = English, 'when''? Lithua-
nian, ka-s, 'who'? Irish, can, 'whence"? Kymric, pa, 'who'?
Greek, pds, ' how '? po-then, ' whence '?
In the Australian plural forms geanni, geen, we have again the
prefix demonstrative ga, but now softened into ge (r/!the Maori pre-
fix nge) because of the short vowel that follows. The next syllable,
an, is a liquid form of ad, ta, ' I,' and the ni may be apluralising
addition — the same as in the Papuan ni-mo. It should here be
remembered, howevei-, that the Australian languages seldom have
special forms for tlie plural ; for ta may mean either ' I ' or 'we';
to indicate the plural number some pluralising word must be added
to ta ; thus in Western Australia ' we' is gala-ta, literally 'all-
I.' Some pronouns, however, seem to have absorbed these suffix
*In Maori, this nge is used as a prefix to the pronouns au and ona»
thus, nge-au is exactly equivalent to the Australian ngatoa.
IKTBODUCTION, xlV-
pluralising words, whatever they were, and thus to have acquired
plui-al terminations ; of this our geanni is an instance ; in western
Victoria, 'we' is expressed by ga-ta-en, that is, gata, ' I,' with
the suffix -en — the same as the -ni of geanni. The Awabakal
' we ' is geen. Such plurals are very old, for they are found in
the Babylonian syllabaries ; there the second pronoun is zu ; its
plural is zu enan, that is, ' thou-they' = ye ; there also, ' I ' is mu ;
with which compare ba, ma.
The Second Pronoun. — There are only two base-forms for the
second pronoun, bi o?' bu and gin. The latter is strengthened by
the addition of -da, which may also be -de, -di, -do, -du, and these
vocalic changes support my contention, that this syllable proceeds
from the demonstrative ta, for if the original is da or ta, all the
others may proceed from that, but it is not likely that, conversely,
any one of them would change into -da. The -to a in the Awa-
bakal gin-toa is the same as in gcit-toa, and the initial g is the
same as ga, ge. But what is the body of the word — the -in ? I
can only say with certainty that it is the base-form of the second
pronoun, for I can give no further account of it. Possibly, it is
for bin with the b (v) abraded ; for the other base-form, although
it now appears as bi, may have been originally bin — the same as
the accusative ; and yet, in the accusative dual, we have gali-n
and bulu-n, and in the singular bon for bo-un, where the n seems
to be a case-sign. If the -in of gintoa is for bin, then we get
back to bi as the only base-form of the second Australian pronoun,
and bi gives the forms wi-ye, we, i-mi-ba, win-in, q.v. The other
base-form of bi is bu, and this is attested in Australian by b lib la,
wuru, nuro, nuni, q.v. ; the n'yurag in South Australia shows
how the initial ?i has come in, for that plural is equivalent to
gvurag, from bu; it also shows the origin of the Awabakal plural
nu-ra. The -ra there is certainly a plural form ; for we have it
in ta-ra, 'those,' from the singular demonstrative ta, and in ba-ra,
' they,' from ba. In the genitive gear-unba, ' of us,' the -ar may
be this -ra, but it may also be simply the -an of the nominative.
This same -r a is a pluralising suffix in Melanesia. In many parts
of Melanesia, likewise, this mu — often when used as a verbal
suffix — is the pronoun ' thou.'
I may here venture the conjecture, without adding any weight
to it, that, as the Sanskrit dva, 'two,' gives the Latin bis, bi, so,
on the same principle, the Sanskrit tva, ' thou,' may be the old
form to which our bi, bu is allied.
As to the prefix ga, I know that, in New Britain, ngo is 'this,'
in Aneityum, nai, naico, i-naico is 'that.' This nga, also, as
a prefix, occurs in a considerable number of words in Samoan; for
instance, tasi is 'one,' and tusa is 'alike,' solo is 'swift'; an in-
tensive meaning of each is expressed by ga-tasi, ga-tusa, ga-solo ;
Xlvi INTEODUCTIOy.
the numeral 'ten' is ga-fulu wliicli I take to mean 'the whole'
(sc. fingers). In Teutonic, it seems to have sometimes a collective
force, as in ge-birge, ' mountains,' and sometimes an intensive, as
in Gothic, ga-bigs, from Sanskrit bliaga, the 'sun.' In Latin the
suffix c in sic is supposed to be the remains of a demonstrative.
Gratoa, then, is to me made up of ga + ad + do, the -do being
the same suffix particle of emphasis which is elsewhei'e in Australia
written -du, and the -do is extended into -to a, also for emphasis,
as in tlie Wiradhari yama, yamoa, and other Australian words.
It is quite possible that this -do also is only the demonstrative ta
— so often used in composition in Awabakal — changed into -to,
Ttlo, according to the rules on pages 10 and 11 of this volume.
From the lists of pronouns given above, it will be seen that
Fijian also prefixes a demonstrative ko, ko-i to its first and second
pronouns. This same particle, ko, o is also prefixed to nouns,
and especially to proper names. In Samoan, 'o, that is, ko, is
placed before nouns and pronouns when they are used as the sub-
ject of a proposition — this, also, for enq^hasis, to direct attention
to the agent, like the agent-nominative case in Awabakal.
In the Ebudan and Papuan pronouns, a similar prothetic demon-
sti-ative is found ; there it has the forms of na, ain, en, a, ka, ha,
ya, ye; in many of the Ebudan dialects, — the Aneityumese, for
instance — the demonstrative in, ni, elsewhere na, is prefixed to
almost every word that is used as a noun. In other parts of
Melanesia, the na is a suffix.
Finally, I placed the Dravidian pronouns in my list in order to
compare them with the Australian. And the comparison is in-
structive. They are, chiefly, nan, yan, for the first person, and
nin, ni for the second. Dr. Caldwell himself considers the
initial n in each case to be not radical, and the base forms to be
iin and in. This is a close approximation to our Australian
bases ; for we have the three forms, gud-du, nad-du, yad-du, in
which the n and the y proceed from the original nasal -guttural g,
and that g, as I have shown, is only a demonstrative prefix. The
d of nad and yad may easily pass into its liquid n, thereby
giving the Dravidian nan and yiin ; and the Australian forms
are older, for Avhile d will give n, oi, when established in a word,
will not i-evert to d. So also, the Dravidian nin will come from
the earlier gin, which we find in the Australian ginda.
IX. The Formatiox of Words.
Any one who examines the Vocabularies of the Awabakal and
the Wiratlhari dialects will see how readily the Australian
language can form derivative words from simjjle roots, and how
expressive those words may become, The language is specially
i>7rEODUCTio:s'. slvii
rich in verb-forms. As an illustration of this, let ns take from the
"Wiradhari dialect the root verb banga, of which the original
meaning is that of 'breaking,' 'dividing,' 'separating.' From
that root are formed — bang-ana, 'to break' (intrans.), bang-
lira, 'to bi'eak ' (trans.), banga-mara, 'to (make to) break,' and,
with various other adaptations of the root-meaning, banga-bira,
banga-dira, banga-nira, banga-naringa, banga-dara, banga-
gainbira, banga-dambira, banga-durmanbira, bang-al-gara.
It is true that these varying formativea resolve themselves into a
few simple elements, but they certainly convey different shades of
meaning ; else, why should they exist in the language 1 Nor is
the root banga the only one on Avhich such changes are made; for
the Wiradhari vocabulary contains numerous instances of similar
formations.
Then the modes of a verb are also usually abundant and precise.
In the Indicative mood, the Awabakal dialect has oiine different
tenses, and the Wiradhari has one more, the future perfect. Our
Australian verb thus rivals and excels the Greek and the San-
skrit, for it thus has four futures, and, for time past, it has three
forms, marking the past time as instant, proximate, and remote.
Corresponding to these tenses, there are nine participles, each of
which may be used as a finite verb. Besides an Imperative mood
and a Subjunctive mood, there are reflexive and reciprocal forms,
forms of negation, forms to express continuance, iteration, immi-
nence, and contemporary circumstances. Now, as the Australian
language is agglutinative, not inflexional, the verb acquires all
these modifications by adding on to its root-form various independ-
ent particles, which, if we could trace them to their source, would
be found to be nouns or verbs originally, and to contain the
various shades of meaning expressed by these modes of the verb.
The Fijian verb — in a Melanesian region — is also rich in forms ;
for it has verbs intransitive, transitive, passive, and, with prefixes,
intensive, causative, reciprocal, and reciprocal-causative. And
among the mountains of the Dekkan of India — also a black region
— the verb, as used by the Tudas and Gonds, is much richer than
that of the Tamil, the most cultivated dialect of the same race.
And, in A.ustralian, this copiousness of diction is not confined to
the verbs ; it shows itself also in the building up of other words.
On page 102 of this volume, a sample is given of the manner in
which common nouns may be formed by the adding on of particles.
Mr. Hale, whom I have already named, gives other instances,
doubtless derived from his converse with Mr. Tlirelkeld at Lake
Macquarie, and, although some of the words he quotes are used
for ideas quite unknown to a blackfellow in his native state, yet
they are a proof of the facility of expression which is inherent in
the language. I quote Mr. Hale's examples : —
xlviii INTEODUCTION,
fe;
>.
_i
«
©
,__l
, 1
'-0
•bC
•bC
'o
'S
t
■ta
.^
.^
•to
•£>C
e
tS
f-H
C3
cS
i—H
f— 1
«
• 1— 1
>%
a
o
• pH
^
S
li
6
pq
ij
b
C5
t>3
c3 ^
TjH S .rH ^ ^ -*-' ^ .JLi ^ r^ C3 C3 jS C5 ^^ ^J ^ ^Z^
§ looo o5^. ^^^
P . "^ :^ -J: -J: S ^ -^-Ji -A ?. p. r. o -Ji o -^ -^
^ 1 1^i:3g'^ 1^11^11 ii:^
"^ e
S
Oj
k
+J
i^
s
•2
-V
E
■i
i
"u
V)
rt
^
o
'~7
u
u
c
3
rt
'^
3
3
o
■»
S
pq
o
o
O
o
w
so
o
o
©
s:
^
3
3
®
a
p
ci
3
s
CO '^
cS
-«2
• rH
cS
c3
; — \
;j:^
•~Y
^
g
riS
3
a
o
'-3
c^
in _r^ r—l r
" £^ b: k:
?> ., fD CD ff-i ri m ® 2
n
^ CO S! ' "^ --^ 5 cS ri^ .i, .^ c3 cS p oi ITJ S ',-=3 ^
2 .„ „ .
^ -^ ;i ^ S :5 S
(i "^ 'a o c^ d =^
i « g .5i .^^3 ^
■—» c3 '-^ ;-> -J ^ u-i • ■— i • — * i/T* . ' — i__ h>. 1-^ ^ , '^
o
o
o
C3
p;
r^
3
r^
cS
^
ci
"^
^
;i^
t 1
rt
c3
6
P
P
s^
&j
o
©
©
►^
o
t^
>>
©
(^
c^
©
O
t^
•^
S
^
>-
g
"V
'T-t
r^
^
^
ri
3
o
'3
15
3
o
5
^ .^ t^
o ^
? o r. c -r Si ^-r
— '7 •'^ .A •'-< r^ ' '~r f"
£^ S 5 ^ 5£-t-..2p=:
-^HPPP^^^^
f.^
U
pj
C^i
'f
"-Y
'"7
rt
e
•-'
;j:^
r^i
V
^
3
-5
a
o
1-^
S !3
d
ci
ci
(-<
rt
^
r^
3
a
.id
'
■ Jh
ce
±3
• A
•— 1
; — 1
r^
-^. ^ 'C '^ '^ ""^ ~r
3
1-7
S
"V
1
rt
j — 1
p^
V
^
S
15
rt
^
ci
^
^
>
>~^
'S
mocSooW^SSPPP^f^^H
INTEODirCTIOX. xllx
If ^ve follow tlie numbers on the columns, and rememloer that
the w'ox'd in column iSTo. 1 always denotes the person who does the
action of the verb, the meanings which these words bear — all
springing from the verbal root-form and meaning — may be shown
thus : —
From
Biin-ki-lli — 2. a boxer ; 3. a cudgel ; 4. a blow ; 5. the smiting ;
6. a pugilistic ring; root-ineanhig, 'smite.'
Gakuya-Ui — 2. a liar ; 3. a ])retence ; 4. deceit ; 5. the 'deceiving ;
6. a gambling-house ; r^. »<..,' deceive.'
Goloma-lli — 2. a saviour ; 3. a safeguard ; 4. protection ; 5. the
protecting ; 6. a fortress ; rt.m., ' protect.'
Gu-ki-lli — 2. an almoner ; 3. a shop ; 4. liberality ; 5. the giving
of a thing; 6. a market ; rt.m., 'give.'
Gura-lli — 2. a listener ; 3. an ear-trumpet ; 4. attention ; 5. the
» act of hearing; 6. a news-room ; rt.m., 'hear.'
Ko-ri-lli — 2. a porter ; 3. a yoke ; 4. a carriage ; 5. the carrying ;
6. a wharf ; rt.m., ' carry.'
IMan-ki-lli — 2. a thief ; 3. a trap ; 4. a grasp ; 5. the taking ; 6. a
bank ; rt. m. , ' take. '
Pirri-ki-lli — 2. a sluggard ; 3. a couch ; 4. rest ; 5. the reclining ;
6. a bedroom ; rt.m., 'recline.'
Tiwa-lji • — 2. a searcher ; 3. a drag ; 4. search ; 5. the seeking ;
6. the woods ; rt.m., 'seek.'
Uma-lli — 2. an artisan ; 3. a tool ; 4. work ; 5. the doing ; 6. a
manufactory; rt.m., 'do.'
Upa-Ui — 2. a writer ; 3. a pen ; 4. performance ; 5. the per-
forming ; 6. a desk ; rt.m., ' perform.'
TJwa-lli — 2. a wanderer ; 3. a coach ; 4. a journey ; 5. the
walking ; 6. a parade ground; rt.m., 'walk.'
Wiroba-lli — 2. a disciple ; 3. a portmanteau ; 4. pursuit ; 5. the act
of following ; 6. the barracks ; rt.m., 'follow.'
Wiya-lli — 2. a commander; 3. a book; 4. speech; 5. the speak-
ing ; 6. a pulpit ; rt.m., 'speak.'
Wiin-ki-lli — 2. a magistrate ; 3. a watch-house ; 4. resignation ;
5. the leaving; 6. the jail ; rt.m., 'leave.'
Yallawalli — 2. an idler ; 3. a seat ; 4. a session ; 5. the act of
sitting; 6. a pew ; rt.m., 'sit.'
As to the oi'igin of these formatives, I think that kan equals
k + an, the -an being a personal suffix from the same source as
the demonstrative un-ni, 'this'; in Wiradhari it is -da in, that
is d-hain, the -ain being the same as -an. We shall find further
on that Jc, d, f, rj and other consonants are used in this language
merely to tack on the suffix. Similarly, in Fijian and Samoan,
1 INTBODUCTION.
there is a great variety of consonants in use for this purpose. The
-kanne seems to be a softer form of -kannai or -kanmai, the
-mai being a common formative. The -ta of number 5 is a de-
monstrative whicli is used al)undantly in the language as a
strengthening particle ; and the -to is the agent-nominative form
(see pp. lO, 11) of -ta. The -geil of number 6, or, as I write
it, -gel, seems to me to be of the same origin as the suffix -kill
(see page 18) ; a corresponding word in Di'avidian is kal, 'a place.'
The -ye of number 2 denotes a continued action, and may be the
same as the impei-ative form -ia, that is -iya.
In the list given above, 'a magistrate' is called wiinkiye be-
cause he ' commits' the culpi'it to jail, and 'the watch-house' or jail
is therefore wiinkilligel. The wirroballikan arc the 'light-
horse,' who act as an escort to the Governor of the colony, and the
place where they are housed is therefore wirroballigel. In the
Gospel, the disciples of Christ are called wirroballikan, and their
following of Him for instruction — their discipleship — is wirro-
balli-kanne-ta. Biinkillikanne may be a 'musket,' because
it ' strikes' with a ball, or it may be a ' hammer,' a ' mallet,' which
gives 'blows.'
The reader has observed that all the verbals in the first column
above contain the syllable -illi, and, as that table has given us
examples of synthesis, it may be j^rofitable now to examine the
formation of Australian words by employing etymological analysis.
With this view, I take up the Awabakal verb takilliko, 'to eat,'
and I take this word, because the idea expressed by it is so
essential to a language, that it is impossible that the word should
be a loan-word. Now, the verb ' to eat ' has, in Australian, many
forms, such as thalli, dalli, thaldinna, thilala, dira, chakol,
taka, tala, and, in Tasmania, tuggara, tughli, te-ganna. Of
all these, the simplest is taka, wjiich is used by the northern
portion of the Kuriggai tribe (see map) in N. S. Wales. On com-
paring taka and tala, it is evident that the simple root is ta,
and all the others come from this; chakol, for instance, is ta
palatalized intoca, with -kal added; di-ra has the sufhx -ra added
on to the root ta, vocalized into di ; and dira gives the universal
Australian word for the ' teeth,' just as the Sanskrit dant, 'a tooth '
{cf. Lat. dens), is a participial form of the verb ad, 'to eat.'
The Tasmanian words, which I have here restored to something
like a rational mode of spelling, are clearly the same as the Aus-
tralian. Nor is the root ta contined to Australia ; it is spread all
over the East as ta or ka. In Samoa (Polynesian), it is tau-te,
'. Ixiii
(5.) In Chalda?a, the dead were not interred ; they were laid
on mats in a brick vanlt or on a platform o£ sun-dried bricks,
and over this a huge earthenware dish-cover, or in a long earthen
jar in two pieces fitting into each other. Our blackfellows also,
even when they do inter, are careful not to let the body touch
the earth ; in some places, they erect stages for the dead — the
Parsee "towers of vsilence"; elsewhere, they place the dead body
in a hollow tree ; in South Australia, the corpse is desiccated by
fire and smoke, then carried about for a while, and finally exposed
on a stage. /Vll this corresponds with the Persian religious belief
in the sacredness of the earth, which must not be contaminated
by so foul a thing as a putrifying human body. And it shows
also how diverse are our tribal customs in important matters.
(6.) The Dravidian tribes, though homoo;eneous, have twelve
varying dialects. The Australian dialects are a parallel to that.
(7.) There is nothing improbable in the supposition that the
first inhabitants of Australia came from the north-west, that is,
from Hindostan or from Further India. Por the native tradi-
tions of the Polynesians all point to the west or north-west as
the quarter from which their ancestors first came. So also the
Indias are to the north-west of our island.
(8.) I now quote Dr. Caldwell; in diverse places, he says: —
" The Puranas speak of the Nishadas as ' beings of the com-
plexion of a charred stick, "svith flattened featui-es, and of dwarfish
tature'; 'as black as a crow'; 'having pi'ojecting chin, broad ands
flat nose, red eyes, and tawny hair, wide mouth, large ears, and
a protuberant belly.' These Nishadas are the Kolarian tribes, such
as the Kols and the Santals. But the Dravidians of the South
have always been called Kalingas and Pandyas, not Nishadas."
" The Tudasof the Dekkan are a tine, manly, athletic race, witli
European features, Roman noses, hazel eyes, and great physical
strength ; they have wavy or curly hair, while the people of the
plains are straight haired, have black eyes, and aquiline noses.
The skin of the Tudas, although they are mountaineers, is darker
than that of the natives of the Malabar coast. The physical type
of the Gondsis Mongolian, that of the other Dravidians is Aryan."
" In Shamanism, there is no regular priesthood. The father of
the family is the priest and magician ; but the office can be taken
by any one who pleases, and laid aside ; so also in Southern India.
The Shamanites acknowledge a Supreme God, but offer him no
worship, for he is too good to do them harm. So also the
Dravidian demonolators. Neither the Shamanites nor the Dra-
vidians believe in metempsychosis. The Shamanites worship
only cruel demons, with bloody sacrifices and wild dances. The
Tudas exclude women from worship, even from the temples ;
they perform their rites in the deep gloom of groves. They have
a supreme god, Usitru Swdmi ; his manifestation is ' light,' not
Ixiv IXTUODUCTIOX.
* fire.' They have no circumcision. They have no forms of prayer.
They believe in witchcraft and the work of demons. After the
death of the body, the soul still likes and requires food."
" Dr. Logan thought that the Dra vidians have a strong ]Melane-
sian or Indo-Afric element, and says that a negro race overspread
India before both the Scythians and the Aryans. De Quatrefages
agrees with him, and says that, long before the historical period,
India was inhabited by a black race resembling the Australians,
and also, before history began, a yellow race came from the north-
east. Of the Tamilians Dr. Logan says : — ' Some are exceedingly
Iranian, more are Semitico-Iranian ; some are Semitic, others
Australian ; some remind us of Egyptians, while others again
have Malayo-Polynesian and even Semang and Papuan features.'
Professor Max Miiller found in the Gonds and other non- Aryan
Dravidians traces of a race closely resembling the negro. Sir
George Campbell thinks that the race in occupation of India
before the Aryans was Negrito. Even in the seventh centuiy of
our era, a Brahman grammarian calls the Tamil and Telugu
people Mlechchas, that is, aboriginals. Dr. Muir thinks that the
Aryan wave of conquest must have been broken on the Yindhya
mountains, the northern barrier of the Dekkan."
COXCLUSIOX.
In this discussion, I have endeavoured to show the origin of
our Australian numerals, the composition and derivation of the
chief personal pi'onouns, and of a number of typical w^ords for
common tilings, and of these many more could be cited and ex-
amined in the same way. I have shown, so far as I can, that
these pronouns, and numerals, and test-words, and, incidentally,
one of the postpositions, are connected with root-words, w^hicli
must be as old as the origin of the language ; for such ideas as
'before,' 'begin,' 'first,' 'another,' 'follow,' 'change,' 'many,'
seem to be essential to the existence of any language. I think I
may safely say the same thing about the root-words for ' water,'
' dumb,' and ' eye.' It thus appears, from the present investigation,
that our Australians have a common heritage, along with the rest
of the world, in these root-words; for, if these blacks are a separate
creation and so have no kindred elsewhere, or were never in con-
tact with the other races of mankind, I cannot conceive how they
have come to possess primitive words so like those in use over a
very wide area of the globe. I therefore argue that they are an
integral portion of the human race. If so, what is their origin %
On this point, our present discussion may have thrown some light.
J.F.
PAET I.
THE GRAMMAR AND THE KEY.
J 2a 09—90 A
(A.)
THE GRAMMAE.
[THE ORIGINAL TITLE-PAGE.^
AN
AUSTRALIAIN^ GRAMMAE,
COMPREHENDING
THE PPtlNCIPLES AND NATURAL RULES
OF THE
AS
SPOKEN BY THE ABORIGINES,
IN THE VICINITY OF
HUNTER'S EIYEE, LAKE MACQUAEIE, &c.
NEW SOUTH WALES.
BY L. E. THRELKELD.
SYDNEY
FEINTED BY STEPHENS AND STOKES, " HEEALD OFFICE,'
• LOWES GEOEGE-STEEET.
K^V'^^-^-^^s. 1834.
&Lrm^i^4
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
In tlie year 1S2G, the writer printed a few copies entitled
"Specimens of a dialect of the Aborigines of New South Wales,"
in which the English sounds of the vowels were adopted. Sub-
sequently it was found that many inconveniences arose in the
orthography, which could only be overcome by adopting anotner
system. Many plans were proposed and attempted, but none
appeared so well adapted to meet the numerous difficulties which
arose, as the one in use for many years in the Islands of the
South Seas,* wherein the elementary sounds of the vowels do not
accord with the English pronunciation. This, however, does not
meet all the difficulties, because there is a material difference in
the idioms of the languages. For instance, in the Tahitian dialect.;
the vowels always retain their elementary sound, because a con-
sonant never ends a syllable or word ; in the Australian language,
a consonant often ends a syllable or a word, and therefore its
coalition with the sound of the vowels affects that sound and
consequently shortens it; while, in many instances, the elementary
sound of the vowel is retained wlien closed hy a consonant, as well
as when the syllable or word is ended by the vowel. To meet
this, an accent will be placed over the vowel when the elementary
sound is retained, but without such accent the sound is to be
shortened. For example, the Australian words hun, hiin^ tin, tin,
will be sounded as the English hun, hoon, tin, teen.
A set of characters cast expressly for the various sounds of the
vowels would be the most complete in forming speech into a
written language, but in the present instance that could not be
accomplished. The present orthography is therefore adopted,
not because it is considered perfect, but from the following
reasons, viz. : —
1. It appears, upon consideration, impossible so to express the
sounds of any language to the eye, as to enable a stranger to
pronounce it without oral instruction. The principal object,
therefore, is to aim at simplicity, so far as may be consistent
with clearness.
2. There appears to be a certain propriety in adopting uni-
versally, if possible, the same character to express the same
sounds used in countries which are adjacent, as Polynesia and
Australia, even though the languages be not akin ; especially when
those characters have been adopted upon mature consideration,
and confirmed by actual experience in the Islands of the South
Seas.
■■■' Mr. Threlkeld was, for a time, a missionary at Raiatea, in the Society
Islands. — En.
VI TnE author's peeface.
TTaving resided for many years in the island of TJaiatea, and
liavin^ been in the constant liabit of conversing with and preach-
ing to the natives in their own tongue, T am enabled to trace the
similarity of languages used in the South 8eas. one vrith another,
proving they are but different dialects, although the natives them-
selves, and we also, at the first interview, could not understand
the people of neighbouring islands, who speak radically the same
tongue !
In the Australian tongues there appears to exist a very great
similarity of idiom, as respects the dual number and the use of
the form expressive of negation ; and yet it is observed by a
writer in the article on ' Grreek language,' Rees's Cyclopaalia, that,
" The dual number is hy no means necessanj in langnage, though
it may enable the Greek to express the number ' two ' or 'pair' with
more emphasis and precision." But this assertion is not at all
borne out by facts ; because, in this part of the hemisphere, all the
languages of the South Seas, in common with New South Wales,
possess a dual number, and so essential is it to the languages that
conversation could not be carried on, if they had it not. There is,
however, a peculiarity in the dual of the Australian tongue which
does not exist in the islands, namely, a conjoined case in the dual
pronouns, by which the nominative and accusative are blended, as
shown in the pronouns*, whilst the verb sustains no change,
excepting when reflexive, or Reciprocal, or continuative. But
in the Islands there are dual verbs. The modes of interrogation
and replication are very much alike in the idiom of both languages,
and so peculiar as hardly possible to be illustrated in the English
language; for they scarcely ever give a direct answer, but in sucii
a manner as leaves much to be implied. The aborigines of this
colony are far more definite in the use of the tenses than the
Islanders, who have nothing peculiar in the use of the tenses.
The subject of tenses caused me much perplexity and diligent
examination. ISTor did the observations of eminent writers on
the theory of language tend to elucidate the matter; because the
facts existing in the language of the aborigines of New Holland
are in direct contradiction to a note to the article ' Grammar ' in the
Mncjiclopcedla JBritannica-\, where certain tenses are represented
as " peculiar to the Greek, and have nothing corresponding io
them in other ionques, we need not scruple to overlook them as
sKprrJluous.'" Now, our aborigines use the tenses of the verb and
the ])articiple variously, to denote time past in general; or time past
in particular, as, ' this morning only;' or time past remote, that is,
at some former period, as, ' when I was in England,' or, ' when I was
a boy,' The future time of the verb and of the participle is also
modified in a similar manner, specifically, either now, or to-morrow
* See page 17. — Ed. t Of that day. — Ed.
THE AUTHOE S PREFACE. VU
morning, or generally as in futnrity ; and besides this, there is
another curious fact opposed to the conclusion of the writer's
note, which reads thus : " Of the paulo-post-futurum of the
G-reeks, we have taken uo notice, because it is found only in the
passive voice ; to which if it were necessary, it is obvious that ifc
would be necessary in all voices, as a man may he ahovf to act, as
well as to suffer, immediately/.'''' Now, such is the very idiom of this
language, as will be seen in the conjugation of the participle; for
the pronoun, being used either objectively or noniinatively, will
place the phrase either in the one sense or the other, such change
in the pronoun constituting the equivalent to the passive voice
or the active voice. The most particular attention is necessary
to the tense of the participle as well as that of the verb, each
tense being confined to its own particular period, as shown in the
conjugation of the verbs. The various dialects of the blacks
may yet prove, as is already ascertained in the Islands, to be a
difficulty more apparent than real ; but wheji one dialect becomes
known, it will assist materially in obtaining a speedier knowledge
of any other that may be attempted, than if no such assistanco
had been rendered.
Although tribes within TOO miles do not, at the first interview,
understand each other, yet I have observed that after a very
short space of time they are able to converse freely, which could
not be the case were the language, as many suppose it to be,
radically distinct. The number of different names for one sub-
stantive may occasion this idea. Por instance, ' water ' has at
least five names, and ' fire ' has more ; the ' moon' has four names,
according to her phases, and the kangaroo has distinct names
for either sex, or according to size, or different places of haunt \
so that two persons would seldom obtain the same name for a
kangaroo, if met wild in the woods, unless every circumstantial
was precisely alike to both inquirers.* The quality of a thing is
another source from which a name is given, as well as its habit
or manner of operation. Thus, one man would call a musket
' a thing that strikes fire ;' a,nother would describe it as ' a thing
that strikes,' because it hits an object ; whilst a third would
name it ' a thing that makes a loud noise ;' and a fourth would
designate it 'a piercer,' if the bayonet was fixed. Hence arises
the difficulty to persons unacquainted with the language in
obtaining the correct name of that which is desired. For
instance, a visitor one day requested the name of a native cat
from M'Gill, my aboriginal, who replied minnaring; the
person was about to write down the word minnaring, 'a
native cat,' when I prevented the naturalist, observing that the
w^ord was not the name of the native cat, but a question, namely,
* There are other reasons for this diversity of language. — Ed.
Vlll THE AUTHOR S PREFACE.
' AVhat' (is it you say? being understood), the blackman not under-
standing what was asked. Thus arise mau}^ of tlie mistakes in
vocabularies published by transient visitors from foreign parts.*
In a "Description of the Natives of King George's Sound (Swan
River Colony)," which was written by Mr. Scott Nind, communi-
cated by R. Brown, Esq., P.R.S., and read before the Eoyal
Greographical Society, &c., 14th February, 1831, there is an
interesting account of the natives, and also a vocabulary, not
one word of which appears to be used or understood by the
natives in this district ; and yet, from a passage at pa
words of a language.
Words are composed of syllables, and syllables of let'terf=t.
The letters of the language of the aborigines of New South
AVales are these : — *
ABDE&IKLMNNgOPETUWT.
JVofe. — It is very doubtful if d belongs to their alphabet ; the
natives generally use the t.
YOWELS.
A is pronounced as in the English words 'are,' 'far,' 'tart.*
E is pronounced as slender a in ' fate,' or e in ' where.' I is.
pronounced as the short i in 'thin,' 'tin,' 'virgin,' or e in
' England.' O is pronounced as in the English ' no.' U is pro-
nounced as 00 in the words ' cool,' ' cuckoo.'
When two vowels meet together they must be pronounced
distinctly; as, no a, niuwoa, the pronoun 'he'; bo unto a,
' she ;' so also when double vowels are used in the word ; as,
wiyeen, 'have spoken.'
A diphthong is the union of two vowels to form one sound ; as»
1. ««, as in kiil-ai, ' wood'; wai-tawan, ' the large mullet.*
2. rtw, as in nan- wai, ' a canoe' ; tau- wi 1, ' that... may eat.'
8. w, as in niu-woa, the pronoun 'he' ; paipiu-wil, 'that
it may appear.'
ATo/e. — ai is sounded as in the English word ' eye' ; au as in
* cow' ; iu as in ' pew.'
Consonants.
G is sounded hard, but it often has also a soft guttural sound ;
g and k are interchangeable, as also k and t.
Ng is peculiar to the language, and sounds as in 'ring,' 'bung,*
whether at the beginning, middle, or end of a word.
E, as heard in ' rogue,' ' rough ' ; whenever used, it cannot b&
pronounced too roughly; when double, each letter must be heard
distinctly.
* See PiioxoLOGY, page 3.— Ed.
2 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Tlie other consonants are sounded as in English.
Europeans often confound J with ^, because of a middle sound
which the natives use in speaking quickly ; so also they confound
t with y, from the same cause.
Accents,
The language requires but one marked accent, wdiich serves
for the prolongation of the syllable ; as, b 6 n, ' him' ; bun, the
root of ' to smite.' The primitive sound is thus retained of the
vowel, which otherwise would be affected by the closing consonant ;
as, bun, the root of the verb 'to be ' accidental, rhymes with
the English word 'bun,' bat biin, 'to smite,' rhymes with
' boon.'
OfiTHOGBAPHT.
In forming syllables, every consonant may be taken separately
and be joined to each vowel. A consonant between two vowels
must go to the latter ; and two consonants coming together must
be divided. The only exception is Ng, which is adopted for w^ant
of another character to express the peculiar nasal sound, as heard
in hanger, and, consequently, is never divided. The following
are general rules : —
1. A single consonant between two vowels must be joined to the
latter; as, ku-ri, 'man'; yu-rig, 'away'; wai-ta, 'depart.'
2. Two consonants coming together must always be divided ;
as, tet-ti, 'to be dead,' ' death' ; b u g-g ai, ' new.'
3. Two or more vowels are divided, excepting the dipthongs ; as,
gato-a, 'it is I ' ; yu-aip a, 'thrust out.' A hyphen is the
mark when the dipthong is divided ; as, ka-uw^a, 'may it
be ' (a wish) ; ka-am a, 'to collect together, to assemble.'
4. A vowel in a root-syllable must have its elementary sound ;
as, b u n k i 1 1 i, ' the action of smiting ' ; t a, the root-form
of the verb, ' to eat.'
Accentuation".
In general, dissyllables and trisyllables accent the first syllable ;
as, p u n t i m a i, ' a messenger ' ; p i r i w a 1, 'a chief or king.'
Compound derivative words, being descriptive nouns, have the
accent universally on the last syllable; as, wiyellikan, 'one
who speaks,' from wiyelli, 'the action of speaking'; so also,
from the same root, wiyelli-gel, 'a place of speaking,' such
as, ' a pulpit, the stage, a reading desk.'
Verbs in the present and the past tenses have their accent on
those parts of the verb which are significant of these tenses ; as,
tatan, 'eats'; wiyan, 'speaks'; wiya, 'hath told.' This
must be particularly attended to; else a mere affirmation will
become an imperative, and so on; as, ka-uwa, 'be it so,
(a wish) ; k a-u w a, ' so it is ' (an affirmation).
THE GRAMMAE. 3
In the future tenses, tlie accent is alwa3's on the last syllable
but one, whether the word consists of two syllables or of more
as, tanun, ' shall or will eat' ; wiyanim, ' shall or will speak'
b link i Hi nun, 'shall or will be in the action of smiting'
bunniin, 'shall or will smite.' Present participles have the
accent on the last syllable ; as, b u n k i 1 1 i n, ' now in the action
of smiting'; wiyellin, 'now in the action of talking, speak-
ing.' Past participles have their accent on the last syllable
but one ;" as, b li n k i 1 1 i a 1 a, ' smote and continued to smite,'
which, with a pronoun added, means ' they fought.' But the
participial particle, denoting the state or condition of a person or
thing, has the accent on the antepenultimate ; as, b u n t 6 a r a,
' that which is struck, smitten, beaten.' Thus, there are two
accents — one the radical accent, the other the shifting one which
belongs to the particles.
Emphasis.
The aborigines always lay particular stress upon the particles
in all their various combinations, whether added to substantives
to denote the cases, or to verbs to denote the moods or tenses.
But, when attention is particularly commanded, the emphasis is
thrown on the last syllable, often changing the termination
into -0 li ; as, w a 1 1 a - w a 1 1 a, the imperative, ' move,' or ' be
quick' ; but to urgently command would be w a 1 1 a - w a 11 - o u,
dwelling double the time on the -oii. To emphatically charge
a person with anything, the emphasis is placed on the particle
of agency ; as, g a t 6 a, ' it is I ; ' g i n 1 6 a, ' it is thou.'
[The PnoxoLOGT of the Australian Langttages.
Of late years increasing attention has been given to the con-
sideration of the Australian languages, and numerous vocabu-
laries have been collected. But it is somewhat unfortunate that
these collections of words have been made, in most instances, by
those who did not appreciate the principles of phonology ; often
the spelling of the words does not adequately represent the
sounds to be conveyed. Enough, however, is now known to
permit a general estimate to be made of the sounds in the
languages or rather dialects, for — notwithstanding many tribal
A'ariations in vocables and grammar — the Australian language is
essentially one.
General Eeatures.
Looking at the language as a whole, and examining its features,
we at once observe the prominence of the long vowels, a and u,
and the frequency of the guttural and nasal sounds ; the letter r
with a deeper trill than in English, is also a common sound.
AN ArSTRALTAN LANGrAGE.
Vowels.
The essential vowels are a, t, u, all pronounced with a full and
open voice; a as in the English word 'father' ; i as in 'seen' ; and
It as 00 in ' moon.' The Australian a long is, in fact, a guttural
sound, and is so deceptive to the ear that in many vocabularies
the syllable ba is written bah, or even bar ; this a has a sti'ong
sympathy for the letter r, which is nearly a guttural in Australia,
and when the two come together, as in mar, the sound of both is
deepened, and so ma>' is pronounced something like mah-rr.
This guttural combination of a and r has hitherto been repre-
sented by arr, as in the word bundarra ; but, as both the sounds
are normal, I prefer to write bundara, especially as the accent
in such a w^ord always falls on the penult. Our blacks also are
Orientals in this respect, that, while in English there is a ten-
dency to hurry over the open vowels in a word, they dwell on
them, and say bd-bd, where we say pa-pa, or even pa-pa.
The Australian i is ee long ; sometimes the sound of it is pro-
longed, and then resembles the sound of e in ' scene ' ; this sound
of i is represented by i in this volume.
In Australian names and words, the sound of it long is com-
monly indicated by oo. This is quite unnecessary ; for the sound
of u, as it is in 'pull,' is its natural sound. I will, therefore, make
it a rule that tt, before a single consonant, stands for that sound.
There are two more long vowels, e and d ; these come from a
combination and modification of the sounds of a, i, and u ; e
comes from the union of a and i, as in the English ' sail ' ; o from
a and u, as in the French ' faute,' or perhaps from a direct.
AVherever necessary, an accent has been placed on e and o (thus,
e, 6), to show that they are the long vowels.
Besides these, there are the short vowels, a, e, t, 6, il. As a
matter of convenience, it has been usual to indicate the short
sound of these vowels, wherever they occur in Australian words,
by doubling the consonant which follows them ; thus also, in
English, we have ' manner,' and, in French, ' bonne,' ' mienne.'
This plan seems unobjectionable, and has been followed here ;
such a word, then, as bukka will have the short sound of w; and
such words as bundara, where the u is followed by a hardened
consonant, or by two different C(msonants, will have the w short,
unless marked otherwise. If any one of those vowels which are
usually short be followed by a simjle consonant, the vowel may
then be pronounced long ; as iUa, tla ; but the short sound of
n, in such a position, will be marked by u in this volume. In
the declension of the verbs, our author writes -mulla, -kulli,
and the like ; this spelling I have allowed to stand, although I
think that it should have been -malla, -kalli.
THE GRAMMAR. 5
Besides these ten, there is in Australian a peculiar vowel sound
■which appears only iu a closed syllable, and chiefly before xhe
nasal ng ; it takes the short sound of either a, e, i, o, or u. For
instance, we have the word for ' tont^ue ' set down as t a 1 1 a n g,
talleng, tulling, talluu, and the Avord for 'hand' as
m a t a, m e t a, m i t a ; and so also with other examples. I regard
these variations as proceeding from an obscure utterance of a,
the same dulled a which appears in English in the word ' vocal,'
and is represented by other vowels in the English ' her,' ' sir,'
' son.' I have introduced a as the sign for this sound ; a, there-
fore, as iu the syllables of talag, etc., will mean a dull, volatile
sound of a, which, iu the various dialects, may have any one of
the other short vowels substituted for it. In the Malay language
similarly, the a — that is, the letter ain, not fjhain — takes the
sound of anj'- one of the short vowels.
These six paragraphs seem to contain all that is noticeable iu
the long and short sounds of the vowels a, e, i, o, u.
Then, we have the diphthongs ; «/, as in ' eye' ; oi, as in ' coin' ;
au, as in 'cow'; iu, as in 'new'; but ai is apt to become o/, and
sometimes, though rarely, ei.
The summary of the vowel sounds will thus be : —
Vowels — a, i, u ; i ; 0, 5 ; a, 8, i, u ; u ; a (volatile).
Semi- vowels — w, y.
Diphthongs — ai, oi, au, iu.
I have admitted lo and y, because they are already established
in Australian words. I consider lo, as a vowel, to be entirely
redundant in our alphabet ; y may be useful at the end of an
open syllable to represent the softened sound of i. Even when w
ov y stands as an initial letter in such words as wata, yuring,
■they are both superfluous, for wata might as well be written
uata, and yuring as luring. But in words such as wa-kal,
'one,' the w stands lor aui original h, and is therefore a consonant ;
and, similarly, in yarro, 'an eg?,' the y probably represents a
primitive Jc. In such cases, lo and y are consonants.
COXSOXAXTS.
The (jufturals are Jc, y, Ji, ny. The ^ is a much more frequent
sound in Australian than its softer brother y ; indeed, I am
iuclined to think that we could safely regard k as the native
sound of this guttural, and set down y as merely a dialect variety
of it. Eor the reasons given above, I discard the use of h at the
end of an open syllable ; as an initial, h occurs in only a few
words, such as h i 1 a m a n, 'a shield ' ; but the guttural-
nasal ny is one of the distinctive sounds of the Australian
alphabet, and is the same sound as the ny in the English word,
* sing.' It appears both as an initial and as a final ; its use at
the beginning of a syllable severs the Australian language from
the Arvan family, and gives it kinship with the African.
6 AN AUSTBALIAX LAXGUAGE.
Ill Samoan and in other Polynesian dialects, nrj is very common
as an initial, and as a final too in the whole of Melanesia. In this
respect the Polynesian and the Melanesian langnages are akin
to the Anstralian. The Malay also uses ufj both as an initial
and as a final. Some Australian dialects nasalise the A', as in the
English word ' ink '; to this there are parallels in the Melanesia!!
languages, and there the sound is represented by h or q.
In Tamil, one of the Dravidian languages of India, with which
our Australian language is supposed to be connected, one forma-
tive suffix is y?/, nasalised into ngu ; it is used as the initial sound
of a syllable, as in ni-ngu, 'to quit' ; to this extent it corresjioiids
with our ncj.
Our author, in his edition of 1831, has in some words a doubled
fjuttural-nasal, as in bungngai. As the second of these is
only a cj attracted by the nasal that precedes it, I have written
such words with g-g. In fact, the double so!ind proceeds froi!!
the one nasal, as iii our English word ' finger.' Some of the
Melanesian languages have this double sound both with cj and
with Tc.
But in both of its uses, initial and final, the Australian ncj arises
from the nasalisation of the guttural (] ; it is a simple sound, and
should therefore be represented by only one letter, not by the
digraph nrj. In Sanskrit, the symbol for it as a filial, for there
it is never used as an initial and seldom as a final, is ii- ; but, as
the Australian ng comes from y, I prefer to use g as its symbol.
If we compare the Dravidian pag-al, 'a day,' with the Melane-
sian bung, 'a day,' it is clear that the ng proceeds from a g^ for
the original root of both words is the verb bha, 'to sine.'
Eurther examination may, perhaps, show that our ng is, in some
cases, a modification of the sound oin, as in the Erench ' bon,'
'bieii,' or even of a final vowel, but at present that does not
seem to me at all likely.
Besides ng, there are the two subdued nasal sounds of n and
in — that is, n before d, and m before & ; these harden the con-
sonant that follows, and produce such sounds as nda^ mba. The
same sounds are common in Eiji — a Melanesian region — but not
in Polynesia.
Of the palataJs, the language has cli, as in the English word
'church,' and y, as in 'jam'; to these may be added the conso-
nant //. The ch and the ./ sounds are, in some vocabularies,
printed as tcli and Oj ; that is quite unnecessary. I have adopted
6 as the symbol for cZ*, because it is a simple sound.
The only cerebral that we have is r, although the sound of it
is often so asperated as to resemble the Dravidian rough and
hard r. Our r is neither the Arabic vibrating gliv, nor the
Xorthumbrian hurr, but is more like the rolled r of the Parisians.
TUE gba:mmar. 7
The dentals are t, cl, n, I. As in the case of the gutturals Jc
aud q, so with the dentals t and d; it is often difficult to decide
whether a native, in pronouncing a word, is using the one or the
other ; so also with p and h in the next paragraph. The liquids
n and I are really dentals, their sound being produced by the
movement of the tongue on the teeth. In connection with the
dentals t and d, it would be interesting to know if our natives ever
cerebralise them in pronunciation ; for, if they do, that would be
another link to connect them with the Dravidiaus; but the differ-
ence of sound is too minute to be detected by an ordinary observer.
A variant of t is th, for our blacks say both Ippatha and
Ippata; the th has the same sound as in the English words,
'thin,' ' breath.' It is possible that, in Australian, this th some-
times takes the place of the absent s. In the Melanesian region
also this sound of th is common, and is represented often by d.
Some Australian tribes have also th sonant, as in the English
words 'this,' 'that'; the Melanesians have a corresponding sound
which is represented in Eijian by c. If we could revive the
Anglo-Saxon characters for these simple sounds, such anomalies
would cease.
The labials are p, i, and m ; the m, as in other languages, is
only a b sound with the breathing allowed to escape through the
nose. Some collectors of words have set down the sounds of/"
and V as existing in Queensland, but I cannot admit them without
further evidence ; they are not found in New South "Wales ; the
natives here say Ucbiny for Waverley.
In addition to these elementary sounds, there are the conjunct
sounds obtained by adding the aspirate h to some of the con-
sonants. These are ph, bk, th, dh, kh, gh, and in each of them
the aspirate is separatc^d, in pronouncing it, from the consonant
to which it is attached, as in Sanskrit, or as in the English words,
u^-7all, doy-Z/ouse, &c. Some of these combined sounds I have
heard distinctly from the lips of a native, and I have no doubt
that the others also exist.
The sibilants have no place in Australia. One vocabulary gives
stha as an initial syllable, but that must be a mistake ; another
gives dtha ; that also must be a mistake.
It ought to be noted here that in many Australian tribes, when
a young man passes through the Bora ceremonies of initiation,
one or two of his upper front teeth are knocked out, and this is a
portion of the accustomed rites. The loss of these teeth must
have had an important influence on the utterance of the dentals
and sibilants in past time, and so on the language itself
Peculiarities.
In some dialects, there is a tendency to insert the sound of y
after t and k; as, tyala, 'to eat,' instead of tala. So also in
English we sometimes he^v gijarden for garden and kyind for kina.
5 AN AIJSTRALTAN LANGUAGE.
Some dialects say kedlu, for which the usual form would
be k ellu. But it is possible that the d here is radical, and so
maintains its j^lace.
In the Dieycrie tribe, near Cooper's Creek, South Australia,
many words have in them the peculiar sound ndr, as raun dru,
' two,' which is also the Tamil word for ' three.' The Tamil is
fond of this sound, and so is the language of Madagascar ; the
Fijian prefixes the sound of n to d, so that dua is pronounced
ndua. The sound of ndr comes by accretions from a single r,
and so the simpler forms of the Tamil mundru are muru,
mudu.
The dialect of King George's Sound, "Western Australia, has
this peculiarity, that it delights in closed syllables ; for there the
twonga of the inland tribes is pronounced twonk, and katta
is kat.
Summary.
The consonants, then, may be thus arranged : —
Gutturals — k kh g gh g h.
PalataU — 6 ... j ... ... y.
Cerebrals — ? ... ... ... ... r.
Dentals-— t th d dh n 1.
Labials — p ph b bh m
Liquids — n 1.
The vowels are Jive in number. If we reckon the guttural-
nasal^ as a separate sound (which, considering its place in the
language, we may justly do), but omit the nasalised k as un-
common, and count n and I as dentals only, the simple conso-
nant sounds ai*e fifteen in number. To these add the two
sounds of f/«, and lo and y as consonants ; but omit the six
aspirated consonants, for they are not simple sounds. The
Australian alphabet thus consists of twentij-fouY simple ele-
mentary sounds. — Ed.]
THE ailAMMAE.
CHAPTER 11.
THE PAETS OF SPEECH.
Or THE Substitute for the Article.
The general meaning of a noun is expressed by using its
simple form; as, m a k o r o, 'a fish ' or ' fishes' ; t i b b i n, a 'bird '
or ' birds,' in a general sense ; k u 1 ai, ' wood,' or ' a stick.' To
make these plural, the plural pronoun would be attached ; as,
unni makoro, tar a makoro, 'this fish,' 'these fishes,'
meaning that they are here present ; to express ' the fish' as au
active agent we must say gali m akoro, 'this fish,' sc, did some
action. And so also with respect to all nouns, as will be explained
under the head of pronouns.
Of Substantives.
Ts'ouns are the * names of persons, things, actions, and places.'
They are Proper, when used as the name of any individual person
or tiling ; Common and Collective, when denoting the names of
things singly or together; as, kiiri, 'man' oi' 'mankind'; karai,
' kangaroo ' ; makoro,' fish.' A pronoun attached shows the
number, whether singular or plural. Nouns which describe par-
ticular applications of the meaning of the verb are formed from
the roots of their verbs ; e.y., w i, the root of the verb 'speak,' gives
wiyellikan, ' one who speaks,' ' a speaker'; w iy ai y e, ' one
who always talks,' 'a talker,' 'chatterer.' When names of things
are appropriated to a person so as to be the person's name, that
name must be declined in the first declension of nouns, to show
it is the name of a person and not of the thing ; e.ff., tintig
' a crab,' belongs to the third declension, and the genitive would
be t i n t i g - k b a, ' belonging to a crab ' ; but when it is the
name of a person, its genitive would be t i n t i g - li m b a, ' belong-
ing to Crab,' — Mr. or Mrs., according to the context. There
are a few terminations of gender in certain nouns, but not
generally; as, pori-b a i, 'a husband'; porikiin-bai, 'a wife';
yinal, 'a son'; yinalkun, 'a daughter'; but piriwal,
means a 'king' or 'queen,' according to the gender of the pro-
noun attached. To animals, in most instances, there are different
10 AN AI'STRALTAN^ LAIS^GTTAGE.
words used for the male and for the female ; as, w a r i k a 1,
* a he-dog'; t i n k o, 'a she-dog.' Names of places are generally
descriptive, as, puntei, the 'narrow' place ; biilwara, the
'high' place; tirabinba, the 'toothed' place; bimkilli-gel,
'the place for fighting,' the field of battle. Names of countries have
a declension peculiar to place, and in the genitive have a feminine
and a masculine termination; ejj., Englandkal, means 'English-
man,' the termination being masculine ; but Englandkalin,
means 'Englishwoman,' the termination being feminine; so also,
untikal, 'of this place,' masculine; untikalin, 'of this
place,' feminine. A noun is an adjective, a verb, or an adverb,
according to the particle used with it, or the position of the word
in the sentence ; as, p ital, 'joy'; ])it aim alii, 'to cause joy ';
p i t a 1 1 i k a n, 'a joyful being'; p i t a 1 k a t a n, 'to exist joyfully';
murrarag, 'good'; murraragtai, 'the good,' s 'belonginp; to us two';
gearun-ba, * belouging to us,' 'ours'; bounnoun-ba,
' belonging to her,' ' hers ' The othei* singular pronouns add the
particles to a variant form of the root-word ; as, c m m o -u m b a,
'belonging to me,' 'mine'; giro-umba, ' belonging to thee,'
'thine.' But time and place require -kal, and-kalin; as,
bugeai-kal, 'belonging to the present ' period of time now
becoming ; E n g 1 a n d -k a 1, 'a man belonging to England,' 'an
Englishman'; E ngland -kalin, 'a woman belonging to Eng-
land,' 'an Englishwoman'; untikal, 'hereof,' 'belonging to this
jjlace.'
4. The Dative case shows the ultimate object to which an action
tends; as, for a person to possess and use a thing in any way ; it
is expressed by adding - n ii g to the interrogative pronoun and to
names of persons only, but -ko to all other nouns, and to the
abstract action, which is thereby formed into a supine or a con-
struct infinitive ; as, b xi n k i 11 i k o, 'for-to smite.'* But motion
towards a person or thing, as opposed to motion from the place
where the person or thing is, requires the following particles
according to the various terminations of the nouns; viz., - t a k o,
- k a k 0, - 1 a k o, - a k o, - r a k o ; that is, the particle - k o, pre-
ceded by a syllable, the consonant of which varies according to
the termination of the noun to which it is affixed ; the personal
pronoun requires -kink o, and place takes -kako; see table
of declensions.
5. The Accusative case, which marks direct action on the person,
not merely towards the per.-^on, is the object of a transitive verb.
The personal pronouns have distinct particles ; see their declension.
But names of persons have the terminating particle - n ii g
added; so also the interrogatives of person, place, and thing ; as,
g a n - n u g ? ' whom ?' or ' who is the direct object ?' w o n - n u g?
' where ?' o?' ' where nt?' min-nug? 'what?' or 'what object?'
so also, T h r e 1 k e 1 d - n u g is the objective or accusative case.
All other common substantives, not derivatives, are placed before
the active verb without any change from the simple nominative ;
nor can error arise therefrom ; because when they are lised as
agents, the sign of that case will be attached ; as, k a r a i b u w a,
'smite the kangaroo ; butkaraito tia bunkulla, 'the kan-
garoo struck me,' equivalent to, ' I was struck by the kangaroo.'
(5. In the Vocative case, the particle a - 1 a or e - 1 a, calling for
attention, is ])refixed to the form of the nominative, not the
agent-nominative, case ; as, ala piriwal! 'Oking!' equivalent
to 'May it ])lease your majesty.'
7. Ablative case. Certain postpositions are used to indicate
this case; as, (I) k a i, meaning 'from,' 'concerning,' 'about,' 'on
account of,' used only to proper names and pronouns ; but for
* See footnote, page 24.
THE GRAM MAT?. 13
common nouns, -t in, -1 i n,-in, - r in, 'from,' 'on account of,'
the consonant varyinj; according to the termination of the word
to which it is attached ; (2) k i n - b i r u g, meaning 'from,' used
only to pronouns, is opposed to the dative of 'motion towards';
proper names, whether of persons or phices, require k a - b i r u g ;
but common nouns reqiiire, according to their terminations,
-ta-birug, -ka-birug, -la-birug, -a-birug, -ra-birug,
to mark ' motion from,' as opposed to the dative ; (3) k a t o a,
meaning to be ' with ' as an agent, is alExed to personal pronouns
and proper names of persons only ; but persons, things, and
places annex, according to their respecti^'^e terminations, -t o a,
-koa, -1 a, -o a, -roa, meaning 'by,' 'through,' 'with,' 'near';
no causative effects are implied in any of these particles ; (4)
ka-ba, meaning 'at' or 'on,' and kin-ba, present 'with' a
person at his place, are locative.
Por nouns, these postpositions are annexed mostly to the
form of the simple nominative ; for pronouns, commonly to the
first dative form.
Of Adjectites A^"D Pakticiples.
Adjectives have no distinctive endings ; it depends entirely on
their situation, or on the particles used, whether words are nouns,
adjectives, verbs, or adverbs. For instance, if murrarag,
'good,' yarakai, 'bad,' and konein, 'j^retty,' be declined
according to their terminations, with the particles of agency
affixed, they would then become agents, and consequently nouns;
as, mnrraragko, ' the good,' yarakaito, 'the bad or evil,'
k o n e i n t 0, ' the pretty' or ' the beauty, ' respectively, . . . . ;*
but participles in the passive voice terminate always in the com-
pound paitiele -toara; the root of the verb is prefixed either
with or without the causative particles, according to the sense
required ; as, from k i y u, the verb ' to roast with fire, to scorch,
to broil,' comes kiy ub a- 1 6 ar a, 'that which is roasted';
k i y u b a - 1 6 a r a b a g, ' I am roasted '; kiyuba-toard, ' that
which is roasted '*.
Adjectives denoting abundance are often formed by a redupli-
cation; as, murrarag, 'good'; m u r r ar a g-m ur r ara g,
'excellent, abundance of good'; kauwal, 'great, large, big';
k a u w a 1 - k a II w a 1, ' many, abundant.'
Adjectives denoting want are expressed by affixing a negative
word ; as, m u r r a r a g-k o r i e n, ' worthless,' lit., ' good-not.'
Adjectives denoting resemblance require the particle -kiloa,
'like,' to be affixed; as, w onnai-kilo a, 'child-like.' ' like a
child ' ; but, if they denote habit, the joarticle -k e i is affixed ; as,
wonnai-kei, 'childish.'
* See footnote, page 10.
14 AX AUSTRALIAN LANCiUAGE.
Adjectives denoting character, manner, or habit, are formed
from the roots of verbs, and have the particles y e or k e i added
e.y., bim, the root of the verb 'to smite,' gives bunkiye, ';
smiter'; whereas b n n k i 11 i-k an would be 'one who smites'
wogkal 'to be a fool'; wogkal-kei, 'foolish'; so also
gura-kei 'wise, skilful'; b u k k a-k e i, 'ferocious, savage'
kekal-kei, 'sweet, nice, pleasant.' Derived forms of the verb
also give nouns in -ye; as w i y - a i - y e, ' a talker.'
Of Comparatives and Superlatives.
The following are the methods used in comparison, there being
no particles to express degrees of quality : —
1. The comparative of equality is formed thus : —
Kekal-kei unni yanti unuo a-k i 1 o a, ' sweet this as that-
like,' i.e., 'this is as sweet as that.'
2. The comparative of inferiority is formed by putting the
negative particle korien after the adjective; thus: —
Kekal-korien unni yanti unno a-k i 1 o a, ' sweet-not this
as that-like,' i.e , ' this is not so sweet as that.'
3. The comparative of superiority is formed by the use of the
word k au wal-k an w al, a redu2)lication of 'great,' and the
particle of negation added to that which is inferior ; as : —
Kekal-kei unni k au w al-kau w al keawai unno a,
'sweet this great-great, not that,' i.e., 'this is most sweet.'
Of Words DExoTixti Dumber.
Numei'als are only cardinal ; they are declined as nouns, so
far as they extend ; namely, w a k a 1, ' one '; b u 1 a, b u 1 o a r a,
'two'; goro, 'three'; wariin, 'four'; beyond this there are
no further numbers, but the general term k au w al-k au w al,
' much or many' is used. The interrogative of quantity or number,
minnan? ' which present ?', means 'how many?'; the answer
Avould be given b}^ any of the above numbers ; or by kau w al-
kau wal kiiri, ' many men' ; or by ware a kuri, ' few men.'
Ordinal numbers can be expressed only by declining the noun to
which they may be attached, the ordinal adjective being also
subject to declension, according its own termination, indepen-
dently of the termination of the noun ; as : —
P u r r e a g-k a g o r o-k a, ' the third day ' ; k u 1 a i-t o a g o r o-
k o a, ' by, beside the third tree.' Bui o a r a is used in the dual,
and is of the sixth declension.
There are also two other expressions which may be noticed
here ; namely, w i n t a, equivalent to ' a part or portion of,
some of; also, yantin, equivalent to 'the whole or all'; as,
unti-bo winta kuri, 'here be part of the men,' 'some of
the men are here'; unti-bo yantin kuri, 'here be all the
men,' ' all the men are here.'
THE GEAMMAB. 15
Of PrO>'OU>'S.
The personal prououus of the first, second, and third persons
singular, have two forms, the one used with the verb as a subject
to it, the other used absolutely in answer to an interrogative, or
with the verb for the sake of emphasis. The latter form, when
used as a subject, precedes the predicate, and always calls atten-
tion to the person and not to the verb. These forms will there-
fore be designated Personal-nominative pronouns, and marked as
such ; thus, Xom. 1 means Personal-nominative ; but the personal
pronouns used as the nominative to verbs and never by them-
selves, nor in answer to interrogatives, will be marked Xom. 2,
to denote Yerbal-nominative, as the verb is then the jDrominent
feature to which attention is called, and not the person ; these
always follow the verb. The strictest attention must be given
to the use of the pronouns in all their persons, numbers, and
cases ; for by them the singular, dual, and plural numbers arc
known ; by them the active, the passive, the reciprocal, and re-
flexive states of the verb ; as will be exemplified in the conjugation
of the verbs, as well as in the declension of the pronouns. The
plural personal pronouns have only one nominative form to
each person ; so also, the singular feminine pronoun, which is only
of one description. The dual number also has but one pronoun in
the nominative ease ; but it has a case peculiar to this language
— a nominative and an accusative case conjoined in one word ;
just as if such English pronouns as I and thee, thou and him,
could become I-thee, thou-him. This will be called the Conjoined-
dual form.
DECLENSION OF THE NOUNS AND PRONOUNS.
[The declension of the nouns and pronouns is effected by
means of postpositions, as has been already explained in this
chapter. The forms of the ablative case may be indefinitely
multiplied in number by using other postpositions than those
shown in the following paradigms.* — Ed.]
[* In the paradigms of the pronouns and the nouns, Horn. 1 is the nomin-
ative case in its simple form, used absolutely ; JVom. 2 is the form used as
the nominative of the agent or instrument ; the Gen. means, as usual, ' of,'
or 'belonging to' ; Dat. 1 is the dative of ' possession' or 'use,' = ' for' (him,
her, it), to have and to use ; Daf. 2 is a sort of locative case ' towards '
(him, &c. ) ; the Ace. is the ' object ' form of the word ; the Voc. is used in
'calling'; Abl. 1 denotes 'from,' 'on account of,' as a cause; Abl. 2,
'from,' 'away from,' 'procession from' ; Abl. 3, 'with,' 'in company with' ;
Abl. 4, 'being with,' ' remamuig with,' 'at'; occasionally there is an
Abl. 5, which means merely place where, 'at.' — Ed.]
IG
AN AL'STEALIAJS" LANGUAGE.
5 •== £
^ ^ '7
^ ^i i£ ^ ^ ^
o o o o c o
a w w « w w
^ -<
o
;^
o
12;
o
I— I
r<;
w
1-^
o
w
fi
w
1=1
q
^ ^ ^
'A
o
1—1
p
pi
^ cj ,5
--.da
w w w w
'^ u
THE GEAM3IAE.
17
I
c3 c3 S rt
O.i:
2 ;? ^.5
t^ r^ ■>; -
p a
6 cc
Cl I
.S o to W it -3
"^ 1
•2 SciC
tt it if CD
c c c c
S S 3 3
o A o i
— — ri-s
'EcTc t£ ic
•si ii
^^^^
it ic it ic
c3 =55 =S5S
O 3SS =:3=!S
'*t' oco '^Sooco
.£ .£ .- .- „ "■ .5: .- .b .b
'3)._ Tc it it .5 ,3 So it it iO
it it ic iO
; C = =
(i
ooo 0=222
T-t 'M
rH Cs (^ ->; U
C^
"rt 'rt "ci 'd '3 "S '^ "rt
ic it iO ic it it i( iO
fe5 C5 q "^
18
AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
DECLENSION OF PLACE-NAMES.
All Nouns, whatever may be their original signification, when
used as proper names of places, are of this declension, if they
end in a.
M u 1 u b i n b a, the site of 'Newcastle.'
Mulubinba, the name of the place, M . . . .
Mulubinba-koba, any thing belonging to M . .
2 M ulubinb a- k al, a male belonging to Ji" . . .
3 Mulubinba -kali n, a female belonging to ilf . .
Daf. 1 Mulubinba-kako, for M . . , — to remain there
2Mulubinba-kolag, tojf . ., to proceed to Jlf.
Ace. 1 Barun Mulubinb a-kal, them (ma*c.) of Jf . .
2 Barun Mulubinba-kalin, them (fern.) of M .
8 Barun yantin Mulubinba-kal, them all of M .
Voc. Tapallun Mulubinba-kal, alas ! people of M
All. 1 Mulubinba -tin, from, on account of 3/. .
2 Mulubinba-kabirug, from, away from M
3 Mulubinba-koa, by, by way of, through M
4 Mulubinba-kaba, at, on, in M
Novi
Gen.
Note 1. — To form the Ace. singular or dual here, put their
pronouns in the place of barun.
2. — The interrogative pronoun signifying place is w o n t a ?
'where is it?' and this maybe substituted for Mulubinba;
the example would then become interrogative ; as, w o n t a k a 1 ?
'belonging to what place?' wontakaba? 'where is it at?'
' at what place is it ?' &c.
DECLENSION OF THE FIRST PERSONAL PRONOUN.
The cases of the three jjersonal pronouns and the manner of
using them are similar to those of the nouns. Thus, for the first
pronoun :■ —
Nom. 1. Gato a, I. — This form is used in answer to an inter-
rogative of personal agenc}^ ; as, Ganto wiyan?
'Who speaks?' The answer would be g a to a, 'it is I
who,' the verb being understood. The next form,
bag, would simply declare what I do.
2. Bag, I, — is used in answer to an interrogative of the
act ; as, M i n n u g b a 1 1 i n b i ? ' What art thou
doing now ?' t at a n b a g, ' I eat ;' ba g must be used,
and not the personal-nominative, gato a.
3'IIE GRAMMAB. 19
Gen. E ra mo - ii m ba, Mij or mine, — is used with a noun, or
with a substantive verb ; the noun always precedes ;
as, kokera emmoumba, 'my house'; but
e m m o u m b a t a, 'it is mine.'
Dat. 1. E m m - u g, For me, — personally to receive or use.
2. Emmo-ug-kin-ko, To me, — to the place where I am.
Ace. Ti-a, Me, — governed by transitive verbs. This pronoun, is
used to form the equivalent for the passive voice ; as,
b lint an bag, 'I strike;' but bun tan tia, 'I
am struck,' lit., 'strikes me.'
Vac. Ka-ti-oii, — merely an exclamation ; as, OJi me ! Ah me !
AM. 1. Emmo-u g-kai, From me, — through me, about me.
2. Emm o-u g-k in-biru g, From me, — away from me.
3. Emmo-ug-ka-toa, With me, — in company with me.
4. E m m - u g - k i n - b a. With me, — at my place.
These case-endings have the same force for the second and the
third pronouns also.
Demoxstratite Pronouns.
These are so compound in their signification as to include the
demonstrative and the relative; e.ff. — 1. gali is equivalent to
' this is that who or which,' — the person or thing spoken of being
here present; 2. gala, 'that is that who or which,' — being at
hand; 3. galoa, 'that is that Avho or which,' — being beside
the person addressed, or not far off. They are thus declined : —
Instant. Proximate. Remote.
j^ (1. Ga-li Ga-la Gra-loa.
^ 2. TJn-ni Un-noa Un-toa.
Gen. Grali-ko-ba G-ala-ko-ba G-aloa-ko-ba.
1. Gali-ko Gala-ko Galoa-ko.
^ " Un-ti-ko Un-ta-ko Un-toa-ko.
Aec. TJn-ni Un-noa TJn-toa.
1. Gali-tin Un-ta-tin Galoa-tin
Ahl
^ 2. Un-ti-birug Un-ta-birug Un-toa-birug.
The pronouns attached to these demonstratives determine
their number, whether they are to be singular or plural; as,
gali-noa, 'this is he who'; gali-bara, ' these are they who' ;
gali-ta, 'it is this that'; gali-tara, 'these are they that.'
Other combinations are gali-noa, ' this is he who,' as an
agent; unni-noa, ' this is he,' tlie subject. Gali-koba bon,
'this belongs to him,' an idiom ; galoa-koba bon, ' this is that
which belongs to him'; these and the other similar genitives,
are always followed by the accusative case.
20 an australian language.
Reciprocal Pronouns.
Gatoa-bo, 'I myself; gintoa-bo, 'thou thyself ; uiu-n'oa-
bo, 'he himself; bali-bo, ' our two selves,' and so ou. The
ho here attached is merely an intensive particle.
Possessive Pronouns.
These are the genitive cases of the personal pronouns, and
are used thus : — e mmoumba ta, ' mine it is ' ; u n n i t a e m-
moumba kokera, ' this is my house' ; unnoa ta giroumba,
'that is thine'; tararan giroumba korien, ' it is not thine,'
lit., 'not thine not,' for the idiom of the language requires
two negatives here.
Indefinite Pronouns.
Titurrabul, 'some one,' ' some person or persons', is declined
like the fourth declension of nouns ; tarai, ' other,' like the second
declension.
Absolute Pronouns.
Ta, 'it is,' from the substantive verb ; tar a, 'they are,' is of
the fifth declension; unni tara, 'these are they which,' as a sub-
ject ; gali taro, 'these are they wdiich,' as agents ; yantin,
'all,' 'the whole,' is of the second declension; yantin-to, 'all
who,' as agents ; wakallo, 'one only,' as an agent.
Interrogative Pronouns.
The interrogative pronouns are, — gan, 'who? '; min {neut),
'which? what?'; won, 'where?'; ya-koai, 'how? in what man-
ner? ' ; ya-kounta, ' wdien? at what time ? '
EXAMPLES OF THE PARTICLES USED AS AFFIXES TO
THE IXTEimOGATICES.
The Interrogative, Gan-? who ?
2iom. I Gan-ke? who is ?
2 G a n - 1 o ? who is the agent ?
Gen. Gan- limb a? wdiose?
Dat. 1 Gan-nug? for whom ? — to possess or use.
2 Gan-kin-ko? to whom ? — towards whom ?
Ace. G a n - n li g ? whom ? or who is the object ?
Voc.
All. 1 G a n- k a i ? from whom ? on account of whom ?
2 Gan-kin-birug? from, away from whom ?
3 G a n - k a t a ? in company with whom ?
•1 Gau-kin-ba? with whom? remaining with wLom?
THE GEAMMAR,
^21
The Interrogative, M i n- ? what ? which ?,
applied to things only.
Min-arig? what? as, minarig ke unni? what is this ?
M i n-n an? Avhat are ? i.e., how many ?
M i n-a r i g -k o ? what ? — as the agent or instrument.
]M i n-a r i g - k o b a ? belonging to what ?
M i n-a rig-kolag? towards what ?
31 i n-n u g ? what ? — the object of the verb.
M i n-a rig-tin? from what cause ? why ? wherefore ?
M i n-a rig-birug? from what ? of what ? out of what ?
M i n-a rig-kiloa? like what ?
M i n-a r i g- k o a ? with what ? together with what ?
M i n-a rig- k aba? on what ?
The Interrogative of place,
"Won-? what place ? where ?
"W o n-t a ? where is the place ? what place ? — definite.
"W n-n e i n ? where ? which place ? — indefinite.
Wo n-t a-k al ? viasc, belonging to what country or place?
Wo n-t a-kalin? fern., belonging to what country ?
W o n-t a - k o 1 a g ? towards what place ?
W n-t a r i g ? to what place ? whither ?
W n-n u g ? what place ? where ? — the object of a verb.
W n-t a - 1 i n t o ? from what place ? (causative) ; where at ?
W n-t a-b i r u g ? from what place ? out of what place ?
Wo n-t a-k o a ? through what place ? by what place ?
T, ,. 1 1 (Takoai? how? in what manner?
interrogatiye adverbs, i -r^ i ^ o t, o ^ i,„j- +• o
° ( Y a k o u n t a .f^ when : at what time z
All these particles are used strictly according to the meanings
shown above, and cannot be used loosely like some interrogatives
in English ; for example, y a k o a i ? ' how ? ' cannot be used to
to ask the question ' how many?' for it is an adverb of manner ;
' how many ' must be m i n n a n.
AS AUSTEALIAX LANGUAGE.
CHAPTER III.
OF THE VERB.
TiiE verbs undergo no change to indicate either number or
person, but the stem-fcn-ms vary in respect to the sort of agency-
employed, Avhether personal or instrumental, and also according
to the manner of doing or being ; a?, {a) when I do anything to
myself, or (b) to another; or (c) I do anything to another and
he reciprocally does it to me ; or (d) when I continue to be or
to do ; or (e) when the action is doing again, or (/") when per-
mitted to be done by this or that agent ; or (y) by another
agent ; or (A) when a thing acts as an agent, or (i) is used as
an instrument. Verbs are reduplicated to denote an increase of
the state or action. All verbs are declined by particles, each of
which particles contains in its root the accident attributed to the
verb in its various modifications ; as, assertion, affirmation, nega-
tion, privation, tendency, existence, cause, permission, desire,
purpose; thus are. formed moods, tenses, and participles. The
participles are formed after the manner of their respective tenses,
and are declined either as verbal nouns or as verbal adjectives.
Of the Kinds oe Yekus.
Yerbs are either Transifive or Intransitive, both of which are
subject to the following accidents, viz. : —
1. Active-transitive, or those which denote an action that
passes from the agent to some external object ; as, 'I strike him,'
bun tan bon bag. This constitutes the active ro/cr, which
states what an agent does to another, or, what another agent does
to him, in which latter case it is equivalent to the English passive
A'oice; e.y.jbuntan bon (literally, 'strikes him,') implies that
some agent now strikes him, ai\d means ' he is now struck,' the
nominative pronoun being omitted in order to call attention to
the object. But when this accusative or object is omitted, the
attention is then called to the act which the agent performs ;
as, bun tan bag, ' I strike,' expressed often by 'I do strike.'
2. Act ive-intrannitive , or those which express an action which
has no effect upon any external object except the agent or agents
themselves ; that is, the agent is also the object of his own act ;
consequently the verb is necessarily reflexive ; as, b u n k i 1 1 e li n
bag, 'I struck myself.' This constitutes the ' reflexive ' modifica-
tion of tlie verb.
TEE GEAMMAK. 23
3. Acfire-fransi'fn'f-reciprocal, or those verbs that denote an
action that passes from the agent to some external object, which
object returns the action to the agent who then becomes the
object, and thus they act reciprocally one towards the other.
Consequently the dual and plural numljers are always the subject
to this form of the verb; as, bunk ill an bali, 'thou and I
strike' each other reciprocally; biiukillan bar a, 'they
strike' each one the other reciprocally, or they fight with blows.
This constitutes the ' reciprocal ' modification of the verb.
4. Continuative ; as Avhen the state continues, or the action is,
was, or will be, continued without interruption ; as, b u n k i 1 -
lilin bag, 'I am now continuing in the action of making
blows', such as thrashing or beating. This is called the ' con-
tinuative ' modification of the verb.
5. Causative (1) by permission, or, with a negative, proliihitive ;
as, when we do or do not permit a person to do the act, or
another to do the act to him; as, biimmunbilla bon, 'let
him strike,' b u m in a r ab unb il 1 a bon, 'cause some one to
strike him,' equivalent to, ' let him be struck' ; b u m m a r a b u n-
b i y i k r a bon, ' let no one strike him.'
6. Causative (2) by personal agency, denoting the exertion of
personal energy to produce the effect upon the object ; as tiir
ta unni, 'this is broken'; tiir bng-ga unni also means
' this is broken,' but then personal agency is understood, for the
phrase is equivalent to ' some person has broken this,' or ' this is
broken by some one.'
7. Causative (3) by instrumental agency, denoting an effect
produced by means of some instrument; as, tiir burrea unni,
'this is broken,' sc, by means of something.
8. 'Effective, or those which denote an immediate effect pro-
duced by the agent on the object; as, urn a bag unni, 'I
made tins'; pital bag, 'I am glad'; pitalma bon bag,
' I made him glad.'
D. Neuter verbs, or those w^hich describe the quality, state, or
existence of a thing; as, kekal lag unni, 'this is sweet';
tetti lag unni, ' this is dead '; w^onnug ke noa? ' where
is he?' unni ta, 'this is it'; moron noa katan, 'he is
alive'; unuug noa ye, 'there he is.' In these the particles,
lag, k e, t a, k a t a n, ye, are rendered into English by the
neuter verb is.
10. Reduplicate, or those which denote an increase of the state,
quality, or energy ; a^, p i t a 1 noa, 'he is glad ' ; p i t a 1-p i t a I
noa, ' he is very glad '; tetti bara, ' they are dead ' ; tetti-
tettei bara,' they are dead-dead,' or ' a great death is among
them'; kauwal, 'great'; k au w a 1-k au w a 1, ' very great ';
t a u w a, ' eat ' ; t a u w a-t a u w a, ' eat heartily.'
24 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
11. Pi'lvaiive, or those wliicli denote tlie absence of some pro-
perty. Affirmatively, u m a n bag u n n i, 'I make this,' or ' I
do this ' ; u p a u bag u n n i, ' I do this,' not directly, but with
something or by means of something else ; e.g., ' I write on this
paper with a quill' would be up an ba.g unni yirigko
wiyelliko, lit., ' I make this quill for-to speak or commuiii-
cate ' ; whereas uman bag unni yirig pen kakilliko
would mean ' I make this quill for-to* be a pen.' Negatively,
when it is implied that the act itself has not taken place, the expres-
sion would be u m a pa bag b a, ' had I made ' ; again, if the act
existed, but no effect produced by the action were implied, it
would be expressed thus, u m a i - g a b a g u n n i, 'I had almost
done this.'
12. Imminent, or those which denote a readiness to be or to
do; as piriwal katea kun koa bag, ' lest I should be
king'; buutea kun koa bon bag, 'lest I should strike
him.'
13. Inceptive, or those which describe the state as actually
about to exist, or the action as going to put forth its energy at
the time spoken of;as, kakilli kolag ball, 'we two are now
going to live reciprocally together'; biinkilli kolag bag,
'I am now going to strike.'
14. Iterative, or those which denote a repetition of the state
or action; as, mc5ron katea kanun, 'shall live again';
b u n t e a k a n li n, ' will strike again.'
15. Spontaneous, or those which denote an act done of the
agent's own accord ; as, tiir kullin unni, 'this is breaking
of its own accord ' — not by external violence {cf. No. G) ; p 6 r
k u 1 1 e ii n u o a, ' he has just been born,' lit., ' he has dropped
himself.'
Or THE Moods.
There are three moods, the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the
Imperative.
1, The Indicative, which simply declares a thing ; as, b ii n t a n
bag, 'I strike'; unni ta, 'thisisit', the subject; gali noa
'this is he/ the agent.
2. The Suljunctive, which subjoins something to the meaning
of the verb, such as a wish, a desire, a purpose ; as, b u w i 1 b a g,
' I wish to strike,' b u u w a b a g, '1 desire to strike,' or ' I
want now to strike ' ; t a u a n ba u w a b u n k i 1 1 i k o, ' had I
come hither for-to strike.'
* This form of the verb, as will afterwards be shown, denotes purpose ;
our author expresses that everywhere by for-to. I have allowed that pre-
positional form to stand. — Ed.
THE GRAMMAR. 25
3. Tlie Imperative, which expresses command ; as, b \\. w a hi,
' do thou strike' ; but in b ii m m n n b i 1 1 a, ' let strike,' the per-
son or persons addressed are desired to permit the person nan:ied
to strike; in b I'lmm a r ab u nb ill a, 'let strike,' the person
addressed is desired ti:^ permit any one to strike the person named ;
in b u n t e a- k a, ' strike again,' the person or persons addressed
are desired to repeat the action. The imperative form is often
used with the first and the third personal pronouns ; in this sense
it denotes the desire of the agent to do the act at the time spoken
of ; as, b u w a b a n u g, 'I want to strike thee' ; b u w a b i 1 o a,
' he wants to strike thee.'
Note. — The equivalent, in many instances, to the English
infinitive mood is the construct form of the verb which denotes
the purpose of the subject; as, Minarig kounni? What
is this for ? b u n k i 1 1 i k o, is the answer, ' for-to strike.'
Of the Te^^'ses.
1. The Present, which asserts the j)Tesent existence of the
action or being of the verb, at the time in which the assertion is
made. The signs of this tense are the following affixed particles,
of which the first consonant is varied by the terminations of the
respective conjugations of the verbs, viz., -an to the simple verb,
-Ian to the reciprocal verb, and -lin to the participle; as,
b u n t an , 'strikes' now; b ii n k i 1 1 a n, now 'reciprocally strike
one another'; bunkillin, now 'striking'; biinkillilin, now
'continuing in the act of striking.'
2. The Perfect-definite, which asserts the act as having been
completed in a past period of the present day ; as, biinkeun,
' has struck,' sc, this morning ; b li n k i 1 1 e u n b a g, 'I have
struck myself,' sc, this day.
3. The Perfect-past-aorist, which asserts the act as completed,
without reference to any particular period in past time ; as,
b II n k u 1 1 a, ' struck.' This is not the participle.
4. The Pluperfect, which asserts the act as completed prior to
some other past circumstance. It is formed by the affirmative
particle, t a, affixed to the past aorist. and is equivalent only to
the English pluperfect ; as, b ii n k u 1 1 a t a, ' had struck.'
5. The Pature- definite, which asserts the act as taking place
at a certain definite period, future to the time at which the act
is spoken of; as, biinkin, 'shall or will strike,' sc, to-morrow
morning.
6. The Future-aorist, which asserts the mere future existence
of the act, without reference to any other circumstance, in some
indefinite time to come; as, biinnun bag, 'I shall strike';
b II u n u n n o a, 'he will strike.'
26 AN AUSTEALIAK LxVXGUAGE.
Of the PARTICirLES.
1. The Present. This lias already been described ; but it may be
necessary to menticm, that the present [.^articiple can be used only
with reference to present time, not to the past and future, as is
the case in English; as, bunkilliu, 'striking' now.
2. The Imperfect -definite., which represents the action as being
in ]:)rogress at some definite past period ; as, bunkillikeiin,
' striking,' sc.^ this morning.
3. The Jmperfcct-past-aorist, which represents the action as
being in prot^ress at any recent time; as, biinkilliela no a,
, he was striking.'
4. The Pasf-present-aorist, which asserts the action as having
been engaged in and completed at some former period; as, b \i n-
talla bag, wouuai bag ba, 'I struck when I was a child ';
w i y a 1 1 a bag w o n n a i-k i 1 o a, w o n n a i bag b a, 'I
spoke as a child when I was a child.'
5. The Pluperfect, which indicates the action as having been
completed prior to some other past event mentioned; as, biin-
killiela t a, ' had struck,' sc, prior to something.
0. The Inceptive-future, which asserts that the action is now
about to be pursued; as, biinkilli kolag bag, 'lam going
to strike,' or 'I am going a-striking ' ; makoro kolag bug,
' I am going a-fishing.'
7. Fiiture-definil e, which asserts the action as about to be
engaged in at some future definite period ; as, b u n k i 1 1 i k i u
bag, 'I am going to strike,' &c., to-morrow morning.
8. The Future-aorist, which asserts that the action will exist at
some future undefined period ; as, b ii n k i 1 1 i n u n bag, 'I am
going to strike,' sc, at some time or other, hereafter.
[ PARADIGM OF THE TENSES AND THEIR MEANINGS.
The Tenses of the verb and their meanings, as given above,
may be concisely expressed thus : —
Indicative Mood and Participles.
Tense. Meaxixg.
1. Present tense, I am or do — now.
2. Imperfect-dejinite, I was or was doing — this morning.
3. First-aorint, I was or was doing — recently.
4. Second-aorist, I was or did — at some former period.
5. Perfect-dfflnite. I have been or done — this morning.
G. Pluperfect, I liad been or done — before some event.
7. Inceptiv'-juture, I am going to or shall, be or do — now.
JS. F at ure-df finite, I am going to or shall, be or do — to-
morrow morning.
9. Fature-aorist, I am going to or shall, be or do — at
some time hereafter.
THE GRAMjVIAH. 27
Subjunctive Mood.
Our author lias four Aorids in this Mood, namely: —
10a. Past aorusf, 1 had almost been or done.
b. Aurisfoftltepasf, Had I been or done.
c. „ ,, I wish I had been or done.
d. ,, „ net/ativeli/, I have not been or done.
The Moods have various mode-forms, thus : — •
In the Indicative.
Reciprocal mode, We [e.y., strike] one another.
liejlexice mode, I [strike] myself.
In the Subjunctive.
Iteration, mode, I [strike] again.
Imminence, Lpst I should [strike].
Contemporary circumstance, "While I or when I [strike].
Implied necjation of actual Ije-') ^ -.^
coming or of actual effect, j
Implied necjation ofheing or action. See 10 b., c., d.
In the Participles.
Continuative mode, Continuing to be or to do.
Reflexive mode, Doing to one's self.
Reciprocal mode. Doing to owe another.
It is clear that the native language recognises three varieties
of time and place. The pronouns g a 1 i, gala, galoa {q.v.)
show these variations as to place ; and so the principal tenses of
the indicative mood, as above, mark time (1) present, (2) recent,
(3) remote. English and other languages show the same dis-
tinctions in such words as liere, there, yonder. — En.]
DECLENSION of the VERBS.
[J^p^ The reader will remember that the tense-form of the
verb is always constant, and is therefore not affected by its sub-
ject. The sub] -ct shown in the declension of the verb is the
pronoun bag, 'I,' and the direct object with a transitive verb is
bon, 'him'; but any other suitable pronouns may be substituted
for these ; for the pronouns that are thus used as subjects, see
note on next page; their objective cases are shown in the paradigm
of the pronouns. Each tense may thus be declined in full, as in
English, by using in succession the pronouns of the first, second,
and third persons as the subject of the verb. The shades of
meaning conveyed by the tenses are given in the paradigm above,
and are applicable to all verbs. The numbers, affixed to the
various tenses in the declension of the verbs, correspond with the
numbers on that paradigm of tenses, and the T. stands for
Tense. — En.]
28 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
DECLENSION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB.
Kakilliko, ' to be,' ' to exist,' ' to remain.'
Exam])le of ilie Declension of a Verh in the Present Tense of tlie
Indicative Mood.
Any Tense may be declined in full in a similar manner.
T. 1. Sing. Unnibof bag* ka-tdn, I am here.
„ bi „ Thou art here.
,, noa ,, He is here.
Dual. „ bali* ,, Wetwo (wzcZzis/re) arehere.
,, balinoa ,, y^et\^o {exclusive) Vive\\evQ.
„ bula „ You two are here.
„ buloara „ They two are here.
Flu. „ geen, „ We are here.
,, nura ,, Tou are here.
„ bara „ They are here.
Reciprocal.
Dual. Unnibo hali* ta-kill-an, AVe two are, o?' live, here to-
gether.
Plu. „ geen* „ We are, or live, here to-
gether.
* Or, such other nominative cases of pronouns of the singular, dual, and
plural, as the sense may require ; e.g., for the sing., bang, /; b i, fhou ;
n o a, Jie ; b o u n t o a, she ; t a, it ; n g a 1 i, this (here) ; n g a 1 a, that (near
me) ; n g a 1 o a, that (near you) ; for the dual, bali, thou and I ; bali
noa, he and / ; b a 1 i b o u n t o a, she and I ; bula, ye two ; bulo-
ara, they two ; for the pht. , n g 6 e n, ur ; n li r a, you ; bar a, they.
'f Lit., this-self-same-place I am
Indicative Mood.
T. 1. *Bag ka-tan T. 6. *Bag ka-knila-ta
4. „ ka-kiilla 8. „ ka-kiu
5. ,, ka-keuii 9. ,, ka-nuu.
Aorist participle — kan ; as, kinta kan bag, ' afraid being I.'
[^Throughout the verb 'to be,' both in this Declarative form and in the
Permissive, a predicative advei'b, ' unnibo,' or any other suitable word,
may be inserted here in all tlie tenses. — Ed.]
Pakticiples.
T. 1. Bag ka-killin T. 6. Bag ka-killi-ela-ta
2. „ ka-killi-keuii 7. „ ka-killi-kolag
4. ,, ka-takx 8. ., ka-killi-kiu
T. 9. Bag ka-killi-nuii.'
THE GEAMMAB. 29
Continuative.
T. 1. Bag ka-killi-liu T. 3. Bag ka-killi-li-ela.
Reflexive.
T. 1. Kan bag bo.
Reciprocal,
T. 1. Bali ka-kill-c4n* T. 6. Bali ka-kill-ala-ta
4. „ ka-kill-ala 7. „ ka-kill-ai-kolag
5. „ ka-kiU-ai-keuii 8. „ ka-kill-ai-kin
T. 9. Bali ka-killa-nun.
* = 'We two are living together, the one with the other, now.'
SuBjuNCTiTE Mood.
1. The constmct verh, denoting purpose.
T. 10.
Ka-ldlli-ko, 'to be, exist, remain.'
Ka-killi-koa, ' to continue to be or live.'
Iva-kill-ai-koa, ' to live one witb another.'
2. The construct verb, denotinfj the immediate purpose of the
action in the preceding clause ; lohen no clause precedes, the form
oftlie verb denotes a wisli.
T. 10. Ka-uwil-koa bag, ' that I may or might be,' ' I wish to be.'
Iteration.
T. 1. Iva-tea-kan bag T. 9. Ka-tea-lia-niin bag
Imminence.
T. 9, Ka-tea-kun-koa bag.
Contemporary circumstance.
T. 1. Ka-tc4u bag ba* T. 3. Ka-killi-ela bag ba
T. 9. Ka-niin bag ba.
* The whole of the indicative mood may be thus declined with ha.
Implied negation of actual becoming.
T. 10a. Ka-mai ga bag
Implied negation of cntitg or being.
T. 10b. Ka-pa bag ba T. 10c. Ka-pa-ta bag ba
T. lOd. Keawaran* bag ka-pa
*ireawaran is a negative.
Imperative Mood.
Ka-nwa bi, 'be thou.'
Ka-kill-ia bi, ' continue thou to be, live, remain.'
Ka-uwa bi gintoa bo, 'be thou thyself.'
Ka-kilhi bula (dual and plural only), ' be ye two.'
Ka-tea-ka bi, ' be thou again.'
30 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
PERMISSIVE EOEM of the VERB ' KAKILLIKO:
Ka-mun-billiko * to permit to be, exist, remain.'
Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Kamiiii-bin bon ba^* T. G. Kamiia-bin-bia-tabon bag
4. „ -bin-bia „ „ 8. „ -bi-kiii „ „
5, „ -bi-keiia „ ,, 9. „ -bi-uua „ „
* = ' I permit him to be.'
Paeticiples.
T. 1. Ka-mun-bill-in T. G. Ka-mua-billi-ela-ia
3. „ -billi-ela 7. „ -kolag
•1. ,, -bi-ala 8. ,, -kiu
5. „ -billi-keiiu 9. „ -nun.
Heciproeal.
T. 1. Ka-muQ-bill-aii f T. G. Ki-mun-bill-ala-ta f
■i. „ -bill-ala ,, 7. „ -bill-ai-kolag ,,
5. „ -bill-ai-keun ,, S. ., -bill-ai-kin ,,
T. 9. Ka-mua-billa-nun billun bag.
t Here insert in eaeh tenee ' bulun bang.' or any other suitable worrls, as
subject and personal object. T. 1. is equivalent to ' I permit them to live to-
gether.'
SuBJUNCTiTE Mood.
1. To exj)ress piDyose.
T. 10. Ka-mua-bilbl-ko, 'to permit to be'.
,, -billa-koa, ' to permit to be together,
the one with the other'.
2. To express immediate purpose.
T. 10. Iva-mua-bin-uwil-koa, 'that ... may or might permit to
be together.'
Iteraf/'on.
T. 1. Ka-mua-bea-kcin bou bag T.d. Ka-muu-bea-ka-nua bon bag*
* = ' I shall again permit hun to be.'
Imminence.
T. 9. Ka-miia-bea-kua-koa biloa,t 'lest he permit thee to be.'
Contemporary circumstance.
T. 1. I\a-mu!i-bin boo bag ba T. 3. Ka-mun-billi-ehabiuugt ba
T. 9. Ka-mim-bi-niia bitiaf ba
t For banung, biloa, bitia, binung, see paradigm of Pronouns.
THE GHAMMAE. 31
Implied negation of actual hecomiiig.
T. 10 a. Ka-mai-ga bdn bag
Implied negation of entity or heing.
T. 10 b. Ka-muu-bi-pabag ba T. 10 c. Ka-mun-bi-pa-ta bag ba
T. 10 d. Iveawaniu* bag muu-bi-pa
* Keawaran is a negative.
Imperatite Mood.
Ka-mim-billa * 'permit * to '
Ka-mua-bill-a „ 'permit „ self to continue to ' • • .
Ka-miia-bea-ka „ 'permit ,, again to ' . , . ,
* Insert here the pronoun in the Ace.
DECLENSION OF TRANSITIVE VERBS.
DECLENSION OF the VERB ' TO STRIKE:
Bun-killi-ko, ' to strike '.
EXAMPLES OF TSE DECLENSION OF THE TENSES OF THE
INDICATIVE MOOD.
T. 1. Sing., Buutan bag.f Dual, Buutan bali.f
Phi., Buntan gaeu.f
Conjoined Dual, Buutan banug.f
t Or any other suitable pronoun as a subject. The personal object must bo
placed alter the verb, but the neuter object after the subject.
Indicatiye Mood.
T. 1. Buntc4n boa bag* T. 6. Bun-kulla-ta bdn bag
4. Bun-killa „ „ 8. ,, -kin bdn bag
5. „ -keua „ „ 9. „ -nun „ „
Paeticiples.
T. 1. Bun-killin bdu bag T. 6. Bun-killi-ela-ta bdn bag
2. „ -killi-keun „ „ 7. „ „ -kolag „ „
3. „ -killi-ela ,, „ 8. „ „ -kin „ „
4. „ -tala „ „ 9. „ „ -nun „ „
Gontimiatite.
T. 1. Bun-killi-linbdnbag* T. 3. Bun-killi-li-ela bdn bag
* = ' I am striking with nnany blows, now.'
Mrjlexive.
T. 5. Bun-kill-eiia bag, ' 1 have struck myself.'
32 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
12eci])rocal.
T. 1. Bim-killan bali T. 6. Bun-kill-ala-ta bali
4. „ -kill-ala „ 7. „ -kill-ai-kolag „
5, „ -kill-ai-kt'-un ,, 8. „ -kill-ai-kin „
T. 9. Bun-killa-nun bali
SUEJUNCTITE MOOB.
1. To express imrpose.
T. 10.
Bim-killi-ko, ' to strike,' ' for the purpose of striking.'
Bim-killi-koa, 'to strike continually,' 'to beat,' 'to thrasli.'
Buri-kni-ai-koa, ' to strike eaeli one the other,' ' to fight.'
2. To express immediate purpose.
T. 10. Buu-wil or bu-wil-koa bon bag, ' that I might strike him.'
3. Iteration.
T. 1. Bun-tea-kan bdn bag T. 9. Biin-tea-ka-niin bag
4. Imminence.
T. 9. Biin-tea-kiin-koa bdn bag
5. Contemporary circumstance.
T. 1. Biin-tciu bdn bag ba T. 3. Biin-killi-ela bdn noa ba
T. 9. Bun-nun bdn bag ba
6. Implied necjation of actual effect.
T. 10a. Bum-mai ga bdn bag
7. Implied negation of action or entity.
T. 10b. Bum-pa bdn bag ba T. 10c. Bum-pa-ta bdn bag ba
T. lOd. Xeawaran bdn bag biim-pa
Impeeatite Mood.
Bii-wa bi, ' strike thou'; buwa-buwa bi, ' continue thou to stidke.
Bim-killa bula, ' strike on, ye two, the one with the other.'
Bun-kill-ia, ' strike on,' 'be striking self.'
Bun-tea-ka bi, ' strike again ' ; biin-kea, ' strike instantly.'
Note. — This imperative, if written in full, with a subject and an
object, would be : —
Bu-wa bi (or bula, or nura) tia ; instead of tia, any other
object maybe used ; such as, nnni, 'this,' unnoa, ' that,' and the
accusative cases of all the pronouns.
Continuative.
Bun-killi-lia bi (bula, nura) tia, &c., as above.
Hcflexive. Emphatic. Reciprocal.
Biin-kill-ia bi kotti, Bu-wa bi gintoa, Bun-killa bula
' strike thou thine own ' strike thou thyself.' ' strike ye two, the one the
self.' other.'
THE GKAMMAR. 33
PERMISSIVE FORM of the YERB ' TO STRIKE:
Bum-mara-bun-billiko ' to permit (some other) to strike.'
EXAMPLE OF THE DECLENSION OF THE TENSES.
1. Form to he used for the Active Voice.
Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Sing. Buin-muu-bm bif tia,t ' thou permittest me to strike,'
or ' I am permitted to
strike.'
Imperative Mood.
1. Present ; 2. Continuative ; 8. Bejlexive ; 4. Emphatic;
5. Reciprocal.
1. Bum-muii-billa bit tia,t 'permit tbou me to strike,'
or ' let me strike.'
'permit me to continue in
striking.'
' permit thyself to strike thine
own self.'
' do thou thyself permit him
to strike.'
' permit ye two, the one the
other, to strike one
another.'
2.
)5
-billi-lia bi tia
3.
!5
-bill-la bi kotti.
4.
))
-billa bi gintoa bou
5.
55
-billa bula.
2. Form to be used for the Fassive Voice.
IifDicATivE Mood.
1. Present ; 2. Continuative; ^.Reflexive ; 4i. Reciprocal.
1. Bum-mara-bua-bin bit tia,t 'thou permittest (any one)
to strike me,' or ' I am
permitted to be struck.'
2. „ bua-billi-lia, ' continue thou to permit (any
one) to be struck.'
3. „ biin-bill-ia tia 'I myself pennit myself to
gatoa bo, be struck.'
4. „ bun-billa bulun, 'permit, the one the other, to
be struck.'
t Any other suitable pronouns may be placed here.
Si AX AI'STEALIAX LANGUAGE.
Declension of this Verb,
wlien it is used so as to have t]ie meaning of a passive voice.
TxT)TCATivE Mood.
T. 1. Bum-mara-biin-ljinb(')ii bng 4. Bum-mara-bun-biabonbag
T. 9. Bum-mara-buu-bi-iiuu bdn bag
Pahticiples.
T. 1. Bum-mara-bun-bill-in T. 4. Bum-raara-buQ-bi-ala
T. 9. Bum-mara-biia-billl-nun
lieciprocal.
T. 1. Biim-mara-Tiun-billaii T. 4. Bum-Tnara-bun-bill-ala
T. 9. Bi'im-mara-bun-billa-nun
ScBjL'xcTivE Mood.
T. 10.
Bura-mara-bim-billi-ko, 'to permit (somebody) to be
.struck.'
-biiu-bill-ai-koa, 'to permit the one to be
struck by the other.'
-buu-bi-uwil-koa, ' tbat...raigbt permit... to be
struck.'
-bun-bia-ktiii-koa, 'lest (somebody) should be
permitted to be struck.'
-biia-bi-iuin bon bag ba, ' nhen I permit (any person)
to be struck.'
-biiQ-bai-gT, bou bag, ' I had almost permitted him
to be struck.'
-buu-bi-pa bun bag ba, ' had I permitted him to be
struck.'
Imper.vtite Mood.
Bum-mara-bun-billa bi tia.
DECLEXSIOX of the TEEB ' TO 2IAKE:
Umulliko, *todo,' personally, ' to make/ ' to create.'
IxDrcATiTE Mood.
T. 1. ITman bag unni T. (5. TJma-ta bag unni
4. Uma „ 8. Uma-kin „
5. Uma-keiin „ 9. Unza-niiu ,,
the grammar, 35
Paeticiple?.
T. 1. Umull-in bag lumi T. 4. Umala bag nnni
2. Uniulli-ktuii ., G. lTuiul!i-ela-ta „
3. Umulli-ela „ 7. Umulli-kolag ,,
T. 9. Umulli-nua bag unni
Continuative.
T. 1. Umulli-lla bag unni T. 3. Umulli-li-ela bag unni
Reflexive.
T. 5. Umull-eLia bag unni
Reciprocal.
T. 1. Umull-an bali unni T. G. Umull-ala-ta bali unni
4. Umull-ala „ ,, 7. Umull-ai-kolag „ „
5. Umull-ai-keun „ ,, 8. Ilmull-ai-kin „ ,,
T. 9. Umulla-nim bali unni
Su33JuxcTiTE Mood.
1. To express purpose.
T. 10.
TTmulli-ko, 'to do, make, create.'
Umulli-koa, 'to continue to do.'
TJmull-ai-koa, ' to do reciprocally.'
2. To express immediate jyurpose.
T. 10. TJma-uwil-koa bag unni, 'that I may or miglit make this.'
Iteration.
T. 1. Umea kan bag unni T. 9. Umea ka-nun bag unni
Imminence.
T. 9. Umea kiin koa bag unni
Contemporary circiim stance.
T. 1. Uman bag ba uuni T. 3. Umulli-ela bag ba unni
T. 9. Uma-nun noa bag unni
Implied negation of actual effect.
T. 10a. Umai-gi bag unni
Implied negation of action or entity.
T. 10b. Uma-pa bag unni T. 10c. Uma-pa-ta bag unni
T. lOd. Keawaran bag uma-pa unni
3g an atjstralian language.
Imperatite Mood.
TJmulla bi, ' make thou.'
Umau-umulla bi, (reduplication) ' make tliou diligently.'
Umulla bula, 'make ye two' (reciprocally).
Umull-ia bi, ' make thou thyself (reflexive).
Umea-ka, ' make again' ; uma-kea, ' make instantly.'
TTma-buu-billa bon unni, ' permit him to make this.'
Umara-bun-billa unni, 'permit this to be made.'
DECLENSIOIS' of the VERB 'TO DO; 'TO PERFORM:
UpuUiko ' to do,' ' to perform,' ' to use in action.'
Indicatiye Mood.
T. 1. Upan bag gali ko T. 4. Upa bag gali ko
T. 9. Upa-nun bag gali ko.
Participles.
T. 1. Upullin bag gali ko T. 4. Upala bag gali ko
3. Upulli-ela „ „ „ 7. Upulli-kolag „ „ „
T. 9. Upulli-nun bag gali ko
Gontinuative.
T. 1. Upulli-lin bag gali ko T. 3. Upulli-li-ela bag gali ko
Reflexive.
T. 5. Upull-eua bag gali ko
Reciprocal.
T. 1 . TJpull-an ball gali ko
Subjunctive Mood.
T. 10.
TJpulli-ko, ' to do, to use in action.'
TJpulli-koa, 'to continue to do,' as, ' to work with.'
Upan-uwil-koa bag, ' that I might do.'
Upea-kun-koa bag, 'lest I should do.'
Upa-nun bi ba, ' when thou doest,' or ' if thou do.'
Upai-ga bag, ' I had almost done.'
Upa-pa bag ba, ' had I done,' or ' if I had done.'
Imperative Mood.
Upulla, ' do,' ' use ' in action.
THE GEAMMAE.
37
DECLENSION op the VERB 'TO BREAK'
by personal agency.
Tiir-bung-giilliko, ' to break ' by personal agency,
not by instrumental means.
, Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gan bagunni T. 4. Tiir-bug-ga bag unni
T. 9. Tiu'-bug-ga-nun bagunni
Paeticipi-es.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gullin bag t T. 4. Tiir-biig-galla bag f
3. Tiir-bug-gulli-ela „ ., 7. Tiir-bug-gulli-kolag „ „
T, 9. Tiir-bug-gulli-nuu bag unni
t Here insert ' unni ' or any other neuter object.
Continuative.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gulli-lln bag T. 3. Tiir-bug-gulli-li-ela bag f
Reflexive.
T. .5. Tiir-bug-gull-eun bag unni
Reciprocal.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gull-an bali unni
Subjunctive Mood.
T. 10.
Tiir-bug-gulli-ko, 'to break' (something).
Tiir-bug-ga-uwil-koa, 'that ... may or might break.'
Tiir-bug-gea-l"GUAGE.
M u n u g - g u r r a b a, tlie place to Avhich ' sea-snipe ' resort.
Miinukan is the name of a point, under which is a seam of
cannel coal, and beneath that is a thick seam of superior common
coal, and both jut into the sea betwixt three and four
fathoms of water. The government mineral surveyor found,
on examination, that the two veins were nearly nine feet in
thickness, and the coal of excellent quality; [i.e.. in ISSl].
jS^ikkinba, a place of coals, from n i k k i n, ' coal.' The whole
Lake, twenty-one miles long by eight broad, abounds with coal.
Niritiba, the name of the island at the entrance of the lake;
from niriti, the ' mutton bird,' which abounds there.
P i t o b a, a place of pipe clay ; from p i t o, ' pipe clay,' which is
used at a death by the deceased's relatives to paint their whole
body, in token of mourning.
P u n t e i, a ' narrow ' place ; the name of any narrow point of land.
Purribagba, the ' ant's-nest place ' ; from within these nests
a yellow dusty substance is collected, and used by the blacks
as a paint for their bodies, called p u r r i b a g. The ants gather
the substance for some unknown purpose.
Tirabeenba, a tooth-like point of land ; from t i r a, 'a tooth.'
T u 1 k a b a, the soft ti-tree place ; from t u 1 k a, ' ti-tree.'
Tulkiriba, a place of brambles ; from t u 1 k i r i, 'a bramble.'
Tumpoaba, a clayey place ; from t u m p o a, ' clay,'
W fi r a w a 1 1 u g , the name of a high mountain to the west of Lake
Macquarie. This has been partly cleared of timber, by order
of the Surveyor- General ; as a land-mark it is seen from a
considerable distance. The name is derived from w a 1 1 u g,
the ' human head,' from its appearance.
"VV a u w a r a n, the name of a hole of fresh water in the vicinity of
Lake Macquarie, betwixt it and the mountains westerly ; said
by the blacks to be bottomless, and inhabited by a monster of
a fish much larger than a shark, called w a u w a i ; it frequents
the contiguous swamp and kills the aborigines ! There is
another resort for these fish near an island in Lake Macquarie
named boroyirdg, from the cliffs of which if stones be
thrown down into the sea beneath, the ti-tree bark floats up,
and then the monster is seen gradually arising from the deep ;
if any natives are at hand, he overturns their canoe, swallows
the crew alive, and then the entire canoe, after which he
descends to his resort in the depths below !
Y i r a n n a 1 a i, the name of a place near Newcastle on the sea
beach, beneath a high cliff"; it is said that if any persons speak
there, the stones fall down from the high arched rocks above ;
for the crumbling state of these is such that the concussions of
air from the voice cause the pieces of the loose rock to come
down ; this once occurred to myself when I was in company
with some blacks here.
THE TOCABrLAET.
53
(3) coiiiiox >'orxs.
B.
Balbai, ;«.,* an axe.
Baiyag-baiyag, 7n., a butterfly.
Bate, ;«., water ; cf. gapoi
Berabukkau, m., sperm wliale;
the natives do not eat this ;
cf. torog-gaiJ.
Biggai, m., an elder brother.
Bintunkin, m., a father.
Birraba, vi., a small shell fish.
Biyug, m., 'father,' addressive.
Biyugbai, m., a father.
Boaliig, m., mangrove seed.
Boarrig, m., misty rain.
Boata, m., the cat-fish.
Boawal, m., the curlew.
Bugkin, 7)1., vermin, as fleas.
Bukkai, m., the bark of a tree ;
the ski a of animals.
Bulbug, m., a small species of
kangaroo.
Bunkuu, 711., a red sea-slug
which adheres to the rocks,
and is known to Europeans
as ' kunjewai.'
Burug, m., hair on the head.
Wiirun, m., hair on the body.
Kitug, 7H., the short hair of
animals.
Tirrig, «?., the fur of the
opossum tribe.
Buttikag, 7«., any beast.
G.
G-apal, 7n., a concubine.
Gapoi, giiyuwa, g«6g, kulbg,
m., names for fresh water ;
cf. kokoin, bato, and yarro.
Garawan,?;?., a plain flat place.
Gardg-gardg, 7n., a rough place.
Garo-geen, ;«., an old woman.
Garo-mbai, m , an old man.
Gauwo, m., a sea-gull.
Girrinbai, on., first-born female.
Wiig-gunbai, youngest „
Golokonug, })i., a large kind of
schnapper.
Gorokan, «i., the morning dawn
Guraki, ???., one initiated; hence,
a wise person.
K.
Kan ; kurriwirara ; ?«., a brown
diamond snake.
Maiyii, «?., the general name
for snakes.
Kanin, m., a fresh-water eel.
Karai, 7?i., flesh of any sort,
but chiefly of the kangaroo,
Karakal, «?., a wizard, doctor,
sorcerer.
Karoburra, ra., a large whiting.
Kardg-karog, m., a pelican.
Kearapai, m., the white cock-
atoo.
AVaiila,?».,theblack cockatoo ;
its breeding place is un-
known to the blacks.
Keilai, m., urine.
Kikoi, w., a native cat; is very
destructive to poultry.
Kinnun, ?«.,the women's nets ;
used as bags.
Kipai. 7n., fat, grease, &c.
Kira-kira; kiiueta; ?«., the male
and the female king-parrot.
Kirika and korunnag, m., two
kinds of native honey.
Mipparai,;;?., the honey-comb.
jS'ukkug, m., the small sting-
less bee of this country.
1 Mikal, 711., the honey in the
blossoms of the honey-
suckle tree.
Karaka, w., the honey in the
blossom of the grass-tree.
* T.ie m, throughout, stands for meaning ; it is inserted merely to divide the native
word fro.u its signification. — Ed.
54
AN AUSTRALIAN LANCiTTAGE.
Kirrin, m., pain.
Kogka, ?«., a reed.
Kog korog, m., an emu ; from the
noise it makes.
Koiwon, m., rain.
Ivoiyog, 711., a native camp.
Koiyug, m., fire.
Kokabai, w., a -wild yam.
Kokei; wimbi; winnug; m., na-
tive vessels made of the bark
of tree.s, and used as baskets
or bowls.
Kokera, m., a native hut.
Kokoin, m., water ; cf., gapoi
Kokug, ?«., frogs ; are so called
from the noise they make.
Komimi, ;»., a shadow.
Konug ; kintarig ; m., dung.
Kdnug-gai, m., a Eool.
Koreil, ot., a shield.
Koropun, ■;«., fug, mist, haze.
Korowa-talag, m., a cuttle fish ;
lit., ' wave-tongue.'
Korro, m., the wind-pipe.
Kotara, m., a club, a waddy.
Kotumag, m., the land tortoise.
Kulai, m., trees, wood, timber.
KuUiira, m., a fish- spear.
Kullearig, m., the throat.
KuUig, in., a shell.
Kulligtiella, m., a knife.
Kullo, m., the cheeks.
Kumara, m., blood.
Kumba, m., to-morrow.
Kumbal, m., a younger brother.
Kunbul, m., the black swan.
Kuri, m., man, mankind.
Kurratag ; murrin ; m., thebody.
Kurrabun, m., a murderer.
Kurraka, m., the mouth.
Kurrakog, m., the eldest male.
Taiyol, m., the youngest male.
Kurra-koiyog, m.. a shark.
Kurrugkun; muttaura; 7».,the
schnapper.
Kuttal, m., the smoke of a fire ;
tobacco ; cf. poito.
Koun, VI., the mangrove bush.
M.
Makoro, m.. the general name
for fish.
Malama, pirig-gun, pinkun, and
wdttol, m., lightning.
Marai, m., the soul, the spirit;
' the same a? the wind, we
cannot see him,' was the
definition given by a black.
Meini, m., sand-flies.
Minmai, m., the gigantic lily.
Miroma, m., a saviour.
Moani, m., the kangaroo.
Mokoi, m., mud oysters.
Molakan, in., the season of the
wane of the moon.
Moto, in., a black-snake.
Miila, m., a boil.
Mulo, m., thunder.
Mumuya, m., a corpse, a ghost.
Mi'mbonkfin, ;;?.,the rock oyster.
Munni, m., sickness.
Muraban,7«., blossom, flowers.
Murrakin, m., young maidens.
Muriin, m., the body.
Murri-nauwai, m., a ship, boat.
K".
Nukug, m., a woman, women.
Nulka ; anulka; ?«., iron ; this
is a kind of iron-stone, which
abounds on the sea-coast.
There is a vein of iron ore
running over coal at the sea
entrance of Lake Macquarie.
Paiyabara, m., the large ti-tree.
Pillapai, m., a valley or hollow.
THE YOCABULABT.
55
Pimpi, m., ashes.
Pippita, m., a small hawk ; so
called from its cry.
Pirama and wommarakan, m., a
wild duck and drake.
Piriwal, m., a chief or king.
Pirrita, m., au oyster which
grows on the mangrove tree.
Pittog ; talowai ; m., two kinds
of roots of the arum species ;
the taro of Tahiti.
Poito, m., the smoke of a fire.
Pdno, m., dust.
Poribai, «?., a husband.
Porikunbai, «?., a wife.
Porowi, on., an eagle.
Porun, m., a dream or vision.
Porun-witilliko, OT.,to dream.
Pukko, m., a stone axe.
Pulli, m., salt.
Pulli, VI., voice, language.
Puna, m., sea sand.
Punbug, m., sea-slug, blubber.
Puniial, m., the sun.
Piirai, m., earth, land, the world.
Purreag, m., day.
Purramai, m., a cockle.
Purramaiban, m., an animal
like a ferret, but amphibious ;
it lives on cockles.
Purrimunkan, m., a sea-salmon.
T.
Taiyol, m., the youngest male.
Tembiribeen, in., a death adder.
The aborigines, when bitten,
usually suck the wound, as a
remedy.
Tibbin, in., a bird.
Tibun, m , a bone.
Ti^ko, m., a bitch.
Tiral, m., a bough of a tree.
Tirriki, m., the flame of fire ;
the colour red.
Tirril, ni., the tick, a voTiomons
insect in this country that
enters the skin of young dogs,
pigs, lambs, cats, and is fatal,
but not to man ; it is exactly
similar in size and shape to
the English tick, but its
effects are soon discovered ;
for the animal becomes para-
lyzed in its hind quarters,
sickness comes on, and death
follows in two or three days
after the paralysis has taken
place.
Tokoi, m., night.
Topig, m., a mosquito.
Tordg-gun, m., the black whale ;
this the blacks eat, whilst the
sperm whale is not eaten.
Tukkara, m., winter.
Tullokan, m., property, riches.
Tulmun, m., a grave.
Tulun, m., a mouse.
Tuukan, m., a mother, a dam.
Tunug, m., a rock, a stone.
Tupea-tarawog and ninag, m.,
names of the flat-head fish.
Turea, m., a bream-fish.
W.
Wairai, m., the spear for battle,
or for hunting.
Motig, m., the spear for fish.
Waiydg, m., a sort of yam.
Waliun, m., a crow ; from its
cry, wak-wak-wak.
Warikal, m., a dog ; the species.
Warikal and waiyi, m., the male
and female tame dog.
Yuki and mirri, m., the male
and female native dog.
Murrogkai, m., the wild dog
species,
Waroi, m., the hornet.
Waropara, m., the honeysuckle.
56
AN AUSTBALTAN LANOITAOE.
Willai, m., an opossum.
"Wimbi, 7rt., a bowl ; generally
made from the knot of a
tree.
TVippi or wibbi, m., the wind.
Wirripag, m., the large eagle-
hawk, which devours young
kangaroos, lambs, &c.
Woiyo, m., grass.
"Wombal, m., the sea-beach.
Wommara, m., the instrument
used as a lever for throwing
the spear ; cf. gorro.
"Wonnai, w., a child, children.
Woropil, «i., a blanket, clothes.
"Worowai, w., a battle, a fight.
Worowiin, m., a kangaroo-skin
cloak.
Wattawan, tw., a large mullet.
AViiggurrapin, m., young lads.
Wuggurrabula, m., ye two lads.
Wuna], m., summer.
Wurunkan, m., flies.
Tapug, m., a path, a broad way.
Tarea, m., the evening.
Tareil and yura, m., the clouds.
Tilen, m., bait.
Tinal, m., a eon.
Tinalkun, m., a daughter.
Tirra, m., a wooden sword.
Tirrig, m., a quill, a pen.
Tulo, m., a footstep, a track.
Tunug, VI., a turtle.
Yuroin, m,, a bream-fish.
(4) PAET8 OF THE BODY.
The Read.
Kittug, m., the hair of the head.
Wallug, m., the head.
Kappara, vi., the skull.
Kumborokan, m., the brain.
Yintirri ; golo ; m., the forehead.
Tukkal, m., the temples.
Giireug ; turrakurri ; ?«., the ear.
Yulkara, «i., the eye-brows.
Woipin, m., the eye-lashes.
Graikug ; porowug ; m., the eye.
Tarkin ; goara ; on., the face.
Nukoro, m., the nose.
Kullo, m., the cheeks.
Tumbiri ; willig ; m., the lips.
Kurraka, m , the mouth.
Gunturra ; tirra ; w., the teeth.
Tallag, m., the tongue.
Wattan, m., the chin.
Yarrei, m., the beard.
Untag, m., the lower jaw.
KuUeug, m., the neck ; it is also
called ' wuroka.'
Kullearig, m., the throat.
Koro, m., the windpipe.
The Trunk.
Kurrabag, m., the body.
Murrin, m., the body.
Miimurrakun ) m., the collar-
Milka-milka, j bone.
Mirrug, m., the shoulder.
Kopa, m., the upper arm.
Turrug, m., the lower arm.
Gruna, m., the elbow.
The Hands and Feci.
Mattara, m., the hand.
Tunkanbeen, m., the thumb
lit., the mother or dam.
Niimba, m., the first finger.
Purrokulkun, m., the second ,,
Kotau, m., the third ,,
THE TOCABULAET.
57
G.irakonbi, in., the little fin<;er.
Tirri ; tirreil ; «?., the nails uf
the fingers and toes.
AVani, m., the palm of the hand;
cf. warapal, ?«., level, plain.
Tug kag keri, -w.jthe right hand.
AVuntokeri, m., the left hand.
Bulka, «?., the back; either of
the hand or of the body.
Paiyil, m., the breasts.
Gripug, VI., the nipple.
\V' ai ara, m., the chest, breasts.
Nara, m., the ribs.
Knrialag, w»., the side or body.
Turoiai, m., the right side.
G-oraon, m., the left side.
Parra or Avarra, m., the belly.
Parra, m , the bosom.
AViiinal, ?»., the loins.
Gr.ikag, m. the hips.
The Limh3.
Buloinkoro, m., the thighs.
AV'oloma o?-lara, m.,the calf of
the leg.
G.iri, m., the shins.
AN'arombug, tn., the knees.
Papin;'in, korog-gai, and mokul-
niokul, m., the knee-pan.
Wirugkag, m., theauKies.
Mnkko ; monug ; in., the heels.
Tullo, m., the sole of the foot.
, Tinna, in., the toes ; the foot.
The Intestines.
Bulbiil, m., the heart.
Purxanai, in., the kidney ; also
a cockle, from its shape.
Munng, in., the liver.
Yokol, m., the lungs.
Konarig; konug; wi., the bowels.
Purring; pnttara; m., the flesh.
Meva, in., the sinews.
Tiirrakil, m., the veins.
Tog-tog, in., the marrow.
Tibun, m., the bone.
Moika, m.,the fatty substance
betwixt the joints.
Bukkai, m., the skin.
AVurun, m., the downy hair on
the skin.
Grordg, m., the blood.
(5)
B.
BeehnuUiko, 7;?., to mock, to
deride, to make sport.
Birrikilliko, in., to lie along,
to lie down so as to sleep.
BoibuUiko, m., to know car-
nally.
Boinkulliko, w., to kiss.
Bombilliko, in., to blow with
the mouth.
Boug-biig-gulliko, VI., to cause
another to arise, to compel
to ari.>'e.
Boug-wulliko, m., to raise one's
self up, to arise.
Biig-bug, m., to salute.
Bukka, «?., to be wrathful, to be
furious.
Bulpor-bug-gulliko, m., to cause
to be lost property, to lose.
Bum-bug-gulliko, ??i.,tocause to
be loose, to opeii a door.
Biimmarabunbilliko, m., to per-
mit another to be struck.
Bummilliko, m., to find.
Bummunbilliko, ;»., to permit
another to strike.
Bunkilliko,7»., to strike, smite;
to aim a blow v:ith a weapon.
Bunbilliko, on., to permit, to
let ; this is an auxiliary verb.
58
AN AUSTEALIAIT LANGUAGE.
Bi'mmulliko, m., to rob, to take
by violence, to snatch.
Bur-bug-gulliko, m., to cause
to be light or well, to cure.
Burkulliko, in., to be light as
a bird, to fly; to be convales-
cent.
Burug-biig-gulliko, wj., to cause
to be loose, to set at liberty.
G
Gakilliko, m., to see, to look,
to observe with the eye.
Gakombilliko, m., to deceive, to
cheat.
Gakontibunbilliko, «?., to dis-
regard, not to mind.
Gakoyelliko, in., to lie, to tell a
falsehood.
Gamaigulliko, m., to see, to
look, but not to notice.
Garabo, m., to sleep.
Garawatilliko. m., to lose one's
self.
Garbug-gulliko, m., to convert
into, to cause to become.
Gari-gari, m., to pant.
Garo-garo, m., to fall down.
Garokilliko, m., to stand upon
the feet.
Garokinbilliko, m., to stand up.
Gimilliko, m., to know by the
eye, as a person or place.
GiratimuUiko, m., to feed, to
give food.
Girulliko, m., to tie.
Goitig, m., to be short.
Goloin, m., to be complete or
finished.
Gukilliko, m., to give, to pre-
sent.
Gumaigulliko, m., to offer.
Gupaiyiko, m., to give back,
to pay, to return in exchange.
Gurald, ;;?., to be wise, skilful.
Gurra-korien, m., not to bear.
Gurramag, in., to be initiated.
Gurramaigulliko, m., to hear,
but not to obey.
Gurrara, m., to pity.
Gurrawatilliko, m., for remem-
brance to pass away, to for-
get any place, or road ; cf.
woguntilliko.
Gurrayelliko, m., to hearken, to
be obedient, to believe.
Gurrulliko, m., to hear, to obey,
to understand with the ear.
Gurrunborburrilliko, m., to let
fall tears, to weep, to shed
tears.
K.
Iva-amulliko, m., to cause to
be assembled together, to
assemble.
Ivaipulliko, in., to call out, to
cry aloud.
Tvaiyu,w.,to be able, powerful,
mighty.
Kakilli-ban-kora, m., do not be.
Kakilliko, in., to be, to exist
in any state.
Kaki-yikora, m., be not.
Ivapirri, m., to be hungry.
Kapulliko, in., to do ; without
the idea of effect upon any
object.
Karabulliko, m., to spill.
Karakai, in., to be active, to be
quick, to hasten.
Karakal-imiulliko, in., to cure,
to make well ; a compoiand
of ' karakai,' a doctor, and
'umulliko,' to do, to make.
Karol, in., to be hot, to perspire
from the heat of the sun.
Kauwal, m., to be large, great.
K.ekal, in., to be sweet, plea-
sant, nice, delightful.
Kia-kia, m., to be courageous,
strong, powerful ; to conquer.
THE \OCABULVRT.
59
Kilbug-gulliko, m., to compel
to snap.
Ivilburrilliko, w., to snap at by
means of something, as a
hook is snapped at by a fish.
Kilkulliko, m., to snap asun-
der, as a cord of itself.
Killibinbin, m., to shine, to be
brijiht, to be glorious.
Kimulliko, m., to wring, to
squeeze as a sponge, to milk.
Ivimmulliko, m., to broil meat
on coals of fire.
Kinta, «?., to be afraid.
Kiutai; kintelliko; ««., to laugh.
Kiuukinari, m., to be wet.
Ivirabarawirrilliko, m., to twirl
the stem of grass-tree until
it ignites.
Kirilliko, m., to lade out waier,
to bail a canoe or boat.
Kiroapulliko, «?., to pour out
water, to empty water.
Kirrai-kirrai, m., to revolve, to
go round.
Kirrawi, m., to be lengthy, to be
long; c/!'goitig,' m., to be
short in length.
Kirrin, m., to pain.
Kitelliko, m., to chew.
Kiunurig, m., to be wet.
Ko, m., to be, to come into ex-
istence.
Koakilliko, m., to rebuke, to
scold, to quarrel.
Koinomulliko, «*., to cough.
Koipulliko, ??«., to smell.
Koitta, 7«., to stink.
Koiyubulliko, w., to burn with
fire.
Koiyun, m., to be ashamed.
Kolayelliko, m., to keep secret,
not to tell, not to disclose.
Kolbi, m., to sound, as the
Avind or sea in a storm.
Kolbuntilliko, m., to chop with
an axe or scythe, to mow.
K(illabi]liko, in., to fish with a
line. The line is held in the
hand.
Kollamulliko, m., to make se-
cret, to conceal anything told.
Konein, in., to be handsome,
pretty.
KontiuiuUiko, m., to wear as
a dress.
Ivorawalliko, m , to watch, to
stay by a thing.
Korien, m., not to be ; the nega-
tive form of ' ko.'
Korokal, m., to be worn out,
threadbare.
Korokon, m., to roar, as the
wind or sea ; cf'. kolbi.
Korun, m., to be silent, to be
quiet.
Korunpaiyelliko, in., to remain
silent.
Kotabunbinla, in., to permit to
think, to remember.
Kotelliko, VI., to think.
Kottiin, m., to be wet and chilly,
from rain.
Kugun, in., to be muddy.
Kulbilliko, in., to lean, to re-
cline.
Kulbun-kulbun, m., to be very
handsome, elegant.
Ivulwun, in., to be stiff, clay-
cold, as a corpse.
Kum-bara-paiyelliko, m., to be
troublesome, to give one a
headache by noise.
Kumbaro, m., to be giddy, to
have a headache from dizzi-
ness.
Kuubun, m., to be rotten, as a
skin or cloth.
Kunbuntilliko, in., to cut with
a knife.
Kuuna, in., to be burned.
Kurkulliko, in., to spring up,
to jump, to leap.
Kur-kur, m., to be cold.
GO
AN AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAOE.
Kurmiir, w., to be rotten, as
wood; c/!, kuubun.
Kurr.i, V2.. to be slow.
Jvurrjigkopilliko, m., to spit.
Kurral, m., to be disabled, to
be wounded.
Kurrilliko, m., to carry.
Kuttawaiko, m., to be satisfied
with food, satiated, drunk.
M.
Ma, w., to challenfi^e, to dare;
to command to do.
Miinkilliko, m., to take, to ac-
cept, to take hold of.
Manmunbilliko, ■;;?., to cause to
take, to let take, to let have.
Mardgkoiyelliko, m., to pro-
claim, to make known.
Matelliko, m., to be gluttonous.
Meapuliiko, in., to plant.
Mimulliko, m., to detain, to
compel to. wait.
Minki, m., to sorrow, to sym-
pathize.
Minkilliko, m., to remain, to
dwell.
MiromuUiko, m., to keep.
Mirial, m., to be without, to
be poor, miserable ; a desert
place.
Mirrilliko, ???., to sharpen into
a point, as a spear.
Mirrinupulliko, OT.,to cause to
be sharp.
Mitti, m., to be small.
Mittilliko, m., to wait, to stay,
to remain.
Mitug, m., to be cut, wounded,
sore.
Morilliko, m., to wind up as a
string.
Moron, ???., to be alive.
Moroun, m., to be tame, quiet,
docile, patient.
Mdttilliko, m., to pound with a
stone, like pestle and mortar.
Mulamulliko, m., to vomit.
Mumbilliko, m., to borrow, to
lend.
Munui, m., to be sick, ill, or to
be diseased.
Muntilliko, w.,to be benighted,
to be overtaken with dark-
ness.
Mupai, m., to fast; to keep the
mouth closed ; to be silent,
dumb.
Mupaikaiyelliko, «?., to remain
silent, to continue dumb.
Murralliko, m., to run.
Murrarag, ???., to be good, ex-
cellent, valuable.
X.
]S'eilpaIyelliko,77?.,to shout; the
noise of war or play.
Nigulliko, 7??., to play, to sport.
NiiJau-nillan, m., to be smashed
into pieces.
Ximulliko, m., to pinch.
Ninmilliko, in., to seize, to
snatch.
Niuwara, m., to be angry, dis-
pleased.
Nug-gurrawolliko, m., to meet.
Niigkilliko, «2., to be success-
i'ul, fortunate ; to obtain.
NummuUiko, m., to press, to
force down.
Numulliko, m., to touch with
the hand.
Nupulliko, m., to try, to learn,
to attempt.
Nurilliko, vi., to throw the
' boomerang.'
P.
Paikulliko, vu, to act of its own
power, to act of itself.
Paikulliko, w., to show one's
self spontaneously.
Paipilliko, m., to appear, to be-
come visible.
THE TOCABUL.VRY.
61
Paipillilco, «?., to act ; excluding
the idea oi: cause.
ral[al, m., to vibrate, to swing,
as in a swing.
Papai, m., to be close at hand.
Peakulliko, m., to letch w-ater.
Pillatoro, m., to set; as tlie sun,
moon, and stars.
Pillobuntilliko, m., to be sunk,
Avrecked.
Pillokulliko, m., to sink.
Pinkurkulliko.OT., to burst as a
bladder, oi" itself.
Pinnilliko, m , to dig.
Pintakilliko, m , to float.
AVatpulliko, m., to swim.
Pintilliko, m., to knock down,
as with an axe ; to shock, as
Avith electricity.
Pipabunbilliko, m., to permit
to stride, to let stride.
Pipelliko, w., to stride, straddle.
Pirra, m., to be tired.
Pirral-mulliko, m., to urge.
Pirriko, w., to be deep.
Pirriral, m.,to be hard, strong;
cf. kunbon, m., to be soft.
Pirun-kakilliko, ot., to be glad,
to be pleased.
Pital-kakilliko, m., to be glad,
to be pleased, to be happy.
Pilal-muUiko, m., to cause joy,
to make happy.
Pittabunbilliko, «;., to permit
to drink, to let drink.
Pittalliko, m., to drink.
Pittamulliko, m., to make to
drink, to cause to drink.
Poaibug-gulliko, m., to compel
to grow\
Poai-buntilliko, m., to cause to
grow.
Poai-kuUiko, m., to grow up of
itself.
Poiyeakulliko, ot., to be suspen-
ded, to hang on ; to infect.
Poiyelliko,7??.,to beg, to entreat.
Pdnkdg, m., to be short.
Pdr-bug-gulliko, in., to compel
to drop.
Pdrburrilltko, ?»., to cause to
drop by means of something.
Porei, m., to be tall.
Pc5r-kakilliko, m., to be drop-
ped, to be born.
Porobulliko, «i., to smooth.
Porogkal, m., to be globular,
to be round.
Porrdl, m., to be heavy ; to be
slow.
Pdrunwitilliko, m., to dream a
dream.
Potobuntilliko, m., to cause a
hole, to bleed a person.
Potoburrilllko, w., to burst a
hole with something.
Potopai_\anuii-wal vi , will burst.
Pulluntara, m., to shine, as with
ointment.
Puldg-kulliko, «?., to enter, to
go or come into.
Pulul-pulul, «?., to shake with
cold, to tremble.
Punta, in., to be mistaken \\\
any tiling.
Puntimulliko, in., to cause to
fall, to throw down.
Purkulliko, m., to fly.
PuromuUiko, m., to lift up.
Puto, m., to be black.
Puttiliiko, m., to bite.
Ta-killiko, m., to eat.
TaleamuUiko, m., to catch any
thing thrown.
Talig-kakilliko, OT.,tobe across.
Ta-munbilliko, ««., to permit to
eat, to let eat.
Tauan, m., to approach.
Tardgkamulliko, m., to cause to
mix, to miiigle.
Tetti, m. to be dead.
G2
AS AUSTRALIAN LAXGrAGE.
Tetti-ba-bunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to die, to let die.
Tetti-ba-bun-burrilHko, m., to
permit to be put to death bj
some means.
Tetti-bug-gulliko, in., to compel
to be dead, to kill, to murder.
Tetti-buUiko, m., to die, to be in
the act of dying.
Tetti-bunkulliko, ;;;., to smite
dead, to strike dead.
Tetti-burrilliko, m., to cause to
die by some means, as poison.
Tetti-kakilliko, m., to be dead,
to be ill that state.
Tiir-bug-ga-bunbilliko, m., to
let break.
Tiir-bug-sulliko, m., to compel
to break.
Tiirburribunbilliko, «?., to per-
mit to break by means of . . . .
Tiirburrilliko, m., to break by
means of something.
Tiirkullibunbilliko,'»?., to allow
to break of itself.
Tiirkulliko, «?., to break of its
own itself, as wood.
Tirag-kakilliko,w?., to beawake.
Tirriki, m., to be red. hot ; the
colour red.
Tittilliko, m., to pluck.
Tiwolliko, m., to seek, to search.
Tiyumbilliko, m., to send any
kind of property, cf., yukul-
liko.
Tokol, m., to be true ; the truth;
this takes 'bo ta' with it.
Toldg-tolog, m.,to separate.
Tolomulliko, m., to shake any
thing.
Torololal, m., to be slippery,
slimy.
Tottdg and tdttorig ; m., to be
naked. This word must be
carefully distinguished from
' tdtug,' news, intelligence.
Tug-gunbil]iko,w2., to show.
Tugkatnulliko, m., to find ; lit.,
to make to appear.
Tiigkilliko, m., to cry, to bewail.
Tuirkulliko, in., to drag along,
to draw.
Tukin-umulliko, m.,to preserve,
to keep, to take care of.
Tukkara, m., to be cold.
Tulbulliko, m., to run fast, to
escape.
Tullamulliko, m., to hold by the
hands.
Tulla-tullai, m., to be in a rage.
Tuloin, m., to be narrow.
Tulutilliko, m., to kick.
Tunbilliko, ;;?., to exchange.
Tiinbamabunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to string together.
Tvinbamulliko, m., to string to-
gether.
Turabunbilliko, m., to permit to
pierce.
Turakaiyelliko, m.,to convince.
Turinwiyelliko, «?., to swear the
truth, to adjure to speak the
truth.
Turdl, m., to be in a state of
healing, to be well ; as a cut
or wound.
Turdnpiri, m., to suffer hunger.
Turral, in., to split.
Turral-bug-gulliko, )n.,to cause
to split, to make to split.
Turramulliko, m., to throw a
stone.
Turrug, m., to be close together.
Turukdnbilliko, in., to punish.
Turukilliko, in., to grow up, to
shoot up.
Turulliko, in., to pierce, prick,
stab, sting, lance, spear.
Tiitdg, in., to be stunned, in-
sensible, apparently dead.
THE VOCABULARY.
(53
tr.
TJmulliko, m., to do, to make,
to create.
Unmulliko, m., to make afraid,
^ to affright, to startle.
Uutelliko, on., to dance.
Upulliko, on., to do with, to use,
to work with.
Uwolliko, m., to come oo' go ; to
walk, to pass, &c.
AV.
"Waipilliko, on., to wrestle.
Waipulliko, m., to hunt.
Waita,w.,to depart, to be away.
AYamulliko, m., to bark a tree,
to skin.
"Wamunbilliko, on., to permit to
go, to let go away.
Warakarig, on., to be full, to be
satiated.
"Warekulliko, on., to put away,
to cast away ; to forgive.
"Warin-warin, m., to be crooked.
"Wari-wari-kulliko, ot., to strew,
to scatter about, to sow seed.
Warau, on., to be flat oo- level,
to be plain.
"Waruwai, on., to battle, to en-
gage in fighting.
Watpulliko, m., to swim, to
stretch the hands to swim.
Wattawalliko, on., to tread, to
stamp with the foot or feet.
"Wauwibunbilliko, on., to i)er-
mit to float, to let float.
"Wauwilliko, on., to float ; as a
cork or feather.
Weilkorilliko, on., to flog, whip,
scourge.
"Weir-weir, on., to be lame.
"Willug, willuntin, on., to be be-
hind, to come after, to be last.
* Note. — Other verbs also take this for
walking ; as, ta-tei-illi
Willug bo, willug, in., to return.
Winelliko, m., to burn with
fire, to scorch.
Wirabakilliko, on., to heat, to be
becoming hot.
Wirakakilliko, on., to be hot.
Wirrigbakilliko, on., to close
up, to shut a door.
"Wirrilliko, on., to wind up, as
a ball of string.
W irrob ulliko, on.,io follow after.
"Witelliko, on., to smoke a pipe.
Wittilliko, on., to sing.
WittimuUiko, on., to fall, to be
thrown down.
Wiyelliko, on., to speak, to say,
to tell, to command, to ask.
Wiyabunbilliko, in., to per-
mit to speak, to let speak.
"VViya-lei-illiko,* on., to talk
and walk.
Wiyayelliko, on., to speak in
reply, to answer.
Wiyayimulliko, on., to accuse.
"Wiyea, on., to say again, to
repeat.
Woatelliko, on., to lick.
Wogkal, m., to be foolish, not
clever, stupid.
Wogimtilliko, ot., to forget any
thing told ; cf., giirrawatil
liko.
Woro-woro, on., to swell.
"Wotara, m., to be shallow.
Wunkilliko, on., to leave.
Wiinmarabunbilliko, on., to per-
mit to be left, to let be left.
Wuno, on., to stoop or bend in
walking.
Wupilliko, on., to put, to place.
Wurunbarig, on., to be hairy;
as an animal.
Wntilliko, on., to cover, to put
on clothes.
m whenever the act is conjoined with
ko, ' to eat and walk.'
Gi
AX ArSTBALIAN LANGUAGE.
T.
Tarakal. m., to be bad, evil.
Yaialkulliko, w., to move away,
as the clouds!.
Tarigkulliko, «?., to laugh.
Yellawa-bug-gulliko, on., to
compel to sit, to force to
sit.
Tellawa-bunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to sit dowu.
Tellawolliko, m., to cross legs
down on the ground ; to sit,
to remain, to rest.
Temmamulliko, «?., to lead ; as
by the hand, or as a horse
by a rope.
Tiirkulliko, w., to tear of itself,
as cloth ; to break.
Tiirkabunbilliko, w., to per-
mit to tear, to let tear.
Tiirburririlliko, w., to tear,
by means of something.
Tiirburri-bun-billiko, m., to
permit to tear, by means
of something.
Tiirbug-gulliko, on., to com-
pel to tear.
Tiirbug-ga-bunbilliko, m., to
permit compulsively to
tear.
TimuUiko, m., to make light,
as fur is caused to lie lightly
before the blacks twist it into
cord ; to encourage, to cheer
Tinbilliko, on., to kindle a fire.
Yiremba, on., to bark ; as a dog.
Yitelliko, on., to nibble or bite;
as a fish the bait.
Tuaipilliko, on., to push away,
to thrust out.
YukuUiko, on., to send, as a
messenger, to send property ;
rf., tiyumbilliko.
Yuntilliko, m., to cause pain,
to hurt.
Yurig, on., to go away.
Yurdgkilliko, on,, to dive.
Yuropulliko, on., to conceal
from view, to hide
Yurrug-gun, w., to be faint with
hunger.
Yutilliko, on., to guide, to show
the way by guiding.
Yutpilliko, on., to pulsate, to
beat, to throb.
ILLUSTRATIVE SENTEXCES. G5
CHAPTER V.
ILLUSTEATIYE SEXTEXCES.
Aboriginal sentences literally rendered into English.*
1. ON THE SIMPLE-KOillXATIYE CASE.
Gran ke bi? gatoa, Bouni; w., who are you? it is I, Bonni.
Who be thou? I, ,,
Gan ke unni, unnoa, unniig? m., who is tin's, that,
Who be this? that? there? there?
Kuri uniii, uukug unnoa, wonnai unnug;
Man this, woniaii tliat, chihl there.
m., this is a man ; that is a woman ; there is a child.
Minarig ke unni? warai ta unni; «?., whatis this ? it is
What be this ? spear it is tliis. a spear.
Minarig-ko ke unnoa? turulliko; «?., what is that for?
What - for be that ? for-to-spear. to spear with.
2. O'S TirE AGE>"T-XOMiyATITE CASE.
Gr ci n - 1 o bin w i y a ? n i u w o a t i a w i y a ; m., who told you ?
Wlio thee told ? he me told. he told me.
Gali-noa, gali -bo uut oa, tia wiya; m., this man, this
This-he this-she, me told; woman, told me.
G a 1 i - n a unni u m a ; m., this is the man who made this.
This-he tliis made.
Minarig-ko bonbunkulla tetti?; w., what smote him
What him struck dead ? dead ?
Nukug-ko, piriwallo, puutimaito;
Tlie woman — , the king — , the messenger — ,
m., the woman — , the king — , the messenger — , sc , smote him.
W a k u n - 1 o minarig t a t a u ? ; m. , what does the crow eat ?
Crow wliat eats ?
M i n a r i g-k o wakun tat an?; m., what eats the crow ?
What crow eats ?
Nagiin-to tia pital-mau; m., the song rejoices me.
Song me joy-does.
Kulai-to tia bunkulla wokka-tin-to;
Stick me struck up-from.
m., the stick fell from above and struck me.
•Note. — The line under the native words is a literal translation of them ;
that which follows tlie m is tlie equivalent English. — Ed.
66 AX AUSTEALIAX LANGUAGE.
3. ON THE GENITIVE CASE.
(jr j'l n - u m b a n o a ii n n i y i n a 1 ? w., whose son is this ?
Whoni-belonging-to he this son?
Emnioumbu ta ; gali-k o-ba bdn; m., it is mine ; tbis be-
Mine it is ; this-belongs him. longs to him.
Birab;in-umba, gilioumba wonnai; m., Birabau's, bis
Birab;in-belonging-to, his chikl. child.
Minari g-k O-ba unni? gali-ko-ba bdn; w., what does this
What-belongs this? this-belongs him. belono' to?
Wonta-kal bar a? En gland- kal bai*a?
What-phxce-of f'?7za.s\ j they ? England - of they.
m., what country are they of? they are Englishmen.
AVonta -kali u bara? England-kalin bara?
What-place-of C/em.j they? England - of they.
in., what country women are they ? they are Englishwomen.
Bug -ga i - k a 1 ; m., to-day ; lit., belonging to the present period.
To-day-of.
Makoro-ko-ba ta unni gdrrdg; «i., this is the blood of a
Fish-belongmg-to it is this blood. fish.
G-overnor- kai-kal bag; m., I belong to the Gover-
Governor - place-belonging-to I. nor's place.
Governor- II mba bag; on., I am the Governor's, «c., man.
Governor-belonging-to I.
Murrarag-ko-ba kuri-ko-ba; m., a good man's.
Good-belonging-to man-belonging-to
4. ON THE DATIVE.
M a k o r o bi g uw a; g a n - n u g ? give the fish; to whom?
Fish thou give ; whom-for ?
Piriwal-ko? Keawai; giroug bo; m., to the chief? no;
Chief-for ? no, for-thee self. for yourself.
Karai tia guwa emmoug takilliko; m., give me flesh to
Flesh me give for-me for-to-eat. eat.
Turig bi wo 11 a; gi kou g-kin-ko ; m., be off"; go to him.
Away thou go him- to.
Gan-kin-ko? piriwal-la-ko ; kokera-ko ;
Whom-to ? chief-to ; house-to.
m., to whom ? to the chief ; to the house.
Wontarig? untarig; untoarig;
To-what-place ? that-plaee ; that-place-there.
m., to what place ? to that place; to that place there.
Mulubinba-ka-ko ; En gland-ka-ko ; m., to Newcastle; to
To Newcastle ; England to. Eno^land.
5. ON THE ACCUSATIVE.
Gan-to bdn bunkulla tetti kulwun? w., who smote him
Who him smote dead stiff. dead ?
G-annug? B i r aba nn u g ; ot., whom ? Biraban.
Whom ? Biraban.
ILLrSTEATIA'E SENTENCES. 67
Gratoa bon tura; tura bdn bag; m., it is I who speared
I him speared ; speared him I. him ; I speared him.
Ivaibulla bounnoun; gannug? ot., caliber; which?
Call her ; which ?
U n n u g -y o g u n n o a n u g n u k u g ; m., that woman there.
■ There-there that woman.
M a n k i y i k o r a u n n o a n u g ; m., do not take that.
Take not that.
Mara b 1 u n n o a n u g ; m., take that ; take it.
Take thou that.
Mara b i u n t i-k a 1, unto a-k a 1, m., take some of this, of that.
Take thou hereof, there-of.
Makoro tia guwa; guuun banug; in., give me a fish ; I
Fish me give. give-will I-thee will give thee.
Puntiman tia baran; m., I am thrown down.
Throws me down.
Makoro bi turulla warai-to; m., spear the fish with the
Fish thou pierce spear-with. Spear.
Tibbinbibuwamusketto; m., shoot the bird with the
Bird thou smite musket-with. musket.
Wiyella bon; wiyella binug; ot., tell him ; you tell him.
Tell him ; tell thou-him.
B li n k u 1 1 a tia; w o n n e ? ; m., I am struck ; where ?
Smote me ; where ?
Wallug tia noa wirea; m., he hit me on the head.
Head me he struck..
Minarig bo bali wiyella? m., what shall you and I say ?
What self thou -I say.
G- a n-t bounnoun turaniin? m., who will spear her ?
Who her pierce-will ?
G-anto unnoanug uma-niin? «?., who will make it?
Who that-there make-will ?
G. ON THE VOCATIVE.
Ela! kaai, tan an unt i-k o ; m., I say, come hither.
Hallo ! come, approach this-place-for.
Wau! kaai, kaai, karakai; ?«., I say, come, make haste.
Hallo ! come, come, be quick.
Bougkalinu n-w al bag waita biyugbai-tako
Arise-self-will I depart Father-to
e mm o u g-k a-t a-ko, gatun wiy a -nun-wal, Biyug,
my-to and say-will, Father,
yarakai bag uma mikan ta morokoka gatuu
evil I made, presence-at heaven-at and
gir ou g-k in;
thee.
m., I will arise and go to my father, and will say unto him, Pather
I have sinned against heaven, and before thee.
GS AN ArSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
7. ON THE ABLATIVE.
K ak i 11 an b ar a ; g^ni-kai? gan-kai-k an ;
Quarrelling-now they ; wliom-from ? whoin-froiu-being ?
m., the}' are now quaiTclling; about whom ?
B o u n n o u n-k a i ; T a i p a m e a r i n ; m., about her ; about T — .
Her-from, Taipaiiiear-from.
M i n a r i g - 1 i n ? m i n a r i g-t i n-k a n ; m., about what ? don't
What-from ? wliat-from-being. know.
M a k o r r i n g a t u n k li r i-t i n ; m., about the fish and the men.
Fish-from and men-froni.
Gan-kin-bir u g unni puntimai? ot., from whom came
Whom-from this messenger? this messenger ^
J e h o V a-k a-b i r u g P i r i w a 1 - 1 a-b irug , m., from .Tehovah the
Jehovah-from King-from. King.
AV o n t a-k a-b irug u o a ? m., from what place did he come ?
What-place-froni he ?
AVokka-ka-biru g moroko-ka-birug; m., from heavenabove.
Up-from heaven-froai.
Sydney-ka-birug ; JMulu-binba-ka-birug; m., fromSydnev;
Sydney-from ; Newcastle-froni. from Newcastle.
Mi n a r i g-b ir u g unnoa uma? vi., what is that made of?
What-fiom that made ?
K u 1 a i-b i r u g ; bras s-b irug; m., of wood ; of brass.
Wood-from ; brass-from.
C o p p e r-b irug garabug-ga brass; m., brass is made
Copper-fiom converted brass. of copper.
Turig bi wolla emmoug-kin-birug; ?;»., go away from me.
Away thou move me-from.
T e 1 1 a w o 1 1 a b i e m m o u g- k a t o a ; m., sit with me.
Sit thou me-with.
G;ln-katoa bouutoa? Tibbin-katoa ba;
Whom-with she ? Tib!)in-with.
m., witli whom is she? with Tibbin.
M i n a r i g-k o a n o a u w a ? m., how did he go ?
Wliat-by he go ?
M u r r i n w a i-t a ; p u r r a i-k o a ; m., on board a ship ; by land .
Large -canoe by ; land-by.
Wont a-k a 1-1 o a ? k o r u g-k o a ; «?., which way ? through the
What-phice-ljy ? ' bush-bj'. bush.
Iv o k e r d a bag n w a ; m., I came by the house.
House-by I came.
W n n u g k e w u r u b i 1 ? B i r a b a n - k i n - b a ;
W.ere-at be skin-cloak ? Birabau-at
w., where is the blanket? at Biraban's.
"\V n n o u g k e n o a ? ' S y d n e y-k a-b a n o a ;
Where-at be he ? Sydney-at » he.
•;«., where is he? he is at Syduey.
"Won ta-wonta-ka-ba kokera? m., whereabouts is the house?
Where-where-at house I
ILLtrSTEATITE SENTENCES. 69
P a p a i-t a-b a Mulubinb a-ka-ba ; m., close to Newcastle.
Close-at Newcastle-at
Broke n-b ay-tin-to* u a t a n S y d n e y-li e a d s ;
Broken-Bay-from see Sydney-heads.
m., at Broken Bay is seen Sydney Heads.
AV o n t a-t i n-t o ? n n t i-t i n-t o ; u n t a-t i n-t o ;
What-place-from ? this-place-from ; that-place-from.
m., at what jjlace ? at this place ; at that place.
8. ON THE ARTICLE.
Minna n kiiri tanan-ba? OT.,howmany men are now coming?
What men approach ?
"Wakal-bo ta noa tana n-b a ; m.^ one man only is coming.
One-self it is he approaches.
B u 1 o a r a-b ota bulatananuwa;«?., only the two came.
Two- self it is two approach came.
K 6 1 b i r a n-b o ta bar a nukug; m., only a few women.
Few-self it is they women.
T i b b i n-t o noa tatan; w., the bird eats.
Bird he eats.
Gali-noa tibbin-to pittan; «z., this is the bird wbich drinks.
This-he bird drinks.
Tibbin-to noa unuug; «?., that is a bird.
Bird he there.
Unni-tara tibbin bi bimkulla tetti; OT.,tbese are the birds
These birds thou smotest dead. you killed.
Grintoa-bo ta unnoa kuri; w., thou art the man.
Thou -self it is that man.
Maiya-ko putti-nun tetti koa kauwil kiiri;
Snake bite-will dead ut-[ may-be man.
m., the snake wdll bite in order to kill the man.
T i r a-k o gikoumb a-k o ; m., with his teetb.
Teeth his- with.
Tetti bon horse-ko witti-ma; «j., tbe horse threw him,
Dead him horse violence-made. and killed him.
9. CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERB.
"VVibbi unni kauwal katan; m., this is a high wind.
Wind this great it exists.
Kan wan, kauwal lag unni; on., yes, very powerful.
So it is, great acts this.
Kapirra bag kakilliela, katan; m., I was, I am, hungry.
Hungry I was-being, am.
Gan unti katan? m., who lives here ?
Who this-place exists ?
Bara-bo unti katan; m., they themselves dwell here.
They-self this-place exist.
* Note — Here Broken Baj- is spoken of both as the cause and the agent, so that the
meaning is — on account of Broken Bay being the au:ent, you see Sydney Heads. The
particle tin, ' from,' ' on account of,' denotes the cause, and to (ko) marks the agency.
t The English expression ' in order that ' is too long to stand under and correspond with
' koa' in the above. I have, therefore, substituted for it, throughout, the Latin 'ut.
70 A>' AUSTR.VLIAX LANGUAGE.
K i a k i a b a g k a k 6 u u u n n i g o r o k a n ; m., I was conqueror
Conqueror I was this morning this morning.
B u k k a bag k a k u 1 1 a ; m., I was very angry.
Rage I Mas.
B u u t o a r a n o a t e 1 1 i k a k u 1 1 a ;?;?., He is the man who
Tluit-wliich-is-smote he dead was. was killed.
Kakullata bag Sydney-ka taga bi ba kakiilla unta;
Was I Sydney-at before thou wast at-that-place
m., I was at Svdiiey before ever you were there.
Tv li m b a bag k a k e u n S y d n e y-k a ; m„ to-morrow I shall be
To-morrow I shall-be Sydney-iu. in Svdnev.
Ivaniin-ta unni murrarJig; ?«., it will be good, this.
Be-will this good.
Mirka noa tetti kaniin; m., perhaps he will be dead.
Perhaps he dead be-will.
G a n - k e k i a k i a k a n u n ? m., who will be the victor ?
^Vho conqueror be-will ?
Piriwal kanun-wal b i ; m., you will certainly be king.
Chief be-wilt thou.
Kabo bag kaniin Sydney-ka; w., by and by I shall be
By and by I be-will Sydney-at. at Sydney.
Kanun bag tarai ta yelienna-ka; m., in another
Be-will I another it is moon-at. month I shall.
Kaiyu kan bag; kaiyu korien bag;
Able being I ; able not I.
m., I am powerful ; I am not powerful.
"VV i r r o b u 1 1 i-k a n b a r a g i k o u m b a ; m , they are his f ol-
FoUowers they his. lowers.
Tulbulleun bag kinta kan; w., I escaped, being afraid.
Escaped I fear being.
Pirra-pirra bara kakillin iintelH-t i n ; «z., the dancing
Fatigued they becoming dance-from. js tirino' them.
Wunal unni kakillin; m., the summer is coming on.
Hot-season this becoming.
Store-ba kakillin bountoa; m., she is now living near
Store existing she. the store.
Store-ka-ba kakillin bountoa; m., she is now living at
Store at existing she. the store.
Musket tia katala Awaba-ka; in., I had a musket at
Musket me existed Awaba-at. Lake Macquarie.
Kinta bag katala, yakita keawai; w., I used to be afraid,
Afraid I existed, now not. but now I am not.
Katala bag li a i a t e a-k a ; m„ I used to live at Raiatea.
Existed I Baiatea-at.
Unta bag katala yuraki M — ka; w., I lived formerly
There I existed formerly M — at. at M — .
Piriwal bag kakilli-kolag; m., I am now going to be
Chief 1 to-be- towards kined nigh our dwelling.
A murderous black, named 'Bumble-foot,' from his infirmitj', and ' Devil-
devil,' from his propensities, had attempted to murder a European by
chopping off the man's head with a tomahawk, and had nearly effected this;
but the man recovered, and I had to appear at a Court of Justice as a
witness ; this dis^jleased ' Bumble-foot, ' and he avowed openly, in the
usual manner, that he would slay me in the bush at the first opportunity ;
this came to the ears of M'Gill, who immediately applied to me for the loan
of a fowling-piece 'to go and shoot that fellow for his +hi'eat'; this was,
of course, refused. M'Gill was once present with me at the Criminal
Court, Sydney, assisting as interpreter, when he was closely examined by
Judges Burton and Willis, in open Court, on the trial of an aboriginal
for murder, 1834, in order that M'Gill might be sworn as interpreter in the
case ; but, though his answers were satisfactory to the general questions
proposed to hina by the Judges, yet, not understanding the nature of our
oath in a Court of Justice, he could not be sworn. Patty, his wife, was
pleasing in her person, "black but comely, " kind and affectionate in her
disposition, and evidenced as strong a faculty of shrewdness in the exercise
of her intellectual powers over M'Gill as many of the fairer daughters of
Eve, who, without appearing to trespass on the high prerogative of their
acknowledged lords, manage their husbands according to their own
sovereign will ; this might perhaps have arisen from the circumstance that
M'Gill, once, when intoxicated, had shot at his wife, although he deeply
deplored this when he became sober ; the injury sustained was not much, but
ever afterwards he treated her with much affection, which appeared to be
reciprocal. It was a romantic scene to behold the haiapy pair, together
B I R A B A N
(McGI LL).
OF McGlLl. WAS TAKEN IN PeNCIL BY Mr. AgaTE OF
U. S. Exploring Expedition in 1839.
REPRODUCED BY HEUOTYPE.
TUE KEY. 89
with many others, on ti moonlight night, under the hhie canopy of heaven,
preparing for the midnight ball to be held on the green sward, with no
other covert than a growing bush, with none other blaze than that from the
numerous fires kindle''S FROM THE SCRIPTURES. 115
Section 4.
Pulli, 'voice.'
TJpea, 'put forth'; from upilliko, 'to exert power.'
Itharael-uinba ; Israel is the proper name, introduced ; -umba,
the particle denoting 'belonging to ' a person onlj'; 'belonging
to' a thing is koba; ' belonging to a place' is -kal (vianc.'),
-kalin (fern.).
Wiyelliko, 'to speak.'
Pital-mulliko, 'to cause peace, joy, gladness.'
lethu-ko Kritht-ko, 'Jesus Christ,' as the agent; the particle
ko, denoting agency, must be added to each word, to show
that both are in the same relation to the verb.
Niuwoa-bo, 'himself it is who is,' emphatic.
Section 6.
G-earunba katan, 'is belonging to us' and remains so; equi-
valent to, ' for we have.'
"Wiyelli-kan, 'one who speaks'; 'an advocate.'
Biyugbai toa ba katan, 'it remains with the Father,'
WINTA 6.— Part 6.
Section 10.
Murrin, 'body ' of a person; murrin nurunba, 'your body.'
Kokera yirriyirri ta, ' it is a sacred house,' 'a temple.'
Marai yirriyirri koba, 'belonging to the sacred Sjpirit.'
AVakalla murrin, ' one body is.'
Section 11.
Tanti nurun wiya, 'in the manner as called you'; equivalent
to, 'you are called'; nurun is in the objective case.
Kotelli ta, 'in the thinking.'
Nuruub a, 'belonging to you,' 'your'; 'of you.'
Wiyatoara, 'that which is said.'
"Wakalla Piriwal, 'one Lord is'; wakalla Marai, 'one
' Spirit is.'
Wakalla gurrulliko, ' one is for-to hear or obey.'
Wakalla kurrimulliko, ' one is for-to cleanse' with water,
Wakalla Eloi ta, 'one is Grod it is.'
Biyugbai ta yantin koba, 'father it is of all,'
Wokka-kaba noa yantin ko, ' up above he is for all.'
Gratun noa yantin koa, 'and he all with.'
G-atun murrug kaba nurun kinba, 'and within you,' *c., all;
murrug, 'within, inside.'
Section 12.
Yantin barun yemmaman marai-to Eloi koba ko, 'all
them lead the spirit does, belonging-to-Grod does,' equivalent
to the passive ; the to and ko are only signs of agency and not
IIG AX AUSTRALIAN LAIfGUAGE,
the verb 'to do'; in the transhition the verb 'does' is only used
to show the effect of the particles; no reason can be assigned
why the particles may not be used indiscriminately the one for
the other, excepting euphony, because the agency is in the o,
which denotes purpose.
Temmamulliko, 'to lead as by the hand '; the to in the text is
added to Marai, because that is the subject of the verb, and
the ko (=to) is added to Eloi koba, because that, too, is an.
essential jjortion of the subject.
Wonnai ta bara Eloi koba, 'children it is they of Grod.'
Section 13.
Niuwarabug-gakorabon, ' angry purposely cause not him.'
Marai yirriyirri-lag Eloi koba, 'Spirit sacred of God.'
Section 14,
Gan-to ba yarakai wiyanun gikoug, ' whosoever-there-be
evil will-speak concerning him.'
Tinal kuri koba, 'the son belonging-to man'; 'the son of man.'
Kamunbiniin wal bon, 'suffered-to-be shall-certainly-be he.'*
Wonta noa ba yarakai wiyanun gikoug marai yirri-
yirri-lag, 'whereas he evil will-speak concerniug-him, the
spirit sacred.'
Keawai wal bon kamiinbinun, 'not certainly he shall-be-
suffered-to-be,' or remain, or exist; according to the idea of
punishment which the speaker wishes to convey.*
WINTA 7.— Part 7.
Luke, ii. 9-14.
Verse 9.
Gatun noa agelo Tehda-iimba, 'and he the angel belong-
ing-to-Jehovah.'
Tanan uwanoa barun-kin, 'approached them'; 'came to them.'
Gatun killiburra Tehda-iimba, 'and shining belonging-
to-Jehovah'; from killibinbiu, ' to be bright ; for the verbal
form burra, see page 37.
Ivakulla barun katoa, ' was them with.'
Kinta gaiya bara kakuUa, 'fear then they were-in-a-state-of .'
Verse 10.
Gatun ageloko noa wiya barun, ' and he the angel told them.'
Kinta kora, 'fear not.'
Kulla nurun bag wiyan, 'because you I tell.'
Totog murrarag kakilliko pitalko, 'news good, for-to-be
joy-for.'
Kakilliko yantin ko kiiri ko, *to-be all-for men-for.'
*£on is here in the objective ; for the reason why, see pages 22 and 30.
SELECTIONS EEOM THE SCEIPTTJEES. 117
Verse 11.
Kulla nurunba porkulleiin unni purreag, 'because belong-
ing-to-you bom-of-itself-is this day.'
Kokera Dabid-umba ka, 'house-at belonging-to-David-at ';
the -ra of kokera is an ablative form ; see page 16.
G-olomuUikan ta noa, Kritht ta Piriwal ta, ' one-wbo-
saves (by personal causation) it-is he, Christ it-is, the Chief
or Lord it-is.'
Verse 12.
Gatun unni tugakaniin nurunba, 'and this mark will-be
yours.'
Naniin nura b'obognug, 'see-will ye the-babe.'
Gamatoara kirrikin taba, ' that-which-is-wrapped in-the gar-
ment,' i.e., * soft raiment.'
Kakillinbatakilligellaba, 'remaining-atthe-eating-place-at.'
Verse 13.
Gatun tanoa-kal-bo, ' and at-that-self-same-instant.'
Paipea konara moroko-kal gikoug katoa agelo katoa,
' appeared host Heaven-of him- with angel-with.'
Murrarag wiyellin bon Eloinug giakai, 'good, telling him,
God (the object), thus'; equivalent to, 'praising God, and
saying.'
Verse 14.
"Wiyabunbilla bon murrarag Eloinug, ' let him speak well
God' (the object); i.e., ' let persons speak good or weU of
God.' This is the native way of expressing our passive voice,
' let God be praised '.
Wokka kaba moroko kaba, 'up-in Ileaven-in.
Gatun kamiinbilla pital purrai tako, 'and let-there-be-
caused-to-be peace earth for.'
Murrarag umatoara kiiri ko, * good what-is-done men-for.'
WINTA 8.— Paet 8.
Section 1.
Eloi-to noa gurrara-ma korien barun agelo yarakai
umullikan, ' God he regarded not them angels evil who-do.'
"Wonto ba wareka noa barun bara koiyug kako tarta-
ro kako, ' whereas cast-away he them down fire for tartarus
for ' ; ' tartarus ' is a word introduced.
Section 2.
Wiyatoara ta yantin kuri-ko wakalla tetti buUiko,
'that-which-is-said it-is all men- for once dead to become.'
Gatun yukita gaiya gurrulliko, ' and afterwards then to-per-
ceive-by-the ear,' sc, the sentence.
118 AN AUSTEALIAX LAXGLAGE.
Section 3.
Yakoai-kan bag moron kaiiuii? ' in-what-mannner-of-beiiig
I life will-be-in-a-state-of ? i.e., ' how can I be alive.'
Giirrulla bon Piriwalnug, lethunug Krithtnug, 'hear
him, the Lord Jesus Christ.'
Moron gaiya bi kanun, ' life then thou wilt-be-iu-a-state-of.'
Gratun kirrikin ta tempel kako, 'and thc-veil it-is the
temple-at.'
Tiir-kulleun bulwa koa, 'rcnt-o£-its-own-power in-the-midst,
in-order-to-be.'
AVokka-kabirug unta-ko baran-tako, ' from the top thence
to the bottom'; Jit., 'up-from there-to down-to.'
^g^The peculiarity of tbe verbal form of yiir, 'a rent,' — so
called from the noise of a piece of cloth when tearing, — is shewn
in the following specimen: —
Yiir-kulleini, ' rent,' 'has rent' of itself, of its own power.
Yiir-bng-ga, 'rent,' some person has.
Yiir-burrea, 'rent,' some instrument has.
Yiir-lag, 'rent,' is declaratively.
Yiir-wirrea, 'rent,' some motion has rent ; as when a flag, or
a sail of a ship flapping in the wind, is rent.
Thus, without a clear idea of the nature of the roots of the
affixes, no one could understand the difference of the five kinds
of 'rending.'
Compound TFords.
Like the North American Indians, although to a less extent,
our aborigines have long composite words in their language.
Tor instance, to express the abstract idea contained in the English
word 'lust,' they would say kotilliyarakaigeariinba, 'our
evil thinking '; and for the contrary idea, kotillimurrarag-
gearunba, 'our good thinking.' Now, either of these words,
when pronounced, appears to be but one word, whereas each con-
tains three words combined, namely: —
(1.) Kotilli (from simple root kot), ' the act of thinking ' ;
(2.) geari'mb a, ' belonging to us '; (3.) yarakai, ' evil '; mur-
rarag, 'good.' From the root kot come the forms, kotilliko,
injin., 'to think,' kotsiU, pres. i}idic.,]\.otinun,fuf. indie, kotta,
jnist indie, kotillin, pres. part., kotilliela, past pfirticiple.
Again, such a word as tiirburreabunbilliko, ' to pei'mit to
be torn,' is made up of tiir, a root which expresses the idea of
tearing, -burrea, the verbal particle of instrumental agency,
-bun, 'permit,' -illi, the formative of a verbal noun, and -ko,
for the purpose of.' And so also with other examples.
DIALECTS. 119
TUKEE AUSTRALIAN ABOBIOINAL DIALECTS,
SHOWING THEIR AFFINITY WITH EACH OTHER.
1. Eastern Australia (Y\iV&\ke\dL) ; 2. South Western Australia
(Captain Grey's Yocabulary) ; 3. South Australia (Teichclraann).
I (emphatic) — 1. Gratoa; 2. Granya ; Nad jo ; Graii.
Thou — 1. Griutoa ; 2. Griunei ; 3. Ninna.
We— 1. G-eeu; 2. aancel; 3. &adlii.
Ye— 1. Nura; 2. Nurag ; 3. Na.
They — 1. Bara ; 2. Balgua ; 3. Barna.
"We two (dual)— 1. Bali; 2. ; 3. G-adlukurla.
Te two — 1. Bula; 2. Bulala; 3. Niwadlukurla.
This (emphatic)—!. G-ali; 2. G-ali ; 3. G-adlu.
That (emphatic)—!. G-ala ; 2. Gala; 3. Parla.
Who ?— 1. Gail ? ; 2. Gan ? ; 3. Ganiia?
Who (is the agent) — !. Ganto ?; 2. Gando ?; 3. Gauto ?
Whose? — 1. Ganuug?; 2. Gannog ? ; 3. Gaityurlo ?
To strike (imperative) — !. Buwa; 2. Buma; 3. Bumandi.
To be wroth—!. Bukka; 2. Bukkau ; 3. Tagkarro.
Yes (assent)— 1. E-e ; 2. E-ee ; 3. Ne.
On account of? — !. -tinke?; 2. -gin ge ? ; 3. birra.
Cold — !. Kurkur; 2. Gurgal ; 3. Manyapaianna.
Heat — !. Karrol ; 2. Kallarruk ; 3. Wottita.
Where?— 1. Woiiti?; 2. Winji ? ; 3. Wanti?
To tear (pres.) — !. Yiiran ; 2. Jiran; 3. Yarurendi.
Presently — ^!. Kabo; 2. Ivaabo ; 3. Gaiinni ; Yagadti.
To take (imperative) — !. Mara; 2. Mara; 3. Marrar.
More—!. Bati; 2. Mate; 3. Muinmo.
Go quickly — !. Wollawollag ; 2. Welawellag ; 3. Warruanna.
To see— 1. Nakilli; 2. Nago ; 3. Nakkondi.
To blow (/.e.,puff)— !. Bombilli; 2. Bobon ; 3. Buntondi.
To fly— 1. Burkilli; 2. Burdag ; 3.
To speak — 1. Wiyelli; 2. AVagon ; 3. Wagondi.
Water (fi-esh) — 1. Kokoin;Bato; 2. Kowin ; Badto; 3. Ivowi.
Dung (excrement) — !. Koniig; 2. Ivonug; 3. Kudna.
The tongue— i. Tullun ; 2. Tallug; 3. Tadlaga.
The throwing stick — !. Wommara ; 2. Meera ; 3. Meedla,
Smoke — !. Poito ; 2. Buyu ; 3. Poiyu.
Wood— 1. Kulai; 2. Kalla ; 3. Karla.
The hand— 1. Matlara; 2. Mara; 3. Murra.
The ribs — !. Narra ; 2. Narra ; 3. Tinninya.
The toes — !. Tinna ; 2. Tjenna; 3. Tidna.
A crow (from its cry) — 1. Wakuii , 2. Quaggun ; 3. Kui.
The wind—!. Wibbi ; Wippi; 2. 3. Waitpi.
120 a2t austealian language.
The Loed's Peatee,
In the language of the Aborigines of Lake Macquarie.
Biyugbai gearunba wokka kaba moroko kaba katan;
Father our up in heaven in art ;
kamunbilla yitirra giroumba yirriyirri kakilliko;
let-caused-to-be name thy sacred for-to-be ;
paipibunbilla Piriwal koba giroumba; gurrabunbilla
let-to-appear King-belonging-to thy ; let-to-obey
wiyellikanne giroumba; yanti purrai taba, yanti ta
word thy ; as earth in as
moroko kaba, guwa gearun purreag ka yanti katai
heaven in ; give to-us day at as always
takilliko ; gatun warekulla gearunba yarakai
for-to-eat ; and cast-way our evil
umatoara yanti ta geen warekayantin ta wiyapaiyeen
that-is-done as we cast-away all spoken-but not-done
gearunba; gatun yuti yikora gearun yarakai
belonging-to-us ; and guide not us evil
umulli-kan kolag ; miromulla gearun yarakai
one-who-causes-to-do towards ; cause-to-deliver us evil
tabirug; kulla ta giroumba ta Piriwal koba gatun
from ; because thine King-belonging-to and
killibinbin yanti katai. Amen.
bright-shining thus always. Amen.
The Author trusts that he has now placed on permanent record
the language of the aborigines of this part of the colony, before
the speakers themselves become totally extinct ; and if, in his
endeavour to aid the purpose of scientific enquiry, his work may
seem to fall short, and so disappoint the expectations of those
"who take an interest in ethnological pursuits, he can only state
that, in the midst of attention to manifold engagements in other
paramount duties, no pains have been spared on the subject,
and therefore his only apology is, that with slender means he
has done his best.
L. E. THEELKELD.
Sydney, New South "Wales,
November 26, 1850.
PART IT.
THE GOSPEL BY St. LUKE.
THE
GOSPEL BY St. LTJKE
TRANSLATED INTO
THE LA^&UAGE
A^^^^BAKA.!.
BY
L. E. THRELKELD.
NOW FOR THE FIRST TIME PRINTED.
FROM THE ORIGINAL MANUSCRIPT,
IN THE 'sir GEORGE GREY COLLECTION' OF THE PUBLIC LIBRARY,
AUCKLAND, N.Z.
CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER,
1891.
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
It is a matter of fact that tlie aborigines of these colonies and
of the numerous islands of the Pacific Ocean are rapidly becoming
extinct. The cause of their extinction is mysterious. Does it
arise from the iniquity of this portion of the human race having
become full ■? — or, that the times of these Gentiles are fulfilled 1 —
or, is it but the natural efi'ects of iniquity producing its conse-
quent ruin to the workers thereof in accordance with the natural
order of God's government of the universe 1 Whatever may be
the result of speculative theories in answer to these queries,
there remains one grand question incontrovertible, " Shall not the
Judge of all the Earth do right f
The providence of God has permitted ancient nations, together
with their languages, and numerous tribes, with their various
tongues, to pass away and others to take possession of and dwell
in their tents, just as we in New South Wales and the neigh-
bouring colonies now do, in the place of the original inhabitants
of the land.
The numbers of the aborigines, both in Australia and the South
Sea Islands, have always been overrated, and the efforts that have
been made, on Christian principles, to ameliorate their condition,
have been more abundant in proportion to the number of these
aborigines, than have ever been any similar efforts towards the
hundreds of millions of heathens in other parts of the world.
My own attempt in favour of the aborigines of New South
Wales was commenced in the year 1824, under the auspices of
the London Missionary Society, at the request of the deputation
from that Institution sent out for the purpose of establishing
Missions in the East, and urged likewise by the solicitations of
the local Government of this colony. The British Government
sanctioned the project by authorizing a grant of 10,000 acres of
land, at Lake Macquarie, in trust for the said purpose, at the
recommendation of Sir Thomas Brisbane, the then Governor of
the Australian Colonies.
In 1839, the London Missionary Society abandoned the mission,
broke faith with me, and left me to seek such resources as the
providence of God might provide, after fifteen years' service in
their employ. The Colonial Government, being perfectly acquainted
with all the circumstances of the case, stepped in and enabled me
to continue in my attempt to obtain a knowledge of the aboriginal
language, and the British Government subsequently confirmed
the new ari'angement.
126 THE Auniou's pkefa:'E.
Circumstances, -wliicli no huuiau power could control, brought
tlie mission to a final termination on December 31, 1841, when the
mission ceased, not from any want of support from the Govern-
ment, nor from any inclination on my own part to retire from the
work, but solely from the sad fact that the aborigines themselves
had then become almost extinct, for I had actually outlived a very
large majority of the blacks, more especially of those with whom
I had been associated for seventeen years. The extinction of the
aborigines is still progressing throughout these colonies. The
last man of the tribe which formerly occupied the site of Sydney
may now be seen sitting by the way side, a paralytic, soliciting
alms from passers by, and this he does from choice, rather than
enter the Benevolent Asylum. Those who drive by in their
carriages along the South Head Road often throw him a sixpence
or so, and thus he is bountifully provided for in his native and
beloved stale of freedom.
Under such circumstances, the translation of the Gospel by St.
Luke can only be now a work of curiosity,* — a record of the
language of a tribe that once existed, and would have, otherwise,
been numbered with those nations and their forgotten languages,
and peoples with their unknown tongues, who have passed away
from this globe and are buried in oblivion.
Elliot, the missionary to the North American Indians, made a
translation of the Scriptures into their language, which has recently
been published ; but only one Indian now remains who knows
that dialect.
This translation of the Gospel of Luke into the language of the
aborigines, was made by me with the assistance of the intelligen.t
aboriginal, M'Gill, whose history is attached. f Thrice I wrote it,
and he and I went through it sentence by sentence, and word
for word, while I explained to him carefully the meaning as we
proceeded. M'Gill spoke the English language fluently. The
third revisal was completed in 1831. I then proceeded with the
Gospel of Mark, a selection of prayers from the Book of Common
Prayer, with which to commence public worship with the few sur-
viving blacks ; I prepared a Spelling book ; I had also commenced
the Gospel of Matthew, when the mission was brought to its final
close.
Not long ago, I accidentally found at a book-stall a copy of the
first specimens of an Australian language, which I published some
* Our author did not know that his Awabakal blacks were only a sub-
tribe, and that their brethren, for some hundreds of miles along the coast
to the north and south of Lake Macquarie, spoke a language which is
essentially the same. Northwards from the Hunter River to the Macleay,
tliis language is still spoken. — Ed.
t See page 88.— Ed,
IHE author's PHITACE. 127
time in 1826 ; this was done to satisfy my friends of tlie impro-
priety of introducing the English sound of the vowels instead of
those of the Continent, which are also in use in the South Sea
Islands.
This present copy of the Gospel by Luke is the fourth re-written
revisal of the work, and yet it is not offered as a perfect transla-
tion ; it can only be regarded by posterity as a specimen of the
language of the aborigines of Noav Holland, or, as a simple monu-
mental tablet, on which might be truthfully inscribed, as regards
the unprofitable servant who attempted to ameliorate the pitiable
condition of the aborigines and attain a knowledge of their lan-
guage : — " He has done what he could."
L. E. THRELKELD,
Ministei'.
Sydney, New South Wales,
loth August, 1857.
[Note. — The original manuscript was illuminated for Sir George Grey
by Annie Layard, daughter of Sir A. H. Layard, the explorer of Nineveh.
The original title page is this : —
EVANGELION
UNNI TA
JESU-IJM-BA CHRIST-KO-BA.
UPATOARA
LOUKA-UMBA.
Translated into the language of the aborigines, located in the
vicinity of Hunter's Eiver, Lake Macquarie, &c., New South
Wales, in the year 1831, and further revised by the translator,
L. E. Threlkeld, Minister, 1857.— Ed.]
EUANGELION upatoara LUKA-UMBA.
WINTA I.
WoNTO ba kauwallo mankulla unnoa tara tugunbilliko gurrdnto
geen kinba,
2. Yanti bo gearun kin bara gukulla, unnoa tara nakillikan
kurri-kiirri kabirug gatun mankillikan wiyellikanne koba.
3. Murrarag tia katan yantibo, koito bag ba tuig ko giroug,
Teopolo munaiag ta,
4. Grurra-uwil koa bi tuloa, unnoa tara wiyatoara banug ba.
5. Yanti-kalai ta Herod noa kakulla, Piriwal noa kakuUa lu-
daia ka, kakulla noa tarai f hiereu Dhakaria yitirra, Abia-timba ko-
nara : gatun nukug gikoumba yinalkun koba Aaron-umba, giakai
bountoa yitirra Elidhabet.
6. Buloara bula kakulla murrarag Eloi kin, mikan ta gurrai-
yell^un bula Yeli6a-ko noa ba wiyellikanne yarakai ma korien.
7. Keawaran bula wonnai korien kulla, bountoa Elidhabet gur-
rauwai ; gatun bula ba gurrogbai kakulla.
8. Gratun yakita kakulla, umulliela noa ba Eloi kin makan ta,
yirrug ka gikoug kin fhiereu koba,
9. Yanti kiloa f liiereu koba uman, yirrug ka gikoumba ta upulli-
ko bon porapora koiyug ko uwa noaba fnao koba Yehoa kai koba.
10. Gatun yanti bo yantinto konara kiiri wiyelliela warai ta
yakita winelliela ba porapora. "
11. Gatun paipea noa fagelo Yehoa-umba gikoug kin, garokil-
liela noa tugkagkirri ka koiyug kon ta porapora ka.
12. Gatun nakulla bon noa ba Dhakaria ko, unma bon noa ba,
kinta gaiya noa ba kakulla.
13. Wonto ba agelo wiya noa, Kinta kora bi kauwa, Dhakaria j
kulla gurra ta wiyellikanne giroiiniba, gatun nukug ko giroumba
ko wonnai kaniin giroumba, gatun wiyanun bi giakai yitirra loanne.
14. Gatun pital bi kantin, pital kauwalkan kaniin porkullin'in
gikoug kinbirug.
15. Kauwal wal noa kaniin, mikan ta Yehoa kin, gatun keawai
wal noa fwain pitaniin, keawai tarere, gatun warakag wal noa wit-
elliniin Marai yirriyirri kan birug ko, waraka birug tunkan ta birug.
16. Gatun noa wiyanun wal barunkauwal-kauwal wonnai Itha-
rael-umba Yehoa-kin ko Eloi ta barunba.
+ This maik is placed before all common nouns which are adapted from
Greek, Latin, or English ; whichever equivalent word in these languages
suits the aboriginal tongue best, that word I have introduced into the text.
In the original text, many of the borrowed words, and especially the proper
names, could not be pronounced by a native black. — Ed.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 1. 129
17. Gratun wal noa uwanim gikong kin mikan ta kaiyu ka
Marai ta Elia-umba, warbuggulliko bulbul biyugbai tara koba
wounai kolag, gatun barun kiako tuloa kako; iima-uwil koa baruu
kiiri kurrikurri Yehoa kinko.
18. Gratun noa Dhakariako wiya bon agelonug, Yakoai kan bag
gurraniin unni 1 kulla bag gurrogbai, gatun nukug emmouinba
gurrog geen.
19. Gatun noa ageloto wiya bon, Gatoa Gabriel, gakillin Eloi
kin mikan ta ; gatun yuka tia wiyelliko giroug, gatun tugun-
billiko gali tara ko pitaluiuUikanne ko.
20. A ! gurrulla bi, gog ko wal bi kaniin, gatun kaiyu korien
wal bi kauun wiyelli ta, yaki-kalai tako purreag kako unni tara
kanun ba, kulla bi ba gurra korien wiyellikanne emmoiiniba, kabo
kanun wal unni tara.
21. Gatun bara kiiri ko mittia Dhakarianug, gatun kotelliela
minnug-bulliela noa tunkea noa fnao ka.
22. Gatun noa ba paikulleiin warrai ta, kaiyu korien noa wiyelli
ko barun ; gatun bara gurra Marai noa nakulla fnao ba; kulla noa
wauwal-wauwal uma barun gatun, garokilliela noa gog ko.
23. Gatun kirun kabulla purreag gikoumba umullikanne, waita
gaiya noa uwa kokera ko gikoug ka tako.
24. Gatun yukita purreag ka Elidhabet gikoumba nukug wara-
kag bountoa, gatun yuropulleimbountoa wai-iin yellenna ka, wiyel-
liela bountoa,
2-5. Yanti noa tia Yehdako umd nakulla noa tia ba purreag
ka, mankilliko barun ba beelmulli tin kiiri tin.
26. Tarai ta yellenna ka fliek ka, Gabi^iel ta agelo ta puntimai
ta wiyabunbia bon Eloi kinbirug uwolliko, purrai kolag Galilaia
koba, giakai Nadbaret,
27. Mirial lako wiyatoaia ko, kiiri kako Yotliep kinko yitirra
ko, wonnai taro noa Dabidiimba ; gatun mirral giakai yitiri'a Mari,
28. Gatun noa agelo uwa bounnoun kin, gatun wiyelliela, A !
murrarag umatoara bi Yehoa katan giroug katoa ba ; murrai'ag
umatoara bi nukug ka.
29. Gatun bountoa ba nakulla bon, kinta bountoa kakulla wi-
yellita gikoug kin, gatun kotelliela bountoa minarig unni totog
katan.
30. Gatun ageloko wiya bounnoun, Kinta kora bi, Mari : kulla
bin pitalmatoara Eloito noa.
31. A, gurralia bi, warakfig bi kaniin, wonnai kan giroug kin
pika ka, gatun yinal p6rkullinun, gatun bi giakai yitirra lETHU.
32. Gatun wal noa kauwal kaniin, gatun wal bon wiyamin gia
kai Yinal ta wokka ka ko ; gatun noa Yelioako Eloito giintin wa.
bon yellawollikanne biyugbai koba Dabidumba gikoumba :
33. Gatun noa wiyanun wal yanti-katai barun Yakobiimba; ga-
tun gikoumba piriwalkanne keawai wal kaniin wirdn.
130 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
34. Wiya gaiya bountoa bon agelonug Mariko, Yakoai ke unni
kamin, kulla bag kiiri korien 1
35. G-atiin noa ageloko wiya bounnouu, Taiian wal noa uwanua
Maraikan murraragkan giroug kinko, gatun kaiyuko wokka tinto
wutinun wal giroug, koito ba unnoa ta murranig porkullinuii gir-
oug kin ; wiyaniin giakai yinal ta Eloi koba.
36. A, gurralia, giroumba wuggunbai Elidhabel, warakag l)Oiin-
toa yinal gurrogeen koba bounnoun ba ; gatun unni ta yellenna
fhek ta bounnoun-kai-kan wiyatoara gurra-uwai.
37. Kulla gurakito ke noa Eloito kaiyukanto ke.
38. Gratun bountoa Mariko wiya, Kauwc'i yanti kamunbilla tia
wiya bi ba ; gatoa mankillikan Yehoa-iimba. G-atun noa agelo pun-
tirkulleiin bounnoun kinbirug.
39. Gratun bountoa Mari bugkulleun unti-tara purreag ka, gatun
uwa bountoa karakai bulkara kolag, kokera ko Yuda kako ;
40. Gratun bountoa uwa kokera ko Dhakaria-umba kako, gatun
bugbiig ka bounnoun Elidliabetnug.
41. Gatun yakita gaiya gurra bountoa ba Elidliabetto pulli Mari-
umba, tulutilleun gaiya wonnai bounnoun kin pika ka ; gatun
Avai'apal bounnoun ba Elidhabet kin Maraikanto murraragko :
42. Gratun bountoa wiyelleun pulli wokka wiyelliela, murrarag
umatoara bi nukug ba; gatun murrarag umatoara peil giroumba
pika koba.
43. Gatun minarig tin tia unni, tanan uwa tunkan piriwal koba
emmoiimba 1
44. Kulla bag ba gurra pulli giroumba gurreug ka emmoug
kin, wonnai gaiya tia tulutilleun emmoug kin pika ka pital ko.
45. Gatun murrarag umatoara bountoa gurra; kulla unnoa
tara kanuii umatoara, wiyatoara bounnoun kin Yehoa kinbirug.
46. Gatun Mariko bountoa wiya, " Maraito eramoumba ko wi-
yan murrai bon Yehoanug,
47. Gatun maraito emmoumba ko pital umulleun Eloi kin Miro-
ma emmoumba.
48. Kulla noa nakulla mirial bountoa ba umullikan glkoumba:
A, unti birug yantinto tia wiyanun murrarag upatoara.
49. Kulla noa tia kaiyukanto unnoa tara kauwal uma; gatun
yitirroa gikoumba murrarag upatoara katan.
50. Gatun murrai gikoumba barun kiuba kintakan bon katan
willuggel kiu-i kabirug tarai kuri kabirug.
51. Tugunbilleuu noa kaiyukan turrug gikoumba ; wupea noa
barun garug gara yaroyaro bulbiil ban kotellikanne.
52. Upea noa baran parran kaiyukan yellawolligel labirug bar-
iinba, gatun wupea noa barun mirral wokka lag.
53. Gukulla noa kapirrikan ko murrarag ta ; gatun noa barun
pai'olkau yuka mii'ral ko.
54. Umulleun noa gikoumba umullikan Itharaelnug, guiTulli bi-
rug gikoug kinbirug murrai ta gikoumba;
THE GOSPEL BV LUKt;, C.
1. 131
55. Yanti wiya noa ba baruu Liyugbai to gearuuba, Abarani-
nug, gatun bavuii wonnai tara gikoumba yanti katai."
56. G-atun Mai-i bountoa kakulla bounnoun katoa goro ka yellen-
na ka, gatuu wiling ba gaiya bountoa bounnoun ka tako kokera ko.
57. Yakita gaiya Elidbabetiimba kakulla Avonnai iDorkullinun ;
gatun yinal bounnoun ba porkulleun.
58. G-atun gurra bara k6tita ko bounnoun bako, yanti Yelioa-
ko noa ba muriarag uma bounnoun kin; gatun bara pital kakulla
gatun bountoa.
59. G-atun yakita gaiya purreag ka, uwa gaiya bara kulla-
bulliko wonnai ko; gatun bara wiya bon giakai Dhakaria, biyugbai
tin yitirra tin.
60. G-atun tunkanto wiya bountoa, Yanoa ; kulla bon wiyanuu
giakai loanne.
61. G-atun bara bounnoun wiya, Keawaran giroumba kotita wi-
ya ba giakai unni yitirra.
62. G-atun bara tuga umulleuu bon biyugbai ko gikovimba ko,
wonnen noa bon yitirra wiyanun 1
63. G-atun noa wiya upulligel ko, gxtun noa upa wiyelliela,
Yitirra noa giakai loanne. G-atun bara yantinto kota.
64. G-atun tanoa-kal-bo kurraka bugkulleiin gikoumba, gatun
bon gikoumba tallag balbal kakulla, gatun noa wiya, gatun noa
wiya mui'rai Eloinug.
65. G-atun bara kiuta kakulla yantin ta untakal; gatun unni tara
wiyellikanne totog kakulla yantin ta kalog koa bulkaroa Yuda ka.
66. G-atun bara yantinto unnoa tara gurra wunkulla barun kin
biilbiil la, wiyelliela, Yakoai unni ta wonnai kaniin ! G-atun mattara
Yehoa-umba gikoug kin katan.
67. G-atun noa Dhakaria ko biyugbai gikoumba, warapal bon
wiipea Marai to yirriyirri to, gatun noa wiyelliela giakai,
6"^. " Kamunbilla bon Yelioanug Eloinug Itbarael koba pital-
liko ; kulla noa uwa barun nakilliko, gatun wirrilliko kuri ko
gikoug kaiko.
69. G-atun bougbugga noa nulka-nulka golomullikan gearun,
kokera Dabid-umba ka gikoumba mankillikan ;
70. Yanti noa ba wiya kurraka ko fpropet koba ko yirriyirri-
kan to yantin to, ])urrai yantin kurrikurri kabirug :
71. G-oloma-iiwil koa gearun geai'unba bukka tukulla biiiig,
gatun mattara birug barun kinbirug yantin tabirug yarakai wil-
ing kabirug,
72. Umulliko murrai ko wiyatoara barun kin biyugbai ko
geari'inba, gatun gurrulliko gikoumba wiyatoai'a yirriyirri ta ;
73. Pirral-man noa gali wiyelliela bon Abai'amnug biyugbai ge-
ariinba,
74. G-iiwil koa gearun noa, mankilliko gearun mattara biriig
bukkakan tabirug geariinba, gurra-uwil koa geen bon kinta kc-
riea ko,
132 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
75. Yirriyirrikan gatun murraragkan mikan ta gikoug kin, yan-
tin ta puireag ka moron geariinba.
76. Gratun gintoa, wonnai ta, wiyanun Lin yitirra fpropet ta
wokka kako ; kullabi iiwauiia ganka mikan ta Yelioakin, upulliko
yajTug ko gikoumba ;
77. Grakilliko gurrulliko moron ko gikoug kaiko kiiri ko, ware-
wavekan yarakai barunba,
78. INIurrai tin kauwollin Eloi koba tin gearunba, gurrakan
wokka kaVjirug tanan uwa gearun kinko,
79. G-ukilliko purreag barun ko yellawolli ta ba ko gorogord
ba ko, gatun komirra kaba tetti koba, yutilliko tinna ko gearunba
ko yapug koa pitdl koba koa.
80. G-atun wonnai poaikulleun, gatun guraki noa maraikan ko,
kulla noa korug koa yakita ko purreag kako paip^a noa ba Itbarael
kinko.
WINTA 11.
Yakita purreag ka, wiya noa Kaitbariko Augutoko, upa-uwil koa
bara yantin kuri murrapulliko.
2. G-atun unni mui'rapullikanne una yakita Kurinio noa ba f ko-
bana kakulla Thuria ka.
3. G-atun yantin bara uwa murrapulliko bari;n ka tako.
4. Gatun noa Yothep uwa wokka-lag Galilaia kabirug, kokera
birug Nadharet tabirug, ludaia kolag, kokera kolag Dabidumba
kolag, giakai yitirra Bethlehem ; (kulla noa kokera koba gatun
kotita koba Dabidumba;)
5. Murrapulliko bon gatun Marl bounnoun katoa, wiyatoara
nukiig gikoumba, wonnai kau bountoa warakag.
6. Gatun yakita kakulla, kakulla bara ba unta, purreag ka
katan p6rkulli'koa bountoa ba wonnai.
7. Gatun bountoa porbuggulleun kurri-kurri yinal, gatun boun-
toa muggama bon kirikin to, gatun bon wunkuUa takilligella butti-
kag koba ka ; kulla wal tantuUan kokera takilligel.
8. Gatun bara fcipu-kal untoa kakulleiin, tumimillin wirral ba-
run ba tokoi ta.
9. Gatun noa agelo Yeh6a-uraba tanan uwa barun kin, gatun
kullaburra Yehoa-umba kakulla barun katoa; kinta gaiya bara ka-
kulla.
10. Gatun noa ageloko wiya barun, Kinta kora ; kulla nurun
bag wiyan murrarag totog kakilliko pital ko, kakilliko yantin ko
ktiri ko.
11. Kulla nurunba p6rkulleun unni purreag, kokera Dabid-
umba ka, GolomuUikan ta, noa Kritht ta Piriwal ta.
12. Gatun unni tiiga kanun nurunba; nanun nura bobognug
gamatoara kirikin taba, kakillin ba takilligel laba.
13. Gatun tanoa k;il bo paipea konara morokokal gikoug katoa
agelo katoa, muriarag wiyellin bon Eloinug, giakai.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 2. 133
14. Wiyaliiuibilla bon mumirag Eloinug wokka kaba inoroko
kaba, gatun kainunbilla pital purrai tako, murrarag umatoara ba-
run kiiri ko.
15. Gratun kakiilla ba, waita uwa bara ba, agelo barun kinbirug
moroko kolag, wi3'ellan bara fcipu-kal taraikan-taraikan, Waita
geen yakita Bethlehem kolag, na-uwil koa imnug tara kakulla ba,
gala Yehoako noa wiya gearun.
16. G-atun bara uwa kurrakai, gatun nakvilla Marinug, gatun
bobog pirikilliehx takilligel laba.
17. G-atun nakulla bara ba, wiyabunbea bara yantin ta purrai
ta unnoa wiyellikanne wiyatoanx barun wonnai tin.
18. G-atun bara yantinto gurra, kotelliela vxnnug tara, wiya ba-
run bara f 6ipu-kal-lo.
19. Wonto ba bountoa Mariko miroma unni tara, gatun kota
bountoa minki ka billbul-la bounnoun kin.
20. Gatun bara f cipu-kal willug ba kakxTlhx, murrarag wiyellin
gatun pitalmullin bon Eloinug gala birug natoara birug gurra-
toara birug bara yantita wiyatoara ba barun kai.
21. Gatun purreag fet ta kakulla ba, kuUintiela ko iuga-witia
wonnai, giakai bon wiya lethu, gala ba wiya noa ageloko kurri-
kurri noa ba pika ka kakulla kunto ka.
22. G-atun purreag ka goloin ta killibinbin bounnoun ba, yanti
Mothe-ko noa ba wiya, mankulla bara bon fHierothalem kolag, gu-
killiko bon Yehoa kin ;
23. (Yanti Avupa ba wiyellikanne ta Yehoa-iimba giakai, Yantin
kiiri tara ganka-ganka pika kabirug yirri-yirri wal kaniin yitirroa
Yehoa koba ;)
24. Gatun gukilliko gutoara, gala wupa ba wiyellikanne taba
Yeh6a-umba, giakai, Buloara purrougkan ga keawai wurogbuloara
poppolameri.
25. A ! gatun kakulla noa tarai kuri fHierothalem kaba, giakai
noa yitirra Thimeon; gatun unnoa kiiri wiyellikan tuloakan, gatun
gurrullikan, mittillin pital ko Itharael-iimba ko ; gatun Marai yir-
ri-yirri-kan kakulla gikoug kin.
26. Gatun bon wiyatoara Maraito yirri-yirri-kan-to, keawai noa
naniin tettibullikanne, na-uwil koa noa Krithtnug Yehoa-iimba.
27. Gatun noa uwa Marai toa f hieron kako : gatun bula ba pori-
kullaito ]iuruma wonnai lethu kin, umulliko bon yanti ko upato-
ara ko wiyellikanne tako,
28. Mankulla gaiya bon noa gikoug kin turrug ka, gatun pital-
ma noa bon Eloinug, gatun wiyelliela,
29. "Wamunbilla bi tia Yehoa yakita pitalkan, yanti wiya bi
ba:
30. Kulla bag nakulla gaikug ko golomullikan glroiimba,
31. Gali ko kakilliko gintoa yantin ko kiiri ko mikan tako ;
32. Kaibug kakilliko barun fethanekal ko, gatun pital kakilliko
kuri ko Itharael giroiimba ko."
134 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
33. Gratun bula Yotliep gatuu Maii kotelliela unnoa wiyatoara
gikoiig kai.
34. G-atun Tliimeon ta noa pit alma barun, gatun wiyelliela Ma-
rinug tuiikan gikoi'imba, "Alkataunoa unni wonnai kakilliko
puntimulliko, gatun bougkuUiko kauw al-kauwal baruuba Itl arael
kuba ; gatun tuga ko wiyea kanun ;
35. (Kauwa, yirrako bin turanun wal marai giroumba k6ti,)
paipi-uwil koa kotatoara biilbul labirug kauual-kauwal labirug."
36. Gratun kakulla wakal Anna, fpropetkun, yinalkun Panuel
koba, konara koba Ather koba; bountoa ta gurrogeen gagkakalin,
gatun kakulla bountoa poribai ta wunalla fhepta ta, murrakinta-
birug bountoa katalla;
37. Gratun bountoa mabnguu kukulla wunal la f ety-wara yanti-
kalai tabirug, waita uwa korien bountoa fliieron kabirug, wonto
ba gurrulliela Eloinug bon pum ag ka gatun tokoi ta ta-korien.
38. Gratun bountoa uwolliela tauoa-kal-bo, wiyapaiye'm bon Ye-
hoanug, gatun wiyelliela yantin barun gikoug kin barun^ nakilli-
kan gupaiyiko fHierothalem kako.
39. Gratun upa bara ba unni tara yanti wiyatoara Yelioa koba,
willugbo gaiya bara kakulla Galilaia kako, barun ka tako koti kako
NadLaret tako.
40. Gratun w^onnai poaikulleiin guraki noa maraikan katan ; ga-
tun pilalmatoara bon Eloi koba.
41. Waita uwa bula gikoumba tunkan gatun biyugbai Hierotha-
lem kolag yanti-katai wunal la takilligel lako kaiwitoara wokka
koa.
42. Gratun noa ba wural la fdodeka ka, waita gaiya uwa bara
fHiprothalem kolag wirikai ko takilli ko.
43. Gratun kirun kakulla purn ag, willugbo bara ba, wonnai
lutliu noa niinka willug ka fPlierothalem ka ; gatun noa Yotliep-
ko gatun tunkanto gurra korien bula.
44. Wonto bara ba punta bon barun kin konara, uwa purreag
ka wakal la ; gatun bara bon tiwa k6ti ta ka.
45. Gratun bara na korien bon ba, willugbo gaiya bara kateakiin
fHierothalem kolag tiwolliko bon.
46. Gratun purrtag ka goro kulla, nakulla gaiya bara bon mui'-
rug ka fhieron ka, yellawoUiela willi ka barun kin fdidathkaloi
ka, gurrulliela barun, gatun wiyelliela barun wiyellikanne pulli.
47. Gratun yantinto bara bon gurra, kotelliela bara bon guraki
gatun wiyatoara gikoiiniba.
48. Gratun nakulla bara bon ba, unma gaiya barun ; gatun tunkan-
to grkouniba-ko wiya bon, Nai, rainarig tin bi kakulla gearun kai 1
a ! biyug ta uw^a ball, tiwolliela ball bin, niinki-kan-to.
49. Gratun noa wiya barun, Minarig tin nura tia tiwolliela?
keawai nura ba gurran-upa-uwil koa bag pintuniimba-kan wiya
'noa tia ba 1
50. Gatun bara gurra korien unnoa wiyelli ta wiya noa ba barun.
THE OOSTEL GY LUKE, C. 2. 135
51. Gratun iioa uwa barun katoa baran Nadharet take, gatun
gurrullikan noa kakulla barun kin : wonto boiintoa ba tunkan
to gikoiimba raii-oma unni tara wiyellikanne murrug ka bulbul
la bounnoun kin.
5l\ Gratun noa lethuko poaikuJleun gurakikakilliko, gatun kau-
wal kakilliko, gatun pitahnuUiko bon iiloito gatun kiiriko.
WINTA III.
Yakita kakulla wum'il la fpipatinta piriwal koba Tiberio Kaitliar
koba, fkobana noa Pontio Pilato ludaia ka, gatun tetrak noa Herod
Galilaia ka, gatun gikoihnba kuti Pilip tetrak noa Iturea ka, gatun
yantin tako Trakoniti ka, gatun Luthanio tetrak noa Abilene ka,
2. Annath gatun Kaiapath fhiereu piriwal bula kakulla, wiyel-
likanne Eloi koba uwa loanne kinko bon, yinal Dhakaria kola,
korug kaba.
3. Gratun noa uwa yantin toa purrai toa loi adan toa, wiyelliela
korimulliko kanumaiko, warekuUiko yarakai ;
4. Yanti wupaitoara ybiblion ka wiyellikanne Ethaia koba fpro-
pet koba, glakai, Pulli wakal koba wiyelleun korug kaba, Yapug
Yehuakobamurrarag umulla nura, tuloa kakillikoyapuggikouniba.
5. Yantin ta pilabai warapal upiniin, gatun yantin ta bulkara
unianun puntig ; gatun warin-warin ta unjaniin tuloa, gatun yapug
yarakai wollugbiara umanun poitog ;
6. Gratun yantinto nanun wal golomullikanne Eloi koba.
7. Wiya gaiya noa barun konara uwa bara korimulliko gikong
kinko, Ela beara ! konara maiya kiloa nura ! ganto nurun wiya
niurralliko bukka tin tanan ba uwanun?
8. Koito nura ba umullia raurrarag minki kabirug; gatun ko-
,ta yikora nura koti ka minki ka nurun kin wiyelliko, Abaram
gearun noa gearunba biyugbai • kulla bag wiyan nurun, Eloi noa
kaiyukan katan umulliko unti tara birug tuniig kabirug wonnai
kakilliko Abaram kinko.
9. Gatun yakita baiV)ai wunkuUa kulai ta wirra ka ; koito ba
yantin kulai keawai katan murrai'ag k61buntil!anun wal baran,
warekulliko koiyug kako.
10. Gratun kiiriko bon wiya, wiyelliela, Minnug banun gaiya geen?
11. Wiya noa barun, wiyelliela, Niuwoa fkot-kan buloai'akan
gikoumba, gumunbilla bon keawai ko; gatun niuwoa kimtokan gu-
miinbilla bon yanti kiloa.
12. Uwa gaiya bara ftelone korimulliko, gatun wiya bon, Piri-
wal, minnug baniin geen ?
13. Gratun noa wiya barun, Manki yikora untoa-kal unnoabo
mara wiyatoara nurunba.
14. Gratun bara farmy-kanko wiya bon wiyelliela, Minnug baniin
geen? gatun noa wiya barun, Bukkamai yikora yantin kiiri, gatun
wiy(ia-yemmai yikora gakoyellaikan yantin kiiri ; gatun murrai
kauwa nura galoakan gutourakan nurunba.
13G AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
15. Gratun bara ba kiiri kotelliela, gatun yantinto kuriko ko-
telliela niurrug ka ba ko, bulbul la ba ko barun kin ba ko gik6-
ug loanneiiug, miiiarig noa Kritht ta, mirka keawaran.
16. loauneto noa wiya barun yantin ta, wiyelliela, Korimulliko
bag katan nurun bato ko ; wonto ba wakal kaiyukan kaiiwal-kau-
walkan gatoa kiloa uwaniin, niuvrarag korien bag porugbuggulli-
ko tugganug ko glkouniba ko; niuwoa ta korimanun nurun Marai
to yirri-yirri ko gatun koiyugko :
17. fPituon gikoumba mankillin mattara ba, gatun murkun noa
umanun bunkilligel laba gikoumba, gatun noa ka-umaniin fwiet
gikoumba tako kokera ko ; wonto ba tirri koiyug-banun wal noa
koiyug ka talokulli korien ta.
18. Tarai ta yantin kauwal-kauwal wiya noa: gatun wiyelli ta
ba ko barun kiiri.
19. Wonto noa ba Herodnug ftetraknug pirahna bon, noa boun
noun kin Herodia kin nukug ka Pilip-iimba gikoumba koti koba,
gatun yantin yarakai noa ba uma Herodto,
20. Yanti unni uma, Avirrigbakulki bon noa loannenug tjail ka.
21. Yakita barunbo karima yantin kuri, kakulla gaiya kori-
mulliela bon letliunug, gatun wiyelliela, moroko gaiya warugkal-
leun,
22. Gratun uwa baran Maraikan yirri-yirrikan murrin kiloa pur-
rougkan kiloa, gikoug kin; gatun wakal pulli kakulla moroko
tin, wiyelliela, Grintoa ta emmoumba yinal pitalmullikanne ; pital-
man bag giroug.
23. Gratun niuwoa bo I6thu kakilliliela wunal la f triakontaka gi-
ko-iimba, puntelliela bon yinal Yothepumba, wonto yinal Eli-umba;
ikc, (fee,
38. Wonto yinal Enoth-iimba, wonto yinal Thet-umba, wonto
yinal Adam-umba, wonto yinal Eloi-iimba.
WINTA IV.
GrATUN noa lethu warapalkan Maraikan yirri-yirri-kan, willugbo
kakulla loradan tabirug, gatun bon yutea Maraito korug kolag,
2. Nupitoara bon purreag ka f tettarakonta ka fdiabollo. Gratun
unta tai'a purreag ka keawai noa ta ba : gatun goloin ba unta
tara kakulla, kapirri gaiya noa kakulla.
3. Gratun noa fdiabollo wiya bon, Wiya, bi ba yinal Eloi koba,
wiyellia unni tunug ka-uwil koa kunto.
4. Gatun noa lethuko bon wiya, wiyelliela, Wupatoara ta, Kea-
wai kuri kanun moron kunto kabirug, wonto ba Eloi koba pulli
tabirug.
.5. Gratun noa fdiabollo yutea bon waita bulkarii ko, nanunbea
bou yantin piriwal koba purrai ta ba tanoa-kal-bo kurrakai.
G. Gratun noa fdiabollo wiya bon, yantin kaiyu kako gunun bag
giroug, gatun pitalmulliko gali tara ko ; koito ba gukuUa tia em-
moug ; gatun bag gutan ganiimbo pital bag ba katan.
THK GOSPEL liY LUKE, C. 4. 137
7. Grintoa ba wiyanun tia, kaniin bin yantin giroumba.
8. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Kauwa bi, Thatan, willug ka
emmougkin ; koito ba wupatoara, Wiyanun wal bi Yeh(3amig giro-
umba Eloinug, gatun gikoug bo gurranim wal bi.
9. Gatun noa bon yutea fHierothalem kolag, gatun wiinkulla bon
bulwarra ka fhieron ka, gatun wiya bon, Yinalla bi ba unni Eloi-
koba, warekulla bi unti birug bardn :
10. KuUa ba wupatoava ta, Wiyanun noa bax'un agelo ko nakilli-
ko giroug, golomulliko girorig;
11. Gatun bara bin nianiin matturro wokka lag, tinna koa gi-
roug pultea-kiin tunug ko yantin ta.
12. Gatun lethuko, \Niyelliela, wiya bon, Wiyatoara ta, Yanoa
wal bi numa yikora bon Yeli6anug Eloinug giroumba.
13. Gatun noa fdiabollo goloin kakulla unni tara nupatoara,
waita gaiya noa uwa gikoug kinbirug yakita ko.
14. Gatun noa lethuko willug ko kakulla, kaiyukan Maraikan,
Galilaia kako: gatun totog bon kakulla yantin ta purrai karig ka.
15. Gatun noa wiyelliela fthunagcig ka barun ka ta, pilal wiya-
toara bon yantinto.
16. Gatun noa uwa Nadharet tako, kakulla noa poaikulleim unta;
gatun, yanti katai noa ba, uwa noa fthunagog kako purreiig ka
thabbat, gatun garokea wokka lag wiyelliko.
17. Gatun gukulla bon fbiblion ta fpropet koba Ethaia koba :
gatun bugbugga noa ba fbiblion, nakulla gaiya noa giakai upatoara,
18. Marai ta unni Yeh6a koba emmoug kinba, kulla noa tia putia
wiyelliko Euagelion barun kin mirral la; yuka noa tia turon umulli-
ko niinkikan ko, wiyelliko barun wiintoara ko wamunbilliko, gatun
na-uwil koa bara munmin to, burug-buggulliko barun buntoara,
19. Wiyelliko * * * gurrabunbilliko wunal la pitalmullikanne
Yeh6a koba.
20. Gatun noa wirrig-bugga fbiblion, gatun noa gutea kan bon
umullikan ko, gatun yellawa baran, Gatun bara bon pimilliela
gaikug ko, yantin fthunagog ka ba ko.
21. Gatun noa barun tanoa bo wiya, Turin-pai-bea unni wiya
upatoara nurun kin gurreug ka unti purreag ka.
22. Gatun yantinto baiu gurrulliela bon, gatun kota bara pulli
murrai kurraka kabirug gikoug kinbirug. Gatun bara wiya, Wiya,
unni ta Yothepumba yinal 1
23. Gatun noa barun wiya, Nura ta wiyanun tia unni wiyelli-
kanne, Karj'ikal, turon bi umulla gintoa bo; gurra geen ba umatoara
Kapernaum ka, umulla bi unti yantin ta purrai ta giroumba ka.
24. Gatun noa wiya, Tuloa nurun bag wiyan, keawai fpropet
garrk korien gikoug ka ta purrai ta koti ka.
25. Wonto bag ba nurun wiyan tuloa, kauwal-kauwal ta mabo-
gun Itharael kuUeun purreag ka Elia-umba ka, yakita wirrigba-
kulla moroko ta wunal ta goro gatun yellenna f hek ta, tara-wara
kakulla yantin ta purrai karig ka ;
]38 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
26. Keawai Eliamig ynka ha barun kinko, wonto ba TLare})ta
kako Tliidoui kako iiukug kako niaboguu tako.
27. G itun kauMa'-kau%va'.kaii fleprokan Itliai-ael ka, yaki-kalai
Elicu koba fpropet koba ; keawaraii wakal baruu kinbirug turon
umatoara, wonto ba noa Naaruan Tliiu'iakal.
28. Gratuii yantin bara kakulla ftliuiiagog ka, gurra bara uiiui
tara, biikka kauwal kakulla,
29. Cratun bougkulltiia, gatun yipa bon kokei'a birug, gatun boii
yutea pita kako bulkara ko kokera ko wittitoara ko, wareka uwil
koa bara bon walkiggon baran.
30. Wonto noa ba uwolliela willi koa barun katoa, waita uwa.
31. G.itun noa uwa banin Ka]:»ernaiim kako, kokera ko Gali-
laia kako, gatun wiyelliela barun purrtag ka thabbat ka.
32. Q- itun bara kota wiyellikanne tin gikovimba tin ; kulla giko-
Umba pnlli kaiyukan.
33. Gr.itun kakulla wakal kiiri fthunagog ka, gikoug kin minki
ka marai kakulla fdiabol koba yarakai koba, gatun noa kaipulleiiri
wokka,
3-1. Wiyelliela, Ka uunbilla gearun; minnng baniia geen l»in gin-
toa letlni Nadharetkal? uwa bi gearun tetti-umulli koiag ? gimillin
bamig giutoa ta ; wakal bo ta yirri-yiri'i-kan Eloi koba.
35. G-itun bon lethuko koakuUa, wiyelliela, Kaiyellia bi, gatun
paikullea gikoug kinbirug. Gatun bon ba wareka willi ka fdiabol-
lo, paikullean noa gikoug kinbirug, gatun keawai bon tetti bun-
tima ba.
36. Gatun bara yantinto kota, gatun wiyelliela barabo-barabo,
Minarig unni wiyellikanne ! kulla noa wiya kaiyu-kan-to barun
tdiabolinig yarakaikan, gatun barun paikulleun warrai tako.
37. Gatun toti'ig gikoumba kakulla yantin toa purrai karig koa.
38. Gatun noa uwa fthunagog kabirug, gatun polugkulleuu Thi-
mon kinko kokera ko. Gatun tunkan Tlumonumlia nukug koba
luunni kakulla karinkan; g itun bon bara wiya bounnoun kai kolag.
39. Gatun noa garokea bounnoun kin tui'rugka, gatun noa koa-
kuUa karin; gatun wareka gaiya bounnoun karinto; gatun bountoa
bougkullean tanoa-kal-ljo, gatun umuUiela barun kaiko.
40. (jratun puniial ba pulug-kullile an, yantin bara niankulla niun-
ni-munni-kan gikoug kinko ; gitun noa wupilleJin barun kin mat-
tara yantin ta, gatun turon uma barun.
41. Gatun fdiabol kauwal-kauwal ]jaikulleun kauwal-kauwal la-
birug, kaibulliela, Gintoa ta Kritht ta, yinal ta Eloi-koba. Gatun
noa barun koakulla wiya korien ; kulla wal bara gimilltun bon
Kritht ta noa unnoa.
42. Gatun purr( ag ba kakulla, waita noa uwa korarig ; gatun
bara kiiriko tiwa bon, gatun uwa gikoug kin, gatun numa bara
bon, keawai noa waita wapa barun kinbirug.
43. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyanun bo ta wal bag piriwa^gel
la Eloi koba taraikan ta kokera ; kulla wal tia giliko yuka.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 5. 139
WINTA Y.
Gatun yakita kakulla, warapa bon ba bara kuriko, garrulliko wiyel-
likanne Eloi koba, garokea noa pitta ka waraka Gennetliaret ta,
2. Gratun nakulla buloara murrinauwai kakilliela wara ka; won-
to ba bara niakorobau waita uwa murrinauwai tabirug. gatun bai'a
umulliela pika uiirkun.
3. Gatuii noa uwa wakal la murrinauwai ta Thimon koba ka,
gatun wiya bon yogyog umullia purrai tabirug. Gatun noa yell-
awa banin, gatun wiyelliella barun kiid murrinauwai kabirug.
4. Gatun goloin noa ba wiya, wiya noa Tliimonnug bon, Tuir-
kullia pirriko kako, gatun wura pika nurunba mankilliko.
5. Gatun Thimonto, wiyelliela, wiya bon, Piriwal, uma geen to-
koi ta yanti-katai, gatun man koi'ien; kulla bi wiyan wupiniin wal
bag baran pika.
6. Gatun uma bara ba unni, kokoi-kokoi bara uma makoro katai
kal ; gatun pika kilpaiya.
7. Gatun bara wokkaimulle jn bardnba tarai taba murrinauwai
taba ; wa-uwil koa barun wintamulliko. Gatun bara uwa, gatun
"warapal bara wupea buloara murrinauwai, pillukuUiela gaiya bara.
8. Nakulla noa ba Thimonto Peterko, puntimulle'm noa letliu
kin wai'ombug ka, wiyelliela, Ela Pii'iwal ! yurig bi wolla emmo-
ug kinbirug ; kulla bag yarakairan kuri katan.
9. Kulla noa kota, gatun yantin bara gikoug katoa ba, kaiiwal-
lin makorrin mankulla bara ba.
10. Gatun yantibo bara Yakobo gatun loanne, yinal ta Lebedaio
koba, mankillai bula ba Thimon katoa. Gatun lethuko noa wiya
bon Tliimonnug, Kinta kora bi; yakita birug maniui wal bi barun
kuri.
11. Gatun mankulla bara ba murrinauwai baiVm purrai tako,
wdnkulla bara yantin, wirroba bon bara.
12. Gatun yakita kakulla, kakulla noa ba tarai ta kokeni, a !
wakal kuri kauwal fleprokan ; nakilliela noa lethunug puntimul-
lean g)arra ko, gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Piriwal, wiya, bi ba
kaiyukan kanun, umaniin bi tia turon.
13. Gatun noa bon wupillejn mattara gikoug kin, wiyelliela,
Kauwa ; turon bi kauwa. G^tun tanoa-kal-bo fleprotawareka gi-
koug kinbirug ko.
14. Gatun noa bon wiya, wiy^akun koa noa barun k 'iri ; wonto
ba yirug uwa tugunV)illiko gintoa bo fhiereu kinko, gatun guwa
kulla bi turon umatoara. yanti to Mothe ka noa ba wiya, gur-
rulliko kakilliko barun.
15. "VYonta ba yantin kakulla totog gikoug yantin toa purrai
tea : gatun kauwalko naro uwa giirrulliko, gatun turon kakilliko
barun munni-munni gikoug kinbirug ko.
16. Gatun noa uwa korug kako, gatun wiyelliela.
17. Yakita kakulla tarai ta purrcag ka, wiyelliela noa ba,
yellawa ba Parithaioi gatun fdidathkaloi wiyellikanne koba, yantin.
140 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
tabirug kokera birug Galilaia kabirug, gatun ludaia kabirug,
gatun fHierothaleui kabirug; gatun kaiyuto Yeli6a-umV)a kakulla
turon iiinulliko barun.
18. A ! gatun bara kiiii wakal kuri kurrea pirrikilligel la luunni-
kan karal; gatun nuina bara bon kurrilliko kokera kolag, gatun
wuukiUiko bon gikoug kinko niikan tako.
19. Gratun keawai bara napa wonnen kurrilliko murrug kolag
konara tin, uwa liara wokka lag kokera bulwarra ka, gatun wupea
bon baran kulla koa willi-willi kako pirrikilligelkan lethu kin mi-
kan ta.
20. Gatun nakulla noa ba kotellikanne barunba, wiya noa bon,
Ela kiiri, yarakai giroumba wareka giroug kinbirug.
21. Gatun bara fgarammateu gatun Paritliaioi kota, wiyelliela,
Gan-ke unni wiyan ba yarakai ? Ganto kaiyu-kan-to warekulliko
yarakai, wonto ba wakallo Eloito ?
22. Wonto noa ba lethuko gurra kotatoara barunba, niuwoa
"sviya wiyelliela barun, Minarig tin nura kotelliela bulbiil lako
nurun kin ba ko.
2-3. Wonnen murrarag wiyelliko, Giroiiniba ko yarakaito ware-
ka giroug kinbirug ; ga wiyelliko, Bougkullia gatun uwolliko?
24. Wonto ba gurra-uwil koa nura kaiyukan noa yinal kuri
koba purrai taba yarakai warekulliko (wiya noa munni karal),
Wiyan banug, bougkullia gatun niara giroumba pirrikilligel, gatun
waita unwolla giroug ka tako kokera ko.
25. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo bougulleun noa barun kin mikan ta,
gatvni mankulla unnug gikoumba pirrikeanoa ba, gatun waita uwa
gikoug ka tako kokera ko koti kako, pitalmulliela bon Eloinug.
26. Gatun yantin bara kotelliela, gatun bara gaiya pitalma bon
Eloinug, gatun kinta lag bara kauwal, katan wiyelliela, Nakulla
geen minarig konein buggai.
27. Gatun yakitayukita waita uwa noa, gatun nakulla wakal
ftelonenug, giakai yitirra Lebi, yellawollin wunkilligel la ; gatun
noa wiya bon, YettiwoUa tia.
28. Gatun noa wiinkulla yanti bo bougkulleun, gatun noa bon
yettiwa.
29. Gatun Lebiko bon noa upea kauwal takillikanne gikoug
ka ta kuti ka kokera : gatun kauwal kakulla konara telonai ko
gatun tarai to yellawa barun katoa.
30. Wonto ba barunba fgarammateu gatun Paritliaioi koakillan
bara barun wirrobullikan gikoumba, wiyelliela, Minarig tin nura
tatan gatun pittan barun katoa ftflonai koa gatun yarakai toa ?
31. Gatun noa letliuko wiya barun, wiyelliela, Bara ba moron
tai katan keawai bara wiyan karakal ; wonto ba bara munni
katan.
32. Uwa bag wiya korien ko niurrog taiko, wonto ba yarakai
willug ko minki kakilliko.
33. Gatun wiya bon bara, Minarig tin bara mupai katan mur-
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 5. 141
rinmurrln wirrobullikan loaune-uraba, gatun wiyan wiyellikaiine,
gatun yantibo bara Parithaioi koba ; wonto ba giroiimba ko tatan
gatun pittan 1
34. Q-atun noa wiya barun, Wiya, nura kaiyukan mupai umul-
liko barun wonnai kakillaikanne, yakita-kalai poribai ba katan
barun katoa ba 1
35. "VVonto ba purreag kanun wal, manun wal bon ba poribai
barun kinbirug, gatun yakita gaiya bara mupai-kakillinun pur-
reag ka unta tai'a.
36. Gratun wiya noa barun wakal f parabol giakai : Iveawai kuri
ko wupillinun buggaikal korokiil la ; ga ba, yanti buggaikal yiir-
bugganiin gaiya wal, gatun pontol buggaikal labii'ug keawai koro-
kal kiloa katan.
37. Gatun keawai kuri ko wupiniin buggaikal f wain pika ka ko-
rokal la; kulla buggaikiillo potopai-yaniin wal pika ka, gatun kiroa-
bullinun, gatun pika kimun yarakai.
38. Wonto ba buggaikal fwain wunun wal buggaikal la pika ka;
gatun buloara murrarag katan.
39. Gatun keawai kuri koba pittanun korokal fwain keawai
noa manun buggaikal fwain, kulla noa wiyan korokal ta muiTarag.
WINTA VI.
Gatun yakita thabbat ka buloara, yukita thabbat ka kurri-kurri,
uwa gaiya noa murrug koayeaigel loa ; gatun bara wirrobulli-kan-
to gikoug ka to tittia woUug yeai, gatun takulla mirro-mirroma
mattara barun kin.
2. Gatun taraikanto Parithaioi koba wiya barun, Minarig tin nu-
I'a uman unnoa keawaran murrarag umulliko unti tara purreag ka
thabbat ka 1
3. Gatun noa lethuko wiya, wiyelliela, Wiya nura, wiya nura,
wiya ba unni, Dabid-to noa ba upa, niuwoabo ba kapirri kakilla
gatun bara gikoug katoa ;
4. Uwa noa ba kokera kai Eloi koba, gatun niankulla takulla
nulai nakillikanne, gatun gukulla barun gikoug katoa ba ko, kea-
waran murrarag takilliko, wonto ba barunba ko f liiereu koba 1
5. Gatun noa barun wiya, Tinal ta kiiri koba, piriwal noa ka-
tan yantin ko thabbat ko.
6. Gatun yakita kakulla tarai ta thabbat ta, uwa gaiya noa
f thunagog ka gatun wiyelliela : gatun wakal kiiri unta kakulla,
mattai'a gikoumba tiigkagkeri tirrai kakulla.
7. Gatun bara f garammateuko gatun Parithaioiko tumimea bon,
wiya bon noa ba turon umulla purreag ka thabbat ta ; wiyayem-
ma-uwil koa bara bon.
8. Wonto noa ba kota barunba gurrulliela, wiya bon noa mat-
tarakan tirraikan, Bougkullia, gatun garokilla willi ka. Gatun
noa bougkulleun, gatun garokea.
9. Wiya gaiya noa lethuko barun, Wiyaniin wal bag nurun
142 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
iinni ; wiya tuloa ta uniulliko, inuiTarag ga yarakai umulliko pur-
rea^J: ka tliabbat ta 1 nioion uniulliko, ga wai-ekulliko?
10. Gatun nakilliela kari-kaii yaiitiu baruii, wiya bon noa, Tu-
tullia bi mattara girouniba. Gatun u])ulleun gaiya noa, gatuu mat-
tira gaiya bon turon unia yanti tarai ba.
11. Gatun bara warapalkan bukkakan kakulla; gatun niurrarag
■wiyellan barabo-baiabo, niinnug baniin bara bon ba letliunug.
12. Yakita unta purreag ka, uwa noa bulkara kolag wiyelliko,
yanti-katai noa tokui ta wiyelliela bon Eloi-nug.
13. Gatun yakita purreag ta, kaai ba noa barun wirrobullikan
gikouuiba; girimuUeun noa barun kinbirug fuodeka niuwoa, barun
wiya giakai yitirra fapothol ;
14. Tliinionnug (wiya noa giakai yitirra Peternug), gatun giko-
uuiba kurrak6g Andrea, gatun Yakobo gatun Joanne, gatun Pilip
gatun Biltolomai,
15. Mattaio gatun Thoma, gatun Yakobo Alpai-umba, gatun
Thimon giakai wiya yitirra Dhelote,
IG. Gatun ludatli kurrakog ta Yakobo-umba, gatun ludath
Itbakariot, niuwoa gakoiyaye noa.
17. Gatun noa uwa baran barun katoa, gatun garawan tako
garokea noa, gatun konaro wirrobullikan gikoiunba, gatun kauwal
konara kuri ludaiakal, gatun fHierotlialemkal, gatun korowatari
Turokal gatun Tliidonikal, uwa bara gurrulliko bon, gatun turon
uniulliko barun ba munni ;
18. Gatun bai'a wonkalman yarakai to marai to : gatun barun
uma turon.
19. Gatun yantinto konaro numuUa bon bara ; kulla murrarag
paibea gikoug kinbirug, gatun noa turon uma yantin barun.
20. Gatun noa wokkalan nakuUa gaikug ko gikoumba wirro-
bullikan, gatun wiya, Murrarag uniatoara niirralko ; kulla nurun
ba piriwalgel la Eloi koba.
21. Munarag umatoara nura kapirrikan yakita : kulla nura wa-
rapan wal kakilliko. Murrarag umatoara nura tunkillin yakita,
kulla nui'a kintellinun wal.
22. Murrarag umatoara nura, yarakai umaniin gaiya nurun
kiiri ko, gatun warekanun nurun, gatun yarakai wiyamin nurun,
gatun warekanun yitirra nuruuba yanti yai-akai ba, gikoug kin
birug yinal k 'iri koba kabirug.
23. Pital nura kauwa gatun uutellia unta purreag ka ; kulla
nuriinba gukillikanne kauwal katan moroko kaba; yanti uma bara
biyugbai tako barun ka to barun fpropetnug.
24. Ya]>al nura porulkan kitan ! kulla nura mankulla ta pital
nurunl)a.
25. Yapal nura warakau ! kulla nura kapiriikanun. Yapal nura
kintellan yakita ! kulla nura girellinun gatun tunkillin I'ln.
26. Yapal nura, murrarag wiyan:in ba yantinto kuriko nurun !
yantibo barunba biyugbai ta ko barun gakoyaye fpropetnug.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 6. 143
27. Griakai bag wiyan nurun gurrullikan, Pitalumulla barun ya-
rakai willug nuriinba ; murrarag umulla barun yarakai nurunba
uinan,
28. Murrarag barun wiyella koatan nurunba ; gatiin wiyella bon
Eloinug wiyella barun yarakai nurunba uuian.
29. (jratun bunnun ba wakal gan kullo tarai to, tarai gukillia ;
gatun niuwoa manim wurabil giroumba, wiya yikora wiwi man-
ki yikora unni doan.
30. Guwa barun yantin ko wiyellinun ba giroug kin ; gatun
niuwoa ba mankulla tullokan giroumba wiya yikora kari bon.
31. Gratun unnoa la kotan nura la murrarag umulliko barun
kuri nurun, umulla nura yantibo ta barun.
32. KuJla nura pitalman barun pitalman nurun, minarigko-ke
unnoa 1 kulla bara yarakai-kan-to yantibo unian.
33 Gatun murrarag nura umanun ba barun gali murrarag nurun
uman, minarigko-ke unnoa'? kulla bara yarakai-kan-to yantibo
uman.
34. Gatun mumbiuun nura ba barun kotan nura willugbo upil-
liko barun, minarigko-ke unnoa '? kulla bara yarakai willug mum-
billan barun willugbo upilliko yantibo.
35. Wonto ba nura pitalumulla barun yarakai willug nurunba ;
gatun murrarag umulla, gatun mumbilla kotan keawai willugbo
iipulliko ; gatun gutoara kauwal kanun nurunba, gatun nura won-
nai kanun wokka koba ; kulla noa murrarag uman barun wiyapaiye
korien gatun barun yarakai.
36. Kauwa nura minkikan, yantibo Biyugbai nurunba minki ka-
tan.
37. Kota yikora yarakai, gatun keawai nurun kotaniin yarakai :
pirriralmai yikora nura, gatun keawai nurun pirriralmanun : ware-
killa nura, gatun nurunba warekanun.
38. Guwa, gatun gunun wal nurun ; warapal, upulla baran, ga-
tun toloniuUa kaumulliko, gatun kiroabullin banin, gunun wal
kiiri nurun gielkag ka nurun kin. Kulla yantibo upitoara nura
upuUin, upea kaniin nurun.
39. Gatun noa wiya barun wakal fparabol; wiya, munminto yu-
tinijn tarai munmin? wiya, wal bula-buloarabo warakullinun baran
kirun tako 1
40. Wirrobullikan ta keawaran noa kauwal korien gikoug kin
piriwal la ; wonto ba tuloa katan, kanun noa yanti piriwal ba gi-
koug ba.
41. Gatun minarig tin bi natan morig giroug ka ta ba gaikug
kaba kurrikog kaba, wonto ba na korien bi tulkirri gaikug kaba
giroug kinba koti kaba 1
42. Ga, yakoai bi wiyan bon kurrik6g giroug ba, Biggai, ya-
koai tia porugbuggabunbilla morig giroug kinba gaikug kaba,
keawai bi ba nakillin tulkirri giroug kaba? Gintoa gakoiyaye !
burugbug gala kurri-kurri tulkirri gaikug kaba giroug kinba koti
Hi AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
kaba, gatun nanun gaiya bi nuirra-murrarag umulliko morig gai-
kug kaba kurrikug kaba giroiig ka ta ba.
43. Kulla ba kiilai murrarag ta katan, keawai yeai yarakai
upin ; ga keawai kiilai yarakai ta katan, yeai luurrarag upin.
44. Wonto ba yantin kiilai gimilliko koti tin yeai tin ; kulla
bara kiiri man korien kokug tulkirri-tulkirri tin, ga titi korien
bara fbotru niaro tin.
45. Muvraragko noa kuriko wnpillin noa murrarag wunkilligel
labirug minki kabirugbulbul labirug gikoug kinbirug ; gatun noa
yarakai wupullin noa yarakai wunkilligel labirug yarakai ta birug
minki kabirug bi'ilbiil labirug gikoug kinbirug ; kulla gikoiimba
ko kurraka ko wiyan kauwal labirug ko biilbul labirug ko.
40. Gatun minarig tin nura tia wiyan, Piriwal, Piriwal, gatun
uwa korien nura unnoa tara wiyan nurun bag ba,
47. Gan tia ba uwanun emmoug kin, ^atun gurran wiyellita em-
nioiimba, gatun galoa unian, tiigunbinun bag nurun gan kiloa noa :
48. Niuwoa ba wakal yanti kiiri kiloa, wittia noa kokera gatun
pinnia pirriko, gatun w'upea tugga tunug ka ; gatun poaikulleun ba
tunta-tunta, w^aiumbul murra koribibi kokeroa, gatun geawai tolo-
ma pa ; kulla wal wittia tunug ka.
49. Wonto ba gurran gatun uma korien, kiiri kiloa noa wittia
kokera tugga korien purrai ta : waiumbul murra koribibi gali, gatun
warakulleim tanoa-kal-bo; kauwalla unnoa warakullin kokera koba.
WINTA YII.
WiYA noa ba goloin gikoumba wiyellikanne, mikan ta yantin ta
kiiri ka, uwa noa Kapernaun kako.
2. Gatun tai'ai koba fkapiitin koba umullikan munni Icakilliela,
mulugkilliliela tetti, pitiil umatoara noa gikoumba.
3. Gatun, gurrii noa ba lethunug, wiyabunbea noa barun garo-
kiil Hebtiraioi koba, wiyelliela Ijon uwa-uwil koa noa pirbuggulliko
gikoumba ko umullikan ko.
4. Gatun uwa bara ba letliu kin, wiya gaiya bon bara tanoa-kal-
bo, wiyelliela, Murrarag noa uma-uwil koa noa bon yanti :
5. Kulla noa pitalman geai'i'mba kiiri, gatun noa wittia gearun
fthunagog.
6. Uwa gaiya noa letliu barun katoa. Gatun kalog korien ta
noa ba kakulla kokera kolag, yuka noa barun fkapatinto koti ta
gikoug kin, wiyelliela bon, Piriwal, yanoa bi ; kulla bag keawaran
murrarag korien uwa-uwil koa bi emmoug kin kokera :
7. Yaki tin bag kota murrarag korien bag uwolliko giroug kin-
ko ; wonto ba wiyella wakal wiyellikanne, gatun emmoiimba umul-
likan pirkullinim wal.
8. Kulla bag ba kaiyukan wiyelliko, emmoug kinba bara ka-
killin farmy-kan ; gatun bag wiya wakal, Yurig, gatun waita gai-
ya noa uwa ; gatun tarai, Kaai, gatun noa uwa tanan ; gatun em-
moiimba umullikan, T^mulla unni, gatun uma gaiya noa.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 7. 145
9. lethuko iioa ba gurra unni tara, kotelliela noa gikoug, gatuii
waiTakulleun noa, wiya gaiya noa barun wirroba bon ba, Wiyan
bag nurun, keawaran bag na pa yanti gurrnllikanne kauwal, kea-
wai yanti Itliarael la katan.
10. Gatun bara yukatoara, willugbo uwolliela kokera kolag,
nakuUa bon umullikan munni birug pirbuggatoara.
11. Gratun yakita purreag ka yukita, uwa noa kokeroa, giakai
yitirra Nain ; gatun kauwal uwa gikouniba wirrobullikan gatun
taraikan kiiri gikoug katoa.
12. Gratun uwa noa ba papai pulogkulligel la kokera kolag, ga,
tetti kulwon kurrilliela kiiri warai kolag, wakal bo ta yinal tunkan
koba bounnoun ba, gatun mabogun bountoa, gatun kauwal-kau-
Aval kiiri kokera birug uwa bounnovm katoa.
13. Gatun nakulla bounnoun noa ba Piriwullo, gurrirra boun-
noun noa kakulla, gatun wiya gaiya noa bounnoun, Tiigki yikora.
14. Gatun uwa gaiya noa, numa kurrilligel ; gatun bara kurria
bon ba gakea korun. Gatun noa wiya, Wuggurra, wiyan banug,
BougkuUia.
15. Gatun niuwoa tetti kabirug yellawa, gatun tanoa-kal-bo wi-
ya. Gatun willugbo bon noa gukulla bounnoun kin gikoumba ka
tunkan ta.
16. Gatun bara kakulla kinta yantin ; gatun bara bon pittilman
Eloinug, wiyelliela, Kauwal fpropet ta paipea gearun kin, gatun
noa Eloito nakulla gikoumba kiiri.
17. Gatun unni totog gikoumba kakulla yantin to ludaia koa,
gatun yantin toa purrai karig koa.
18. Gatun loanne-umba-ko wirrobullikanto wiya bon unni tara.
19. Gatun noa loanneto wiya bulun wirrobullikan gikoumba,
yuka bulun letliu kinko, wiyelliko, Gintoa ta uwanun 1 ga, na-tea
kanun geen taraikan ?
20. Uwa bara ba kiiri gikoug kinko wiya bara, loanneto kori-
muUikanto gearun yuka giroug kinko, wiyelliko, Gintoa ta uwa-
nun 1 ^a, na-tea kaniin taraikan ?
21. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo fhora ka pirbugga noa kauwal-kauwul
munni-munni, gatun marai yarakaikan; gatun kauwal-kauwal mun-
min uma noa barun nakilliko,
22. Wiya gaiya noa barun lethu, wiyelliela, Waita lag nura,
gatun wiyella bon loannenug unni tara nakulla nura ba gatun
gurra ; munmin-tabirug-ko natan, wiirwiir-birug-ko uwan, wamun-
wamun-tabirug turon kakulla, wogkal-labirug gurran, tetti-kabirug
bougkulleun, barun mirral ko wiyan ta Euagelion.
23. Gatun pital-umatoara yantinto niuwara korien kaniin em-
moug kin.
24. Gatun waita ka ba bara ba puntimai loanne-umba, wiya
gaiya noa barun kiiri loannenug bon, Minarig tin nura korug
kolag nakilliko ? kogka toloman wibbi ko 1
146 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
25. Minarig ko nura uwa korug kolag nakilliko ? wakal upul-
leun kiui poitog korikin to? A! bara upuUeun konein to ^atun,
bara murrarag katan takilliko, yellawa bara ])iri\valg6l la.
26. Minarig ko nura uwa korug kolag nakilliko? wakal fpropet?
Kauwa, wiyan nuruu bag kauwallan noa ba fpi'opet kiloa.
27. (jrali noa wiyatoara upa unni, A! yukan bag puntimai ein-
moumba giroug kin mikan ta, umanun wal noa yapug giroug.
28. Kulla bag wiyan nurun, Keawai fpropet kauwal katan yanti
loanne noa ba koriiiiullikan porkullitoara nukug labirug : niu-
woa warea ta katan })iriwalgel la Eloi koba ka, kauwal noa katan
niuwoa kiloa.
29. Gatun yantinto kiiriko gurra bon, gatun bara ftelonai, pital-
ma bon Eloi-nug, korimatoara katan bara loanne kaibirug kari-
niulli birug.
30. Wonto ba bara Parithaioi gatun bara fnomikoi gurramaiga
wiyellikanne Eloi kola barun kin, keawai korimatoara korien.
loanne kai.
31. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Yakoai kiloa bara kuri untikal
willuggel 1 gatun minarig kiloa bara?
32. Bara yanti wonnai kiloa yellawollin gukilligel la, gatun
kaipullin taraikan, gatun wiyellin, Tirkima geen nurun, gatun
keawai nura untelli korien ; minki geen kakuUa nurun, gatun
keawai nura tugkilli korien.
33. Kulla noa loanne korimuUikan uwa, keawai kunto ta pa
ga twain keawai pitta pa ; gatun nura wiyan, tclial)ol noa gikoug
katoa ba.
34. Yinal ta kirikoba uwa takilliko gatun pittelliko, jlatun
nura wiyan, A ! mataye kiiri unni, gatun twain pittaye, koti ta
ttelonai koba gatun yarakai willug koba !
3.5. Wonto ba yantinto wonnaito guraki koba ko piralman bon
guraki.
36. Gatun wakallo Parithaioi koba ko wiya bon ta-uwil koa noa
gikoug katoa. Gatun uwa noa kokera Parithaio koba, gatun yella-
wa noa baran takilliko.
37. Gatun, a ! gapal wakal yarakaikun bountoa gurra bountoa ba
Tethunug bon yellawai takilli taba kokera Parithaio koba ka, man-
•kuUa bountoa wiinkilligel alabathro putillikanne,
38. Gatun garokea bountoa tinna ka bulka ka gikoung kin,
tuilkillin, gatun bountoa puntia bounnoun ka to gurrun to tinna
gikoumba, ^atun pirripa bounnoun ka to kittug ko wollug koba
ko bounnoun ka to, gatun biigbugka bon tinna gikoumba, gatun
putia bon putilligel lo.
39. Yakita nakulla noa ba unni gali Parithaio, wiya bon ba,
wiyelleiin gaiya noa niuwoabo minki ka, wiyelliela, Unni kiiri tpro-
pet ba noa gurra pa noa wonta-kan-to ka gapallo numa bon ; kulla
bountoa yaraikan.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 7. 147
40. Gratun lethuko noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela bon, Thimon,
wiya-uwil koa banug. Gatun noa wiya, Piriwal, wiyellia.
41. Tarai ta kakulla gukillikan wakal buloara mumbitoara giko-
limba ; wakallo noa mumbille 'in f pentakothioi fclenari, gatun tarai
ta f pentekonta mumbilleun.
4'2. Gratun keawai bula gupaiye pa ba yarug ka bon, wareka gaiya
noa bulun ba. Wonta kin bulun kinbirug pitalmaniin kauwal bon !
43. Thimonto noa wiya, wiyelliella, Mirka gikoug wareka noa
ba kauwal. Gatun noa wiya bon, Kota bi tuloa.
44. (latun noa warrakulleun gapal ko, gatun wiya Thim')nnug
Natan bi unni gapal 1 uwa bag kokera ko giroug ka ta ko, keawai
bi tia gupa bato tinna ko ; wonto bountoa ba puntia tia tinna
bounnoun ka to gurrun to, gatun watia bounnoun ka to wollug
kabirug ko kittug ko.
45. Keawai bi tia bugbiig ka pa : wonto ba unni gapal, biig-
biig-kulliela tia tinna yakita birug uwa bag ba.
46. Keawai bi puti pa emmoumba wollug kipai to, wonto ba
unni gapal putia emmoumba tinna kipai to.
47. Giakai tin banug Aviyan, Yarakai umatoara bounnoun ba
kauwal ta warekatoara bounnoun ba ; kulla bounnoun pital-ma
kauwal: kulla bariinba warekatoara warea, pital-ma bara warea.
48. (jat'.ui noa bounnoun wiya, Wareka umatoara giroiiinba yara-
kai.
49. Gatun bara yellawan gikoug kinba takilli taba, bara bo
wiyatan minki ka, Gan-ke unni warekan noa yarakai.
50. Gatun noa bounnoun wiya, Gurrulli ta birug giroiimLa
moron bi kiitan; yurug bi pital kakilliko.
WIXTA YIII.
Gatun yakita yukita uwa noa yantin toa purrai toa kokera, wiyel-
liela gatun tugunbilliela totog pitalmullikanne fbatliileia koba
Eloi koba : gatun bara fdodeka ta gikoug katoa ba.
2. Gatun bara nukug taraikan, turon umatoara marai yarakai
tabirug gatun munni kabirug, Mari yitirra giakai Magdalakalin,
bounnoun kinbirug paipea fdiabol fbepta ta,
3. (jatun loanna porikunbai Kutlia-iimba, Herod-iimba umuUi-
kan, gatun Thuhanna, gatun taraikan kauwal, gala bax'a gukulla
bon untakal tuUokan ba birug barun kai.
4. Gatun uwittillin bara ba kiiri kauwal-kauwal, gatun uwa gi-
koug kinko, yantin tabirug kokera birug, wiya noa unni fparabol :
5. Upillikan noa uwa yeai ko upulliko gikoumba ko ; gatun
upulliela noa ba, winta porkuUeiin k.iiyinkon ta yapug ka ; gatun
waita-wa baran, gatun tibbinto takulla moroko tinto.
6. Gatun winta porkullein tunug ka ; gatun poaikullejn ba
wokka lag tetti gaiya kakulla, koito ba bato korien ta.
7. Gatun winta porkulletin tulkirri-tulkirra; gatun poaikullean
tulkirri-tulkirri matti, gatun murrugkama.
148 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
8. Gatun tarai ta porkulk'un puriai murrarag purrai ta, gatun
poaikulleiin wokka lag, gatun yeai kurria fhekaton ta. Gratun
noa ba wiya mini tara, kaaijjulleun gaiya noa, Niuwoa ba gurreug
kan katan gurrulliko gurrunbunbilla bon.
y. (xatun wirrobulli-kan-to gikoumba ko wiya bon, wiyelliela,
Minarig ke unni fparabol ?
10. (jiatun noa wiya, Gutan gurrulliko nurun pirriral fbathileia
koba Eloi-umba ; wonto barun tarai ta fparabol la ; natan bara
keawai bai-a na pa, gatun gurran bara keawai bara gimilli pa.
11. Giakai ta unni fparabol : Yeai ta wiyellikaune ta Eloi koba.
12. Bai-a kaiyinkon taba yapug kaba gurrullikan bara; uwa
gaiya noa f diabol, gatun mankuUa wiyellikainie barun ba minki
kabirug bulbul labirug, gurrea-kun koa bara gatun moron koa bara
katea-kun.
1 3. Baia tunug kaba gurra bara ba wiyellikanne pitalkan to ;
gatun unni tara wirra korien katan, kota bara warea ba, gatun
yakita nuniullikanne ta waraka gaiya bara.
li. Gatun unnoa tara porkuUeun tulkirri-tulkirra, bara ba
gurra, waita uwa gaiya, gatun niurrugkania umullikanneto gatun
porollo gatun pirunto moron koba, gatun yeai kurri korien mui'-
rarag kakilliko.
15. Wonto ba unnoa murrarag kaba purrai taba, bara ba gurra
wiyellikanne, tuloakan gatun muiTaragkan bulbulkan, tuman bara,
gatun yeai kurrin murroi to.
16. Keawai kiiriko wirrogbanun kaibug, A^iitinian gaiya tenti
ko, ga wutiniin bara ka pinkilligella ; wonto ba wupiniin kaibug-
gel la, na-uwil koa bara uwollita ba ko kaibug.
17. Kulla yantin ta getti birug gurraniin wal kakilliko ; gatun
yantin ta yuropatoara birug gurraniin wal kakilliko, gatun paipi-
nun wal.
18. Yakoai nura gurrulla ; kulla gikoug kinba guniin wal giko-
ug kin ; gatun keawai noa ka korien, mantillinun Aval bon gikoug
kinbirug unnoa ta paipitoara gikoug kinba.
19. Gatun tunkan gikoug kinko gatun bara koti ta gikoumba
uwa, gatun keawai bara wa pa gikoug kinko konarrin, kulla
kauwal waitawollan.
20. Wintako bon wiya giakai, Garokillin bara wai'rai taba giko-
umba tunkan gatun k6ti ta, na-uwil koa bara giroug.
21. Gatun noa wiyayelleiin barun, wiyelliela, Unni tara tia ka-
tan emmoumba tunkan gatun koti ta, gurrullikan wiyellikanne
Eloi koba gatun umullikan.
22. Gatun yakita tarai ta purreag ka, uwa noa murrinauwai ta
ko gikoug katoa wirrobullikan toa gikoumba ; gatun noa barun
wiya, Waita geen waiga-uwil kaiyin kolag Avara kolag. Gatun bara
tolka mureug kolag.
23. Wonto ba bara UAVolliela, pirrikea noa kogog ; gatun wibbi ka-
uwal kakulla w-ara ka; gatun bara warapal, gatun kinta kakilliela.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 8, 149
24. Gatuii bara uwa gikoug kin, boiigbu^ga gaiya bon, wiyel-
lielia, Pii-iwal, piriwal, tetti kolag geen ! BoiigkuUein gaiya noa,
gatun wij-a noa wibbi, gatun tulkun wombul koba ; gatun korun
kakulla, gatun yurag gaiya kakulla.
25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wonnug-ke nurun kotellita "? Gatun
bara kinta kakulla, kotelliela, wiyalan taraikan-taraikan, Wonta-
kan unni kiiri I kulla noa -sviyan wibbi gatun bato, gatun guxTa
gaiya bon.
26. Gatun bara uwa purrai tako Gadaren tako, kaiyin taba Gali-
laia kaba.
27. Gatun noa ba yankulleiin purrai tako, nuggurrawa bon
wakallo kiiriko kokera birug ko, fdiabolkan noa katalla yuraki,
gatun keawai noa upillijia kirrikin to, keawai noa katan kokera,
nikki ka noa kakulla.
28. Nakulla noa ba letliunug, kaaibullein gaiya noa, gatun
puntimulleun gikoug kin mikan ta, gatun wokka wiyell^iin wiyel-
liela, Minnug banun ke bi tia, lethu, Yinal ta Eloi koba wokka
kaba koba 1 Yanoa bi tia piralmai yikora.
29. (Kulla noa wiya marai yarakaikan paikulliko kiiri kabirug.
Kulla bon mankulla murrin-murrin ; gatun wirria bon tibon ko ;
gatun noa tiirbugga tibon, gatun yuaipea bon fdiabollo korug
kolagV
30. Gatun lethuko noa wij'a bon, wiyelliela, Wonnen bi yitirra ?
Gatun noa wiya, fLejun bag ; kulla kauwal-kauwal fdiabol uwa
murrarig gikoug kinko minki kako.
31. Gatun bara bon wiya, Yanoa, wiya yikora gearun bi pirriko
kolag kakilliko.
32. Gatun kakulla untakal wirrul takilliela bulkara ba ko; gatun
bara wiya bon pulogkulliko barun minki kako fporak kako. Gatun
noa wamunbea barun.
33. Uwa gaiya bara waita fdiabol minki tabirug kuri kabirug,
gatun pulogkulleiin fporak ka koiro ka; gatun wirrul murra baran
karakai pirriko koba wara kako, kurrin to gaiya bara.
34. Nakulla bara ba tamunbea unnoa tara umatoara, murra
gaiya bara, gatun waita uwa kokera kolag, gatun gorug kolag ;
wiya gaiya galoa.
35. Uwa gaiya bara nakilliko umatoara ko ; gatun uwa lethu
kin, gatun nakulla bara bon unnoa kuri, paipitoai-a birug bara
waita uwa, yellawoUiela lethu ka ta tinna ka, kirrikinkan gatun
tuloa gurrullikan ; gatun kinta bara kakulla.
36. Yantinto nakulla unnoa wiya barun, yanti bon ba turon
uma fdiabolkan kauwalkan.
37. Gatun yantinto konaro purrai tako Gadaren tako wiya
gaiya bon waita uwolliko barun kinbirug ; kulla bara kintakan
kauwal kakulla. Gatun noa uwa murrinauwai tako, gatun wul-
luicbo kakulla.
150 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
38. Gatun unnoa kiiri kabii'ug t<^iabol bai-a waita uwa, wiya
bon ka-uwil koa noa gikoug katoa : wonto noa lethuko yuka bou
waita, wiyelliela,
39. Willugbo bi wolla giroug ka tako kokei-a ko, gatun gurra-
l)unbilliko unnoa tai'a uina noa ba Eloito giroug. Gatun noa
waita uwa, gatun wiya yantin toa kokeroa, yanti letliuko noa
uma bon.
40. Gatun yakita kakulla, willugbo noa ba lethu kakulla, pital
tara kakilliela kuri, kulla bara bon mittilliela yanti nto.
41. Gatun yakita uwa wakal kuri tanan, giakai yitirra Yaei)'o,
wiyellikan noa fthunagog kako ; gatun noa puntiniulleun letlui
kin tinna ka, gatun wiya uwolliko gikoug kinko kokera ko ;
42. KiiUa bon wakal yinalkun kakulla, fdodeka wunal ta boun-
noun ba, gatun bountoa ])irrikilliela tetti kakilliela. Gatun uwa
gaiya noa, kuriko bon murrugkania.
■rt43. Gatun wakal nukug, kumarakan tdodeka wunal ta boun-
noun ba, gukilleun bountoa kirun tullokan bounnoiinba karakal ko,
keawai bara bounnoun turon uma pa,
44. Uwa bountoa bulka kako, gatun numa pita gikoiimba kir-
rikin : gatun tanoa-kal-bo kumara gaiya kakulla korun.
45. Gatun noa lethuko wiya gaiya, Ganto tia numa 1 Yantin-
to wiya keawai, wiya gaiya noa Peterko gatun bava gikoug katoa,
Piriwal, konaro bin murrugkania gatun waita wa, gatun bi wi-
yan, Ganto tia numa ?
46. Gatun noa letbuko wiya, Wakallo ta tia numa : kulla bag
gurran waita ka ba kaiyu emmoug kinbirug.
47. Gatun bountoa ba nukugko nakulla yuropa korien boun-
toa, uwa bountoa pulul-pulul, gatun puntimulleun gikoug kin
mikan ta, wiya bon bountoa mikan ta yantin ta kuri ka, minarig
tin })ountoa numa bon, gatun tanoa-kal-bo bountoa kakulla turon.
48. (jatun noa bounnoun wiya, Yinalkun, kauwa bi pital ;
gurrullito giroumba-ko turon bin uma ; yurig waita pital kakilliko.
49. Gatun wiyelliela noa ba, tanan uwa wakallo wiyellikan ta
Jbirug kokera birug, wiyelliela bon, Giroumba yinalkun tetti kakul-
la ; yanoa, Piriwal pirriralmai yikora bon.
50. Wonto noa ba lethuko gurra, wiyayelleun noa bon wiyel-
iiela, Kinta kora bi ; gurrulla wal bi, gatun turon gaiya wal boun-
toa kanun.
51. Gatun noa ba uwa kokera ko ba murrarig, keawai noa tarai
kan wommumbi pa gikoug kin, wonto ba Peternug gatun Yako-
bonug, gatun loanniniug, gatun biyugbai gatun tunkan murrakin
koba.
52. Gatun yantin tugkilleiin gatun minki kakulla bounnoun kai :
wonto noa ba wiya, Tugki yikora ; keawaran bountoa tetti korien,
wonto ba garabo kakillin.
53. Gatun bara bon beelma, nakilliela tetti bountoa kakulla.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 8. 151
i)i. Gatuu noa kirun baruu yipa warai tako, gatun noa man-
kulla bounnoun muttarrin, gatun wiya, Murrakin, bougkullia.
55. Gatun bounnoun ba marai kateakan, gatun bountoa boug-
kuUeiin tanoa-kal-bo : gatun noa wiya bounnoun takilliko.
56. Gatun kintakan biyugbai gatun tunkan bounnoun ba :
wonto noa ba wiya barun, yanoa wiya yikora taraikan kuri unni
umatoara.
WINTA IX.
Wiya gaiya noa barun fdodeka ta gikoumba kaumuUiko, gatun
gukulla barun kaiyu kakilliko gatun wiyellikan kakilliko yantin
ko fdiabol ko, gatun turon vimulliko yantin munnikan ko.
2. Gatun noa barun yuka wiyelliko fbathileia Eloi koba, gatun
turon umulliko niunni ko.
3. Gatun noa wiya barun, Manki yikora waita kolag, keawai
tupa-tupa manun, keawai yinug, keawai kunto, keawai fnioney,
keawai buloara manun kirrikin taraiko-taraiko.
4. G-atun uwanun nura ba tarai ta kokera, tanoa kauwa, gatun
waita uwolla untoa birug.
5. Gatun bara keawai nurun wommunbi korien, waita nura ba
uwanun untoa birug kokera birug, tirri-tirrillia yullo kabirug
morig tinna kabirug nurim kinbirug, tiiga kakilliko barun kinko.
6. Gatun waita bara uwa, gatun uwa kokeroa willi koa, wiyel-
liela Euagelion, gatun turon umulliela yantin ta purrai ta.
7. Gatun noa Herodto tetrakko gurra unni tara uma noa ba ;
gatun kotelliela niuwoa bo, kulla wiyatoara tarai-kan-to loanne
noa bougkullea tetti kabirug ;
8. Gatun winta ka, paipea noa Elia ; gatun tarai-kan-to, wakal
gagka-kal fpropet tabirug bougkalleun.
9. Gatun noa Herod wiya, Kolbuntia bag bon laonnenug wol-
lug ; gan-ke unni gurran bag unni tara 1 gatun noa iia-uwil koa
bon.
10. Gatun bara fapotliollo willugbo bara ba kakulla, wiya gaiya
bon yantin unni tara uma bara ba. Gatun noa barun yutea, gatun
kara uwa mirrulla ko, kokera ko yitirra Betathaida kako.
11. Gatun bara kuri gurra bara ba, wirropa bara bon ; garokea
noa wiyelliko barun fbathileia Eloi koba, gatun uma barun turon
kakilliko munnikan.
12. Gatun pun-eag kakilliela yareakal, uwa gaiya bara fdodeka
ta, gatun wiya bon, Yukulla barun konara waita lag, uwa-uwil
koa bara yantin toa purrai karig koa, yellawolliko, gatun takil-
liko ; kulla geen katan unti mirrul la.
13. Wonto noa ba barun wiya, Guwa barun galoa ko takilliko.
Gatun bara wiya, Keawai gearunba kulla unni f pente kunto ga-
tun buloara makoro ; wiya geen wirrilla barun gali ko takilliko
yantin ko kiiri ko.
152 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
14. Kulla wal kuri kauwal fpentakikilioi ta. O^atun noa wiya
barun winobnllikaii, Yellawabunbilla baruii konara kakilliko tpen-
tekonta tarai taba kakilliko.
15. Gratuii uma gaiya bara yanti, gatun yellawabunbea barun
yantin baran.
16. Mankulla gaiya noa unnoa tara kunto fpente gatun makoro
buloara ; gatun iiakilliela wokka lag moroko koba, uinrroi wiyel-
liela unni tai'a, gatun yiirbugga, gatun gukulla barun wirrobul-
likan ko wunkilliko barun kin mikan ta konara.
17. Gatun takulla bara, gatun warakan gaiya bara kuttawan
yantin ; gatun mankulla bara wanan fdodeka ka wimbi ka wunta-
wai birug barun kai.
18. Gatun yakita wiyelliela noa ba niuwoa-bo punbai, gikoiimba
wiiTobullikan gikoug katoa ; gatun noa wiya barun, wiyelliela,
Gannug wiyan ki'iri ko gan bag ba.
19. Wiyayelleun bara, wiyelliela, loanne ta bi koriraullikan ;
wonto ba taraito wiyan Elia ta ba ; gatun taraito wiyan wakal
gagka-kal tpropet koba, bougkulliakan katea-kiin.
20. Wiya noa barun, Canto tia nura wiyan gan bag ba?
Peterko noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela, Kritht ta bi Eloi-umba.
21. Gatun noa barun piralma, wiyea-kan koa bara unnoa tara
tarai ko kuri ko ;
22. Wiyelliela, Yinal ta k/iri koba yarakai kauwal wal bon
umanijn, gatun warekanun wal bon havsi gagkakal gatun bara
fhiereukan piriwal, gatun l^ara tgaraniniateukan, gatun biinnun
wal tetti, gatun bougganun gaiya bon tarai ta purreag goro ka.
23. Gatun wiya noa barun yantin, Wanun tia ba taraikan
kiiri uwamin, gurrullia noa niuwoa-bo, gatun mara-uwil koa noa
taligkabillikanne gikouinba yantin ta purreag ka, gatun wirro-
bulla tia.
24. Ganto ba miromanan moron gikoiimba, warekanun wal noa ?
kulla noa warekanun moron gikoumba eimnoug kin, galoa noa
moron umanun.
25. Wonnug-ke murrarug kuri ko, mankilliko purrai karig ko,
gatun noa tetti wal gaiya kanun niuwoa-bo, ga warekanun wal ?
26. (nm tia ba koiyun kanun emmoug kai, gatun wiyellikarnie
emraoumba, Yinal kuri koba koiyun gikoug kai, uwanun noa ba
killibinbinkan koti gikoug kinba, gatun Biyugbai koba, gatun
agelo yirri-yirri-kan koba barunba.
27. Kulla bag wiyan nurun tuloa, unni winta garokeiin ba,
keawai bara tetti kdnun, kabo na-uwil koa bara f batliileia-nug Eloi
koba.
28. Gatun yakita kakuUa purreag ka fet ta yurika-ta unni taiu
wiyellikanne, yutea noa barun Peternug, gatun loannenug, gatun
Yakobonug, gatun uwa wokka lag bulkara kolag wiyelliko.
29. Gatun noa ba wiyelliela, takin bon tarai warrakuUeun, ga-
tun gikoumba kirrikin purriil kakulla, gatun killibinbin kakulla.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 9. 153
30. Gatiin wiyelliela bon ki'iriko Motheko ^atun Eliako :
31. Paipea bula killibinbin, gatun wiya bula gikoumba ttvii
tin ka-nwil koa fHierothalem ko.
32. Wonto ba Peter noa gatun bara gikoug katoa porrollcau
bara birikea kogog ; gatun bara kakulla tirag, nakuUa bara giko-
limba killibinbin, gatun buloara bula k 'iri garokea gikoug katoa.
33. Gratun kakulla yakita bula ba waita uwolliela gikoug kin-
birug, Peterko noa wiya bon lethunug. A! Piriwal, murrariig gea-
run unti ko kakilliko ; gatun umabunbilla goro kokera ; wakal
bin, gatun wakal Mothenug, gatun wakal Elianug, gurra korien
minarig noa wiya.
34. Wiyelliela noa ba, yareil kakulla, gatun wutea barun ;
gatun bara kinta kakulla, waita bara ba woUiela murrarig yareil la.
35. Gatun puUi kakulla yareil labirug, wiyelliela, Unni ta
emmoumba k6ti yinal pitalmuUikan ; gurrulla bon.
36. Gratun pulli ba kakulla korun, letliu noa kakilliela punbai.
Keawai bara unni tara wiya pa untatoara, natoara purreag ka ta-
raikan ta.
37. Gratrm yakita kakulla purreag ka tarai ta unta, uwa bara
ba baran bulkara birug, kauwallo kuriko nuggurra wa bon.
38. A ! gatun wakal kuri konara koba kaaibulleun, wiyelliela,
Piriwal, kai bi, na-uwillia yinal emmoumba; kulla noa emmoumba
wakal wonnai.
39. A! gatun maraito bon mankulla, gatun gaiya noa kaaibul-
leiin wokka ; gatun yiirbugga bon, gatun kurragtoanbugga ; gatun
biintoara noa, waita gaiya gikoug kinbirug uwa.
40. Gratun bag wiya barun wirrobullikan giroiimba warekulliko
bon ; keawai bara kaiyu korien.
41. Gratun noa lethuko wiya, wiyelliela. A! gurra korien gatun
pirriral unni willug-gel ! Yakounta-lag bag kanun nurun kin,
gatun wal bag kamuiibinun nurun 1 Mara bon tanan girouniba
yinal unti ko.
42. Gratun uwolliela noa ba tanan fdiabollo bon puntima baran
gatun yiiryiir uma. Gatun noa lethuko koakuUa bon marai yara-
kai ka, gatun bon wonnai turon inna, gatun guteakan gaiya bon
biyugbai ta gikoumba tin.
43. Gatun yantin bara kinta kakulla kaiyu tin kauwal lin Eloi
koba tin ; gatun kotelliela bara ba yantin unni tara lethuko noa
ba uma, wiya gaiya noa barun wirrobullikan gikoumba,
44. Kamunbilla unni tara wiyellikanne murrarig gurreug kako
nurun kin ; kulla noa Yinal kiiri koba wupinim wal bon mattara
kiiri ka.
45. Keawai bara gurra pa unni wiyellikanne, gatun yuropa
gali barun kinbirug, keawai bara gimilli korien ; gatun bara kinta
kakulla wiyelliko bon gali tin wiyellikanne tin.
46. Yakita gaiya bara wiyellan barabo-barabo, gan-ke kan "in
kauwal piriwal barun kinbirug.
154 AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE,
47. Gatun lethuto noa gimilleun kotatoara bulbul labirug barun
kinbirug raankulla noa wonnai, gatuu yellawabunbea boii gikoug
kin tariig ka,
48. Gatun noa barun wiya, Ganto ba unni wonnai pitalmanun
kinba, pital mani'in gaiya tia ; gatun ganto ba tia pitalmanun,
pitalmanun bon gala yuka tia ba ; gatun niuwoa katan warea
nurun kinba yautin taba, yantibo ta wal noa kauwal kanun.
49. Gatun noa loanneto wiya, wiyelliela, Piriwal, nakuUa geen
wakallo paibuggulliela barun fdiabol gii'oug katoa liirug yitirra
birug ; wiya geen bon yanoa, koito ba keawai noa wa jia gearun
katoa.
50. Gatun noa letliuko bon wiya, Wiwi yikora ; koito noa ba
keawai bukka korien gearun, niuwoa gearun katoa ba.
51. Gatun yakita kakulla purreag maniin bon ba wokka kolag,
pirral noa kakilliela waita fHierotlialem kolag,
52. Gatun noa yuka barun puntiinai gikoumba ganka ; gatun
bara uwa kokera kolag Thamaria kako, umulliko gikoug.
53. Gatun bara bon keawai pitalma pa, kulla noa j^irral kakulla
wa pa fHierothalem kolag.
54. Gatun bula wirrobullikan gikoumba, Yakobo gatun loanne,
nakulla bula unni, wiya bula, Piriwal, wiya bi, wiya-uwil koa geen
koiyug koa kauwal banin moroko kabirug wina-uwil koa barun,
yanti Elia noa ba unnoa 1
55. Wonto noa ba wakulleun, koakulla gaiya barun noa, gatun
wiya, Keawaran nura giniilli korien nurunba koti biilbul.
56. Koito ba noa yinal kuri koba keawaran noa tanan wa pa,
bunkilliko kuri ko barun, wonto ba murrin umulliko. Gatun bara
uwa tarai tako kokera ko.
57. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela bara ba yurig yapug koa,
taraito bon wiya, Piriwal, wirrobugbinim banug, wontarig bi ba
uwanun.
58. Gatun noa letliuko bon wiya, Murrog-kai-ko kumiri bariin-
ba, gatun tibbin moroko ka koba kunta bariinba, Avonto ba yinal
kuri koba keawaran bon gikoumba birrikilli-gel wallug ko giko-
umba ko.
59. Gatun noa tarai wiya, Wirrobulla tia. Wonta noa ba wiya,
Piriwal, wamunbilla tia ganka bapa-uwil koa bag emmoiimba bi-
yugbai.
GO. Wiya bon noa letliuko, Bapabunbilla barun tetti-tetti bariin-
ba ; giiitoa yurig bi wolla wiyelliko piriwal koba Eloi koba.
61. Gatun taraito wiya, Piriwal, wirrobanun banug; wamunbilla
tia ganka wiyellikoa barun bag unni emmoug kinba kokera ba.
62. Gatun noa lethuko bon wiya, Keawai tarai-kan-to upilli-
nun mattara purrai-gel lo, gatun willug-wuminun, keawaran noa
murrarag korien kakilliko piriwal ko Eloi koba ko.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 10. 155
WINTA X.
Yakita gaiya kakulla unni tara, Piriwallo noa geaiimulleun fthe
benty taraikan ta, gatun yuka barun buloara-buloara gikoug kiq.
mikan ta, yautin tako kokera ko uwanun noa ba niuwoa-bo.
2. Gatun noa bai-un wiya, Kauwal-lan unni nulai katan, keawai
bo katillikan kiiri kauwalkal ; gali tin wiyella nura bon, Piriwal
nulai-gel koba yuka-uwii koa noa barun katillikan nulai ko katil-
liko gikoug kaiko.
3. Waita nura yurig wolla : A ! yukan nurun bag waita kolag
yanti kiloa warea ta cipu barun kin murrog ka ta.
4. Kurri yikora yanoa raunnigel, gatun yinug, keawai tug-
ganug ; gatun yanoa wiya yikora yapug koa taraikan kiiri.
5. Gratun uwanun nura ba kokera ko taraikan tako, wiyella
kurri giakai, Pital kauwa unni kokera ba.
6. Gatun ba yinal koba pital koba kanun unta, nurunba })ital
kaniin gaiya unta ; keawai ba nurun kin katea kanun willugbo.
7. Gatun yellawanun nura unta kokera, takilliko gatun pittel-
liko, guniin bara ba nurun ; kulla noa umulli-kan-to man ba gu-
toara gikotimba. Uwai yikora kokera kolag kokera kolag.
8. Gatun uwanun nura ba yantin ta kokeroa, gatun bara nurun
pitalmanun, ta-uwa untoa tara wunun ba mikan ta nurun kin.
9. Gatun turon barun umulla unta tara ; gatun wiyella barun,
Piriwal koba Eloi koba papai uwa nurun kinba.
10. Uwanun nura ba tarai ta kokeroa, gatun bara keawai pital-
ma korien nurun, uwea ka nura warai tako yapug kako, gatun
wiyella,
11. Umulleun geen punul untikal gearun kinba nurun kin ; A!
kotellia nura unni ta uwan ta papai katan nurun kin piriwal koba
Eloi koba.
12. Wiyan nurun bag, murrarag kanun unta ta tarai ta purreag,
ka Thodom kako, keawaran gala ko kokera ko.
13. Yapallun bi Koradhin ! yapallun bi Betathaida ! kulla uma-
toara ba kauwal-kauwal kaiyu birugka pa Tviro ka gatun Thidoni
ka uma giroug kin, minki bara ka pa yuraki, yellawa pa bara
pirral la kirrikin ta gatun bonog ka.
14. Murrarag buloara kanun Turo gatun Thidoni unta purreag
wiyellaikanne ta keawaran bi.
15. Gatun gintoa, Kapernaum, wunkulla wokka lag moroko ka,
yuaipiniin wal baran pirri kako.
16. Niuwoa gurran nurun ba, gurran ta noa tia ; gatun niuwoa
waitiman nurun ba, waitiman noa tia ; gatun niuwoa tia waitim an,
waitiman noa bon yuka noa tia ba.
17. Gatun bara ftliebenty ta willugbo kakulla pitalkan, wiyel-
liela, A Piriwal ! gurrullikan bara f diabollo gearun giroug katoa
yitirroa.
156 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
18. Gatun noa barun wiya, NakuUa bon bag Tliatannug punti-
mulleun baran moroko tin yanti niahiia kiloa.
19. A ! gutan bag nui-nn kaiyu -svaitawolliko maiya ko gatun
ti^uarai ko, gatun yantin ko kaiyu bukkakan ko ; gatun keawai
wal nurun yarakai umulliko.
20. Pital-mai yikora nura-nura, gali tin gurullikan tin bara
marai nurun ba ; unti birug pitalnia nura, kulla yitirra nurunba
upatoara moroko ka ba.
21. Yakita ta noa pital-lan kakulla marai ta, gatun wiyelliela,
Kauwa tia yanti, Biyug, Piriwal ta moroko koba gatun purrai
koba, kulla bi ba unnoa tara yuropa gali unti birug guraki ta
birug, gatun bi tugkaiya unnog, tara barun bobog ko ; kauwa
yanti, Biyug, koito ba murrarag ta giroug kin katan mikan ta.
22. Yantin ta tia wupea emmoug kinko Biyugbaito ; gatun
keawai kiiriko bon yinal gimilli pa, wonto ba Biyugbaito ; gatun
Biyugbai yinallo gimilleun, gatun niuwoa yinallo tugunbinun bon
Biyughai.
23. Gatun noa willarig kakulla gikoug kai koba wirrobullikan
koba, gatun wiyelliela kara, Kauwa yanti murrarag ta natan gai-
kug ko unni tara natan nui-a ba :
24. Kulla bag nurun wiyan, kauwallo fpropetto gatun piriwallo
na pa unni tara natan nura ba, gatun bara keawai na korien ; ga-
tun gurra pa unni tara gurran nura ba, gatun keawai gurra korien.
25. A ! tarai wakal fnomiko garokea wokka lag, gatun wiya
bon, wiyelliela, Piriwal, minnug ban ''in bag moron kakilliko yanti-
katai 1
26. Wiya bon noa, Minarig u})a wiyellikanne 1 yakoai bi wiyan ?
27. Gatun noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela, Pital kakilliko bi Piri-
wal ko Eloi ko giroumha ko yantin to biilbiil lo giroumba ko,
gatun yantin to marai to giroumba ko, gatun yantin to kaiyu ko
giroumba ko, gatun yantin to kotellito gii'oiimba ko ; gatun k6ti
ta giroumba yanti gintoa bo ba.
28. Gatun noa wiya bon, Gintoa wiyayelleun tuloa ; unni ta
umulla gatun moron koa bi kauwal
29. Wonto noa ba kotelliela tuloa ko niuwoa bo, wiya bon noa
letliunug, Gan-ke tia k6ti ta emmoiimba 1
30. Gatun noa lethuko wiya, Taraikan waita uwa bar4n fHi-
erothalem kabirug Jeriko kako, gatun nuggurrawa mankiye, man-
tille 'm bon kirrikin, gatun bunkulla, gatun bara waita uwa wareka
gaiya bon biintoara.
31. Yakita gati uwa wakal fliiereu baran ya pug koa ; gatun na-
kulla bon noa ba, uwa noa tarug koa kaiyin ta koa.
32. Ganti yanti kiloa wakiil Lebikan kakulla noa ba unta,
uwa nakulla gaiya bon, gatun noa uwa tarug koa kaiyin ta koa.
33. Wonto ba wakal kiiri Thamariakal uwoUiela ba, uwa yapa-
rig kakilliela noa ba ; gatun nakulla bon noa l)a, minki bon noa
kakulla gikoug kai,
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 10. 157
34. Gratnn uwa gikoug kai koba, gatun gira bon buntoara
gikoumba, kiroabulliela kipai gatun fwain, gatun yellawabunbea
bon gikoug ka ta koti ka buttikag, gatun yutea bon takillig^l lako,
gatun miroma bon.
35. G-atun tarai ta purreag ka wakal la waita noa ba uwa, nian-
kulla gaiya noa buloara fdenari, gatun gukuUa kokeratin ko,
gatun bon wiya, Grolomulla bon ; kirun hi ba upinun, uwea kaniin
bag ba willugbo, gutea kanun gaiya banug.
36. Wonnug-ke k6ti ta gikoumba nuggiirrawa mankiye unti
birug goro kabirug kuri kabirug, kotella bi 1
37. (xatun noa wiya, Niuwoa goloma bon. "Wiya noa bon Tetlui
ko, Yurig, yanti kiloa uniulla bi.
38. Gatun yakita kakuUa, uwa bara ba, uwa noa murrug koa
kokeroa ; gatun taraito nukugko, Marathako yitirra, waniunbea
bon bounnoun kin kokera.
39. Wiiggunbai bounnoun ba gaiya kai, yitiri^a Mari, yellawa
bountoa lethu kin yullo ka, gatun guri'a bon wiyellita
40. Wonto ba INIaratha kamullan bimtoa marai-marai umullita,
gatun uwa bountoa gikoug kin, gatun wiya, Piriwiil, kora bi
natan tia wareka tia wiiggunbai emmoumba umulliko wakallo 1
wiyella bounnoun umiilli koa bountoa tia.
41. Gatun noa letliuko wiyelleun, gatun wiya bounnoun, Ela!
Maratha, Maratlia, gintoa kamullan marai-marai minnambo-min-
nambo ka ;
42. Wonto ba wakal murrarag katan : gatun Mariko bountoa
geremullejn unnoa murraragbo, keawai wal mantillinun boun-
noun kinbirug.
WINTA XI.
Gatun yakita kakulla, wiyelliela noa ba tarai ta purrai ta, kaiul-
leun noa ba wiyelli ta, wakallo bon wiya gikoug-ka-to wirrobulli-
kanto, Piriwal, wiyella gearun bi wiyelliko, yanti kiloa loanne-
to noa wiya barun gikoumba wirrobullikan.
2. Gatun noa wiya barun, wiyamin nura ba, giakai nura wiya-
niin nura, Biyugbai geariimba wokka ka ba moroko ka ba katan,
Kamunbilla yitirra giroumba yirri-yirri kakilliko. Paipibunbilla
Piriwal koba giroumba. Gurrabunbilla wiyellikanne giroumba,
yanti moroko ka ba, yanti ta purrai ta ba.
3. Guwoa gearun purreag ka takilliko.
4. Gatun warekilla geariinba yarakai umatoara, kulla geen
yanti ta wareka yanti ta wiyapaiyeiin geariinba. Gatun yuti
yikora gearun yarakai iimullikan kolag ; mii'omulla gearun yara-
kai tabirug.
5. Gatun noa barun wiya, Gan nurun kinbirug k6ti gikoumba,
gatun uwamin gikoug kin tokoi ta, gatun bon wiyanun, Ela ! k6ti,
mumbilla tia wokkai to goro ko ;
158 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
6. Kulla noa einmoumba koti uwa kalog tin emmoug kinko, ga-
tun keawai bag wiin korien gikoug kin mikan ta takilliko 1
7. Niuwoa inurrug ka ba ko wiyaniin, Wai tia wiyellan ; kulla
nnni kurraka wirrigbakulla, kulla wonnai tara emmouinba em-
moug katoa ba birrikilligel laba ; keawaran bag bougkulli korien
gukilliko giroug.
8. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai uoa bougkulli korien gulliko bon,
kulla noa ba gikoiimba koti ; kulla wal noa bon pirriral-mulli tin
bougkullinun gaiya noa gulliko bon wiyellinun noa ba.
9. G-atun nurun bag Aviyan, Wiyella, gatun gunim gaiya nurun ;
gatun tiwolla, gatun karawollinun gaiya nura; Avirrillia, gatun uma-
niin gaiya nurun.
10. Yantin ba wiyellinvm, manun wal ; gatun noa tiwoUinun,
karawollinun gaiya noa ; gatun gikoug wirrillinun noa ba, uma-
nun gaiya wal.
11. Yinallo ba wiyanun nulai yantin ta nurun kin, biyugbai ta
ba, wiya, noa gunun tunug 1 ga makoro, wiya, noa maiya gunun
makoi'6 ?
12. Gra ba wiyellan noa ba yarro, wiya, noa bon gupaiyinun wu-
arai 1
13. Nura ba yarakaikan katan, gukilliko gutoara murrarag
wonnai ko nurunba ko ; kauwa yanti gunun noa Biyugbaito mo-
roko ka ba ko Marai murrarag barun wiya bon ba ?
14. Gatun noa ba paibuggulliela wakal fdiabol, gatun noa gogo.
Gratun yakita gaiya kakulla, waita ba uwa fdiabol, wiya gaiya noa
gogo kabirug ko ; gatun bara kuri kotelliela.
15. Wonto ba tarai-kan-to wiya, Paibugga noa barun fdiabol
Beeldhebul katan birug, piriwalloa birug fdiabol koba ko.
16. Gatun tarai-kan-to wiyelliela, wiya bon tuga ruoroko tin.
17. Wonto noa ba gimilleun barimba kotellikanne, wiya barun,
Yantin piriwiil koba garuggara umulla barabo tetti bara kaniin ;
gatun kokera koba barabo warakullia bara.
18. Thatan noa ba garuggara kaniin niuwoa-bo, yakoai giko-
umba piriwal koba kanun 1 kulla nura wiyan paibugga bag ba
barun fdiabol Beeldhebul katoa birug.
1 9. Gatun gatoaba paibugganiin barun fdiabol Beeldhebul birug,
gan katoa birug nuriinba-ko yinal-lo paibugga ?
20. Gatoa paibugganun mattarroa birug Eloi koba ko barun
fdiabol, kauwa tuloa uwa gaiya piriwal koba Eloi koba nurun
kin ba.
21. Golomanun no a ba tarai ki'iri mokal porrol gikoug kin ko-
kera, gikoiimba tullokan murroi katan.
22. Wonto ba tanan uwanun tarai mokal porrolkan kauwal
kan gikoug kin, gatun keakea-ma noa bon, mantilliniin gaiya wal
bon kirun mokal gikoumba pirriral-matoara ; gatun gutilliniin noa
mokal gikoumba.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 11. 159
23. Niuwoa keawai emmoug katoa, niuwoa katan koti korien ;
gatun noa keawai boa-ma korien emmoug katoa, ware-ware-kan.
24. Paikullimui ba marai yarakai kuri kabirug, iiwan noa yu-
rig purroi toa tai'awaroa, nakilliko korilliko ; gatun noa keawai
na korien, wiyan noa, Willugbanun wal bag willugbo kokera ko
emmoug ka ta ko, unta birug uwa bag ba.
25. Gratun uwanun noa ba, nakuUa gaiya noa ba wirea kiriiri
gatun konein.
26. XJwan gaiya noa gatun yutea taraikan ftheben ta marai ya-
rakai kauwal yanti niuwoa ba ; gatun bara uwa murrarig gatun
kakulla gaiya bara unta ; gatun yarakai kauwal noa unnoa katan
yakita, kakulla noa ba kurri-kurri.
27. Gratun yakita kakulla, Aviyelliela noa ba, kaaibulleiin tarai
nukug gali koba konara koba, gatun wiya bou bountoa, Murrai"ag
kauwa yanti pika kurrea bon ba, gatun paiyil pitta bi ba.
28. Wonto noa bo wiya, Kauwa yanti, murrarag kauwal katan
bara gurrullikan wiyellikanne Eloi koba, gatun mirromulli-ko.
29. Gratun yakita kakulla, wittillan bara ba kuri, wiya noa
kurri-kuiTi, Unni ta yarakai katan willuggel ; nakillin bara tilga ;
keawai wal barun gunun, unni bo ta wal tiiga lona-umba fpropet
koba.
30. Yanti kiloa lona ti'iga kakulla noa bai'un kuri Ninebi ka,
yanti bo ta wal kaniin noa yinal kiiri koba barun gali ko willuggel
ko.
31. Bougkullinun wal piriwal kirin pakai birug purreag ka
wiyelligel lakurikoa untikal loa willuggel loa, gatun pirralmaniin
barun ; kulla bountoa uwa kalog kabirug purrai tabirug wiran
tabirug gun-ulli bon guraki ko Tholomon ko ; A! kauwal katan
Tholomon kiloa unnibo.
32. Bougkullinun wal bara kiiri Ninebikal purreag ka wiyelli-
gel la kuri koa untikal loawillugg61 loa, gatun pirral-manun barun;
kulla bara minki kakulla wiyelli ta lona-iimba ka ; A! kauwal ka-
tan lona kiloa unnibo.
33. Keawai kuriko tarai-kan-to wirroug bugganiin kaibug wu-
nun gaiya gati ta, keawai bara ka wimbi ka, wonto ba kaibuggel
la, bara ba uwanun na-uwil koa bara kaibug.
34. Kaibug ta murrin koba gaikug ; wonto ba giroumba gaikug
tuloa katan, yantin bin katan murrin kaibugkan ; wonto bin ba
gaikug yarakai, kaniin murrin bin warapa tokoi to.
35. Yakoai bi, mirka unnoanug kaibug giroug kinba tokoi ta ba
katan.
36. Kulla ba yantin ta giroumba murrin ta ba warapan kaibug
ko, keawai taraikan tokoi, kanun yantinbo ta wal warapan kaibug
ko, yanti kaibug koba wupin gatun binkirreun.
37. Gratun wiyelliela noa ba, taraito Parithaioko wiya bon ta-
uwil koa noa gikoug katoa ; gatun noa uwa murrarig gatun yel-
lawa takilliko.
160 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
38. Gratun noa 1ia Parithaioko nakulla, umulli korien noa bato
ka kurri-kurri takilli kola^', kotellicla noa.
39. Gatun bon noa Piriwallo wiya, Yakita nura Parithaioiko
umullia inirkun karai-gon tunti gatun pikirri ; wonto ba nuriin-
ba murrin warapan williro gatun yarakai to.
40. Wogkal nura! yan ta noa uma unnoa yanti unnoa ba warrai
ta ba, yantibo uma noa murrug ka ba?
41. Guwa nura untoakal nurun kinbirug, gatun yantin nurun
ba tuloa ka katan.
42. Yapal nura Paritliaioi ! kulla nura gukillan wintakal fnien-
tha tabirug, gatun f ruta tabirug, gatun yaki tara, gatun gurra-
maigan tuloa gatun [)italumullikanne Eloi koba : unni tara nura
uma pa, gatun keawai taraikan wareka pa uma korien.
43. Yapal nura Pai'ithaioi! kulla nura pitalman yellawollikanne
wokka kaba ftliunagog kaba, gatun umuUikanne gukilligel lake.
44. Yapal nura fgarammateu gatun Parithaioi, gakoiyaye ! kulla
nura yanti tulmun kiloa paipi korien, gatun bara kiiri uwan
wokka lag tulmun toa, keawai-an bara na korien.
45. Wiyayelleun gaiya wakallo f nomiko-ko wiyelliela bon, Piri-
wiil, giakai bi wiyan, pirvalman bi gearun.
46. Gratun noa wiya, Y^apal nura fnomikoi yantinbo ! kulla nura
wuntan kiiri ka porrol ta lo kauwal porrol kurrilliko, gatun kea-
wai nura unnoa porrol numa korien nurun ka to mattarr6.
47. Yapal nura ! kulla nura ba wittiman tulmun bariinba fpro-
pet koba, gatun biyugbaito nuriinba-ko bunkulla barun tetti kul-
won.
48. Kauwa tuloa ta pirralman nura umatoara biyugbai koba
nurunba ; kulla bara yuna bo ta barun biinkulla tetti, gatun nura
wittillin tulmun barunba.
49. Yaki tin wiya gurakita Eloi koba ko, Yukanin wal bag
barun fpropet gatun fapothol barun kin, gatun winta barun kin-
bii'ug biinnin wal bara gatun yarakai umanim ;
50. Wiya-uwil koa gorog yantin koba fpropet koba kiroaba-
toara yaki tabirug kurri-kurri tabirug purrai tabirug, unni barun
willuggel;
51. Grorog kabirug Abeliimba kabirug, gorog kako Dliakaria-
umba kako buntoara willi ka tt>omo ta gatun fhieron ; kauwa
tuloa to wiyan nurun bag, wiya-uwil koa unni barun willuggel.
52. Yapal nura fnomikoi ! kulla nura mankuUa wirrigbakilli-
gel gurakita koba ; keawai nura wa pa, gatun nura miya barun
uwa bara ba.
53. Gatun wiya noa ba unni tara barun, pirriralma bon bara
garammateuto gatun Parithaioiko, wiya-uwil koa noa minnambo
wiyelliko ;
54. Mittillin bara bon, gatun nakillin gurrulliko gikoug kin ba
ko kurraka ba ko, wiyayean koa bara bon.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 12. 161
WINTA XII.
Yakita kakulla, wittillan bara ba yantibo konara kuri, wata-wata-
wollan barabo, wiya noa kurri-kuiTi barim wirrobullikan gikoumba,
Yakoai nura flebben barunba Paiitbaioi koba, gakoiyaye ta unnoa.
2. Yantin ba wutea ta tugunbinun gaiya wal ; gatun yantin
yuropa ta namunbinrm gaiya wal.
3. Yaki tiii, wiyellan nura tokoi ta gurrabunbinun wal kaibug
ka ; gatun unni ta wiya nura ba gurreug ka waiyakan ta, wiyel-
liniin wal wokka ka kokera.
4. Gatun bag nurun wiyan k6ti ta emmoumba, Kinta kora nura
barun kin biinkillikan tin murrin tin, gatun yukita tantoa bo ta
wal bara kaiyukanto bannn.
5. Tugunbiniin wal bag nurun gan-kai nura kinta wal kaniin :
Kinta bon kauwa gikoug kai, yukita noa ba biinkulla kaiyukan
noa warekulliko koiyug kako pirriko kako ; kauwa wiyan bag
nurun, Kinta bon kauwa gikoug kai.
6. Wiya, fpente tibbin warea ta gupaiye ko buloara fassari, ga-
tun keawai wakal unti birug woggunti korien gikoug kin Eloi kin ?
7. Kulla yantin wollug kaba kittug murrapatoara katan. Kinta
kora nura gali tin ; kulla nura murrarag kauwalkan katan, kea-
waran gali tarako tibbinko warea-ta-ko kauwal-kauwal-ko.
8. Unni ta nurun bag wiyan, Yantinto enimoug wiyaniin mikan
ta kiiri ka, gikoug wiyaniin noa Yinal kiiri kolja mikan ta agelo
ka Eloi koba ko.
9. Wonto ba niuwoa ganbullin'm tia emmoug mikan ta kui'i
ka, ganbullinun wal bon mikan ta agelo ka Eloi koba ka.
10. Cratuu ganto ba yarakai wiyan un gikoug Yinal kiiri koba,
kamunbinun wal bon ; wonto bon ba yarakai wiyellikan Maraikan
yirri-yirri-kan, keawai bon kamunbiniin.
11. Gratun man Lin nurun bara fthunagog kako gatun wiyelli-
kan tako, gatun kaiyukan tako, kota yikora nura wonnug nura ba
wiyayellin'in, ga minnug nura wiyanun.
12. Kulla nurun Marai-kan-to yirri-yirri-kan-to wiyaniin Aval
yakita bo gaiya minnug wal nura wiyan fm.
13. Gatun wiya bon wakallo konara birug ko, Piriwal, wiyella
emmoumba biggainug, gukulli koa noa purrai emmoug kai.
14 Gatun noa bon wiya, Kiiri, ganto tia uma wiyellikan, ga
gukillikan giroug kin 1
15. Gatun noa barun wiya, Yakoai gatun murroi kauwa williri
koba ; kulla moron kiiri koba ka korien ta kauwal-kauwal la tul
lokan ka gikoug ka ta.
16. Gatun noa wiya barun unni fparabol, wiyeiliela, Purrai ta
porr61kan koba poaikulleun kauwal :
17. Gatun noa kotelleun niuwoabo, wiyeiliela, Minnug banun
bag, kulla wal unni tuntan uwa, wiya wal bag wonta wura-uwil
unni tara emmoumba ?
162 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
18. Gatuii noa wiya, TJnni bag uinanun ; umanun wal bag bardn
Avunkilligel emmoumba, gatun wittia kaiiiin kauwal ; gatun unta
bag wuniin yantin emmoumba iiulai gatun tullokan.
19. Gatun bag wiyanun emmoiimba marai, A marai! kauwal
tullokan giroumba wimkulla kauwal lako wunal lako; yellawolla
murroi bi, tauwa, pittella, gatun pital kauwa.
20. Wonto ba Eloito bon wiya, Wogkal-lan bi ! unti tokoi ta
giroumba marai mantillinun wal giroug kinbirug ; ganto gaiya
unnoa tara tullokan manun tuigko bi ba uma 1
21. Yanti niuwoa ba wupeakan tullokan gikoumba ko, gatun
keawai porrol korien Eloi kai koba.
22. Gatun noa wiya barun wirrobullikan, Yaki tin wiyan bag
nurun, Yanoa, kota yikora nurunba moron takilliko ; ga keawai
murrin ko wupulliko.
23. Moron ta kauwal katan murrarag takillikanne keawaran,
gatun murrin ta kauwal katan murrarag kirrikin keawaran.
24. Kotella wakun barun ; koito bara ba keawai wupa korien,
gatun keawai kol bunti korien ; keawai bari'mba tuigko wupilli-
gal, keawai baninba kokei-a ; gatun noa Eloito giratiman barun ;
kauwal-kauwal nura katan murrarag tibbin bara keawaran.
25. Gatun gan nurun kinbirug kotellita kanun, umea kaniin
moron gikoumba warea ka kakilliko fkubit kako 1
2G. Wiya nura ba kaiyu korien to umulliko unni warea, min-
arig tin nura kotellin unnoa tara 1
27. Kotella nura kenukun turukin bara ba ; keawai bara uma
korien, wupi korien bara ; gatun bag wiyan nurun, Tholomon noa
ba, koneinkan, keawai bon wupa korien yanti kiloa wakal unti
tara birug.
28. Upanun noa ba Eloito woiyo yanti, yakita purreag ka unta
ba purrai ta katan, gatun kumba warekakin murrug ka wollo ka ;
wiya, nurun noa upanun. A! nura gurrullikan wareakan ?
29. Gatun na-ki yikora nura minarig nurunba takilliko gatun
pittelliko, ga kota yikora nura minki ko.
30. Koito ba bara yantinto purrai ta ba ko natan yantin unni
tara ; gatun nurunba-to Biyugbai-to gurx-an unni tara gukillikanne
nurun ba murrarag kakilliko.
31. Wonto ba nura nauwa piriwal koba Eloi koba, gatun yantin
unni rara gunun nurun kin.
32. Kinta kora, wirrul warea ; kulla pitalman bon Biyugbai nu-
runba gukilliko piriwal-gel ta nurun kin.
33. Gukillea nurunba, gatun guwa gukillikanne : umulla nura
yinug nurunba, keawai koa korokal katea-kun, porrolkan ta moroko
ka ba kakilliko ka korien kakilliko, keawai ba unta ko uwa korien
mankiye, gatun keawai ba yarakai puntaye.
34. Wonnun ta nurunba tullokan, untabo kanun nurunba bi'il-
bul yantibo.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 12. 163
35. Grirullia nura winnal nui'iinba, gatuii uuriaiba kaibug wina-
bunbilla ;
36. Gatun nurabo yanti kiloa kuri ba mittillin bariinba ko Piri-
wal ko, willug-baniin noa ba mankilligel labirug ; uwaniui noa ba
ba tanan gatun wirrillinun, umauiin gaiya bon tanoa-kal-bo.
37. Pitalmatoara kauiiu bara unnoa tara mankillikan, yakita
Piriwal noa ba uwanun, noa ba barun kin naniin noa ba barun
nakilli ta ; wiyan bag tuloa nurun, girullinun noa kotibo, gatun
yellawabumbea barun takilli kolag, gatun uwanun noa gukilliko
barun.
38. Gratun tanan uwanun noa ba, yakita buloara nakillikan ta,
yakita goro ka nakillikan ta, gatun naniin barun yantibo nakilli
ta, pitiilmatoai-a bara unnoa tara mankillikan.
39. (jratun gurrulla unni, wiya noa ba kokera-tin-to gurra pa,
yakounta ba uwa pa mankiye na pa noa, keawai gaiya kokera
gikoiimba potobunti pa,
40. Yanti tin kauwa nura nakilliko ; kulla noa Yinal kiiri koba
uwanun yakita kota korien nura ba.
41. Wiya gaiya noa bon Peterko, Piriwal, wiyan bi unni fpara-
bol gearunbo, ga gearun yantin 1
42. Gratun noa Piriwallo wiya, G-an-ke noa mankillikan murra-
rag gatun guraki, piriwallo noa umanun bon -wiyellikan kakilliko
kokera ko gikoug ka ta ko, gu-uwil koa noa takilliko yakita gukil-
ligel la 1
43. Pitalmatoai'a katan unnoa mankillikan, umanun noa ba gi-
koiimba piriwal nanun gaiya noa bon umulli ta yanti.
44. Wiyan bag tuloa, umanun bon noa wiyellikan kakilliko
yantin tako.
45. Wonto noa ba wiyanun gala mankilli-kan-to, bulbiil la, Em-
moiimba piriwal minkin uwa korien ; gatun gaiya noa biinkilli
kolag barun kiiri mankillikan gatun gapal, gatun takilli kolag,
gatun pittelli kolag, gatun kuttawai kolag ;
46. Piriwal gala koba mankillikan koba uwanun wal noa pur-
reag ka na korien ta, gatun yakita gaiya kota korien ta bon,
gatun bunniin bon buloarakan, gatun gunun bon winta gikoug
kai barun kin gurra korien ta,
47. Gratun unnoa mankillikan gurran noa kotelli ta piriwal
koba gikoiimba, gatun keawai uma korien, keawai noa uma pa
yanti kotelli ta gikoumba, biinnun wal gaiya bon kauwal-kauwal.
48. Wonto noa ba niuwoa gurra korien, gatun yarakai umatoara
yaki tin bun ba bon, biinnun wal warea. Kulla bon gupa kauwal,
wiyapaiyanun wal kauwcil gikoug kinbirug ; gatun kuriko gu-
kuUa kauwal, wiyellia kanun bara gaiya kauwal-kauwal gikoug
kinbirug,
49. TJwan ta bag unni yukulliko koiyug ko purrai ta ko ; niin-
nug-bulKnun bag kauwa ba tanoa-kal-bo wirrog-kullea 1
164 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
50. Kulla tia korimullikanne cnimong kinba korimulliko; gatun
yakoai bag kutan goloin koa ka-iiwil kakilliko !
51. Kotau nura, uwa bag bapital gukillikopiuTai ta ko 1 wiyan
bag ba, keawai ; wonto l)a gurruggiiiTa kakilliko ;
52. Kulla wal unti birug kaiiuu kakilliko fpente kokera wakal
la, gurruggurra birug, goro buluu kiiibirug, gatuu buloara goro
kabirug.
53. Biyugbai gurruggurra kaiiun yinal labirug, gatun yinal
biyugbai tabirug ; gatun tunkan yinalkun tabirug, gatun yin41-
kun tunkan tabirug, tungaikun bounnoun ba kurrinanbai tabirug,
gatun kuri'inanbai bounnoun ba tungaikun tabirug.
54. Gratun noa barun kuri wiya, Nanun nura ba yareil wokka
lag punnal ha pulogkulligel lin, wiyanun gaiya nura koiwon ta-
nan ba ; gatun kauwa yanti.
55. Cratun kareawug ba kanun, wiyellinun gaiya nura, karol
kinun ; gatun yanti gaiya kanun.
56. A nura nakoiyaye ! natan nura tarkin moroko koba gatun
purrai koba ; minarig tin koa nura na korien unti yakita 1
57. Kauwa, kora koa nura kota ba nurun kinbirug tuloa 1
58. Uwimun bi ba gikoug katoa bukkakan toa gikoug kinko
wiyellikan tako, yapug koa nuiyellia bi bon, wamunbi-uwil koa
biloa murroi kakilliko gikoug kinbirug : yutea-kun koa biloa wi-
yellikan kauwal lako, gatun wiyellikanto kauwallo wamunbinan
biloa yarakan tako, gatun yarakanto vvupiniin biloa fjail kako.
59. Wiyan banug, keawai bi waita uwa korien unta birug, gu-
killinun bi ba flepton ta kirun warea ta.
WINTA XTII.
Kakulla bara unta yakita taraikan, wiya bon barun Galilaiakal,
gorog bariinba tarogkama Pilato-to fthubia barun barunba.
2. Gratun noa letliuko wiyayelleun, wiyelliela noa barun, Wiya,
nura kotellin unnoa tara Galilaiakal yarakai bara kakulla kau-
wal barun kinbirug Galilaiakal labirug, kulla barun ba mankulla
unnoa taral
3. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai ; kulla nura keawai minki katan,
yantin gaiya nura tetti tetti kanun.
4. Gra barun fetin ta wunkulleiin kokera baran, gatun tetti-tetti
barun wirria, wiya, nura kotellin barun yarakai bara ba kakulla
kauwal barun kuri kabirug kakillin fHierotbalem ka 1
5. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai ; kulla nura keawai minki katan,
yantin gaiya nura tetti-tetti kanun.
6. Wiya noa unni yanti tp^i-i'abol : Taraikan ta kiiriko wup^a
yirriwilbin purrai ta gikoug ka ta ; gatun noa uwa yeai ko nakil-
liko, gatun noa keawai gaiya na pa.
7. Wiya gaiya noa bon upuUikan, Ela! goro ka wunal la unti,
Hwa bag nakilliko yeai ko unti birug ko yirriwiltabin tako, gatun
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 13, 165
keawai gaiya bag iia pa ; kolbuntiila inmoa uaruu ', minavig tiu
unnoa katan purrai ta ]
S. Gratuu noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela Ijon, Piriwal, kaiuuubiUa
unnoa unti wunal la, pinni-uwil koa bag untoakal ko, gatun konug
koa bag wupi-uwil ;
9. Gatun yeai l)a kanun, mun-ai-ag gaiya kaniin ; gatun ka
korien ba, gatun yukita gaiya kolbuntinun wal bi uuni barau.
10. Gratun noa wij^elliela wakiU la ttkunagog ka purreig ka
thabbat ka.
11. Gratun, a! kakuUa unta wakul nukug launni-lan bouutoa ba
kauwal-kauNval wunal fetin ta, gatun woinu bountoa, gatun kea-
wai bountoa kaiyu korien wokka-lan kakilliko.
12. Gratun nakulla noa ba lethuko bounnoun, kaaipa bounno-
un noa, gatun wiyelliela bounnoun, Nukug, gintoa burug-kulleun
woinu kabirug giroug kinbirug.
13. Gatun noa upilleiui miittara bounnoun kin ; gatun tanoa-
kal-bo bounnoun tuloa uma, gatun bountoa pitaluia bon Eloinug.
li. Gatun piriwtillo ftliunagjg kako wiyayelleun bukka-kan-to,
kulla noa lethuko tui-on uma purreag ka thabbat ka, gatun wiya
barun kuri, jHek ta })uri'eag ka umilliko kuri ko ; unti tara pur-
reag ka tanan uwolla turon uniulliko, gatun koawai tliabbat ta
purreag ka.
15. Pii'iwallo noa bon wiyayelleun gatun wi^'elliela, Gintoa
gakoiyaye ! wiya, yantinto nura burugbuggan gikoumba jhoo ga-
tun fatliino, purreag ka tliabbat ka, unta birug kokera birug,
yemmama-uwil koa kokoin kolag pittelliko?
16. Gatun keawai wal unui gapal, yinulkun ta Abaramiimba,
giratoara bounnoun Tliatanto noa unni tara jetin ta wunal la,
burugbuggulliko yanti birug, unti tliabbat ta purreag ka 1
17. Gatun wiya noa ba unni tara, koiyun bara gaiya ki'itan
yantin bukkamaiye gikoug kai ; gatun yantin kuri pital kakulla
yantin tin umatoarrin kauvsal lin gikoug birug.
18. Wiya gaiya noa, Minarig kiloa Piriwal koba Eloi koba I ga-
tun yakoai kiloa paggunbinun ?
19. Yanti kiloa ta yeai ba fniutard kolia, mankulla kuriko, ga-
tun meapa puri-ai ta gikoug kai ta ; gatun boaikuUeun Avokka lag,
gatun kakulla kauwal kulai ; gatun tibbin moroko tin yellawa wi-
ran ta.
20. Gatun noa wiyea-kun, Yakoai kiloa bag tugunbiiu'in piriwal
koba Eloi koba 1
21. Yanti flebben kiloa, mankulla gapallo gatun yuropa goro
ka gukilligel la nulai ta, kakulla wal yantibo flebben kiloa.
22. Gatun noa uwa kokeroa gatun kauwal loa kokeroa, wiyatin,
gatun uwollin tHierotlialem kolag.
23. Wiya gaiya bon wakallo, Piriwal, v/iya, warai moron ka-
killiko 1 Gatun noa wiya barun,
M
IGG AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
24. Nuwolla pulogkulli kolaj> tuloa tin yapug tin : kuUa bag
nui'un wiyan, kaiiwal-kauwallo nuwam'iu murrarig [)ul6gkulli ko-
lag gatun keawai wal kaiyu korieii.
25. Bougkulliuuu iioa ba kokeratin wokka lag, gatun wirrig-
l)akulia pulogkulligel, gatun nura garokea warrai ta, gatun wirril-
lei'in toto pulogkulligel, wiyellin, Piriwal, Piriwal, umulla gearun ;
gatun noa wiyayellinun gatun wiyanun, Keawaran bag nui'un gi-
milli korien wonta birug wal nura :
26. Wiyanun gaiya wal nura, Takeun geen gatun pittakeun gi-
roug kin mikan ta, gatun gintoa wiyakeun gearun kin yapug ka.
27. Wonto wal noa ba wiyanun, Wiyan l)ag nurun, keawaran
bag nurun gimilli korien, wonta Itirug wal nura ; yurig tia uwolla
emmoug kinbirug, yantin nura yarakai umullikan.
28. IJnta ta wal tugkilliniin gatun tirra-gatpuntullinun, nanun
gaiya nui'a ba barun, Alx'iramnug, gatun Ithaknug, gatun Yacub-
nug, gatun yantin fpi'opetnug, kakillin bara ba piriwal koba ka
Eloi koba, gatun nurunbo yuaipea wari'ai tako.
29. Gratun bara uwanun niui'iug tin, gatun krai tin, gatun kuni-
mari tin, gatun pakai tin, gatun yellawaniin wal piriwal koba ka
Eloi koba ka.
30. Gratun, a ! bara willug katan, kabo wal bara ganka kaniin
gatun bara ganka katan, kabo wal bara willug kanun.
31. Unta purreag ka winta uwa Parithaioi kabirug wiyellin bon,
Yurig ba waita wolla unta birug, kuUa noa Herodto biloa bunnuu
tetti.
32. Gratun noa barun wiya papai kokera koba, gurra noa tekki gatun
uutelli ta.
26. Gatun noa kaai])a wakal uiankillikan, gatun wiya minnug-
ban gali tai-a minarig tin.
27. Gatun wiya bon noa, Unni ta uwan giroumba biggai ; gatun
giroumba-ko biyugbaito tura giratimatoara buttikag fitalo kipai
ta, kuUa wal piti'il noa gikoug kai moron tin katan.
28. Gatun noa niuwara kakulla, keawai noa murrug kolag uw a
pa; yaki tin noa biyugbai gikoumba nwa gatun pirriralma bon.
29. Gatun noa bon wiyayelliela gikoumba biyugbai, Ela ! kau-
wal-kauwalla wunalla umala bag gii'oug ; keawai bag giroumba
Aviyellikanne unia korien ; gatun keawai bi tia gupa warea butti-
kag f kid, pital koa tia ka-uwil bara emmoumba kotita :
30. Wonto ba tanoa-bo giroumba yinal uwa gali, wari-wareka
giroiimba tullokan yarakai-willvig koa ko gapal loa, tura gaiya bi
gikoug buttikag fitalo giratimatoara.
31. Gatun noa wiya bon, Yinal, yellaw'an biemmougkin yanti-
katai, gatun yantiu imni tara emmoumba giroug kin kanun.
32. Murrarag ta kakulla takilliko gatun pittelliko ; koito l>a
unni giroumba umbeara-kog tetti kakulla, gatun moron kateakan :
gatun garaAvatilleim, gatun bummilleim bon yakita^
THK GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 16. 171
WINTA XVI.
Gatux noa wiya baruu gikoumba wii-robullikan, Untoa ta tarai ta
wakal kuri tuUokan porrolkan, mankillau piriwal gikoiimba ; gatuii
wiyayema bon gikoug wareka noa gikouniba tullokan.
2. Gatun noa wiya bon, wiyelliela, Yakoabag gurra giroug kin-
ba ? "sviyella bi tia minarig bi ba nmulliela ; keawai bi kara kunuu
umullikan.
3. Wiyelleiin gaiya noa mankillikan niuwoal)0, Minnug baniui
bag ? kulla wal lia piriwallo enimoumba ko mantilleun keawai
bag mankillikan kanun ; keawai bag pinninun ; koiyun bag poi-
yelliko.
4. Gali wal bag mnulliko, yipanim tia ha emmoiimba mankil-
ligel labii'ug, waniunbi-uwil koa tia bara koti ko kokera ko.
5. Yanti lia wiya noa liai-un wiyatoara piriwal koba gikoumba,
gatun noa wiya wakal kurri-kurri ka, Minnan ba wiyapaiyeun em-
nioumba piriwal koba'?
6. Gatun noa wiya, fHekatou ta wimbi ka karauwa. Gatun
noa wiya bon, Mara bi unni, yellawa kurrakai, upulla fpentekonta
koa ka-uwil.
7. Wiya gaiya noa tarai, Minnan bi wiya])aiyeun piriwal koba?
Gatun noa wiya, fHekaton ta winibi fwiet. Gatun bon noa wiya,
Mara bi unni, npuUa fety koa ka-uwil.
8. Gatun noa piriwallo mui-rarag bon wiya unnoa mankillikan
yarakai ka, kulla noa uma gurakito ; kulla bara wonnai tara unti
ko purrai tako bariinba willuggel koba guraki bara, keawai bara
wonnai kaibug koba.
9. Gatun gatoa nurun wiyan, Umulla nura bo kutita kakilliko
tullo-yarakai tabirug ; tetti nura ba kanun, waraunbilla gaiya nu-
run kokera yuraki ba katan yanti-katai.
10. Niuwoa miroman gali warea ta, yanti miroman noa kauwal
gali ta ; gatun niuwoa yarakai-maye gali warea ta, yanti yai'akai-
maye gali kauwal ta.
11. Yaki tin keawai nura l)a miroma pa tuUo yarakai ta, ganto
wal nurun guniin tullo tuloa ta miromuUiko 1
1 2. Gatun keawai nui'a ba mii'oma pa tarai koba, ganto wal gu-
nun nuriinba koti tako 1
13. Keawai wal mankillikanto umanun buloara-bulun piriwal
bula ; kulla noa yarakai umanun wakal bon, gatun mun-arag uma-
nun tarai ; ga ba kanun noa wakalla, gatun beelmanun bon tarai.
Keawai nura kaiyu korien uraulliko Eloi ko gatun tullokan ko
yarakai ko.
14. Gatun unni tara bara gurra Parithaioiko, willirrikan bara
katan, gatun bon bara beelma.
15. .Gatun noa barun wiya, Kauwa murrarag koa nura ka-uwil
inikan ta barun kin kuri ka ; wonto noa ba Eloito gurran nuriin-
ba biilbul la ba ; kulla unni tara murrarag ta katan baruii kinba
kiii'i ko, yakaran ta katan mikan ta Eloi kin.
172 AX AUSTRALIAN LAN-GUAfJE.
16. Wiycllikanno-ta gatuu Inira fpropct kakulla loaune noa La
paipea : yaki tabirug jnriwAl koba Eloi koba wiyabunbea, gatuu
yantin kiiri Avaita-waitawoUeiiu inurrug kolag.
17. Gatuu moroko ta gatuu purrai ta kaiyukau kauun waita
kolag, keawai warea ta wiyellikauue koba ka korieu kakilliko.
18. Gauto ba warekulliuuu porikuubai gikoumba gatuu tarai
bi'imbea ka, yarakai buinbea uoa: gatuu ganto ba bumbiuuu ware-
katoara ])oribai taliirug, yarakai bi'uubea uoa.
19. Kakulla ta noa wakal porrolkau, upulleiiu uoa gorog-gorbg
ko gatuu uiurrurag ko karigkareug ko, gatuu bou kakulla uiiu-
nugbo-uiinuugbo kauwal takilliko gatuu pittfUiko yautiu ta pur-
eag ka:
20. Gatuu kakulla ta wakal ]ioiyaye giakai yitirra Ladharo,
wuukulla bou ba yapuggel gikoug ka ta, warapal mita-mitag,
21. Gatuu wiya bou ba nmtug ko takilliko gikoug kai porrolbiu
tin takilligel labivug ; gatuu warikal uwa bara, woata gaiya l>ou
uiita-iaitag.
22. Yakita-kalai tetti kakulla poiyaye, gatun kurriu Ijava bou
agelo-ko Abaram kiuko jtarrag kako : tetti gaiya noa porrolkau
kakulla, gatuu bou uiilka.
23. Gatuu uoa uuta koiyug ka jlu'll ka bougkulleiiu gikoiiuiba
gaikug, kakilliela tirriki ka, gatuu nakilliela bou Abaramuug ka-
log ka, gatuu uoa Ladharo parrag ka kakilliela Abaram kin.
21:. Gatun uoa kaaibulleiui, wiyelliela, Biyug Abaram, gurrara
tia kauwa, gatuu yukulla bou Ladliaronug, kurrimulli' koa noa
kokoin to, gatuu moiya koa tia tallag wupi-uwil ; kulla wal liag
Idrrin kiitan iinti tirriki ka koiyug ka.
25. Wonto noa ba Abaramko wiya, Yiual, gurrulla giutoa ya-
kita moron ta inautala murrarag-tai giroiimba, wonto noa ba
Ladharo yakaran mantala ; gatun noa yakita pital katan, wonto
bi ba kirrin katau.
2G. Gatuu yanti uuui l)a, geaiaiu kiuba willika ba pirriko wiiu'
kulla ; keawai uwanun untikal luitoa kolag : koawai bara unta
birug nwaniin untiko gearun kiuko.
27. Wiya gaiya uoa, Wiyan bauug, Biyug, yuka-uwil koa boii
l)iutun kiuko kokera kolag :
28. Kulla wal lia emmoumba kotita fpente; wiya-uwil koa noa
barun, yanoa bara ba tanau uwanun unti kolag tirriki-tii'riki kako.
29. Abaramko noa wiya bou, Mothe uoa gatuu bara fpropet ba-
run katoa ba ; gurral)uubilla baniu,
30. Gatuu noa wiya, Keawaran, ])iyug Abaram ; wakal l)a uwol-
la barun kin unta birug tetti kabirug, gurraniui gaiya wal bara.
31. Gatuu noa bon wiyj'i, Keawai bara ba gurranun bou iVlothe-
ung gatuu barun fpropetnug, keawai wal bara gurranun wakal ba
^laikullinun moron tetti kabirug.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 17. 173
WIXTA XVIT
^^'IYA !J:aiva noa barun wivi-obullikan jldkoiiiuba, Kauwa yanti ka-
niin bo ta yval yarakai -, yapalla iioa gikoiig kiubirug yarakai ta-
birug !
-. 3Iurrai ka ba noa gira-uwil koa kulleug koa l:)Ou tuuug, gatun
"wareka-uwil koa bon korowa ka, mini noa yanoa yarakai umabunlji
yikora unti tara birug wakal wonnai tara birug.
•3. Yakoai nura kauwa : Kotiko ba giroug yarakai iimanun gi-
roug ka to, wiyella bon ; gatun minki noa ba k-anun, kamunbilla
bon.
4. Gatun kauwul-kauwal-la Inloa ba yarakai umanun wakal la
purreag ka, gatun kauwal-kauwal-la biloa willarig noa kanun wa-
kal la puiTeag ka, wiyellinun biloa, Minki bag katan ; kamun-
binun Aval binug.
5. Gatun bon bara fapothol wiya, Piriwal, kauwal koa geaninba
gurrulli-ta ka-uwil kakilliko.
6. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Ka ba nun'mba gurrulli-ta yanti
kiloa mitti yeai fmutard koba, wiyella wal nura ba unni kiilai
ftbukamin, Wokka lag l)i kauwa wirrakan-bo, gatun meapuUia bi
korowa ka ; gatun gala nurun gurraniin gaiya wal.
7. Gan nurun kinbirug-ko upullin i)urrai nurun ka to mankilli-
kan-to, ga taraunbin buttikag, wiyaniin bon kabo, uwanun noa ba
upulliggel labirug, Yurig bi wolla, yellawolliko ta-uwil koa 1
8. Gatun wiya bon noa A\"iyanun, Kurrakai uniulla ta-uwil koa
bag, gatun girullia bi gintoabo, gatun mara-uwil koa bi tia ta-uwil
koa bag gatun pitta-uwil ; gatun willug gaiya bi tanim gatun pit-
tanun ]
9. Wiya noa, wiyapaiyeun I)on mankillikan, koito noa ba uma
unni tara' wiya bon ba 1 Kotan bag kearan.
10. Yanti nura wiyella, umanim nura Ija yantin unni tara
wiyatoara nurun, Umullikan geen murrarag korien katan ; uma ta
geen unni wiyatoara umulliko gearun.
11. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela noa ba fHierotlialem kolag,
uwa willi koa noa Tliamaria koa gatun Galilaia koa,
12. Gatun noa uwolliela ba tarai toa kokeroa, nuggarawa bon
bara kuri ften ta puiTul-wommun-wommun, garokea kalog ka :
13. Gatun bara paibugga pulli, gatun wiya Ictlm, Piriwal, gui'-
raraiuulla gearun.
14. Gatun nakulla noa barun, wiya barun noa, Yurig nura wolla,
tugunbillia nura barun kin fhiereu ko. Gatun yakita kakulla,
uwolliela bara ba, turon bara kakulla tanoa-kal-bo.
15. Gatun wakallo bai'un kinbirug-ko, nakilleiin noa ba turon
noa kakulla, willugbo noa uwa, gatun kaaipulleim noa wokka, pi-
talmulliela bon Eloinug,
16. Gatun puntimulleun noa baran goara ko gikoug kin tinna
ka, murrarag noa bon wivelleun ; eatun noa Thamaria-kal.
174 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
17. Gatun noa lethuko wiyayelleiin, wiyclliela, Wiya, ften ta
turon kakulla 1 ga wonnug-ke bara taraikan fnain ta 1
18. Keawai bara willug ])a ba ]iitaliniilliko bon Eloinug, wakal
ba }ioa mini gowikan ko.
19. Gatun noa wiya bon, Jjougkullia, yurig bi woUa ; girougka
ba ko guiTulli biriig ko turon bi katan.
20. Gatun wiya bon ba Paritliaioiko, yakounta-ke paipinun piri-
wal koba Eloi koba, wiyayelleun noa barun, wiyelliela, Tanaii
uwan piriwal koba Eloi koba keawai na koiieji.
21. Keawai bara wiyanun wal, A unni ta ! ga unta ta ! kuUa, a !
piriwal koba Eloi koba murrug kaba katan nurun kinba.
22. Gatun noa wiya barun wirrobullikan, A! puri'eag ta wal
kanini, na-uwil koa nura wakal purreag Yinal koba kuri koba,
gatun keawai wal nura nanun.
23. Gatun bara nurun wiyanun wal, Xa-uwa unni ; ga, na-uwa
unnug : yanoa l)arun uwa yikora, wirroba yikoi'a.
24. Yanti kiloa jnrruggun-to uwan tarai tabirug ko moroko
birug ko, tarai ta kako moroko kako ; kauwa yanti kiloa wal ka-
nun Yinal kiiri koba purreag ka gikoug ka ta.
25. Gatun kui-ri-kurri ta bon umanun ininnugbo-minuugbo,
gatun warekatea wal bon gali koba willuggel koba.
26. Gatun yakita ba kakulla j)urreag ka Noe-iimlja ka, yanti
bo ta wal kaniin purreag ka Yinal koba kuri koba.
27. Takillala bara, pittellala bar.a, bumbillala bara nukug, gukil-
lala bumbilli ka, yakita purreag ka kakulla noa ba Noe uwa niur-
rarig murrinauwai ka, gatun tunta-tunta kakulla, gatun kirun gai-
pa barun nuropa.
28. Gatun yanti yakita ba kn.kulla purreag ka Lot-iiniba, ta-
killala bara, pittellala bara, wirrilliala bara, gukillala bara, meapala
bara, wittiala bara ;
29. Wonto ba yakita uuta purreag ka Lot noa uwa Thodum ka-
Ijirug, patea gaiya koiyug-ko gatun f biimton-ko wokka tin nioi'oko
tin, gatun kiyupa barun yantin kirun tetti-tetti.
30. Yanti kiloa kaniin yakita piu'reag ka paipinun noa ba
Yinal kuri koba.
31. Unta yakita purreag ka katan noa lia wokka kokera, gatun
gikoiimba tullokan murrug kaba kokera ba, keawai bon uwabunbi
yikora baraii mankilliko tullokan ko ; gatun katan noa ba upulli-
gel laba, keawai bon uwaljunbi yikora willug kolag.
32. Kotella bounnoun kai nukug Lot-iunba tin.
33. Ganto ba gikouniba moron miromanun moron kakilliko, wo-
giintinun wal noa ; gatun ganto ba wogiintinun gikoiimba moron,
kanun wal moron kakilliko.
34. Wiya nurun bag, yakita unta-unta tokoi ta buloara ta ka-
niin birrikilligel la wakal la ; maiiun wal wakal, gatun tarai gaiya
wuniin.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 17. 175
35. Buloara umullinun bula; manun wal wakal, gatun tarai gai-
ya wunun.
36. Baloai-a katea-kaiiun upulligel la; manun wal wakal, gatun
tarai gaiya wunun.
37. Gatun wiyelleun bon Ijara, wiyelliela, Piriwal, wonnug-ke ?
Gatun noa wiya barun, Unta wonto ba katea-kiinun muriin ta,
unta kolag ba kautilliniin bara porowi.
WINTA XVIII.
Gatun noa wiya barun wakal tpf>'i'«ibol, wiya-uwil koa bon bara
kuriko Eloinug, gatun yari koa bara kaiyalea-kiin ;
2. Wiyelliela, Unta ta kokera tarai ta wakal wiyellikan piriwal
kakuUa, kinta korien kakuUa noa bon Eloi kai, gatun keawai noa
tuma korien barun kiiri :
3. Gatun kakulla wakal niabogun unta kokera ; gatun bountoa
uwa gikoug kin, wiyelliela, Timbai kakillia tia emmoumba bukka-
kaye.
4. Gatun keawai wal noa gurra pa kabo kakullai tako ; wonto
noa ba yukita wiya gikoug kinko minki ka, Keawai bag kinta
korien bon Eloi kai katan, ga keawai kiiri tuman korien ;
5. Kulla bountoa tia unni mabogunto pirralman, gatoa timbai
ki'inun bounnoun kin, murrin-muiTin koa bountoa tia uwa-uwil
kumburi'obawan bountoa tia.
6. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Gurrulla bon unni yarakai wiyel-
likan piriwal wiyan ba.
7. Gatun wiya noa Eloito timbai katillinun barun gikoiimba
girimatoara, bara wiyan bon purreag ka gatun tokoi ta, gurralin
noa barun wiyelli ta kalog tinto ?
8. Wiyan nurun bag, timbai wal noa katillinun barun kurrakai.
Wonto noa ba uwanun wal Yinal kuri koba tanan, wiya, noa na-
nun gurrullikanne purrai taba?
9. Gatun noa wiya barun unni fparabol tarai tako kotelleim
bara ba murrarag-tai barabo, gatun yarakai bara kotellin taraikan :
10. Buloara-bula kuri uwa fliieron kolag wiyelliko : wakal la
noa Paritliaio gatun tarai ta ftelone ;
11. Garokea noa Paritliaio gatun noa yanti wiyelliela niuwoabo
giakai : A Eloi ! pitalraan bag gii'oug, kulla bag ka korien yanti
tarai ba katan, bara kau-maye, tuloa uma korien mankiye nukug
ka, ga ka korien bag yanti unni noa ba ftelone :
12. Ta korien bag buloarakal katan wakal la thabbat birug
ka, gutan bag winta untikal emmoug kai yantin tabirug.
13. Gatun noa ftelone garokilliela ba kalog ka, keawai noa
gaikug ka wokka lag na pa moroko koba, wonto noa ba minki
motilliela wiyelliela ba, A Eloi! miromulla bi tia, yarakai bag ba
katan.
14. Wiyan nurun bag, unni noa kuri uwa baran kokera koba
gikoug ka tako gurraraatoara, keawai tarai ta : kulla yantin bara
176 AN AUSTUALIAX LAXGUAGE.
})iriwal-buntelIiko, kanun wal bai-a koiyuii-baratoaro ; siatun niu-
woa bo koai-koai korien bon, uinaiiiin kauwal bou kakilliko.
15. Gatun mankulla bara gikoug kiiiko wonnai tara numa-uwil
koa barun noa : Avonto l)a nakulla bava l)a wirrobnllikanto, yipa
bara barun.
1 6. Wonto ba noa lethuko wiya barun, Aviyelliela, Wamunbilla
barun wonnai tara ennnoug kinko, gatun yanoa barun yipai yiko-
ra ; kulla barun-kai-kal katea-kanun ])iriwal koba Eloi koba,
17. Wiyan bag tuloa nurun, Ganto ba gurra korien piriwal koba
Eloi koba yanti wonnai warea ba, kfawai wal noa pulogkiillinun
unta kolag.
IS. Gatun taraito umullikanto piriwallo wiya bon, Aviyelliela,
Piriwal murrarag-tai, minnug-bulliuun bag moron kakilliko yanti-
katai ?
19. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Minarigtin bi tia wiyan mur-
Tarag-tai emmoug '? keawai wal wakal murrai'ag-tai, wonto noa ba
wakalbo, Eloi ta.
20. Gurran bi yantin wiyellikanue, Yanoa manki yikoranukug
taraikan koba, Yanoa biinki yikora tetti, Yanoa manki yikora,
Yanoa nakoiya yikora, Gurulla bon biyugbai gatun tunkan giro-
limba.
21. Gafcun noa wiya, Gurra bag unni tara wiyellikanne yaki-
kalai tabirug, wonnai bag ba kakulla.
22. Gatun yakita gurra noa ba lethuko unnoa tara, wiya bon
noa, Wakal unnoa-unnug uma korien bi ba; gukillia j^antin tullo-
kan giroiimba, gu-uwil koa barun mirral ko, gatun tullokan giro-
umba kanun wal wokka ka moroko ka ; gatun kaai, Avirroba-uwil
koa bi tia.
23. Gatun gurra noa ba unni, minki noa kakulla kauwal ; kulla
noa porrol kakulla kauwalkan.
24. Gatun noa ba lethuko nakulla bon minki noa ba kakulla
kauwal-lan, wiya gaiya 2ioa,Pirral ta pulogkulliko bara tullokan
ta ba piriwal koba kako Eloi koba kako !
25. fKamel noa kaiyukan katan pulogkakilliko tigkugkoa ko
taku lako, keawai porrolkan pulogkakilliko piriwal koba kako
Eloi koba kako.
26. Gatun bai-a ba gurra, wiya bara, Gan-lce wal moron kanim
kakilliko 1
27. Gatun noa wiya, Unni tara kaiyu korien kiiri ko umulliko,
kaiyu-kan-to Eloito noa umulliko.
28. Gatun Peterko noa wiya, Ela ! wunkulla geen yantin ta,
gatun wirroba geen bin.
29. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyanim liag tuloa, Niuwoa wareka
kokera gikoiimba, ga biyugbai, ga tunkan, ga gapal, ga wonnai,
gikoug kinko piriwal koba tin Eloi koba tin,
30. Manun wal noa kauwal unti yakita, gatun untoa tarai ta
purrai ta tanan kakilliko, moron noa kanun yanti-katai.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 18. 177
31. Maukulla gaiya noa barun fdodeka ta wirrobullikan, gatuu
wiya bavuu, A! waita geeu wokka kolag tHiei'othalem kolag, ga-
tun yantiu tara wiyatoara fpropet to gikoug kai Yinal liii kiiri
koba tin kimun wal uuiatoani kakilliko.
32. Gatuii boil guuuu wal barun kin fetlianekul kinko, gatun
bon bukka-maniin wal, gatun karagkobiuun :
33. Gatun welkoriniui Aval bara bon, gatuu wal bon wirriuini ;
gatun kuaiba-ken-ta bougkuUinun gaiya noa willugbo.
34. Gatun keawai l)ava gurrapa unni tara wiyatoara : gatun
unni wiyellikanne yuropa barun kai, keawai bara gurrapa uuui
tara wiyatoara.
35. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela noa ba papai Yeriko ka,
wakal muumin kuri yellawolliela yapug ka bitta ka, poiyelliela :
36. Gatuu guri'ulliela noa liarun konara yapug koa, wiya noa
iuinarig unni ?
37. Gatun bara bon \viy;i, Uwan noa lethu Nadharet-kul.
38. Gatun noa kaaipulleim, wiyelliela, Ela letliu! yinal Dabicl-
>'unba, gurrara-mulla bi tia.
39. Gatun bara uwa ganka, wiya bon koiyelli koa noa: wonto
noa ba butti paiN^elleun, Yi'.ial Dabidumba gintoa, gurrara-mulla
bi tia.
40. Gatun garokea noa lethu, gatun wiya bon yutllliko l)on
gikoug kinko ; gatun uwa noa ba ])apai, wiya bon noa,
41. Wiyellielx, Minnug-buUiko bi tia wiyan 1 Gatun noa wi^-an,
Piriwal, namunbilliko tia umulla.
42. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Kamunbilia bin nakilliko ;
giroumba tin gurrulli tin moron unia.
43. Gatun noa tanoa-kal-lio nakuUa, gatun bon noa wirropa,
pitalmulliela bon Eloinug ; gatun yantin unni kuri nakulla bara
ba, pitalma bon Eloinug.
WINTA XIX.
1. Gatun noa lethu UAva willi koa Yeriko koa.
2. Gatun kakulla untakal wakal kuri giakai Dhakke yitirra,
piriwal ttelunekal noa kakulla, gatun noa porrolkan.
3. Gatun noa numea nakilliko lethunug, gan noa Ija; gatun
noa keawai, kulla konaro niintiraa, kulla noa warea goiyog.
4. Gatun noa murra ganka, gatun noa kuUiwa wokka-lag kulai
tin nakilliko bon, kulla noa unta kolag uwolli kolag.
•l. Gatun lethu noa ba uwa untako, nakulla noa wokka-lag,
gatun bon nakulla, gatun bon wiya, Ela Dhakke! tanan kurrakai
tirabuUa, kulla buggai koa bag yellawaniin giroug ka ta koker/i.
6. Gatun tiraba noa kurrakai baran, gatun pital ma-uwa bon.
7. Gatun nakulla baj-a ba, wiyellan niuwai-akan bara yantinto,
wiyelliela, Waita noa uwa yarakai toa koti kakilliko.
8. Gatun noa Dhakke garokea, gatun wiya bon Piriwalnug,
Ela Piriwal! wiuta bag gutan emmoiunba tullokan kabirug niiri'al
178 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGK.
kai ko ; gatun niankiilla bag ba tullokan taraikan taliirug yaki tin
gakoiyaye tin, wupinun gaiya l)on Ijag willugbo Avaran tako.
9. Gatuu noa letliuko bon wiyu, Tanan uwa moron unti buggai
[)urreag ka initi ko kokera ko, kulla noa katan yinal ta Al);irani-
umba.
10. Kulla Yinal kuri koba uwa tiwolliko gatun tumulliko wo-
guntitoara ko.
11. Gratun gurra bara ba unni tara, wiyoakan butti noa gatun
wiya wakal fparabol, kulla noa papai ta ba fHierothalem ka, gatun
kulla bara kota paipilliniin piriwal koba Eloi koba tanoa-kal-bo.
12. Yaki tin noa wiya, Tarai ta pii'iwal uwa tarai tako purrai
tako kalog kako, mankilliko gikougbo ])iriwalkanne-ta, gatun wil-
lugbulliko.
13. Gatun wiya noa barun gikoumba niankillikan ften ta, gatun
gukulla noa barun kin fmina ta ften ta, gatun wiya barun, Mivo-
mnlla uwanun bag ba willugbo.
14. Wonto ba gikoumba-ko konara niuwama bon, gatun yuka
bon puntimai gikoug, wiyelliela, Keawai wal noa unni piriwal ka-
tillinim gearun.
15. G-atun kakulla yakita, willug ba noa ba. mantoara piriwal-
koba, wiya gaiya noa barun unnoa niankillikan gan kin noa ba
gukulla tmoney, tanan gikoug kin, gurra-uwil koa noa minnan
barun kinba gutoara gukilli tabirug.
16. Tanan gaiya uwa kurri-kurri wakal, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal !
giroumba ta fniina unni wittia kauwal ften fmina ta.
17. Gatun bon noa wiyu, Kauwa yanti, gintoa niankillikan
murrarag; kulla bi miroma unnoa warea ta, kaiyukan bi kauwa
ften ta kokera.
18. Gatun tarai uwa, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal! giroumba ta fini-
na unni wittia kauwal fpente fmina ta.
19. Gatun noa wiya gaiya bon, Kauwa bi kaiyukan fpente ta
kokera.
20. Gatun tarai uwa, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal ! na-uwa unni ta
fmina giroumba, wunkulla bag ba koroka wurobilla :
21. Kulla bag kinta kakulla giroug kai, kulla bi bukka kauwal ;
mantan bi wokka-lag keawai bi ba wunpa baraii, gatun kolbuntia
bi unnoa keawai bi ba meapa ba.
22. Gatun noa bon wiya, Giroug kinbirug koti ko kurraka ko
wiyan pirriral-manun banug, gintoa ta niankillikan yai-akai.
Gurra bi tia bvikka kauwal bag ; mantillin wokka-lag keawai bag
wunpa bar.'m, gatun kolbuntillin unnoa keawai bag ba meapa ba:
23. Kora koa bi gupa enimoumba f money gukilligel lako, mara-
uwil koa ])ag enimoumba koti gatun kopatoara ta, emmoug ka ta
uwolli ta 1
24. Gatun noa wiya barun garokilliela bara ba tarug ka, Man-
tillia unnoa fmina unti birug bon, gatun guwa bon gala ko f ten-
kan ko eikoui;.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 19. 179
25. (Gratun bara wiya bou, Piriwal, ften ta fmina mantan noa).
26. Wiyan nurun bag, Yantinko barun mantan bava ba gunun
wal butti ; gatun keawaran noa ba, unnoa ta mantan noa ba man-
tillinun wal bon gikoug kinbirug.
27. Kulla bara uniioa emmoumba nitiwa-maye, keawai bara
emmoug kanim bi ba piriwal barun, mara barun, bu-uwil koa barun
eramoug kin mikan ta.
28. Gatun wiya noa ba unnoa, waita gaiya noa ganka uwa
wokka-lag fHierothalem kolag.
29. Gatun kakulla yakita, uwa noa ba papai Bethabage tako
gatun Bethany tako, bulkara ta giakai yitirra tElai6n ka la,
yakunbea noa buloara-bulun gikoiimba wirrobullikan,
30. Wiyelliela, Yurig nura wolla kokera ko kaiyin tako ; uwol-
linun nura ba untarig, nanun gaiya nura wirritoara warea butti-
kag; keawai yellawa pa kuri bulka ka : burugbuggulla unnoa,
gatun yemmamulla untiko.
31. Gatun tarai-kan-to ba wiyanun, Minarig tin nura unnoa ta
burugbuggan t giakai nura wiyella bon, Kulla noa Piriwallu wiya.
32. Gatun bara ba yukatoara, Avaita uwa, gatun nakulla gaiya
bara yanti noa ba wiya barun ba.
33. Gatun burugbugguUiela bara ba unnoa warea buttikag, gi-
koiimba-ko wiya barun, Minarig tin nura burugbuggan mnii warea
buttikag ]
34. Gatun bara wiya, Piriwallo noa wiya gala.
3.5. Gatun bara yemmama bon kinko : gatun bara wupea barun
ba kirrikin bulka ka buttikag ka, gatun wupea bon bai-a letliunug
wokka ka.
36. Gatun uwolliela noa ba, wupea bara yapug ka kirrikinkan
nuriinba.
37. Gatun uwa noa ba papai, bara ka fElaion ka ba koba bul-
kara koba, yantin konara wirrobullikan pital gaiya kakulla, gatun
pitalmulliela bon Eloinug kauwal lo pu.lli to, yantin tin kauwal
lin uma ba nakulla bara ba ;
38. Wiyelliela, Pitalmabunbilla bon Piriwal ta uwan noa ba
Yeli6a-umba koa yitirroa : pital-kamunbilla moroko ka, gatun kil-
libinbin kamunbilla wokka ka.
39. Gatun winta-ko Paritliaioi kabirug konara birug wiya bon,
Piriwal, koawa bi barun giroumba wirrobullikan.
40. Gatun noa wiyayelleun barun, wiyelliela, Wiyan nurun bag,
wiya, bara ba kaiyelliniin mupai, kaibullinim wal gaiya unni tara
tunug tanoa-kal-bo.
41. Gatun uwa noa ba papai, nakulla noa kokera karig, gatun
noa tugkillimilleun galoa rin,
42. Wiyelliela, Gurrapa bi ba, gintoa ta, unti purreag ka gi-
roug ka ta unni tara pital-kakilliko giroumba ko ! wonto ba yaki-
ta yuropa ta giroug kai nakilli tin gaikug tin.
43. Kulla purreag ta kaniin giroug kin, biikka-kan-to giroug
180 AN ArSTRALIAN" LANGUAGE.
wirriiiun wal bara kinai karai-kai-ai ^aroujj:, gatun karai-karai
wirriiiiiii giroug, gatun mimunauun l)iii willi ka yantin ta kai-
yinkaiyin ta,
44. Gratun pirikibunpiuuu bin puirai ta, gatun giroumba wonnai
tara muiTug kaba giroug kinba ; gatun keawai bara wupinun
tunug tarai ta wokka ka ; kulla keawai bi ba gurra pa yakita
nataki ba giroi'nnlja.
4.5. Gatun noa uwa niurrarig kolag, gatun yipa gaiya noa Ijarun
gukillikan, gatun barun niankillikan unta birug;
46. Wiyelliela barun, Upatoara unni, Emmoumba kokera ta
wiyelligel kokera ; wonto ba nura uma unni wollo kakilliko barun
mankiye-ko.
47. Gatun wiyelliela noa ))urre;'ig ka yantin ta niurrug ka
fhieron ka. Wonto ba piriwui fhiercu, gatun bara garanunateu,
gatun bara piriwal kiiri koba, nunia bara bon bunkilli kolag ;
48. Yakoai bara ba umulliko gatun kt'awai bara, kulla vantin
ta kiiri pital kakilliola gurruUiko bon.
WINTA XX.
Gatun yakita kakulla, wakal la tarai ta purreag ka, wiyelliela
noa ba barun kuri ka, gatun wiyelliela euagelion, uwa gaiya bon
bara piriwal gatun bara tg;»i"aminateu gatun bara fparethbuteroi,
2. Gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Wiyella gearun, minarig tin kaiyu
tin umullia bi unni tara ? ga ganto-ke noa bin unni ta kaiyu gu-
kulla giroug 'i
o. Gatun noa wiyayelleiin, gatun wiyelliela barun, Gatoa wiya-
nun nurun unni ta wakal ; gatun wiyaycllea tia ;
4. Korimullikanne-ta loanne-uniba, wiya, ta moroko kabirug,
ga kiiri koba ?
5. Gatun bara Aviyatan barabo, wiyelliela, Wiyanun geen ba,
Morok(') kalnrug ta ; wiyanun gaiya noa, Kora koa nura gurrapa
bon?
6. Kulla geen wiyaniin ba, Kuri koba ta; yantinto gaiya gearun
kuriko pintinun tunug ko : kulla bara kotan bon loannenug
t})ropet ta kakulla.
7. Gatun bara wiy;i, keawai bara gurra])a wonta birug ta.
S. Gatun noa barun letliuko wiya, Keawai bag wiyanun nuruu
minarig tin kaiyu tin uinan bag unni tara.
9. Gatun potopaivi'i gaiya noa barun kiiri wiyelliko unni-ta
tparabol : Taraito kuriko nieapa fwain-gel la, gatun wunkulla ba-
I'un kin iipullikan ta, gatun uwa gaiya noa kalog kolag, yuraki.
10. Gatun yakita j)oaikulleun ba, yuka noa bon wakal uniul-
likan barun kin u])ullikan ta, gu-uwil koa bara bon yeai fwaingel
labirug ; wonto bara ba ])rmkulla bon, gatun yuka bara bon waita
yeai korleii.
11. Gatun noa toanta yukea-kan tarai umullikan : gatun bara
bon biintea-kaji yantibo, gatun yarakai uma bara bon, gatun bon
b'ara vuka waita voai koricn.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 20. ISl
12. Gatuii uoa toauta yukea-kau goro-ta, gatuu bara boii inu-
la rea-ka:i, gatuix wareka bai'a boa warrai tako.
13. Wiya gaiya noa pil•i^vallo fwain-gel koba, Miunug banuii
kan bag? Yiikaniin -vval bag emmoumba yiual pitalmatoara : niir-
ka bara bou guri\'iiiun, naniin boii bara l)a,
14. Wonto bara ba upulli-kan-to nakulla Ijon ba, barabo gaiya
wiyellan, wiyelliela, Uiini ta wuggnrra piriwal : kaai geen Ijt'nvil
bon, purrai koa ka-uwil gearunba.
15. Yanti bon bara wareka f^vain-gel labirug, gatun buiikiilla
gaiya bon tetti. Minnug bainm noa bariin piriwallo fwain-gel kobo
ko?
16. Uwanun wal noa tauan l>unkilliko barun upillikan-ko, ga-
tiin guniin wal fwain-gel taraikan ko. Gatun gurra bara ba unni,
wiya gaiya bara, Kamunl>i yikora Eloito.
17. Gatun noa barun nakilliela, gatun wivci, Minarig-ke unni
upatoara yanti, Tunug ta wareka wittilli-kan-to, unnoa ta katea-
kanun wokka ka waiyakan ta vrollug ?
18. Gan-ba puntimullinun untoa tunug ka tiiiijuntimiillinun,
wal ; gan kinba puntimullinun, uiinbinun wal bon niuta-mutan.
19. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo kota bara piriwallo fhiereuko gatun fga-
rammateuko mankilliko bon ; gatun bara kinta kakulla kouara
tin ; kulla bara gurra, wiya noa ba unni f parabol barun kin.
20. Gatun bara bon tumimea, gatun yuka barun gakoiyellikan,
gakogkilliko barunbo kuri murrarag-tai, gui-ra-uwil koa bara gi-
koumba v.iyellikanne, yaki tin niai-a-uwil koa bara bon kaiyu
kabo f kobana kinko.
21. Gatun wiya bon bara, wiyelliela, Piriwal, gurran geen wi-
yan bi ba tuloa, kinta koi'a l)i kauwa tai'aikan tin kuri kurrig tin,
wonto bi ba wiyan tuloa wiyellikanne Eloi koba :
22. Wiya tuloa ta gukilliko gearun tullokan gikoug kin f Kai-
thari kin, ga keawai 1
23. Wonto noa ba gurra gakoiya 1)ari'iuba, gatun v.iya barun,
Yakoai nura tia numan ]
2-1. Tvigunbilla tia wakal f denari. Gan kiloa unnoa goara ga-
tun u]jatoara unni ta? Wiyayelleim lion bara gatun wiyelliela,
f Kaithaiinnba ta.
25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Koito f Kaithari kinko guwa f Kai-
thariimba ta, gatun Eloi kinko uinioa tara Eloi-iimba ta.
26. Gatun keawai bara man pa gikoumba Aviyelli-ta niikan ta
barun kin kuri ka : gatun mupai kakulla bara.
27. Uwa gaiya tai'aikan barun kinbirug Tliadukaioi kabirug,
bara gurramaigaye moron ta katea-kanim tetti kabirug; gatun ba-
I'a bon wiya,
28. Wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal! Motheto noa upa gearun, Tarai-
kan koba ba koti tetti kanun ba porikunbai gikoumba ta, gatun
tetti noa ba kanun, wonnai korien, mara-uwil koa gikfluniba ktiti
182 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
l)Ounnouu gikoumba pon"kuiil»;ti ka-uwil koa wounai gikoumba
kuti koba.
29. Yakita gaiya wart'in kakulla kotita ftlieben ta: gatun kurri
birug ko bumbea porikuiil)ai kakilliko, gatnii tetti kakulla, wou-
nai koi'ien.
30. Gatun willi-kaba-ko fdeutero-to biuubea bounnoun porikun-
bai kakilliko, gatun tetti noa kakulla, wonnai korien.
31. Gatun willi-kaba-ko ftrito-to bumbea bounnoun porikunbai
kakilliko; gatun yaki-bo ftliebento; gatun bara keawai wimba won-
nai, gatun tetti bara kakulla.
32. Willug ta tetti ba bountoa nukug.
33. Ganiimba baiun kinba unnoa porikunbai kunun kakilliko
moron ba katea-kanun tetti kabirug '? kulla liai'a ftliebento boun-
noun bumbea porikunbai kakilliko.
34. Gatun noa lethuko wiyayelleim, wiyelliela barun, Wonnai
ta untikal bumbillan })orikunbai gatun gukillaiko bumbilliko :
35. Wonto ba bara miirrarag-tai kanun uwolliko unta kolag
tanai tako i)urrai tako, gatun moron kakilliko tetti kabirug, kea-
wai bara bumbumbillan, keawai gukitan bumbilliko :
36. Keawai wal bara tetti banun yukita ; kulla bara yanti ka-
tan fagelo kiloa ; gatun wonnai tara katan Eloi-umba, katan bara
wonnai tara gali koba moi'on kanini tetti kabirug.
37. Gatun Motheko noa ba tugaiya wakal la kulai ta, boug-
bugga barun tetti-tetti kabirug, wiya noa ba bon Yelioanug, Eloi
ta Abaramumba, gatun Eloi ta Itlu'ikumba, gatun Eloi ta Yacol)-
umba.
38. Keawai noa Eloi ta barunba tetti-tetti koba, wonto ba ba-
ri'niba moron koba ; kulla yantin moron katan gikoug kin.
39. Taraito bara fgarammateukallo wiya gaiya, Piriwal, murra
rag bi wiyan.
40. Gatun yukita keawai bara bon wiya pa kinta-kan-to.
41. Gatun noa barun wiya, Yakoai bara wiya Kritht ta yinal ta
Dabiclumba 1
42. Gatun Dabidto noa niuwoabo wiya, fbiblion kaba ftehillim
koba, Yehoako noa wiya bon Piriwal emmoumba, Yellawolla bi
tugkagkei'i ka emmoug kin,
43. Uma-uwil koa bag barun bukkakan gikoi'imba yulogel ko
kakilliko gikoug.
44. Dabidto noa ba wiya bon Piriwal yitirra, yakoai gaiya noa
yinal ta gikoumba 1
45. Wiya gaiya noa barun gikoumba wirrobullikan mikan ta
yantin ta kiiri ka,
46. Yakoai nura barun kai fgarammateu tin, pital koa bara
uwa-uwil kurrawitaikan, gatun umulliko gukilligel laba ko, gatun
yellawolligel la wokka ka fthunagog ka, gatun piriwal-g^l takil-
lig61 laba ;
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 20. 183
47. Mantan bara kokera ba mabogun koba, gatuu umanun
wiyellikanne-ta kurra-uwai tugunbilliko : yaki tin bara kauuu kau-
wal tetti kakilliko.
WINTA XXI.
Gatux noa nakulla wokka-lag, gatun nakulla barun poirolkan
wiinkilliela gutoara bariinba wiinkilligel la.
2. Gatun noa nakulla tarai mabogun mirralkan wiinkilliela
bountoa flepto buloara unta ko tarog kako.
3. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyan bag nurun tuloa, gali mabo-
gunto mirrallo wiinkulla kauwal ta bara yantin kearan.
4. Kulla yantin gali vvimkulla bara tullokan barunba kauwal
labirug gutoara Eloi koba ko : wonto bountoa ba bounnoun kin-
birug mirral koba wiinkulla yantin tullokan bounnoiinba.
5. Gatun winta koba wiyelliela fhieron tin, umatoara unni ko-
rien tunug ko murrarag ko gatun gutoara, wdya noa,
6. Unni tara natan nura ba, uwanun ta purreag karig ka,
korien gaiya ba wakal tunug wokka-ka-wokka-ka, yantin wal ware-
kullinun bardn.
7. Gatun bara bon wiya, wiyelliela, Piriwal, yakounta-ke unni
tara kanim? gatun minarig tiiga kanun unni taraba gaiya kanun?
8. Gatun noa wiya, Yakoai nura, gakoiya kora koa nura ka-uwil;
kulla kauwal-kaiuvallo tanan uwanun emmoug kin yitirra, wiyel-
linun, Gatoa ta (Kritlit ta) ; gatun papai ta kakillin ; yanoa uwa
yikora nura barun.
9. Gurranun gaiya nura ba wuruwai kauwal gatun koakillai
ta ba, kinta kora nura : kulla unni tax"a kanim wal kurri-kurri ,
kulla wiran keawai kanun kabo.
10. Wiya gaiya noa barun, Bara kui'iko wuruwai wal kanun
barun kuriko, gatun bara piriwal koba barun piriw^al koba ko :
11. Gatun purrai tako pulululu kakilliko Avinta kabo, gatun
kunto korien ta ko, gatun munni kauwalkan ; gatun kinta nakilli
tara gatun kauwal kanun tiiga moroko kabirug.
12. Wonto ba kurri-kurri ka unni tara ba kaniin, mauun wal
bara mattarro nurun, gatun yarakai nurun umanun, gumuliinun
nurun ftliunagog kako, gatun tjail ko, mantoai'o nurun mikan ta
ko piriwal lako, gatun wiyellikan tako emmoug kinko yitirra ko.
13. Gatun unni ta kanun nurun tiiga kakilliko.
14. Yanoa nura kota yikora minki ko, minai'ig nura wiyayel-
linun.
15. Kulla bag gunun nurun kurraka gatun guraki kakilliko,
keawai wal yantin bara nuriinba bukka-kan-to kaiyu kanim wiya-
yelliko ga pirriral umuUiko.
16. Gatun nura gakoiyellinun w-al nurun biyugbaito gatun koti
tako karig ko, gatun winta nurun kinbirug bunnun wal tetti
barun kai.
17. Gatun nurun yarakai umanun yantinto, emmoiimba tin
yitirra tin.
'184 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
18. Wonto Ija koawai wal wakal kittug gikoug kinbirug wollug
kabirug tetti kuiu'in.
19. Murrai kakillikaiiiu' nun'uilia ka, iniromuUa nuramai-ai uu-
riinba ?
20. Gatun iianiin uura ba fHicrothaleni kirrai-kiiTai ta ha ko-
nai'a ba, gurniHa papai ta ba gaiya wari-warekulli ta ba unuug.
21. IMurrabunbilla gaiya l)arun ludaia kaba waita bulkara ko-
lag; gatun iiwabunbilla baruu willi kaba waita warai tako : gatun
uwabuubi yikora barun tanau korug kaba untako.
22. Kulla yakita unti tara purreag ka bukka kakillikanuc, ka-
wwil koa yantin upatoaia kanun "vval kakilliko.
23. Yapallun l)ara wonnaikun gatuu bara pittallikun, yakita gai-
ya purreag ka ! kulla wal kaniin kauwal yarakai purrai ta, gatun
bukka unti yantin ta kiiri ka.
24. Gatun bara tetti kapaiyinuu yirra birug, gatun liarun yuti-
nun wal mantoara kakilliko yantin tako purrai karig kako : gatun
fHierotluileni wattawanun bai'an bara fethimekal-lo, yakita kalai
tako barunba koba goloin kunun tetlianekal.
2-5. Gatun gaiya kanun wal tuga punnal la, gatun yellana ka,
gatun mirri ka ; gatun purrai tal)a yarakai ta barun kin kiiri
ka, gatun kinta kauwal ; korowa ta gatun bokkalog k(ilbilag-
bullin ;
26. Kuri koba bulbullo kotan kinta-kan-to, gatun nakilli ta-
birug galoa tai'a kotanan l^a uwani.in purrai kolag ; kulla wal
barun tolomaniin wal kaiyukan ta moroko koba.
27. G;itun yakita gaiya wal nanun Yinal ta kuri koba tanan
nwollinim yareil loa kaiyu koa, gatun killibinbin koa kauwal loa.
28. Gatun kaniin ba unni tara paipinim, na-uwa Avokka-lag,
gatun wokka-lag kauwa kia-kia nuriinba woUug ; kulla tanan
uwanim paipai nuriniba womniunbillikaune-ta.
29. Gatun noa wiya ))arun wakal fparabol ; Na-u\Ya kokug ta,
gatun yantin kiilai ta ;
30. Paikullinun bara ba, naniui nura gatun gurraniiu nura nu-
run kinbirug wunal katan paipai taba.
31. Yaki kiloa nura, nanim nura ba unni tara paikulliko, gur-
rulla gaiya nura piriwal koba Eloi koba katan papai taba.
32. Wiyan tuloa nurun bag, Keawai unni willuggel tetti-tetti
kaniin, yakita-ko goloin ba kaniin.
33. Moroko ta gatun purrai ta kanim wal waita uwanim, won-
to ba keavrai wal eniniouuiba ^\•iy('llikanne unui tara keawai wal
waita uwanim.
31. Gatun yakoai nura nurabo, kauwa ba yantin ta uurimba
l)ulbul matayei koa katoa-kim gatun kuttawaiban koa katea-kim,
gatun uniillikeim koa katea-kim gali koba moi'on koba, gatun
yantita purreag ka imipinim gati nurun kin.
35. Kulla pika kiloa yanti uwimun iintoa puri-eag ka barun
kin yellawan yiuitin ta yaki tin purrai ta,
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 21. 185
36. Tuminiilla nura, gatuii wiyellia yaiiti-katui to, k;i-uwil koa
iiura murrarag kakilliko moron ko unti tara birug paikullinun
wal, gatiin garokilliko mikan tako yinal lako kuri koba ko.
37. Gatun purreag ka wiyelliela noa miuTug ka f hieron la ;
gatun noa uwa waita tokoi ta, gatun yellawa noa bulkara giakai
yitirra fElaion ka la.
38. Gatun yantin bara kiiri uwa gorokan ta gikoug kinko fliie-
ron lako, gurrulliko bon.
WINTA XXII.
Vakita kakuUa pa,pai takillikanne nulai tlt'b1.)en korien koba,
giakai yittira f Patbak.
2. Gatun bara piriwiil fhiereuko gatun garammateuko nukilliela
bunkilli kolag bon tetti wirrilliko ; kulla bara kinta kakulla kiiri
tin.
3. PulogkuHeim noa Thatanto murrug ka bon ludatlikin, tarai
yitirra giakai Itliakariot, wakal noa fdodeka kabirug.
4. Gatun noa vraita uwa, gatun Avi3"elliela l)arun piriwal fhiereu-
nug gatun barun fkapatin, yakoai noa ba gakoyanun bon barun
kin.
5. Gatun }iital kakulla, gatun bara wi^-a gukilliko bon farguro.
6. Gatun noa AV'iyai, gatun mittilliela noa gakouiulliko bon
barun kin, yakita bara ba konara waita gaiya UAva.
7. Kakulla gaiya purreag nulai flebben koi-icn ta, yakita fPa-
thak bunniui wal ba tetti.
8. Gatun noa yuka Peternug gatun loanncnug, wiyelliela, Yurig
uwolla umulliko fPatliak ta, ta-uwil koa geen.
9. Gatun bara bon wiya, Wonta-ke geen umaniin i
10. Gatun noa baiim wiyti, A! nauwa nura, yakita uwanun
nura ba kokera karig ka, unta gaiya nurun wakallo kiiriko wim-
bi-kaba-kan-to kokoin-kan-to nuggurra uvanim nurun ; Avirrobulla
bula bon murrug kolas; kokera kolas unta-ko pul()!i.kullinun noa
ba.
il. Gatun wiyaniin nura bon kokeratin, Piriwallo wiyan bin,
Wonnug waiyakan takilligel, untoa bag ba taniin fPatbak ta em-
moumba katoa wirrobullikan toa 1
12. Gatun nurun tugkaiyaniin wal noa kauwal ta waiyakan
wpkka kaba "wupitoara : unnug umulla.
13. Gatan bara waita uwa, gatixn nakullabara unni tara yantin
ba wiya barun : gatun bara upea fPatliak ta.
14. Gatun yakita kakulla fliora ba, yellawa noa baran, gatun
fdodeka ta fapotliol ta gikoug katoa.
15. Gatun noa barun wiya, Kauwal ta cmmounilja kotatoara
takilliko unni fPatliak ta nurun katoa, ta-uwil koa kurri-kurri
tetti kolag ke bag :
16. Kulla bag wiyan nurun, Keawai wal bag tanun unta-kal
kabo ba kiinun piriwal koba ka Eloi koba.
186 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
17. Gatun iioa maiikulla wimbi, gatun pitalma gaiyanoa, wiyel-
liela, Mara unni gukillai koa nurabo :
18. Kulla bag wiyaii iiurun, Keawai wal bag pittuiiuu yeai
tabinig tain})elo tabiiug, kabo koa uwa-uwil piriwal koba Eloi
koba tanan.
19. Gatuii noa luaukulla farto ta, gatun pitalma gaiya noa, ga-
tun yiirbugga, gatun gukulla barun, wiyelliela, Unni ta emmo-
liniba inurrin gutoara nurun kin : uniulla unni yanti gurrulliko tia.
20. Yantibo wimbi takilli birug yarea ka, wiyelliela, Unni wim-
bi ta wiyatoara ta Iniggaikal emmoug kinbirug gorog kiroapa nu-
run kai.
21. A! na-uwa, unni ta raattara gikoumba gakoyclli-kan-to tia,
emmoiig katoa ba takilligel laba.
22. Yuna bo ta wal noa uwaniui Yinal kiiri koba, yanti wiya-
toara ; yapallun unnoa kuri gakoyelli-kan-to bon ba !
23. Gatun bava wiyellan barabo, gan-to barun kinbirug-ko uma-
nun ta unni.
'2i. Gatun koakillau Ijara barabo, gan-ke kanun piriwal barun
kinbirug.
25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Bara ta piriwal ethanekal koba ka-
tilleun bara ; gatun bara ta katillikan giakai yitirra nmrrog-tai.
26. Wonto nura ba keawai yanti kanun ; wonto noa kurrikog
nurun kinba, kamunbilla bon yanti mitti ; gatun noa piriwal ka-
tan, yanti umullikan ta.
27. Wonnug-ke kauwal unnug, niuwoa yellawan noa ba takilli
ta, niuwoa umanun noa ba ? wiya, unni ta noa yellawollin ba ta-
killi taba 1 wonto bag ba katan nurun kinba yanti niuwoa ba
umullikan ta.
28. Nura ta emmoug kin minkea emmoug ka ta numatoara :
29. Gatun gutan nurun bag kakilliko i)iriw;ilgel lako, yanti tia
emmoumba Biyugbaito gukulla tia ;
30. Ta-uwil koa nura gatun pitta-uwil ennnoug ka ta takilligel la
emmoug ka ta j^iriwalgel la, gatun yellawa-uwil yellawolligel la
piriwal koba ka, wiyellin barun konai'a fdodeka ta Itliarael koba.
31. Gatun noa piriwallo wiya, Ela Thimon, Thimon! gurrulla,
Thantanto noa wiyan bin mankilliko kirrai-kirrai koa biloa uma-
uwil yanti fwiet kiloa :
32. Wonto bag ])ix wiyelleun giroug kai gurra-uwil koa br;
gatun minki bi ba kanim, pirralmulla gaiya barun bi koti ta giro-
umba.
33. Gatun noa wiya bon, Piriwal, kiitan bag unni mirigil uwol-
li kolag gikoug katoa ko tjail kolag gatun tetti kakilli kolag.
34. Gatun noa wiya, Wiyan banug, Peter, keawai wal mukkaka
ko tibbinto wiyanun unti purreag ka, kurri-kurri ka bi ba gako-
yanun tia goro-ka gimillin bi tia ba.
35. Gatun noa wiya l)arun, Yuka nurun bag ba yinug korien,
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 22. 187
gatun pika korien, gatun tuggaiiog kovien, "wiya, uura miiiavig lo?
gatun bara wiya, Keawai.
36. Wiya gaiya iioa bariin, Woiito ba yakita uuti, niiiwoa ba
yhuigkau, niamuiibilla bon unnoa, gatun yanti pika; gatun niu-
woa yirra korien, guniunbilla kirrikin gikoumba, wakal koa noa
gukilli ko.
37. Wonto bag ba wiyan nurun, unni ta upatoara ka-u\vil koa
ennnoug kin kakilliko giakai, Tumbitoara noa barun kin yarakai
willug ka : kulla unni tara emmoug kin ba kakillinim goloin ko.
38. Gratun bara wiya, Piriwal, na-u\va unni tuloa buloara yirra.
Gratun noa wiya barun, Tantoa-bo-ta.
39. Gatun noa uwa warrai koba, gatun waita uwa uwolli kolag
Ijulkara kolag fElaiou ko la kako ; gatun gikoumba wirrobulli-
kan wirroba bon.
4'). Gatun uwa noa ba unta, wiya gaiya noa barun, Wiyella,
keawai koa nura pulogkulli korien yarakai kolag.
41. Gatun noa waita uwa barun kinbirug yanti kiloa tunug
koba pintia, gatun wai'ogbugko upullin Ijaran, gatun wiya,
42. Wiyelliela, Biyug, wiya bi unni wimbi manun emmoug kin-
birug : yanoa eramoiimba kotellikanne giroumba ta kamnnbilla
kakilliko.
43. Gatun paipea wakal agclo moroko kabirug pirriralurallin
1 )on.
44. Gatun kirrinkan noa kauwalkan, wiyelliela noa pirriral
butti ; gatun gikovunba kurrol upulleun baran purrai kolag yanti
kiloa komonba kauwal gorog koba.
4.5. Gatun bougkulleun noa ba wiyelli tabirug, gatun uwa gi-
koumba tako wirrobullikan tako, nakulla gaiya noa barun birriki
birriki minkikan,
46. Gatun noa wiya barun, Minaiig tin nura birrikin I Boug-
kullia gatun wiyella, uwea-kiin koa nura yarakai kolag.
47. Gatun yakita wiyelliela noa ba, a! konara, gatun noa yi-
tirra giakai ludatb, wakal ta fdodeka kabirug, uwa ganka barun
kin, gatun uwa gaiya noa papai lethu kin, bumbumkakilliko.
48. Wonto noa ba lethuko bon wiyii, Ela ludath! gakoman bi-
nug Yinal kuri koba liumbuggullito 1
49. Nakulla bara ba gikoug kinba minnug-bulli kolag, wiya-
1)011 bara, Ela piriwal! wiya, geen buntan yirra ko ?
50. Gatun wakal barun kinbii'ug kunbuntea wakal umullikan
fhiereu koba piriwal koba, gatun kunl)untea bon tugkag-keri
gurreug.
51. Gatun lethuko noa wiyayelleun, gatun wiyelliela, Kamun-
billa nura unni. Gatun bon noa iiuma gurreug gatun turon bon
umea-kan.
52. Wiya gaiya lethuko barun piriwal fhiereu koba, gatun ba-
rvni fkapatin fhieT'on koba, gatun barun garrokal, uwa bara gi-
liS5 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
koujl' l.iii, ^Viya, nura tia uwau yauti mankiye ko yavakaikau ta,
yirrakan gatuii kotarakan ?
53. Kakulla Lag ba nurun ki)i yauti-katai purreag ka fliierou
ka, keawai nuva tia iiiaupa mattarro: wonto ba \umiyakita ta ka-
tan nurunba gatun kaiyukau tokoi tako.
54. j\Jaukuna gaiya bava l)Oii, gatun yutea bon, niaiikuUa gaiya
bon kokera ko piriwal koba kako tbiercu koba kako. Gatuu Pe-
tcrko noa wirroba kalog kokig.
55. Gatun npilleun bara ba koiyug ko willi ka kokera, gatun
yellawa yantin, Peter gaiya noa yeHawa barun kin.
56. Gatun taraito niurrakinto nakulla bon, yellawa noa ba koi-
yug ka, gatun pimrailliela bon pirrallo, gatun wiya, Unni noa kiiri
kakulla gikoug katoa.
57. Gatun noa gakoiya bon, wiyelliela, Ela murrakin! keawai
bon bag gimilli korien.
58. Gatun toanta taraito bon nakulla, gatun wiyelliela, Gintoa
ta yanti bo baninba. Gatun noa Pcterko wiya, Kuri, kcawaran
bag.
59. Gatun, yakita toanta, wakal fliora ta yukita, taraito wiya
pirralma wiyelliela, Yuna bo ta unni kuri kakulla gikoug katoa ;
kulla noa Galilaiakal.
60. Gatun noa Peterko wiya, Ela kiiril keawai l>ag gurran
)-akoai bi ba wiyan. Gatun wiyelliela noa ba, tanoa-kal-bo niuk-
kaka-ko gaiya wiya tibbinto.
61. Gatun noa Piriwal warkulleun, gatun ntikilleun bou Peter-
nug. Gatun Peterko noa gurra wiyellita Piriwiil koba, wiya bon
noa ba giakai, Gikoyanim wal l)i tia kurri-kurri tibbinto mukkaka
ko wiyanun goro-ka.
62. Gatun Peter noa uwa \\arrai koba, gatiui tugkilleiin gaiya
noa kauwal.
63. Gatun bara kuriko mankuUa bon letliunug beelma bon,
gatun bunkulla bon.
64. Gatun munniin 1iai"a ba upea bon, bunkulla gaiya bon bara
u'oara, gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Wiyella bi, ianto-ke bin bun-
kulla]
G-}. Gatun kauwal-kauwal taraikau yai-akai wiya bara ijikoui
kin.
60. Gatun purreag ba kakulla, kau-umullan gaiya bara garrotai
kuri koba, gatun bara piriwal fliiereu koba, gatun bara garani-
inateu, gatun yutea gaiya bon kau-uniulligel lako barunba tako,
67. Wiyelliela, Kritht ta bi unni ? wiyella gearun. Gatun noa
wiya l>arun, "NViyani'in niu'un bag l.ia, keawai gaiya wal nura gui"-
rauuu:
68. Gatun wiyanun nurun l)ag ba, keawai wal nura wiyaiyelli-
nim tia, keawai wal nura tia waniunbinun.
09. Kabo noa Yiual kuri koba yellawanuu tugkag ka kaiyukan
ta Eloi koba ka.
THE GOSPEL liV LLKE, C. 22. 189
70. AViya ^aiya bai'a yantinto, Yinal ta bi unni Eloi koba ? Ga-
tun uoa wiya baruii, Wiyaii iiiiva gatoa ta uiini.
71. Gatun bai"a wiya tantoa ta, Y^anoa gearun kin gurrullikanto
taraito ? kulla geeu giivra geenbo kurraka kabirug gikoug kin-
birug koti kabirug.
WIXTA XXIII.
Gatux bara yautin konai'a bougkuUeun, gatun yutea bou Pilato kin.
2. Gatun bou bara pirrahiia, wiyelliela, Gurra geen bou unni ga-
koyelliekx noa l)a barun kuri "willuggel, gatun wiyelliela, yanoa
guki yikora tullokan Kaitliarinug, Aviyelliela, niu^voa-bo-ta Kritht
ta wakal ta Piriwak
3. Gatun Pik\to-to wiya bon, wiyelliola, Ga gintoa ta Piriwal ka-
tan barunba ludaioi koba ? Gatun uoa wiyayelleun bon, gatun
wiya, Gintoa ta wiyan.
4. "NViya gaiya noa Pilatoto barun piriwal fhiereu gatun banui
kiiri, Keawai bag gurra pa yarakai unti kiiri ka.
5. Gatun bara bukka-buttibugkea, vriyelliela, Pirralinan noa ba-
run kuri, wiyellin, yantin ta ludaia ka, Galilaia tinto unti kolag.
6. Gurra noa ba Pilato-to Galilaia ka, wiya noa, Unni kiiri Gali-
laiakal ?
7. Gatun gurra noa ba Herodumba-kan noa wottaikan, yuka bon
noa Herod kinko, yakita gaiya niuwoabo kakulla fHii rothalem ka.
8. Gatun nakulla bon noa ba Herodto lethunug, pital gaiya
noa katan kauwal, kulla noa natelli ba bon yuraki tabirug, kulla
noa gurra kauwallan gikoug kinba ; gatun nakilliko tarai uma-
toara gikoug kai.
9. Wiya gaiya bon noa \^ iyellikanne kauwal-kauwal ; wonto
noa ba keawai wiyelli pa bon.
10. Gatun bara piriwal fliiereu gatun bara garannnateu garo-
killiela, gatun pirrahnulliela bon kauv>-al.
11. Gatun Herod katoa ba bara wuruwai koba gurraniaiga bon
bara, gatun beeliaa bon, gatun ■\\-uda bou kouein to kirrikin to,
gatun yukea-kan bon Pilato kinko.
12. Gatun unta purreag ka wakal la, Pilato gatun Herod koti
bula umuUan : yakita unta kakillan bula l>ukkakan bula-bo.
1-3. Gatun Pilato-to noa kau-wiya noa ba barun piriwal fliiereu,
gatun barun piriwal, gatun barun kuri,
14. Wiya gaiya barun, Mankulla nura bon unni kuri emmoug
kinko. yanti wakal noa gakoya-uwil l)a kuri ; gatun, a I gurulla,
nuiya ta bon bag unni niikan ta nurun kin keawai bag gurrapa
yarakai gikoug kin, ginoa-tara tin pirralma l.ion nura :
1-5, Iveawaran, keawai Herodto : kulla bag yuka nurun gikoug
kin; gatun, nauwa, keawai gali tin tetti korien noa kanun.
16. Welkorinun wal bon bag, gatun wamunbinun gaiya bou.
17. (Kulla noa lairugbugganun wal wukal yakita ta takillikaii-
ne ta.)
190 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE,
18. Gatun bara kaaibulleun wakalla purawai, wiyelliela, Yurig
uiini kuri; gatun burugbuggulla bon Barabbanug gcai'im kinko:
19. (Gali noa wakal wuruwai tin kokera gatun Ijunkilli tin tet-
ti tin, Avunkulla bon tjail ka.)
20. Koito noa ba Pilato-to kotelliela burugbuggulliko bon lethu-
nug, wiyea ka barun.
21. AVonto bara ha wiya, wiyelliela, Buwa bon tetti, buwa bon
t(^,tti.
22. Gatun noa barun wiya yukita goro-ka, Miuarig tin? mina-
rig noa yarakai uma ? keawai bag gurrapa taraikan gikoug kin
galoa kolag bunkilli kolag tetti wirrilliko ; welkorinini wal bon
bag, gatun wamunbinim bon.
23. Gatun bara tanoa-kal-bo pulli kakuUa kauwal, wiyelliela,
biiwil koa bon tetti. Gatun pulli bariinba gatun bariinba piriwal
fhiereu pirral kakulla.
24. Gatun Pilato-to noa wiya, ka-uwil koa yanti wiya bara ba.
25. Gatun noa bon burugbugga barun kin unni bon wuruwai
tin gatun Ininkilli tin tetti tin wunkulla bon fjail ka wiyatoara
barunba ; gatun noa bon letliunug wamunbea barun kin.
26. Gatun yutea bon bara ba yurig, mankulla gaiya bara wakal
Thimunnug Kureniakal ta, tanan uwolliela korug tin, gatun wu-
p6a bara gikoug kin taligkabillikanne, knrri-uwil koa noa willug
tin lethu katoa.
27. Gatun wirroba bon bara kauwallo konaro, gatun bara nu-
kug-ko, tdgkilliela gatun minki kakilliela gikoug kai.
28. Wonto noa ba lethu warkulleun barun kai koba, wiya, Yi-
nalkun fHierothalemkalin, tiigki yikora cnnnoug kai, wonto ba
tiigkillia nura nurunbo, gatun nurun kaiko wonnai tara ko.
29. A! na-uwa, purreag karig tanan uwollinini, yakita unta wi-
yanun bara ba, Murrarag bara wonnai korien, gatun unnug tara
pika keawai porkulli korien, gatun paiyil keawai pittelliko.
30. Yakita gaiya l)ara wiyellan bulkara karig, Puntimullia
gearun kin, gatun yilnko ko, Wutilla gearun.
31. Gatun uwullinuu bara ba unni tara kulai ta kirug ka, min-
nug banim wal kulai ta turral la ?
32. Gatun unnug bula taraikan yarakai wilhig, yutea gikoug
katoa wunkilliko tetti wirrilliko.
33. Gatun uwa bara ba unta ko, giakai yitirra Kalabary, unta
gaiya bara biinkulla bon gatun bulun yarakai bula, wakal ta tiig-
kag-keri ka gatun tarai ta wunto-keri ka.
34. Wiya gaiya noa lethuko, Biyug, kamunbilkx barun, kuUa
bara keawai gurra korien uniuUi ta. Gatun toinbillan bara kirri-
kin gikoiimba, gatun wupillan woiyo.
'.ib. Gatun bara nakilliela garokito. Gatun l)ara piriwal yantibo
barun katoa b6elmulliela, wiyelliela, Mironi;i noa taraikan; miro-
mabunbillia bon gikoug koti, wiya ]ioa ba Kritht ta, girimatoara
Eloi-uinba.
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 23. 191
30. Gatun bara fmilitiko beelma bon, uwolliela gikoug kin, ga-
tun nupilliela bon faket,
37. Gatun wiyelliela, Wiya bi ba piriwal ludaioi koba, mii'o-
inullia bi gintoabo koti.
38. Gatun upulleun wakal upatoara wokka ka gikoug kin pul-
li fHellenik koba, gatun Latin koba, gatun Hebaraio koba, gia-
kai, Unni ta Piriwal ludaioi koba.
39. Gatun wakallo yarakai bulun kinbirug-ko, kakilliela ba ku-
lai ta, beelmulliela bon, wiyelliela, Wiya bi ba Kritht ta, mivo-
mullia bi gintoabo gatun geavun.
iO. Wonto ba taraito wiyayelleun, koakilliela bon, wiyelliela,
Keawai bi kinta korien Eloi kai, gatun gintoa ta katan wakal la
umatoara 1
41. Gatun galin yakita niurrarjig uma ; yaki tin galin kai uma-
toara tin : wonto noa ba gali kuriko, keawai noa yarakai uma pa.
42. Gatun noa wiya letliunug, Piriwal, gurrulla bi tia, uwanun
gaiya bi ba piriwalgel lako giroug ka tako.
43. Gatun noa letliuko wiya bon, Yuna bo ta wal bag wiyan
giroug, XJnti buggai purroag ka kaniui bi tia emmoug katoa Pa-
radeith ka tako.
44. Gatun yakita kakulla fhora ka fbekto ta, tokoi ta kakuila
yautin ta purrai ta katea ka fliora kako fnain tako.
4-5. Gatun punnal ta tokoi kakulla, gatun kirrikin ta fliieron
kako yiirkulleim bulwa koa.
46. Gatun noa ba Tethuko kaaibulleun wokka wiya noa, Biyug,
wunun bag emmoiimba marai giroug kin miittara ; gatun wiyel-
leun noa ba unni, wunkulla gaiya noa marai.
47. Yakita gaiya noa ba kenturionko nakulla unni umatoara,
pitalma noa Eloinug, wiyelliela, Yuna bo ta wal murrarag unni
kuri.
48. Gatun bara yantin kiiri uwa nakilliko gala ko umatoara ko,
wirrilleun bara wapara, gatun willugbo bara uwa.
49. Gatun yantin gikoiimba k6ti ta, gatun bai'a nukug wirroba
bon Galilaia kabirug, garokea kalog ka, nakilliela unni tara.
.50. Gatun kakulla wakal kuri, giakai yitirra Yotlieji, wiyellikan
katan; murriirag kakillikan, gatun tuloa kakillikan :
ol. Gali keawai noa pital korien barunba ko wiyellikanne ko
gatun bariinba umatoara ko ; Arimatheakal noa, wakal ta kokera
ludaioi koba ; niuwoa ba mittilliela piriwal lako Eloi koba kako.
.52. Unni noa uwa Pilato kin, bon wiyelliko murrin ko letliu
koba ko.
53. Gatun noa mankulla baran, gatun muggama kirrikin ta, ga-
tun wunkulla tulmun ta umatoara tunug ta; keawai ba unta kiiri
wuntelli ta.
54. Gatun unta purreag ka tupoi-tupoi-kanne-ta, gatun ]iapai
kakulla thabbat ta.
19'2 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
55. Gatun bara nukug- uwa gikoug katoa Galilaia kabirug wir-
roba yukita, gatun nakuUa tulinun, yakoai ba v.-iiukulla murrin.
56. Gatun bara willugbo, gatun mankulla faromata gatun fmu-
ra; gatun korea purreag ka thabbat ta, yaki tin Aviyatoara tin.
WINTA XXIY.
YAKUfA kakulJa purreag ka yukita tliabbat birug ka, goiokan ta,
uwa bai'a unti ko tulmun tako, niankillin faromata uma bara ba,
gatun taraikan uwa barun katoa.
2. Gatun bara nakulla tunug umatoara kurrai-kuri'ai birug kur-
laka ko tulmun tabirug.
3. Gatun bara uwa murrarig, gatun kcawai bara na korien
murrin ta Piriwal koba letliu koba.
4. Gatun yakita kakuUa, kotelliela Ijara ba ge tin, a ! buloai'a
kiiri bula garokea barun kin killibinbin kaba kirrikin taba ,
5. Gatun bara ba kinta kakilliela, gatun wunkulliela bariinba
goara baran purrai tako, wiya bula barun, INIinarig tin nura nakil-
lin moron-kan ta unti tetti-tetti ka ?
G. Keawai noa unti, kulla noa waita ka ba bougkulleun: gur-
rulla nura yauti wiya nurun noa l)a, yakita noa ba kakulla Gali-
laia ka,
7. Wiyelliela, Yinal ta kiiri koba wunun wal bon mattara yara-
kai-willug koba ka, gatun biinnun wal tetti, gatun purreag ka
tarai ka kumba-ken bougkullia kanun noa.
8. Gatun gaiya bara kotelliela gikoumba wiyelli tara,
9. Gatun willugl)o bara uwa tulmun tabirug, gatun wiya unni
tara l^arun kin fdodeka ta, gatun barun yantin ta.
10. Galabountoa Mari-ko Magdalakalm-to, gatun bountoa loan-
ua-ko, gatun bountoa Mari-ko tunkan-to Yacobo-umba-ko, gatun
taraikan-to bara nukug-ko barun katoa, wiya unni tara barun fap-
otliolnug.
11. Gatun bara ba wiyelli tara kakulla barun kin yanti kiloa
gakoyelli tara, gatun bara keawai gurraiyelli pa barun.
1 2. Peter gaiya noa garokea, gatun murra tulmun tako ; gatun
woinkulliela baran, nakulla noa kirrikin wuntoara pitaka, gatun
waita noa uwa, kotelliela unni tara katan ba.
13. Gatun yakita purreag ka yantibo, buloara-bula barun kin-
birug iiwa kokera kolag, giakai yitirra Emmaou, yakita kalog
fHierotlialem kabirug purlog fhekekonta ta.
14. Gatun bara wiyellan unni tara kakulla ba.
15. Gatun yakita kakulla, wiyelliela ba, gatun kotelliela bara
lia, letlni noa niuwoabo uwa papai barun kin, gatun uwa barun
katoa.
IG. Wonto ba gaikug bariinba tullama, girailli korien koa bara
))on.
17. Gatun noa wiya barun, Minarig nura unni tara wiyellan,
uwollin nura ba, gatun minki katan ?
THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 24. 193
18. Gatuu Wiikal bulun kinbirug, giakai noa yitirra Kleopa,
wiyayelleiui, ■wiyelliela boii, Griutoa bo ta wakal gowikaii fHiero-
thalemkal, gatuu keawai unni tara gurrapa kakulla ba uuti tara
purreag ka 1
19. Gratun noa wiya barun, Miiiarig-ke unni wonnug ? Gatuu
bou bara wiya, Gikoug kin letliu kin Nadliaretkal unni kakuHa
tpropet ta kaiyukan uuiulliko gatun wiyelliko niikan ta Eloi koba
Icin, gatun yantin ta barun kin kiiri ka :
20. Gatun yakoai bai'a ba piriwal fhiereu, gatun geavunba piri-
wal karig wiinkulla bon wiyayelliko tetti kolag, gatun bava bon
Ijunkulla tetti.
21. Wonto geen ba kota niuwoa niivomulliko Itharaelnug ; ga-
tun yantin unni tara ba, unni buggai kiimba-ken-ta katan unnoa
tara umatoara birug.
22. Kauwa, tarai bara nukug geavunba konara bimig kota bini-
bea bara gearun, bara goiokeen kiitan tuhnun ta :
23. Gatun keawai bara ba na pa gikoumba muriin, uwa gaiya
bara, wiyelliela, nakeun bara natoara fagelo karig koba wiya mo-
ron noa kakulla.
21:. Gatun taraikan bariinba gearun kinba uwa tulmun kolag,
gatun nakulla yanti l)ara nukugko wiya ; keawai Ijon bara na
korien.
2.5. Wiya gaiya noii barun, A I wogkal nura, gatun piiTiral Ijii-
bul gurrulliko yantin ta wiyatoara Ijara ba fpropet to!
26. Keawai noa Kritlit kaniimginbia ta umatoara ba innii tara,
gatun uwolliko kirrikin kolag gikoug ka tako 1
27. Gatun kurri-kurri Mothe ko noa ba wiya, gatun yantin to
tpi'opet karig ko, gurrabunbea gaiya noa barun unnoa tara upato-
ara birug gikoug kai.
28. Gatun bava papai uwa unta kolag kokera kolag, unta kolag
liara : gatun noa pinitelliela kalog kolag.
29. Wonto bara ba pirralma bon, wiyelliela, Kauwa gearun ka-
toa ; kulla wal yarea kakillilin, gatun purreag ta waita uwollilin.
Gatun noa uwa murrarig kakilliko bai'un katoa.
30. Gatun yakita kakulla, yellawa noa ba barun katoa takilliko,
niankuUa noa farto, gatun pitalma noa, gatun yiirbugga, gatuu
gukulla gaiya barun.
31. Gatun gaikug l)arunba bugkuUeun, gatun gimilleiin gaiya
bara bon; noa gati kakulla barun kinbirug.
32. Gatun bara wiyellan barabo, Wiya, geaninba biilbiil winna
ba gearun kinba ko murrug kaba ko, wiyellileun noa ba gearun
katoa, gatun gurrabunbeun noa ba gearun upatoara ta ?
33. Gatun bougkulleun tanoa-kal-bo gatun willug ba kakulla
fHierothalem kolag, gatun nakulla Itarun fhendeka ta, gatun ba-
run taraikan barun katoa,
31-. AViyelliela, Bougkulleun bo ta yuna Piriwal ta. ^atun pai-
kulleun Tliimon kip.
194: AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
35. Gratun bara wiya unni tai'a upatoara yajiig koa, gatun gi-
inilleiin bara boa yiirbuggulliela noa ba tarto.
36. Gatun bai'a ba wiyelliela, lethuko noa niiiwoabo gai'ok^a
willi ka barun kin, gatun wiya barun noa, Pital nura kauwa.
37. ^Vonto bara ba pulul-pulul kakulla gatun kinta-kan, gatun
kotelliela bai-a marai ta bara nakuUa.
38. Gratun noa wiya barun, Minarig tin nura kinta katan ? ga-
tun niinarig tin nurunba bulbullo kotan '!■
39. Nauwa tia niattara emmoumba, gatun yulo emmomnba, Gra-
toa bo : numulla tia, gatun nauwa ; kulla keawai marai koba
purriug korien gatun tibun korien, yanti nakulla nura tia ba em-
moumba.
40. Gratun wiya noa ba unni, tilgumbea liarun noa gikoumba
mattara gatun yulo.
41. Gratun keawai bara ba gurra jtital ko, gatun kotelliko, wiya
noa barun, Wiya, nurunba kunto unti 1
42. Gratun bara bon gukulla pundol koiyubatoara makoi'o birug,
gatun pundol nuparai kabirug.
43. Gatun noa maukulla, gatun takulla barun kin mikan ta.
44. Gatun noa wiya barun, Unni tara wiyellikanne-ta wiya nu-
run bag ba, kakulla bag ba nurun katoa, yantin koa ka-iiwil kakil-
liko upatoara wiyellikanne-ta Mothe-umba, gatun banni ba fpro-
pet koba, gatun ftehillim kaba, emmoug kai.
45. Gurrabunbea gaiya noa barun, gurra-uwil koa bara upa-
toara ta ;
46. Gatun wiya noa barun, Yaki upatoara, gatun yaki murn'i-
rag ta Kritlit ko gikoug kakilliko tetti ko, gatun bougkulliko kiim-
ba-ken-ta purreag ka tetti kabirug :
47. Gatun wiyabunbi-uwil koa minkikanne-ta gatun warekuUi-
kanne-ta yarakai umullikan ko gikoug katoa birug yitirra birug
yantin ta konara, kurri-kurri kabirug fHierotlialem kabirug.
48. Gatun nura nakillikan katan gali tara ko.
49. Gatun, gurrulla, wupin bag nurun kin wiyatoara emmoum-
ba koba Biyugbai koba : wonto nura ba minkea kokera fHiero-
thalem ka, kaiyu koa nurun kauwal biilwara tin.
50. Gatun yutea noa barun kalog kolag Bethany ka bo, gatun noa
wupilleun mattara gikoumba wokka-lag, gatun pitalma noa barun.
51. Gatun yakita kakulla, yaki pitalmulliela noa ba barun, man-
tilleim gaiya bon barun kinbirug, gatun kuri'ea bon wokka-lag
moroko kako.
52. Gatun bara bon murrarag koiyelliela, gatun willug ba ka-
kulla fHierotlialem kolag kauwal-kan pital-kan :
53. Gatun kakilliela murrug fbieron ka, murrarag wiyelliela
gatun pitalmulliela bon Eloinug.
AMEN.
PART III.
THE LEXICON
[FllDM THE ORIGINAL MANUSCRIPT.]
AK
AWAEAKAL- ENGLISH
LEXICON
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO SAINT LUKE
L. E. THPvELKELD
^•0W FOR THE FIRST TIME PRINTED.
CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER.
It592.
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
It was during the year 1827, being the third year after the com-
mencement of my mission to the aborigines, that the first work of
this kind was produced — the result of my researches, assisted by
M'Gill. The work was entitled " Specimens of the Language of
the Aborigines of New South Wales," and was printed in Sydney,
the only attempt that had then been made by anyone to obtain a
thorough grammatical knowledge of the aboriginal language of
Australia, in any of its various dialects, and to render it into a
written form.
In 1834, on the recommendation of the Rev. W. G. Broughton,
the then Arch-Deacon of Xew South Wales, the Colonial Govern-
ment, and the Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge,
London, conjointly advanced sufficient funds to enable me to
to publish a small edition, now out of print, of "An Australian
Grammar of the Language as spoken by the Aborigines in the
Vicinity of Lake Macquarie, New South Wales." In 1850, I
published, on my own account, " A Key to the Structure of the
Aboriginal Language, being an Analysis of the Particles used as
Affixes, to form the various modifications of the Verbs, showing
the essential powers, abstract roots, and other peculiarities of the
language." Both of these works were presented to, and exhibited
at, the Royal National Exhibition, London, 1851.
This Lexicon will contain only those words which are used in
the Gospel by Saint Luke. For the exemplification of such tenses
and cases as may not be used therein, reference must be made to
the " Australian Grammar," and to the " Key to the Structure
of the Aboriofinal Language."
A few illustrative sentences will be found at the end of the
Lexicon, showing the mode in which certain forms of English
phraseology are expressed in the aboriginal language.
As a tribute of respect to the departed worth of M'Gill, the
intelligent aboriginal, whose valuable assistance enabled me to
overcome very many difficulties in the language much sooner
than otherwise could have been accomplished, his likeness is also
attached to this work.
L. E. THRELKELD.
Sydney,
New South Wales,
1859.
ABBREVIATIONS.
ahl. for
ace. ,,
adv. „
aor. „
cf-
conj. „
dat. ,,
def. „
emjyh. ,,
Eng. „
exclam. ,,
fern. „
flit. „
Gr. „
Eeh.
imper. or imp. ,,
indef. ,,
i.q. „
intens. „
c/.* This is a reference to the foot-note on par/e 204
ablative
interr. for interrogative
accusative
Lat. .
, Latin.
adverb.
lit. ,
, literaUy.
ccorist.
mand. ,
. mandatory.
refer to.
masc. ,
, inasculine
conjoined.
neg. ,
, negative.
dative.
opt. ,
, optative
definite.
part. ,
, participle
emphatic.
perf
, perfect.
English.
plu. ,
, 2}lurah
exclamation.
2)rep. ,
, 2^('^^POsition
feminine
pres. ,
, present
future.
2)riv. ,
, j)7-ivative
Greek.
j)r.n. ,
, proper noun
Hebrew.
proh. ,
, ^>7*o/ii6zto/'y.
imperative.
pron. ,
, p)ronouu.
indefinite.
sing. ,
, singular
the same as.
subj. ,
, sidrjunctive.
intensive.
subst. ,
, substantive
AX
AWABAKAL-ENGLISH LEXICON
TO THE
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO SAINT LUKE,.
The letters in ilie English alphabet, with some modifications, are
here useel to convey the sounds of letters and words in the ab-
original language. The meaning of the verb is given in the third
person singular only, but it should be remembered that the verb,
when rendered into English, must be made to agree with its
subject, whether singular, plural, or dual — first, second, or third
person, as the case may require; for example, — buntan, ' smites,'
may have to be translated ' I smite,' ' thou smitest,' ' he, she, or it
smites,' ' avc, ye, or they {dual and j^horcd) smite '; cf, Grammar,
p. 31. So likewise with respect to nouns ; for they are singular,
dual, or plural, according to the particle attached to shov/ the
number; as, kuri, 'man'; kiiri ta, 'the man'; kuri tara, 'the
men'; yantin kuri, 'all manner of men '; ' all men '; 'all people';
' all mankind.'
[Hyphens are used to sliovv- the composition of some of the words. — Ed.]
A — the sound of this letter is
the same as heard in Unr/. ah !
A — retains the long sound, es-
pecially when accented as in
ban ; a sounds shorter than a.
See ' Phonology,' page 5.
A ! — a call of attention ; hark !
Aaron — 2tr.7i., Aaron.
Aaroniimba — belonging to A.
Abaram — -^jr. n., Abraham .
Abaramiimba — belonging to A.
Abaram kinko— to be with A.;
dat. 2.
Abaramnug — for A. to have or
possess ; dat. 1.
Abaramnug — A. as the object.
Abel — pr.n., Abel.
Abeliimba — belonging to A.
Abelnug — Abel ; the ace. case.
Abia — pr.n., Abia.
Abia-umba — belonging to A.
Abilene — ^j?'.?!., Abilene.
Agelo — -Gr., an angel.
Ai — sounds as i in £n{/. 'nigh.'
Aketo — Lat., vinegar.
Aku — Lett., a needle.
Alabathro — Gr., alabaster.
Alpai — Gr. pr.n., Alpheus.
Altar — see bonio.
Andrea — pr.n., Andrew.
Apothol — Gr., an apostle.
Arguro^G-V., silver.
Army — Eng., army.
Army-kan — Eng., a soldier.
Arto — Gr., bread, a loaf.
Atthari — Gr., a farthing.
Ather — pr.n., Asher.
Athino — Lat., an ass.
202
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
B
B — is sounded as in En.
Biintoara — that Avliich is smit-
ten or struck.
Burrilliko — to do a thing spoken
of by some violent instrumen-
tal means ; cf. tetti-burrilliko.
Burroug — a dove.
Burugbuggii — did set at liberty;
unloosed, released, unbound.
Burugbuggan — does set at liber-
ty (release, unbind).
Burugbugganim — will set loose.
206
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Burugbuggulla — maud., sot at
liberty ; set loose.
Buru gbuggulliela — was cau.sing
to be set at liberty ; was un-
loosing or releasing.
Burn gbuggulliela ba — while (as,
when). . .was setting at liberty.
Burugbuggulliko — to cause to
be set at liberty ; to unloose ;
to release ; to unbind.
Burugkulleun — did set at liberty,
unloosed (of itself).
Burugkulliko — to set itself at
liberty of its own })ower ; to
unloose itself ; to unbind it-
self ; to go off spontaneously.
Butti — more ; to do more ; to
continue the action.
Butti-butti — mand., more more ;
go on, go on.
Buttikag — any animal ; ass, ox.
Buttikag ba — when (if) an ani-
mal . . . , as an ox.
Bu-nwil — opt., wish to smite.
Bu-uwil koa — subj., in order to
smite ; that . . . might smite ; on
purpose to strike.
Buwa — mand., smite ; strike.
There is no sibilant sound in
the language, consequently there
is no c soft, or s, or z in the
native alj^liabet. These letters,
therefore, occur only in words of
foreign origin introduced into
the aboriginal tongue. The hard
sound of c, as in Uny. ' cubit,'
would 1)6 represented l^y the
letter k The letter 6 (0) repre-
sents the sound of ch. , as in Entj.
' church.'
Cipu — Eng., sheep.
Kc'if(titalo, Gr.)—Foiff., calf.
Kalabary — j^''-^^-) Calvary.
Kenturion — a centurion.
Kentui"ion-ko — the centurion, as
an agent.
Kubit — Eng., a cubit.
Kurenia— pr. n. , Cyrenia.
Kurenia-kal — belonging to Cy-
renia ; a Cyrenian ( niasc.J.
Kurenia-kulin — T)elonging to Cy-
renia ; a Cyrenian (fern.).
D.
D has a middle sound betwixt
t and d ; it often confounds the
sounds of d and t. I) is used in
foreign words, while t belongs
to the language. The aborigines
do not pronounce the Eng. v or
f, generally substituting h for
V, and j) tor f.
Dabid — David.
Dabid-to — David, as the agent.
Dabidumba — belonging to D.
Debbil (fdiabol, 6'/-'.) —devil.
Debbil-debbil — intensive; a term
used for an evil being of whom
the aborigines are much afraid.
Dekem-millia— Z«<. , 1 0,000.
Denari— Zffl^., a penny.
Deutero — Gr., second.
Dhakaria — pr.n., Zacliarias.
Dhakke — pr.7i., Zaccliaeus.
Dhelot — Gr., a zealot.
Diabol-lo or diabol-to — the devil,
as an agent.
Diabol-kan — one having a de^-il.
Didathkalo (-oi) — Gr., teachei-.
Dodeka — Gr., twelve.
E.
E — sounds as a in Eng. ' may.'
Ela or ala! — exdam., ho! hallo!
THE LEXICON.
207
Ela-beara ! — emphatic exclam. of
astonishment oi- surprise ; oh,
dear ! dear me ! well !
Elai6n — Gr., Mount of Olives.
Elebben — see hendeka.
Elebben-ta — eleven it is ; eleven.
Elia — i^w.n., Elias.
Elia-umba — belonging to Elias.
Elidhabet — pr. n. , Elizabeth.
Elithcu — pr.n , Eliseus.
Eloi — Hebrew Elohim, God.
Eloi kai — on account of Eloi.
Eloi kai koba — on account of
and belonging to God.
Eloi kin — in place before Eloi ;
before (in presence of) God.
Eloi kinko — for or to Eloi.
Eloi koba — belonging to Eloi ;
belonging to God, as property.
Eloi-ta — Eloi it is, as the sub-
ject.
Eloi-to — Eloi, as the agent : God.
Eloi-iimba — belonging to Eloi,
personally ; God's.
Eloi-iimba-ta — belonging to Eloi
it is ; it is of God ; it is God's.
Emmaou — pr.n., Emmaus.
Emmaou kolag — towards E.
Emmoug — ace, me.
Emmoug kai — from me ; on ac-
count of me ; about me.
Emmoug katoa — with (in com-
pany with, together with) me.
Emmoug kin — -at me ; with me.
Emmoug kinbirug — from me ;
away from me.
Emmoug-ta — it is mine ; mine.
Emmoumba — my, mine, belong-
ing to me. Also, Emmoemba.
Emmoumba katoa — with (in
company with) my.
Emmoumba koba — belonging to
my ; of my.
Emmoumba tin — from mine ; on
account of mine, as a cause.
Et (et) — Eng., eight.
Ethaia — -pr.n.., Esaias.
Ethane — Gr., nations.
Ethane-kal — Gr. and aboriginal,
the Gentiles. See Gentail.
Etin (etin) — Eng., eighteen.
Etin-ta — the eighteen it is, as a
subject.
Ety-wara — Eng. and aboriginal,
eighty-four.
Ety koa — in order to be eighty.
Euagelion — Gr., the gospeL
F.
The sound of /is not found in the
native language ; when it is in-
troduced by foreign words, the
aborigines pronounce it p.
Parthig — Eng., farthing.
Pente — Gr., five.
Pente-ta — five it is ; the five.
Pentaki-kilioi— 6V., 5,000.
Pentakothioi— (Jr., 500.
Pentekonta — Gr., fifty.
Pipatin — Eng., fifteen.
Pipaty — see pentekonta.
Pipaty koa — in order that it
may be fifty.
Pipaty koa ka-uwil — in order
that there may be fifty.
Pok (falopek, Gr.) — Eng., fox.
Purlog — Eng., furlong.
Purlog hikty — Eng., sixty fur-
longs.
Purlog hikty-ta — sixty furlongs
it is ; three-score furlongs.
G.
G is always the English g hard.
Gabriel — pr.n., Gabriel.
Gabriel-ta — Gabriel it is.
Gabrielumba — belonging to G.
Gadara — ^pj'.w., Gadara.
Gadara-kal — a woman of G.
Gadaren — p)r.n., Gadarene.
208
AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Galiliiia — jir.n., Galilee.
Galihiia kaba — at Gnlilee.
Galilaia kabirug — out of G.
Galilaia-kul — {masc. ) belonging
to Galilee ; a Galilean.
Galiiaia-kah'u — (fcDi.) belong-
ing to Galilee ; a Galilean.
Galilaia tin — from (on account
of) Galilee.
Galilaia tin-to — on account of
Galilee, as an o.gent.
Garamuiateu — Gr., scribes.
Gii ram mateu -kal- — bel onging to
the scribes.
Garammateu-kal-lo — belonging
to the scribes, acting as agents.
G;\rammateu-kan — he who is a
scribe.
Garammateu ko — for the scribes.
Ga ram mateu nug— the scril^es, as
the object.
Garammateu tin — on account of
the scribes; from the scribes,
as a cause.
Gararaiaiateu-to — the scribes, as
agents.
Garep (fbotru, Gr.) — Z'?!^/. , grape.
Gennetharet — ■pr.7i.,Gennesaret.
Gentail (fethane-kal) — Gentiles.
Gentail kinko — for (unto) the G.
Gentail koba — belonging to G.
Gentail-to — G., as the awnts.
Gr.
G sounds as ng in Enff. * bung ';
it has the nasal sound of 7i(/
in the English alphabet. Tlie
sound is invariably the same
whether at the beginning, the
middle, or the end of a word,
and cannot bo too strongly
nasalised.
Ga — or ; or it is.
Ga 1— is it 1
Ga !— lo ! behold !
Ga ba — or as ; it is as ; while as.
Ga wiya ? — or say? or is it not ?
Gagga, gagka — see ganka.
Gai — rhymes with IJnc/. ' nigh.'
Gaikug — the eye; the eyes.
Gaikug birug — from (awa3"from,
out of) the eye.
Gaikug tin — because of the eye.
Gaiya — then ; at that time or
period spoken of. It is used
as a correlative to yakounta?
' when '? in the reply, ' gaij-a '
follows the word that indi-
cates the time v/hen ; as, kiim-
ba gaiya, 'to-morrow then.'
Gakea — .stood ; did stand.
Gakilliko — to stand upright.
Gakillilm — nov/ standing and
continuing to stand.
Gakiilin — standing upright.
Gakogkilliko — to feign ; to sham
or pretend.
Gakoiman — deceives ; betrays.
i^p^This and the word-forms Ije-
low may be written either
gakoi- or gako-.
Gakoimulliko — to cause decep-
tion ; to deceive ; to betray.
Gakoiya — deceived ; denied ; he-
trayed ; perverted.
Gakoiya — deception ; hypocrhsy ;
deceit ; betrayal.
Gakoiyanun — Avill make believe
or sham; v.-ill deceive or deny.
Gakoiya-uwil — opt., v\'ish to de-
ceive or betray.
Gakoiya-uwil ba — as . . . might de-
ceive.
Gakoiya-uwil koa — suhj., that...
might deceive or betray.
Gakoiya-uwilliko — to wish to de-
ceive.
Gakoiyaye — habitual deception,
f^aye tin — on account of
liabitual deception ; from
hypocrisy or deceit.
THE LEXICO>^.
209
Grnkoiya yikora — mamL, beware
of deception.
Gakoiyellan — does now deceive.
Grakoiyellieia — was deceiving or
pervci'ting.
G-akoiyclli-kan — one who lies or
deceives or acts the traitoi'.
Gakoiyelli-kau-to — one who de-
ceives, actins; as the accent.
Grakoiyelliko — ^to act in such a
way as to deceive ; to betray;
to feign ; to lie ; to act the
Gakoiyellilin — now deceiving.
Grakoiyeliinun — will betray.
Gakoiyelli-ta — (sin;/.) the decep-
tion ; the deceiving.
Gakoiyelli-tara — (plu.) the de-
ceptions ; the dcceivings.
Grala — that (demonstrative).
Gala ko — for that ; to that.
Gali — this (demonstrative).
Gali birug — from (out of) this.
Gali koba — belonging to this.
Gali noa— this is he who.
Gali-ta — this is it that ; this is
tliat which.
Gali-tara — these arc they which.
Gali tin — from (on account of)
this, as a cause.
Galoa — that (there at hand.)
Galoa-ko — that there, spoken of
as an agent.
Galoa kolag — towards that.
Ga!oa-riu — from (on account of)
that, as a cause.
Gan 1 — interr. who ?
Gan-ba — who as ; whoever.
Gan...ba? — who is (he)?
Ganbulliko — (a peculiar idiom,
Jit., to be ' whoing ' a person
when you know who he is ;
hence,) to deny all knowledge
of a person when at the same
time you know him ; to deny
a person ; to deny personal
knowledge.
Ganbullin.'m — v,dll l)e 'whoing';
will deny.
Ganbullinun wal — will certainly
be ' whoing '; shall deny.
Ganka — first ; before ; foremost ;
prior ; elder ; 1.(7. gag-ga or -ka.
Ganka — before ; in presence of.
Ganka-ganka — the very first.
Ganka kakilliko— to be Ijefore ;
to be the first.
Ganka-kal — relating to the first
or the elder.
Ganka-kalleun — having been be-
before or first.
Ganka kanun — will be first.
Ganke? — personal interr., who
is the person 1 who ? who is 1
Gan kiloa 1 — whom like 1
Gan kiloa unnoa — like whom is
that 1
Gan kin 1 — upon whom 1 locally.
Gan kinba — upon whomsoever,
locally.
Gannug 1 — ace, who is the per-
sonal object 1 v/hom 1
Gan-to? — who did or does % who
is the personal agent %
Gan-to ba — whosoever sliall act
as a personal agent ; wdioso-
ever does or will do.
Ganto-bo ba — whosoever may be
the selfsame personal agent ;
whosoever v.dll.
Ganto-ko 1 — -who is the personal
agent 1 who is he thit does ?
Gamim ? — to whom (to have or
to possess) 1
Ganumba 1 — whose 1 to whom
belongeth...'?
Ganum-bo — whosoever hath.
Gapal — a woman, a concubine.
Gapal toa — with (in company
with) a woman or women.
Gar — rhymes with the Eng.
' far,' pronouncing the r very
rough.
Garabo — sleep ; repose.
!10
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGK.
Grarabo-kakilliko — to 1)C in a
state of re])ose ; to sleep.
Gavabo kakillin — present j>arf.,
sleeping ; reposing.
Garaka — the entrance or mouth
of anything ; i.q. kurraka.
Graraka-ko — the entrance, as the
subject.
Grarawalliko — to lose one self.
G-arawallilleiin — lost ; did lose.
Garawan — a plain ; a flat place;
a level ; i.q. garai'awan.
Garo — -the eldest son ; the first
born son ; cf. kurri and koro.
Garogeen — an elderly woman ;
an old woman.
Garokal — aged ; elder ; old.
Garokea — stood up ; arose.
Garokeiin — stood up, at some
definite time past.
Garokilla — mancl., stand wp.
Garokill^a — mand., stand up and
continue to stand.
Garokilliela — ^9fflsi. part.^ con-
tinued to stand ; stood.
Garokilliko — to stand upright
on the feet ; to be in a stand-
ing position.
Garokilli korien — neg., not to
be standing upright ; not to
stand.
Garokillin — ^jj'e*'. 2>«'"^-) stand-
ing ; now standing upright.
Garombai — an elderly man; an
old man.
Garkulleun — turned round.
Garkulliko — to revolve of itself;
to turn one's self round.
Garug — rough ; rugged.
Garuggai'a — rugged ; proud.
Gati — happened of itself ; acci-
dental ; perchance ; unawares ;
without cause ; secret ; unre-
vealed.
Gati — nothing ; nought ; not.
Gati kakilliko — to be nothing.
Gati kakulla — was not ; evan-
ished ; disappeared.
Gati-ta — the secret place.
Gatoa — ein^^hatic, I who ; it is I.
Gatoa-ta — emphatic, it is I who.
Gatoa-bo — empli., it was (is) I
myself who.
Gatun — conj., and.
Ge — rhymes with the Eng. 'nay,'
sounding strongly the nasal
ng at the beginning.
Gearimulleun — choose ; elected.
Gearimulliko — to pick out ; to
choose ; to cull ; to elect.
Gearun — pron., we.
\Incomplete : see note at tJie
end of the Lexicon. — Ed.]
H.
The aborigines seldom sound h as
an initial aspirate; consequently
the letter h is not much used in
the language, save in words of
foreign extraction.
Hebiiraio — pr.n., a Hebrew.
Hebaraioi-umba — belonging to
the Hebrews.
Hek — 6'r., six.
Hekaton — Gr., a hundred.
Hekekonta — Gr. , sixty.
Hellenik — Gr., Greek.
Hendeka — Gr., eleven.
Hepta — Gr., seven.
Herod — jrr.n., Hei'od.
Herodiath — pr.n., Herodias.
Herod katoa — with (in company
with) Herod.
Herodnug — H., as the object.
Herod-to — Herod, as the agent.
Herodumba — belonging to H.
Herodiimba-kan — being H's.
Hiereu— (?/•., a priest ; priests.
Hiereu-kan — one who is a priest.
Hiereu-ko — the priest, as agent.
THE LEXICON.
211
Hiereu-nug— the priest 0?- priests,
as the object.
Hieron — Gr., temple.
Hieron ka — at the temple.
Hieron tin — from (on account of)
the temple.
Hierothalem — Gr. , Jerusalem.
Hierothalem ka — at or in J.
Hierothalem kabirug — out of J.;
from (away from) J.
Hierothalem-kal — belonging to
Jerusalem (masc.) ; a man of
Jerusalem.
Hierothalem-kalin — belonging
to Jerusalem (fern.); a woman
of Jerusalem.
Hour (fhora, Gr.) — ^«'er ; accompanied by
power.
Kaiyu korien — not powerful or
able ; unable.
Kaiyu-korien-to — unable to act,
as an agent.
Kaiyu tin — from (on account of)
the power.
In,.-
BuNTiMAi— ' A Messenger. '
TilE LEXICON.
213
Ka-keun — definite tmse, it Avas
(eai'ly in the morning) this
day or of the day spoken of.
Kakillai — being and continuing
to be.
Kakillan — did remain in a state
of (whatever is spoken of).
Kakiliieliko — ^to be and to con-
timie to be.
Kakilli-kan — one who is and
continues to be.
Kakilliliela — was being and con-
tinuing to be (in such a state).
Kakilliko — to be.
Kakillin — being novv^ actually
(in such a state).
Ka korien kakilliko — not to be ;
to fail to be.
KakuUa — was (in such a state).
Kakullai — to be awhile ; to be
for a season.
Kakuliai-ta — it is for awhile ;
it endures for a season.
-kal — (masc.) belonging to a time
or place ; in a state of ; a man
of such a place.
-kalin — {fern.) belonging to a
place; a female of such a place.
Kalog — afar off ; far ; distant.
Kalog ka — at a distance.
Kalog kaba — being afar off or
at a distance.
"Kalog-kolag — towards afar off;
to a distance.
Kamel — Emj., camel. ^
Kamunbilla — im.j>., forgive; let
be ; permit to be.
Kamunbilla kakilliko — to per-
mit to be in any state or con-
dition.
Kumunbilliko — to cause to let
be ; to permit to be.
Kamunbinun — will cause to let
be; will permit to be.
Kumunbin in wal — will cer-
tainly cause to permit to be ;
shall cause to let be.
Kiinunbi yikora — imp. prohlb.,
let not be permitted to be ;
forbid permission to be ; let
not be ; foi'bid to be.
Kan — is sounded !x?i Bur/, 'can.'
Kan-kan — p7'es. tense of tiie verb
to be (in any state); subst., one
who is (whatever is stated).
Kanumaiko — to repent.
K:\nun — -fict. tm/e/!, will be; e.g.,
tetti kanun, 'will be dead," will
be in a state of death.
Kanim kakilliko — to be in sucli
a state ; v.'ill be ; will become ;
will come to pass.
Kanun wal kakilliko — shall cer-
tainly come to pass.
Ka-pa — a particle which implies
a denial ; ' if it had been.'
Kapaiyinun — will become.
Kapatin — J^ng., a captain.
Kapa tin-to — a captain, as agent.
Kapernaum — jjr. n., Capernaum.
K apirri — hunger.
Kapirri-kan — one who hungers ;
being hungry.
Kara — private; secret ; adv., pri-
vately ; secretbf.
Kara — the negat. of being in
such a state ; equivalent to
' no longer to be.'
Karag — spittl e.
Karag-kabilliko — to do spittle ;
to spit spittle ; to spit.
Karai-karai — round about ; all
round.
Karaigon — suhsf., the outside ;
adv., outside.
Karaka — the mouth ; an entrance
gate or door ; i.q. kurraka.
Karakai — quick ; imp., he quick;
make haste ; i.q. kurrakai.
Karakai — one who pretends to
cure by charms ; a medicine-
man ; a sorcerer ; a doctor.
Karal — trembling; shaking; the
palsy.
!14
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Karauwa — oil.
Kara-uwilliko — to seek care-
fully with a wish to find.
Kaia-uwilli-koa — that . . . might
find ; in order to find.
Karawolleun — aorisf, found ;
shall have found.
Karawolliko — to find.
Karawollinun — -/uL, will find.
Kareawug — the south wind.
Kari — the first ; i.q. kurri.
Kari-kari — a reduplication de-
noting intensity or plurality ;
the very first.
Karig — all through; throughout
the whole.
Karig-kareug — fine i-aiment.
Karig-kai-eug-ko — fine dress, as
the agent.
Kai-in — pain.
Karin-kan — one who is in pain.
Karol — heat of any kind ; hot.
Katai — always ; to be always ;
for ever ; ever.
Kataikal — of every sort.
Ka tako — to be with.
Katalla — liad been ; had lived ;
had existed.
Katan — {present tense of kakilli-
ko, ' to be in any state ') am ;
art ; is ; are ; it is used with
singula!', dual, and plural pro-
nouns.
Katea — to be again.
Katea ka — to be until.
Katea-kan — one Mdio is again ;
beinof again.
Katea-kanun — will be again.
Katea-kanini wokka ka — will be-
come again up; will be again.
Katea-kun — subj., may be again.
Katilli-kan — one who is the thing
spoken of and acts as such ;
one who is...
Katilliko — to be (substantively)
the thing spoken of ; to be in
any state or condition.
Katillin — (substantively) exi.st-
ing as ; if preceded l)y pii-i-
wal, 'chief, lord, king,' it means
— does exercise lordship.
Katillinun — will be (substan-
tively), as above.
Kau — sounds as Eng, 'cow.'
Kau-ka-nwil — opt., would wish
to be.
Kau-ka-uwil koa — sub., in order
to be... ; that might be...
Kau-uia — gathered together ; as-
sembled.
Kau-ma korien — did not assem-
ble together.
Kau-ma pa — priv., would ha%'e
gathered together, but
Kau-manun — will cause to come
together; will gather together.
Kau-ma-uwil — opt., wished to
gather together ; would ga-
ther together.
Kau-ma-ye — one who habitually
causes to assemble or collect
together ; a collector.
Kau-mullan — did assemble to-
ther ; did take council.
Kau-mulli-gel — the place where
the gathering together is made;
the place of assembly; the
council chamber ; the parlia-
ment house.
Kau-mulligel lako — dat., to the
place of assembly ; to the
counoil.
Kau-mulliko — to cause to gather
together; to collect; to gather
together, as quails their yojing
or a hen her chickens.
Kau-tilliko — to assemble or col-
lect together, of themselves.
Kau-tillinun — will of themselves
assemble together.
Kauwa — imp., be ; be in such a
state. Also, Ka-wa.
Kauwa ba — be it so ; let it be in
this manner.
THE LEXICON.
215
Kauwal — great ; large ; big.
Kauwal kakilliko — to be great.
Kauwal kakulla — was great.
Kauwal-kan — one who is great ;
being great.
Kauwal-kauwal — a great many ;
intensely great ; very great.
Kail wal-kau wal-la — the many,
as the subjects.
Kauwal-kauwiil-lo — very many,
as the agents.
Kauwal koa — with (in company
with) the great...
Kauwal-la — great, as the sub-
ject ; much ; abundance.
Kauwal-lag — is great, large, or
abundant ; a great deal.
Kauwallan — does greatly...
Kauwal-lo — great, as an agent.
Kauwal loa — through the many
or great.
Kauwal loa kokeroa — through
the many houses ; through the
village, town, or city.
Kauwal-lo konaro — a great mul-
titude (as agents) did, does, or
will... (according to the tense
of the verb.)
Kauwa yanti — be it so ; be it in
this manner ; be it thus.
Ka-uwil koa yanti— in order to
be thus ; that . . . might be in
this manner.
Kau-wiyelliko — to command by
word of mouth to assemble
together; to call a coimcil ; to
summon a congregation.
Ke — sounds as ca in Ung. ' care.'
-kel — an interrogative particle.
Kea-kea— courageous, victorious.
Also, Kia-kia.
Kea-kea-md, — did cause to con-
quer ; has conquered.
Kearan — pres. tense neg., no, not.
Keawai — simjjle negation, nay ;
no ; not.
Keawai wun-ba — did not leave.
Keawai wal — determinate nega-
tion^ shall not; certainly shall
not.
Keawaran — ^;res. tense of oiega.,
no, it is not ; no; not.
Keawaran bag — denial, not T ;
I am not.
Keawaran-keawai — no ; nor.
Kenukun — the large white rock
lily ; a lily.
Kerun — complete ; i.q. kirun.
Ki — sounds as Ung. ' key.'
Kia-kia — upright ; this denotes
conquest, victory; because one
left standing upright after a
combat or battle is the victor.
Kid- — Eng., a kid.
-kil — a particle used in the infi-
nitive form of the verb 'to be.'
-killi — particle used as the aux-
iliary sign of the verb 'to be.'
-killiko — 'to be,' as an auxiliary,
to indicate the initiation of
the action implied by the verb
to which it is joined; e.g.,
bunkilliko — to proceed to
smite ; from the root bun, ' a
blow.'
Kilbuggulliko — to cause to snaji
by personal agency ; to snap,
as a piece of rope ; to break,
as a cable.
Kilburrilliko — to cause to snap
by an instrument.
Kilkulliko — to snap of itself ; to
break.
Killibinbin — clear ; unspotted ;
bright; shining; pure ; glori-
ous.
Killibinbin kaba — in a state of
shining glory ; in a pure, un-
spotted, glorious condition.
Killibinbin kakilliko — to be in
a bright, glorious state.
Killibinbin kamunbilla — imper. ,
let there be brightness, splend-
our, glory ; glory be.
21G
AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Killibinbiii koa— with (in com-
])any "vvitli) glory ; accompanied
■\vitli S[)londour or glory.
Iviloa — like ; likeness ; resemble ;
resemblance.
Ivilpaiya — did snap as a cord ;
bi'oke as a rope breaks.
Kilpaiyelliko— to snap, as a cord
snaps Avlien it breaks.
Kin — pyep., to ; to a 2)e7'son.
Kin-ba — vith; at; is at ; lucally.
Kinta — fear.
Kinta kakilliela — was afraid ;
feared and did fear ; feared.
Kinta kakilliko — to be in a
state of fear ; to fear ; to be
afraid.
Kinta kakulla — was in a state
of fear ; was afraid.
Kinta-kan — being afraid ; one
who is afraid ; a coward.
Kinta-kan-to — one who fears,
as an agent.
Kinta kora — iivp., fear not.
Kinta korien — not to fear ; no
fear.
Kinta-lag — does now fear ; is
now afraid.
Kinta nakilliko-— fearful to see.
Kinta nakilli-ta — {sing.) it is
fearful seeing ; a frightful
siglit.
Kinta nakilli-tara — (phi.) fear-
ful sights.
Kintelleun — did laugh.
Kintelliko — to laugh.
Kintellinun — Jut., will laugh.
Kintellinun v.al — will certainly
laugh ; shall laugh.
Kipai — fat ; ointment ; unction,
Kirai — a ditch ; canal.
Kirin — cpieen ; c/l, }iiriw;U.
Kiroabatoara — that which is
poured out or spilled.
Kiroabulliela — did pour out.
Kiroabullielliko — to continue to
pour out; to continue si)illing.
Kiroabulliko— to pour out all ;
to spill. Also, Kiropulliko.
Kiroabullin — now spilling.
Kiroabullinun — will pour out.
Kiroa-pa — shed ; is shed or sj)ilt.
Kirra — gently, carefully.
Kirrai — see, krai.
Kirrai-klrrai — round about.
Kirrai-kirrai ta ba — surrounded.
Kirrai-kirriii-umulliko — to cause
to go round about or revolve,
as a windmill ; to sift grain,
as with a sieve ; to bring the
chaff to the top.
Kirra-uwolliko — to seek wishing
to find ; i.q. kara-uwilliko.
Kirra-uwoUi koa — in order to
seek diligently ; that... might
seek diligently.
Kirrawolliko — to move care-
fully ; to seek diligently.
Kirrikin — clothing ; a garment
of any kind ; cloak ; veil ; cur-
tain ; covering.
Kirrikin-ta — it is the garment.
Kirrikin taba— with the raiment
Kirrikin-to — clothing (raiment,
robe), as an agent.
Kirrikin-wuntoara — the raiment
or clothes which were left.
Kirrin — light ; as, daylight.
Kirrin — pain ; fever ; agony.
Kirrin kakilliko — to bein a state
of pain (fever, agony).
Kirrin-kan — one being in pain
or suffering agony.
Kirrin-kan noa— he being in an
agony.
Kirrin katan — is in pain ; is in
a state of anguish or agony.
Kirul — green, as a young tree.
Kirun — all ; the whole.
Kirunta — a creek ; a ditch.
Kittug — hair (of the head only).
Kij'ubanun — will do with tire.
Kiyuliatoara — that which is done
with fire (roasted, broiled).
THE LEXICON.
217
Kiyubulliko — to do ■with tire ; to
roast or broil.
Kiyu-}ta-ba — done o?* destroyed
by tire ; roasted ; burned.
Kleopa — j))'.n., Cleopas.
Ivo—2)article, for the purpose of.
Koa — in order to ; that. . .might.
Koai-koai-kakiliiivO — to be strut-
ting like a turkey-cock ; to be
lifted up or proud.
Koai-koai-kan — being proud ;
one who is proud.
Koai-koai korien — not proud.
Koai-koai-umuUiko — to make
proud.
Koakillai-ta — contention ; any
strife of words.
Koakillan: — strives with words ;
does quarrel o)' rebuke.
Koakilleun — did rebuke, itc.
Koakillicla — did rebuke.
Koakilliko — to scold; toquarrel;
to contend ; to rebuke.
KoakuUa — rebuked.
Koatan — swears at. [at.
Koatelliko — to curse ; to swear
Koawa — im])., chide ; rebuke.
Koba — of or belonging to any
tiling ; -umba — of or belong-
ing to any 'person.
KobAna — Eng., governor.
Kobana kinko — dat. 2, to the
governor.
Koba-toara — that v/hich is in
possession ; that which is ob-
tained.
Koiro — an herb.
Koito — therefore; for; because ;
consequently.
Koito-ba — therefore as ; because
it is so.
Koito noa ba — for as he... ; for
when he. . . ; because he
Koiwon — rain.
Koiwon tanan ba — as the rain
approaches.
Koiy:i — murmured ; repined.
Koiyelliko — to murmur ; to re-
pine ; to rebuke.
Koiyelli koa — in order to re-
buke ; that... might rebuke.
Koiyug — fire.
Koi^^ug ka — in the fire ; is in
the fire.
Koiyug kako — in (into) the fire.
Koiyug-ko — fire, as an agent.
Koiyiin — shyness ; shame.
Koiyun-bara-toaro — down ash-
amed ; to be abased.
Koiyim-batoara^that which is
become ashamed.
Koiyuu kakilliko — to be in a
state of shame ; to be ashamed.
Koiyunkanun — will be a.shamed.
Kokera — habitation ; hut ; shel-
ter ; tent ; tabernacle; house;
palace ; temple.
Kokera — dat., at or in the house,
temple, itc,
Kokera birug — away from out
of) the house.
Kokera ka — dat. 1, to the house.
Kokera kolag — dat. 2, towards
the house.
Kokera karig — all the houses ;
the whole of the houses ; the
tillage, town, city.
Kokera kolag kokerd kolag — to-
wards the houses ; from house
to house.
Kokeratin — the master (ownei-,
landlord) of the house.
Kokeratin-to — the master of the
house, as an agent.
Kokeroa — through the house.
Kokerrin — from (on account of)
the house.
Kokoi-kokoi — surrounde;d; in-
closed.
Kokoin — fresh wa,ter ; cf. bato.
Kokoin-kan — one having water;
po.ssessing water ; dropsical.
Kokoin-kan-to — a dropsical per-
son, as an agent.
218
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Kokoiii-kan warakag — one filled
with water ; one having the
dropsy.
Kokoin kolag — to (towards) the
water ; going to water.
Kokug — an indigenous fig; a fig.
Kolag — towards ; now about to.
Kolbi — sound ; noise ; roar.
K61bi-lag-bulliko — to make a
sound 0?" noise ; to roar.
K')lbi-lag-bullin — now making a
noise or sounding; I'oaring as
the wind or sea.
Kolbiinti korien — not to chop.
Kolbiintia — chopped ; reaped.
Kolbiintilla — imp., cut down.
Kolbuntilliko — to chop, as with
an axe ; to hew ; to mow ; to
reap with a hook or any other
thing that cuts or chops ; to
cut with a sword.
K61buntillin — jyres. jjart., chop-
ping ; hewing ; reaping.
Kolbuntillinun — will choj), &c.
K61buntinun — will chop, etc.
Kolbuntinun-wal — sliall cut ;
will certainly cho^D.
Koli — Avater; cf. kori and hato.
Komarra — shade ; a shadow.
Kom6nba — a drop or clot.
K6g — sounds as the Eng. 'gong,'
but with the o long.
K6gka— a reed.
K6gg6g, k6g6g — the noise made
by any person sound asleep ;
hence, to be overpowered with
sleep.
K6g6g-kan — being sleepy ; one
who sleeps.
K6g6g-kan-to — one who sleeps,
being the agent.
K6n — sounds as the Eng. 'cone,'
but rather longer, laying the
accent on the o.
Konara — tribe ; host; company ;
assemblage ; family ; army ;
herd ; nation.
Konarrin — from the tribe, as a
cause ; because of the tribe,
company, assemblage, (tc.
Konein — good to look at; pretty ;
handsome ; noble in appear-
ance.
Konein kakilliko — to be in a
beautiful state ; to be pretty;
to be handsome ; to be gar-
nished.
Konein kako — to being pretty.
Konein-kan — one who is pi'etty ;
being handsome.
Konein-ta — it is pretty, etc.
Konein-tara — the pretty things.
Konein-tar6 — the ^^^^^ty (per-
sons or things), as agents.
Konein-to — pretty, as an agent.
Koin — an unknown being of
great power, of whom the ab-
origines are very much afraid.
K6n-ta — that person, as an agent.
Kun-to-ka — that person as an
agent is...
Konug — -dung ; excrement.
Konug-gel — the place of dung ;
a dunghill.
Konug- g^l ko — for the dunghill.
Kora — a inandntonj proliihition ;
e.g., kinta kora, 'fear not.'
Koradhin — j^r.n., Chorazin.
Korakal — see korokal.
Kora koa — interrogative of nega-
tion, why not?
Korarig — a lonely place.
Korea — ceased action ; rested.
Koribibi — strong, rushing, vio-
lent ; as a stream of water or
the tide of the sea.
Korien — denial, not.
Korilliko — to cease action ; to
rest ; to be still.
KorimA — did cleanse ; baptised.
Korimaniin — will use water to
cleanse ; will baptise.
Korimulliela — being cleansed
or baptised.
THE LEXICON.
219
Korimulli-kan— one who cleanses
with water ; a baptist.
KorimuUikanne — baptism.
Koriuiullikan-ta — the baptism.
Korimulliko — to use water in
any way ; cleanse with water ;
cf. kori, koli. ' water ': mulliko
means ' to do with ' ; hence
korimulliko is used to mean
' to baptize,' in any form.
Koriniulli koa — that ... might
cleanse with water ; that . . .
might baptise.
Koro-ka— concealed ; was hidden.
Korokal — old, worn out ; said of
clothes or property, not of
persons.
Koro-kakilliko — to be in a state
of concealment ; to hide one's
self ; to be concealed.
Korokal la— <:/«<., to the old.
Korokul katea-kanim — will be
again old.
Korowa — the sea ; the waves of
the sea.
Korowa tarig — the sea coast ;
the seaside ; the coast.
Korug — the inland part of the
country ; the interior ; the
bush ; the wilderness.
Korug-ka —in the wilderness ;
in the bush ; in the interior.
Korug kabirug — from (out of,
away from) the bush ; from
the country ; from the in-
terior.
Korug tin — fi'om (on account of)
the wilderness, as a cause.
Korun — still ; .silent ; calm.
K6t — Eng., coat.
K6t-kan — one having a coat.
Kota — thought ; did think.
Kota ba — when (if)... did think.
Kota-ban kora — mand. (partici-
pial form), cease thinking.
Kota-bumbilliko — to permit to
cause to think : to let think.
Kota-bunbea — allowed to cause
thought ; did astonish ; made
astonished.
Kota korien — thought not.
Kotan — thinks ; does think.
Kotanun — -fut-, will think.
Kotatoara — thought ; the thing
which is thought.
Kotayikora — mand. (the verbal
form) do not think ; think not;
take no thought.
Kotara — an aboriginal instru-
ment of war called by the
Europeans 'a waddy ''; a cud-
gel, made of iron wood, stout
in the middle but tapering to
a point.
Kotara-kan — one having a cud-
gel.
Kotaru — the cudgel, as an
agent j with or by the cudgel.
Kotella — mandatory (the verbal
form), do think : remember ;
reflect.
Kotellan — does think.
Kotelleim — aor., did, does, will
think ; thought ; thinks.
Kotellia — mand. (the participial
form), think; be thinking; re-
member ; reflect; meditate.
Kotelliela — thought ; did think ;
was thinking.
Kotellielliko — to think and con-
tinue to think ; to be thinking.
Kotellikanne — the thing which
is thought ; imagination ; idea.
Kotelliko — to think ; to be in
thought.
Kotellin — ^;xw<. ^»-es., the action
of thought ; thinking.
Kotelli-ta — the thought.
Koti — a kinsman 0?' a neighbour;
a friend ; a guest.
Koti — personally belonging to
self ; own-self ; e.g. , giroiimba
koti, 'thine own-self.'
220
AX AUSriiALIAX LANGUAGE.
Koti bula umullan — the two be-
came friends again ; lit., the
two were caused to be akin.
Koti kabirug — from (out of) the
the self-same.
K(3ti kakilliko— to be near of
kin ; a kinsman, friend, neigh-
bour.
K(3ti-ta — {'iing.) the kinsman or
neighbour; friend; guest.
Koti-tara — [phi.) the kinsfolk ;
kinsmen; neighbours; friends.
Krai — the west ; westward ; in-
land ; i.q. kirrai. [west.
Krai tin — from (because of) the
Kritht — py.n., Clu'ist.
Kritht-ta — it is the Christ ; the
Christ, emphatic.
-kill — ^?«r^2We 'jiiasc, belonging
to any locality ; i.q, -kal.
-k'llin — part, /em., belonging to
any locality ; i.q. -kalin.
Kiilai — wood ; timber ; a tree of
any kind.
Kulla — because, for.
-kuUa — postfix jMrticle, the sign
of an aorist tense ; e.r/., ka, 'to
be'; ka-kulla, ' was.'
Kullabulliko — to cut round ; to
circumcise.
Kullaburra — shining ; glorious;
bright ; resplendent ; glory.
Kulla wal — because certainly ;
surely.
Kulla-wal-lea— because certainly
...has or did.
Kulleug, kulliug — the neck.
Kulligtiela — cut ; did cut.
Kulligtielliko — to cut, as with a
knife or some such cutting
instrument.
Kullimulliko — to make use of
the toe ; hence, to climb ; be-
cause the blacks cut notches
in the bark, and, to ascend
the trunk of a tree, place the
toe therein.
Kulliwa — climbed ; did climb.
Kullo — cheek.
Kulwon — stiff", as a corpse.
Kinn — soundsas^'n^. 'come': c/.*
Kumara- — blood.
Kumara-kan — a bloody person.
K iim ba — t o-m orro w,
Kumba-ken-ta — the period of
time after to-morrow ; the day
after to-morrow ; the third day.
Kumbarapaiyelliko — to be trou-
blesome, clamorous, noisy.
Kumbarawan — does trouble, as
by some movement or bustle.
Kumbarawilliko — to trouble or
tease ; to worry.
Kumiri — a shady })lace ; a hole
in a rock ; a cave.
Kummari — northward ; north.
Kummari tin — from the north.
Kiimmulliko — to cai:se trouble,
anxiety ; to be anxious.
Ku mmullan — troubled; anxious.
Kim — for its sound cf.*.
Kunbuntea — did smite with a
knife or a sword ; cut ; smote.
Kunbuntilliko — to cut with a
knife ; to smite with a sword
or any similar edged instru-
ment, [be.
Kiui koa — lest. . .should or might
Kunta — nest ; the nest of a bird.
Kunto — food ; vegetable food, as
bread, but not animal food.
Kunto-kan — one having food ;
one possessed of food.
Kuri— man ; mankind ; men.
Kiiri koba — belonging to men ;
of mankind ; of man (si>iy. or
2}hi.).
Kiiri koba ko — dat., to man's.
Kurinio — Gr. j;r.«., Cyrenius.
Kiiri tin — from man, as a cause ;
on account of man.
Kiiri willug-gel — the men of this
place ; those of this genera-
tion.
THE LEXICOX.
221
Kurr — sounds as E)i(j. ' cur.'
Kurrag — froth ; foam.
Kurrag-to — froth, a.s an agent.
Kurragtoanbuggulliko — to cause
by personal agency to foam.
Kurragtoanl )ugg;i — was caused
to foam ; foamed.
Kurrai-kurrai — to turn round ;
to go round about ; to roll.
Kurraka — the mouth; entrance;
doorway ; gateway.
Kurraka birug — from (nut of)
the mouth, kc.
Kui'rarakai — be quick ; haste ye;
i.q. karakai.
Kurrauwai — long ; length.
Ivurrawitai-kan — being clothed
with long raiment ; robed.
Kurrea — carried ; did cany.
Kurri — hrst ; cf. kai'a.
Kurri birug ko — from (out of)
the first ; from the first.
Kurri g — any.
Kurrig tin — from (on account
of) any.
Kurrikog- — the first-born male ;
cf. karakog, the elder brother.
Kurri koricn — not to carry ;
carries not ; bears not.
Kurri-kurri — intensive, the very
first ; the beginning.
Kurri-kurri ka — is the first.
Kurri-kurri kabirug — from the
first ; from the l)eginning.
Kurri-kurri-to — the first, as an
agent.
Kirrilliela — bore ; was carrying.
Kurrilli-gel — the place of carry-
ing; the carrying places, as the
railway.
Kurrilliko — to carry ; to bear.
Kurrin — choked ; suffocated ;
stifled ; drowned.
Kurrin — carries, 1>ears, brings
forth ; cf. karin.
Kurrinanbai — dau"hter-in-hiw.
Kurri-u^\ 11 koa — in order that. ..
might carry.
Kurriwulliko — to carry away :
to bear away.
Kurri yikora — mand., carry not.
Kurrol — perspiration ; sweat.
Kuth:i — jir.n., Chusa.
Kuttawai — satiety ; intoxica-
tion ; drunkenness ; gluttony ;
giddiness.
Kuttawai-ban — one who satiates ;
a glutton ; a drunkard.
Kuttawai-kan — one who is in a
state of satiety.
Kuttawaiko — to be satiated with
food or drink : drunkenness ;
glutton}'.
Kuttawai kolag — to be about to
satiate with food or drink.
Kuttawaiye — one whose manner
is habitually that of being-
satiated ; one habitually a
drunkard or a glutton.
Kuttawan — satiated.
L — pronounced as Eng, ' ell.'
La — is sounded as ixiEnc/. 'large.'
Ladharo — pr.n., Lazarus.
Latin — pr.n., Latin.
Latiniimba — belonging to the
Latin people or language.
Le — rhymes with A'»^. ' lay.'
Lebben — Eng., leaven.
Lebben kiloa — like leaven.
Lebben korien koba — not having
leaven ; unleavened.
Lebi — 2)r.n., Levi.
Lebi-kid — a Levite.
Lebi-ko — Levi, as the agent.
Lejun — Eng., legion.
Lepro — Eng., leprosy.
Lepro-kan — one Iteing in a state
of leprosy ; leprous ; a leper.
Lepro-ta — leprosy, as a sulyect ;
the leprosy.
222
AN AUSTHALIAN LANGUAGE.
Leptoii — G'y'., a small coin : a
mite.
Lepton-ta — a mite ; it is a mite.
Lo — sounds as Eng. 'lo'!
Lot — pr.n., Lot.
Lotiimba — belonging to Lot.
Luka — Gr. pr.n., Luke.
Luka-iimba — beloniring to Luke.
Luthania- -^7-. ». , Lysanias.
]M
Ma — imjj., do (a challenge).
-ma — an auxil. particle denoting
the 2>erf. j}ost aorist, did; done
-ma korien — did not ; not done.
Mabogun — a widow.
Mabogun koba — belonging to a
widow ; a widow's.
Magdala-kalin — [fern.), a woman
of Magdala ; Magdalene.
Mai — sounds as Eng. 'my.'
Maiya — a snake ; a serpent (the
genus).
Makoro-ban — one who fishes \ a
fisherman.
Makoro — fish (the genus).
Makoro — fish, as an agent.
Makoro birug — away from fish ;
a piece of a fish.
Makorrin — from fish, as a cause ;
on account of fish.
Malma — lightning.
Mamuya — a ghost, the spirit of a
departed person ; not the spirit
of a living person, which is ma-
rai ; cf. Marai {not mamuya)
Yirri-yirri ' the Holy Ghost.'
Man — sounds as Eng., 'man.'
-man — as a particle, denotes tlte
■present tense of the verb cau-
sative.
Mankilli-gel — the place of tak-
ing or receiving, as the counter
of a shop ; the bank ; the
treasury.
Mankilli-kan — one who takes in
hand ; a doer ; a .servant.
Mankilliko — to take in hand ; to
do ; to receive.
Mankilli kolag — about to take
• in hand.
Mankillin — now taking ; hold-
ing ; doing ; receiving.
Manki-ye — one who is a habitual
taker ; a thief.
Mankiye-ko — to (againsf:) a thief.
Mankiye nukug-ka — a taker of
women ; a woman stealer ; an
adulterer.
Manki yikora — jirolnh. imp., do
not steal ; do not take.
Man korien — it<'g-, did not take.
MankuUa — have taken in hand ;
did take ; took.
Man pa — privative of effect, un-
able to take ; could not ac-
complish the taking hold of.
Mantala — did take, at some
former period.
Mantan — does take hold of.
Mantillea — imjo., take it.
Mantilliko — to take ; to receive.
M antill in — now recei ving.
Mantillinun wal — will certainly
take; it shall be taken.
Mantoara — that which is taken,
received or held ; the deposit ;
the theft.
Manumbilla — imp., permit to
take ; let take.
Manumbilliko — to allow to take ;
to let take.
Manim — fut., will take.
Manun wal — will certainly take ;
shall take.
Mara — imp., take; do take ; take
hold ; receive.
Marai — spirit; soul of a living be-
ing not a gho.st ; which is ma-
muya.
Marai-kan — one who is a spirit ;
having a spirit.
THE LEXICON.
3Iavai-kan-to — one possessing a
spirit, acting as an agent.
Marai koba — belonging to the
spirit or soul ; of the spirit.
Marai-marai — actively engaged
doing something; busy; busily
employed.
Marai nuriinba — spirits belong-
ing to you ; your spirits; your
souls.
Marai-to — the spirit, as an agent.
IMarai yirri-yirri — the spirit sa-
cred ; the Holy Spirit.
Marallia — imp. , continue to take;
receive.
Maratha — py. n. , Martha.
Mara-uwil — opt., that may
take.
Mara-uwil koa — siihj., in order
that... might take or receive.
Mari — ^jr.w., Mary.
Maro — an indigenous thorn ; a
thorny bush ; a bramble.
Mata-ye — one habitually given
to greediness ; a glutton. Also,
Matayei.
Mataye-koa-katea-kun — lest any
greediness (gluttony, surfeit-
ing) should be.
Mattara — the hand.
Mattarrin — from (on account) of
the hand ; by the hand, as an
instrument.
Mattar6 — the hand, as the agent;
with the hand.
Mattaroa — - with (accompanied
with or through) the hand, as
an instrument.
Matti — dual, acts together; did
together,
-mau — rhymes with Eng. ' cow.'
-ma-u^the causative particle in
the optative and subjunctive
form of the verb.
Meapa — recently cultivated or
planted.
Meapala — aor. def., ])lanted, at
some certain time past.
Meapulla — planted; did plant.
Meapullia — imp., plant ; do
plant.
Meapulliko — -to j)lant, set, cul-
tivate.
Me — sounds as in Eng. ' may.'
Mentha — Led., mint.
Mi — is sounded as Eng. ' me.'
Mikan — presence ; fronting ; in
the face of ; before.
Mikan -ta — the presence.
Mikan tako — in the pi^esence of ;
before.
Mimti — did cause to stay.
Mimulliko— to detain ; to urge
to stay.
Min — sounds as Eng. 'mien.'
Minn — sounds as in Eng. 'mint.'
Mina — Gr., a pound.
Minarig ? — what %
Minarig-bo 1 — what very thing 1
Minarigbo — any selfsame thing ;
anything.
Minarig-ke? — what isl what arel
Minarig tin ? — what from, as a
cause 1 wherefore 1 from wdiat
cause ? why ?
Minbilliko — to crush ; to g)-ind.
Minbinun — will grind.
Minbiniin wal — will certainly
crush or grind ; shall grind.
Minka — imi?., wait.
Minkea — remained; waited.
Minki — any mental or moi-al
feeling ; the feeling of sym-
pathy ; sorrow ; compassion ;
penitence ; patience ; repent-
ance ; pondering.
Minki kabirug — from (out of)
such a feeling.
Minki kakilliela — was sympath-
ising.
Minki kakilliliela — was and con-
tinued to sympathise or feel
penitent, &c.
22-t
AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAGE.
^liiiki kakilliko — to be in a state
of inward feeling ; to sym-
patliise; to sorrow ; to mourn;
to be penitent.
Minki kakulla — sympatliisetl ;
liave sympathised.
jMinki-kan — one who .sympath-
ises or feels sorry and repents.
Minki-kanne— sympatliy ; any
inward feeling ; repentance.
Minki-kanne-ta— sympathy it is ;
the sympathy.
Minki kanan — will sympathise
(sorrow, repent).
Minki katan — sympathises ; re-
pents.
Minki koricn — v/ithout feeling.
Minki-lag — sympathises ; feels
sorrow ; repents.
Minki lliko — to wait (.stay, dwell)
Minkin — waits ; dwells ; dehiys.
Minnan ! — what are actually pre-
sent \ how many % how much %
Minnug ? — what things, as the
object"?
Minnug-ljan ? — what thing now
about (I, wc, you, ic.)
Minnug-banun'2 — what will...
do % what will be done ?
Minnug-baniin-kan ] — vdiat now
will some one do ?
jMinnug-baniui wal ? — wliat Aviil
...certainly do ? what shall be
done ?
Minnugbo or minnambo — some-
thing ; anything ; somewhat.
Minnugbo - minnugbo — many
things; everything ; all things.
Minnug-bulliela 1 — what was go-
ing on 1 what was doing %
Mimiug-bulliko — (an interroga-
tive form of the verb) what
is doing? what is going on %
Minnug-bulli kolag — about to do
sometliing.
Minnug-lndlinun? — w]:at will be
"oinsj; on or doing.
Mipparai — honeycomb.
jNlipparai kabirug — from (out of)
honeycomb.
jNIirka — perliaps ; ''i.([. murka.
Mirka-ta — perhaps it is.
Mirkin — vii'ginity ; purity.
IMirkun — pure ; clean.
Mirobunbiiiia — imper. and per-
missive, permit to continue to
take care of or save.
Mironni — took care of ; did
keep ; did save.
Mii'oma-bunbilla — imp. , permit
to take care of or save.
Miromanim — will take care of ;
will save ; will occupy.
Miroma pa — privntive, did (not)
take cai'e of ; without care of.
Miromulla — imj)., take charge
of, if necessary.
Miromullia — imj)., continue to
take care of ; save and con-
tinue to save.
Miromulli-kan — one who takes
charge of (watches over, saves
from harm) ; a saviour.
Miromulliko — to take charge of;
to take care of; to watch over ;
to keep ; to save from harm.
Mirral — desolate; unproductive ;
barren ; poor.
Mirralla, muruUa — a maid; hav-
ing no husband ; l)arren; poor.
Mirral kaiko — for the miserable.
Mirral-lo— the poor and destitute,
as agents.
Mirral-mirral-kan— one who is in
a miserable state ; poor ; des-
titute.
Mirrigil — ready ; prepared to
remove or to go a journey.
Mirro-mirronni — rubbed and con-
continued to rub.
Mirromulliko — to rub.
Mirug — the shoulder.
Mirug ka — on the shoulder.
Mita — a sore.
THE LEXICON.
225
Mita-mitag — .soi-es ; full of sores.
INIittea — waited ; did wait.
Mitti — small; little; alittleoiie;
tlie youngest child.
j\Iitti — the youngest son.
Mitti-ko — the youngest son, as
the agent.
]Mittiiliela — waited and con-
tinued to wait ; vvas waiting ;
waited ; stayed ; remained.
]\Iittilliko — to wait or remain.
Mittillin — nov/ waiting.
Miya — hindered ; prevented.
Miyelliko — to hinder.
Moiya — cool.
jNLoiya koa — in order to cool ;
that... might cool. [fare.
jMokal — arms ; weapons of war-
IMoney — Eny., money.
Moni-gel— money -puice ; a purse ;
a bank.
Moni-ko — money, as the agent.
Morig — a particle ; a very small
bit ; a mote ; dust.
Moroko — the sky ; the visible
heavens ; heaven.
Moroko kaba — is in heaven.
Moi'oko kabirug — from (away
from) the sky ; from heaven.
]Moroko kako — in or to liea\en.
Moroko koba — belonging to the
sky or heaven.
Moroko lin — from (on account)
of heaven, as a cause ; from
heaven ; of heaven.
Moron — life.
Moron-ba — lives ; is alive.
Moron-ba-katea-kan iin — will be
alive again ; will live again.
Moron kakilliko — to be in a liv-
ing state ; to be alive ; to live.
Moron-kan ta — they (he) who
are alive ; the living.
Moron kanun — v^'ill be alive ;
will live.
Moron katan — is iix the state
of living ; is alive ; lives.
Moron ko — for life.
Moron koa katea-kiin — lest...
should be alive again ; lest
...should be saved alive.
Moron-ta katea-kaniin — life will
be again ; the life is to be
again. [life.
Moron tin — from (on account of)
Moron tin katan — from (o\\ ac-
count of) being alive.
Mot — sounds as Eng. ' mote.'
Mothe — pr.n., Moses.
Mothe-ko — Moses, as the agent.
Mothe-to — Moses, as the agent.
Mothe-to noa — Moses he, as the
agent,
Mothe-unil)a— - belonging to M
Motilliela — did smite on the
breast.
Motilliko — to smite the breast.
Mu — sounds as in Eng. 'moon.'
Mug — rhymes with Enj. 'bung.'
Mugga-ma — did wrap up.
Mugga-ma-toara — that which is
wrapped up or swaddled.
Muggamulliko--to cause to be
covered ; to wrap up in sof*
'ti'-tree bark as clothing ; to
swaddle ; to swathe.
Mukkaka — the noise which a
bird utters; to cackle; to crow.
Mukkakaka tibbinto — the crow
of a cock.
Mukkin — the form of address to
a young female ; maid ■
Mularea-kan — one wounded by
an instrument ; one caused to
become v.^ounded by an in-
strument.
Mulug — close by; nigh at hand.
Midug kakilliela — was and con-
tinned to be close by.
Mulug kakilliko — to be near.
Mum — for its sound cf. *.
Mumbilla — imp., lend ; do lend.
Mumbillan — does lend.
Mumbillein — lent ; did lend.
•226
AN AUSTRALIAN LANG U AGE.
Munibilliko — to loiul.
Munil)inun — will lend.
Mumbitoara — that which is lent;
the loan ; the deht.
Mupai — fast, shut, silent, dumb.
Mupai kakilliko — to be fast, as
the mouth ; to be silent or
dumb ; to hold your peace.
Mupai kakillinun — will be fast
or dumb; will be silent.
Mupai kakulla — was fast ; was
silent ; held their peace.
MxTpai umulliko — to cause to be
silent or dumb.
Mur — sounds as 7nur in Eng.
' murder,' but the r is rougher.
Mur — soundsas^n^. 'moor'; cf*
Marka — see mirka.
Murkun — pure ; clean ; free of
superfluity ; cf. mirkun.
Muron — ointment.
Murra — ran ; did run.
Murra~to run ; to flee away.
Murrabunbilliko — to let run.
Murrabunbilla — imj).., let run.
Murrai — good ; well ; patient ;
in a general sense ; cf. mur-
roi and murrarag.
Murrai-kakillikanne — the thing
which is in a state of well-
being; happy, if in prosperity;
patient, if in adversity.
Murrai-kakilliko — to be good ;
to be well pleased; to be happy.
Murrakin — a young female ;
maiden ; virgin ; cf. mukkin.
Murrakin-to — a young female, as
the agent.
Murrapatoara — that which is run
out ; anything numbered.
Murrapullikanne — the taxation ;
the thing that counts or num-
bers.
Murrapulliko — to run out ; to
number ; to tax each one.
Murrarag — good; right; just;
proper.
Murra-murrarag — intfns., very
good ; excellent.
Murrarag kakilli-kan — one who
is and continues to be in a good
state ; one who is righteous ;
a righteous one.
Murrarag kakillikanne — any-
thingthat is good or righteous ;
righteousness.
Murrarag kakilliko — to be in a
good state ; to be well off or
happy.
Murrai-ag koiyelliela — worship-
ped.
Murrarag koiyelliko — tobegood,
in manner ; to worship.
Murra r;\g-tai — the good, indefi-
nitely ; the just ; the righteous.
Murrarag-ta — a good thing.
Murrarog-tara — good things.
Murrarag wiyelliela — was say-
ing good; was praising.
Murrarag wiyelliko — to speak
good ; to praise.
Murrarig — within ; into ; inside.
Murriug — forward ; onward.
Murriug kolag — about to go for-
ward.
Murrin — the body ; cf mavai
— the soul ; the spirit.
Murrinauwai — a floating vessel ;
canoe ; boat ; ship ; the ark.
Murrin kiloa — like a body.
Murrin ko — for the body.
Murrin tin — from (on account
of) the body, as an instru-
mental cause.
Murrin-murrin — frequent ; very
often ; often-times.
Murrog-kai — a sort of wild dog,
like a fox.
Murroi — peaceful ; at his ease ;
in peace ; i.q. murrai ; cf.
also murrarag.
Miirrulliko — to run away ; to
flee.
Murrug — within ; in ; locally.
THE LEXICOX.
227
Murrug ka — is within; is inside.
MuiTug ka temple la — is inside
or within the temple.
Murrug-ka-ma — pressed upon.
Murrug-kamulliko — to cause to
let be overcome, as water runs
within and overcomes ; to let
be choked or drowned.
Murrug-ka-ma — was caused to
let be overcome or smothered ;
was choked.
Murrug kolag — about to £;o in.
Muta-mut;in — powder ; dust.
Mutard — E)ig., mustard.
Mutug — a crumb; a small [)iece;
a bit ; a mote.
Note. — Tliis Lexicon is incoiaiylete ; the author was inorking
on it at the time of his death. — Ed.
PART lY.
THE APPENDIX.
APPENDIX
(A.)
A SHORT
GRAMMAPt AND VOCABULARY
OP THE
DIALECT SPOKEN BY THE MINYUG PEOPLE,
on the north-east coast of New South Wales.
(By the Rev. H. Livingstone, Wimmera, Victoria.*)
I. THE GRAMMAR.
The Miny ug dialect is spoken at Byron Bay and on the Bruns-
wick River. The natives on the Richmond River have a sister
dialect called the Nyug ; those on the Tweed call their own
Q-ando or Grandowal, but the Mi nyug they call G-endo. The
words minyug and nyug mean 'what"? or 'something,' for
they are used either interrogatively or assertively. Similarly, the
words gando and gendo mean 'who'? or 'somebody.' These
three dialects are so closely related that they may be regarded as
one language ; it is understood from the Clarence River in New
South Wales northward to the Logan in Queensland. For this
language the aborigines have no general name.
It is well known that the Australian dialects are agglutinative,
everything in the nature of inflection being obtained by suffixes.
To this, the Minyug is no exception ; so that, if I give an account
of its suffixes, that is nearly equivalent to giving an exposition of
its grammar. It will, therefore, be convenient to take, first, such
suffixes as are used with the noun and its equivalents, and, after-
wards, those that may be regarded as verbal suffixes. The words
that take what may be called the noun-suffixes are (1) Nouns,
(2) Adjectives, and (3) Pronouns.
NOUNS and ADJECTIVES.
As the same general principles apply to both nouns and adjec-
tives, these may be examined together as to (1) Classification,
(2) Number, (3) Gender, (4) Suffixes.
* Written for this volume at my request. — Ed.
4 an austkalian language.
1. Classification.
Nouns in Minyug may be arranged tlius : —
Life-nouns.
(1.) Persons (y.'irtsc.) ; all proper and common names of males.
(2.) Persons {/em.) ; all proper and common names of females.
(3.) Animals ; all otlier living creatures.
Non-life nouns.
(1.) Names of things. (2.) Names of places.
I divide them into life-nouns or nouns denoting living beings,
and no7i-li/e notuis or names of things and places, because the
former often join the suffixes to lengthened forms of the nouns,
while the non-life nouns have the suttixes attached to the simple
nominative form. Again, subordinate divisions of both of these
classes is necessary, because the adjectives and pronouns often vary
in form according as they are used to qualify names of human
beings, or animals, or thing's.
A few examples will make this plainer. If a man who speaks
Minyug is asked Avhat is the native word for 'big' or 'large,' he
replies, kumai. This kumai is the plain or vocabulary form,
which may be used on all occasions to qualify any kind of word.
But if a native is speaking of a 'large spear,' he will usually say
kuminna cuan. Either kumai or kuminna will suit, but the
longer form is more common; kuminna is used only to qualify
such things as spears, canoes, and logs, and never to qualify persons
and places. If a native is speaking of a ' big man,' Avhile he
might say kumai paigal, the usual form is kumai -bin, which
is then a noun ; but since all nouns can also be used as adjectives, the
longer form kumai-bin paigal is also correct. To express, in
Minyug, 'that boy is big,' we might say either kully kumai-
bin cub bo, or cubbo kumai. The feminine form of kumai
is kumai-na-gun, which is only the suffix -g\in added to the
form in -na ; like kumai-bin, this is either a noun, when it
means ' a big woman,' or an adjective used to qualify a feminine
noun. The suffix -gun is sometimes added to the plain form ; as,
mobi, 'blind,' mobi-gun, fein. ; sometimes to the masculine
form ; as, balig-gal, 'new,' 'young,' ball g-gal -gun, feni. ; and
sometimes to the form in -na ; as, kumai-na-gun. Some adjec-
tives have only two forms, while others have three, four, and even
five. In some cases diffigrent words are used, instead of different
forms of the same word. The principal suffixes used for the mas-
culine are, -bin, -gin, -jara, -rim, -ri, -li, -gari, -gal. The
table given below, for ordinary adjectives, adjective pronouns,
and numerals, illustrates these uses. Forms rarely used have a f
after them.
THE MIXYUNG DIALECT.
3 «
*
7 to
C cJ
2:5
•^ c § • s 2 ? 2
7 SD
• "i " d 'rt 7 Ec-^ ^ i
d v
S ce
''^'■S
1 -ic ^ ^ .S ;b]oT -"^ -£
5 -^
? J
il
\4
"3
• rt
rt
C.0
to 3
•tb J '^
C o
P "i^ . 'o
'>i-§
-J '-^ -rS — c:
■^•p-ad-s^^-d-a^?!
5
^:;=po 2^ =''cs ^^
j^
"3 '3
1
^cqMw^^MwMS
\4
S W
^fq
o
fa
^
r- -^
! forn
3 llOU
=3 5:0 So - i P ^" ^ :=!
tJO
2f g
"I.I
■5^3
•:i 7 ;5 rt ^ S tfc if sf^
rt
5 .3
7 "7^
ik
-2 '-'
II
3 s
3
'S '3
cS S
fe
M
^W
c
n
a
s . . -i^ 'i^
c3
."
^ s
• "^ '3 S --^ 'cT' ~ ^
•3
^'^^-l
^'3
to
IS
M ;q ^ p; ;^ ^ pq t:^ S ^
w
1 3
-ti
"c
^
• ^
?~l
rt
,J2
to
^ Ph • bb
F^
-fj
03
• -1^ '^-•
.^
-• cS - . 2
9 , c >> s
HH
P:^o5r;:jP73so3 ?
^3
^3 - '3 J
J '^ '-'
t^pt^p;>^MmM^M f£
M
g W fe
.>^M
6 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Tlie adjective dukkai, 'dead,' takes numerous forms; thus : —
2. dukkai, dukkai-ljiuf; 3. touara-gun, dukkai-gunf, dukkai-bin-
gunf, dukkai-gun-binf; 4. dukkai, dukkai-binf.
2. Number.
Nouns and adjectives do not change tlieir form to denote number.
The word paigal may mean one 'man,' or any number of ' men.'
With regard to the pronouns, some of them are singular, some
dual, some plural, and some of them indefinite so far as number is
concerned. The number of a noun is generally known by the iise
in the same sentence, or in the context, of a singulai', dual, or
plural pronoun, or by the scope of the sentence or other surround-
ing circumstances.
3. Gender,
There ai'e two ways by which the feminine is distinguished from
the masculine — either by a difterent word or by adding the ter-
mination -gun, of which the ?f is always short ; as : —
Masculine. Ftmiuinc
Mobi, 'a blind man.' Mobi-gun, ' a blind woman.'
Y^rubilgin, 'a male singer.' Yerubilgin-gun, 'a female singer.'
Kicom, 'old man.' Merrug, ' old woman.'
Cubbo, 'boy.' Yagari, 'girl.'
Koroman, male 'kangaroo.' Imarra, female 'kangaroo.'
riWNOUA'S.
These are : — (1) Personal pronouns, (2) Demonstrative.s, (3)
Indefinite pronouns, (4) Numerals, and 5) Interrogatives.
Personal jn'onoicns.
Singular. Gai, 'I.' We, 'thou.' Nyuly, 'he'; nyan, '.she.'
Plural. Grully, ' we.' Buly, ' you.' (?annaby, 'they.'
The Minyug has no simple dual, although there are compound
terms and phrases denoting the dual number; such as, gulliwe,
gullibula, 'we two'; we gerrig, 'you two,' 'you and another.'
The personal forms of bula are sometimes used as dual pro-
nouns; as, bulaily, 'they two,' ?»asc., and buiaili-gun, 'they
two, /em. ; and even such phrases as w6 gerrig bulaily and we
gerrig bulaili-gun, ' you two,' are used.
Demonstratives.
Besides these, there is a peculiar class of words, which may be
called demonstratives. When used as predicates, they have the
general meaning of 'here,' ' there,' or 'yonder.' They are often
used as demonstrative adjectives, and then mean this,' ' that
THE MINYUNG DIALECT.
'these,' 'those.' A.s such, they usually agree iii fonn with the nouns
which they qualify, that is, they take similar suffixes. Often,
however, the noun is omitted, and then they become true personal
jironouns, retaining whatever suffix they would have if the noun
were used. For examjile, the Avord kully, used as a predicate,
means 'here'; as, paigal kully, 'a man is here'; but paigal kully
yilyul means 'this man is sick'; and, omitting paigal, kully
yilyul means 'he is .sick'; kully thus means 'here'; 'this'; 'the';
'he here'; 'she here'; and 'it here.'
Such words are real demonstratives, and must be carefully dis
distinguished from ordinary adverbs of place ; for, often an adverb
of place i.s, as it were, promoted to the rank of a demonstrative,
and in this way it may come to take the place of a personal pro-
noun. This may account for the fact that the third personal
pronouns are so numerous, and have little or no etymological con-
nection in Australian dialects. These demonstratives are kully,
mully, killy, kunde, kanyo, miin, kam, kaka, ka, and kaba.
As these are sometimes doubled or reduplicated and have some other
variations in form, the following scheme may be convenient : —
Singular. PlnraL
' I.— Kully, ku-kully, 'this'; 'the';
'he (she, it) here '; 'this here.'
II. — Kulla-na-gun, ' this '; ' she here.'
III. — Konno, ko-konno, ' this '; 'it here,
IV. — Kully, kii-kully ; kiikai ;
kuUai, ku-kullai ; 'here.'
I. — Mully nui-mully, 'that'; 'the';
' he (she, it) there.'
II. — Mulla-na-gun, 'that'; ' she there.'
III.— Monno, ' it there.'
IV. — Mully, mu-mully ;
mullai, mu-mullai ; 'there.'
I. — Killy, ki-killy, 'yon'; 'he';
' he (she, it) yonder.'
II. — Killa-na-gun, 'yon'; 'she yonder.'
Ill— Kundy, ' it there '; 'it.'
Kanyo, ka-kanyo, 'this'; 'it near.'
IV. — Kanyo, ka-kanyo, 'here.'
I. is the common masculine form used as an adjective or pro-
noun. II. is the feminine form so used. III. is the neuter form
so used. IV. is used as a predicate for masculine, feminine, and
neuter.
Demonstratives used either as singular or plural are — ka, 'it ';
2jhi., 'they in that place there'; kaba, 'it'; phr., 'they there.'
I
Munyo ;
sometimes
mim.
KAmo, ka-kdmo :
sometimes
kcim.
Kaka,
8 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Tlie Nyug dialect, instead of kully and mully, has mugga
and kugga; thus: —
Sivf/i'Iar. Plural.
Masculine. Feminine.
Mugga. Muggun. Maka.
Kugga. Kuggun. Kaka.
Kaka is thus a recent addition to the Minyug dialect. It is at
}ii-esent almost exckisively used instead of cannaby. Maka is
sometimes used for mully, but always as a singular. Kugga is
used in the sense of ' he out there.' So it is evident that ka is the
root form of all the demonstratives beginning with k, and ma
of those beginning with in. Most of the plural demonstratives
are formed from ka and ma; thus, k am a consists of ka + ma,
maka of ma + ka, and kaka of ka + ka; yet there are many
doubled forms that are singular. Ma, however, is used, but not as
a demonstrative. Ka, ma, ly, ba, and nyo are all root-forms.
Indefinite pronouns.
There are four indefinite pronouns: — Kurralbo, 'all'; kaiby,
' another'; undiiru, unduru-gun, unduru-na, 'some'; and ger-
rig, 'both'; to these maybe added the adjective kumai, which is
sometimes used in the sense of 'mvich' or 'many.'
Kurralbo has but one form, viz., kurral, but it is never used
without the addition of the ornamental particles, -bo or -jug. The
four forms of kaiby have been given already. Gerrig has but
one form.
Kimierals.
Strictly speaking, the language has only two words, yaburu and
bula, that can be called numerals. Yet, by doubling and repeat-
ing these, counting can be carried on to a limited extent ; as,
Yaburu, ' one.' Bula-bula, ' four.'
Bula, 'two.' Bula-bulai-yaburu, 'five.'
Bulai-yaburu, ' three.' Bula-bula-bula, ' six '; (to.
Yaburugin, and yaburu-gin-gun are sometimes used for the
singular personal pronouns, and bulaily and bulaili-gun for the
dual. Other uses of these numerals maybe seen in — yaburugin
yiinbully, 'go alone' (said to a male) ; yaburugingun yun-
bully, ' go alone ' (said to a female) ; yaburu-min-ba, 'at once,'
or 'with one blow,' 'with one act'; bula-nden. 'halves'; bula-n-
d a i, b u 1 a-n d a i-g u n, ' twins. '
Intcrrogatives.
In Minyug, the diflerence between an interrogative sentence
and an assertive one consists, not in any diflferent arrangement
of the words, but simply in the tone of the voice. Therefore the
THE MINYUNG DIxVLECT. 9
words which we call interrogatives liave also assertive meanings.
For example, the expression gen ku ggallen, taken as an assertive,
means ' somebody calling,' but, as an interrogation, ' who is call-
ing "? thus, gen represents 'who'? or 'somebody'; it is used like
the life-nouns and personal pronouns. In the same way, minya,
minyug, minyugbo, mean 'what'? or 'something.' There is also
inji, winjif, which means 'where'? or 'somewhere.' Another
word of the same kind is yiHy, 'in what place'? and 'in some
place.' Such words are the connecting links between the nouns
and the verbs.
4 (a). Suffixes to Kouxs.
The suffixes used w4th nouns are the following : —
1. -0.
This is usually said to be the sign of the agent-nominative case,
but it also denotes an instrumental case; e.ff., buman gaio wanyo
murrunduggo, ' I will beat you vnth-a-clab.' Here the words
for /and for the c^h^ both have this suffix. Yogum gai yuggan
bumbumbo, 'I cannot go ivitli-swollen-fect.' Here the word,
'■swollen feet^ has this form.
2. -nye, -ne, -e, -ge.
This may be called the accusative suffix. It usually follows the
use of such transitive verbs as bu ma, 'beat'; n a, 'see'; igga, 'bite';
wia, 'give to'; bur a, 'take out.' As a genei'al rule, only life-
nouns and personal pronouns take this suffix. Non-life nouns
retain their plain nominative form. Since adjectives and adjective
pronouns agree in form with the nouns they qualify, it follows
that they have a twofold declension. The accusative form of
'that man' is mullanye paigannye; of ' that tomahawk,' the
accusative is mully bundan.
Examples of its use are: — Mullaio gunye yilyulman, 'he
will make me sick.' Wanye yilyulman mullaio, 'he will make
thee sick.' Graio mullanye yilyulman, ' I will make him sick.'
Sometimes either the form in -o or in -nye is omitted.
This is used to denote the genitives; as, paiganna koggara, 'a
man's head'; taicumma jennug, 'a boy'sfoot.' This form in -na
belongs only to life-nouns and words connected with them. It is
the same that is used with adjectives qualifying things ; so that
unduruna cuan may mean either 'some spear' or 'somebody's
spear,' There are also other forms to denote possession. When
followed by this case, the interrogative minyug takes the sense
of 'how many'? as, minyugbo kittomma nogum ? 'how many
dogs has the old man '?
10 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
4. -go, -go-by, -gai.
The meaning of these is 'to, of, for.' The by maybe taken as
a variation of bo, and, like bo, very little more than an ornament
of speech. Go is suffixed to all kinds of nouns to denote 'to,' -go-
by and sometimes -go to non-life nouns, in the sense of 'for,' and
gai to life-nouns, in the same sense.
Examples of its use are: — Yilly cubbulgun killagoby kun-
dalgob}^, 'where is the paddle of that canoe "? Gaio kindan
junag bundango, 'I will make a handle for the tomahawk.'
Gaio cuan kinan cubbogai biaggai gerriggai, ' I will make
.spears for both the boy and the father.'
5. -gal, -jil, -gal-lo, -na-gal, -na jil.
The suffixes -go and -gal correspond to one another in the
sense of 'to' and 'from." Inji-go we means 'where are you going
to'? inji-gal we is ' where are you coming from'? gaikamgal,
'I come from there.' Jil is a variant-form seldom used. The
life-nouns add -gal or -jil to the form in -na; as, paiganna-gal,
'from the man.' Sometimes -gal takes the form gal-lo, and then
has the meaning, of 'in coming' or 'when coming,' This is appar-
ently the agent-nominative added to a strengthened form in -gal.
6. -ba.
Ba is simply a locative form. Probably there is some connec-
tion between it and -bo and -by. which may be regarded as
little more than ornaments. It is sometimes found as a termina-
tion to names of places. Its principal use as a noun-suffix is to
strengthen the simple forms of life-nouns, and thus form a new
base for the addition of the suffixes.
7. -ma, -bai-ma.
Ma is rarely used as a noun-suffix, l)ut, when so used, it has the
meaning of 'in'; e.g., Avalo dulbagga ballunma, 'you jump
in the river '; the longer form is used with life-nouns ; as, warre
paigal-baima konno, ' carry this with the man.'
8. -a, -bai-a.
This takes the meaning of 'from,' 'out of.' Examples of its use : —
bura junag bundanda, ' pull the handle out of the tomahawk ';
bura monno cuan pagalbaia, ' pull that spear out of the man.'
It often denotes possession ; as, gaiabaia cuan, ' I have a spear.'
9. -e, -ai, -ji, -bai
This is the converse of the particle -a ; it means 'into.' Ji is
used with nouns ending in -in ; as, umbin -ji, ' in the house.' Ba-i
has the i added to the strengthening suffix (ja ; as, pagalbai, ' in
the man.'
THE MINYUXG DIALECT. 11
10. -no, -ba-no.
This is used after certain verbs of motion; as, koroally we
bon-no, 'go round the camp'; but koroally paigal-bano, 'go
round the man.' It is also used in such sentences as kagga
kug ballunno, ' carry water from the river.' Its meaning may
be given as ' from,' ' around,' ' apart,' and the like.
11. -urrugan.
This means 'with.' It may be regarded as a kind of possessive;
e.g.^ yilly nogiim -urrugan paigal may be translated, 'where
is the dog's master '? or ' where is the man with the dog '? There
is a phrase walugara, 'you also,' which has some connection with
this ; the g is intrusive between vowels to prevent hiatus.
12. -jiim.
J um means 'without.' Yilly nogum jiim paigal? 'where
is the dog without a master "? This is one of the verbal suffixes.
13. -gerry.
The peculiarity of this suffix is that, whilst it follows the rules
of the noun-suffixes, it has a verbal meaning. For instance,
kwag-gerry gai, ' I wish it would rain'; nyan minyug-gerry
kug, 'she wants some water'; gai killa-gerry umbin-gerry,
' I would like to have that house'; yogum gai mulla-gerry
culgun-gerry, 'I do not like that woman.'
Many of these are mex'ely additions to the simple nominative
case, and are not used for inflection. To these may be added the
suffix -bil, which is used to turn some nouns into adjectives ; as,
woram, 'sleep,' woram-bil, 'sleepy.' All terms for relatives are
usually strengthened by -jara and -jar-gun; e.g.^
,,. ' ,^ .. y a 'male cousin.' ^j. ■, ^9 P. >a 'female cousin.'
Yirabug-jara j Yirabug-jar-gun J
Adjectives generally agree in termination with the nouns they
qualify ; but it should be noticed they do not follow any hard and
fast rule. The suffix may be dropped from the adjective ; more
frequently it is dropped from the noun and retained with the
adjective ; and rarely, when the sentence can be understood with-
out it, it is dropped from them both. On the other hand, this
rule is carried out to an extent that surprises us. For instance,
nubug and nu bug-gun mean 'husband' and 'wife,' but the
longer form of nubug-gun isnubug-jar-gun. Now, Kibbinbaia
means ' Kibbin has,' and to say ' Kibbin has a wife,' would
usually be Kibbinbaiagun nubugjargun. Again, bura jin
gaiabaia mia would mean 'take the speck out of my eye';
where gaiabaia and mia agree in termination, yet mia has the
shorter non-life form and gaiabaia has the longer life form.
12 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Suffixes as Verbal Interrorjatives.
The intorrogatives seem to be the connecting link between the
nouns and the verbs. This avisos from the fact that they take
both the noun and the verbal suiiixes. For instance, while inji
*when'? takes, at times, the forms inji-go and inji-gal, it also
becomes inji-gun and inji-gun-ga, and these last terminations
are verbal suffixes. The word minyug 'what'? may also take
such forms as these: — minyugallela? 'what are you doing'?
minyngen? 'what is the matter'? minyugoro? ' what is done ' ?
In form, there is really no distinction between intciTogative and
assertive sentences ; hence any interrogative may have also an
assertive meaning; minyugallela gai, therefore, may mean 'I
am doing something.' In this dialect, there is a grammatical
distijiction between the imperative, the affirmative, and the nega-
tive forms of speech ; but all these forms may be made interrogative
by the tone of the voice.
S uffix-jjostjwsitions used with Xoitns and Pronouns.
It may be as well to ask, at this stage, if there are any pre-
positions in Minyug. There is a large number of words denoting
place ; most of them are sim})le adverbs, and some of them demon-
stratives, and some occasionally have such a relationship to the
noun that they can only be regarded as fulfilling the office of
})repositions. They are not always placed before the noun, the
Minyug having the greatest freedom with respect to the collo-
cation of words. The word kam, which is among the demon-
stratives, may also be regarded at times as a preposition. When
a native says walokamkubbal kyua, which is, literally, 'you
to scrub go,' Avhy should not kam be called a preposition? In
the same way, kagga kubbal means 'out to the scrub.'
There are a fcAv Avords of this kind that have a limited inflec-
tion ; e.g., balli or ballia means 'under'; juy, jua, junno are
'down,' 'into'; bundagal, bundagally, bundagalla, 'near.' Of
these, the particular form used is that which agrees in termination
with the noun qualified.
Every word in Minyug ends either with a vowel or a liquid,
and there are certain euphonic rules to be followed in connecting
the suffixes with each kind of ending. In the following tables
examples will be given of each kind. In Table I., all the inflecting
suffixes will be joined to mully. In Table II. will be found the
singular personal pronouns, which contain some irregularities,
and a life-noun ending in I, m, n, ng, ra, or a. It will, howevei",
be unnecessary to give in full the declension of these.
In Table III., four non-life nouns are chosen, ending in -/, -n,
-in, and -?•«, and the terminations given are those numbered 1, 8, 9,
From these examples, all other forms can be understood.
THE MINYUXG DIALECT.
13
§ ?
-15 's '3
o
tiD
to
=; 3 P 3 S3
o EI.
t-,
:;±^ =0
I 2
I
^
C!
^
c3
U2
o
v2
d
6
1
•:3
c3
C3
3
r— «
^
rt
^
r^
c3
(ri
ci
."t^
=i
S
13
13
r-
s
;i
S
g
S
^
g
<^ <1 O
f^ pR
t>
c;
f^
hH
rH
p-
f-*
!>
-l-= rH j; Ti r^
^ t^
O M
o
!25
M^
c3
••—3
e
ti3
rt
:3
c3
<{
d
P
r- C ^
O
£ a
o ^•-
fcC .03
c3
S c3
d ^'2
cS c3 rS cS Te J-
pq ffl pq pq pq t^
r-l C-1 CO
14
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
I
o o
\ji. ^
o o o
tin ^
^ --
^ -S
e3
rt O a; S "S
c3 -rt -rt .03 '(S
^ ^ ^ ^ ^
•:j -jj -u -u su
W pq CQ P2. (5
pq
•S e '^
O QJ c3
IS 3 13
^ .:= -O
W '^ f5 i5
^ c5 4
Ui Ui
,a ^ ;r; 5 s .3 .S
£ -^ I:: !r^ '^ ).o io
D -^ = g ;: S g
^ g
§ "
^ H
5^
!2;
bo
^ ^ ^
-d :=! c
!z;
Cl,
o
<
M ."
c3 o3 rt c3 rt
't:; r3 '^ "^ '^
rf s s rt rf
:=i :=! 3 s :=i
pqpqpqpqpq
_J-
O
c5
s
•TJ
8
• cJ 'CS • j3 '03 -c^
ti
^
r3-o ri-^^
^
«*
tii
-
3 5 5 5 3
q ^ ^
THE MINYUNG DIALECT. 15
VERBS.
4 (h). Suffixes to Verbs.
Iinperatire and Affirmative Forms.
The imperative, in the Miiiyug dialect, is the simplest form of
the verb ; it will therefore be quoted as the stem of the verb. In
true verbs, it ends in -a or -e ; as, kulga, 'cut,' bugge, ' fall.' If
the -a or -e is cut off, there remains the root of the verb, and to it
the verbal suffixes are attached. These are very numerous, and
appear, at first sight, to be very complicated ; but the whole may
be simplified by taking them in the following order : — (1) Final
suffixes; (2) Internal strengthening particles or letters; and (3)
Separable demonstrative particles. The usual final suffixes are : —
1. -a, -e, used in giving a command or in expressing a wish.
2. -ala, -ela, denoting present action.
3. -an, denoting future action.
4. -anne, -inne, -unne, denoting unfinished past action.
5. -oro, denoting finished action.
6. -en, the historical past tense ; often an aorist participle.
7. -inna, used, but rarely, as a participle.
8. -ia7i, past time ; with passive sense, when required.
9. -ia, -e, -aia, when used with a leading verb, has a future
meaning, but it is generally the infinitive or noun form to express
verbal action.
10. -ai, may be called the subjunctive, but the verb does not
take this form in all positions where we might expect a sub-
junctive to be used.
11. -enden, -unden, -anden, is probably derived from kinda,
the sixth form of which is kinden. It adds the idea of ' made '
or ' did ' to the root idea of the verb. It is sometimes equivalent
to the passive, and at times it becomes the foundation of another
verb, so that there are such forms -endene, -endeloro, &c. It some-
times takes, between it and the root, the strengthening particles
of the next paragraph.
12. The internal strengthening particles ai'e (1) le, I, r, re, (2)
g, ng-g, ing-g, and (3) h. These are inserted between the root and
and the final suffix, and are sometimes compounded together, so
that there are such form as galle and halle. These particles add
but little to the meaning. It may be that le or re gives a sense
of continuance to the action, so that while ala is a simple present,
while alela may be a progressive present. This, however, is very
doubtful. In fact, it may be stated, once for all, that while there
is an abundance of forms, the aborigines do not seem to make
very exact distinctions in meaning between one form and another.
16
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE,
If it is doslrecl to give emphasis to the idea that the action is con-
tiuuative, a separate word is used to denote this. Thus alen,
which is the strengthened form of en, is purely a participle with-
out distinction of time. Tlie forms in r, re are simple variations of
U, find seldom used. The foi'ms in (j, ng-(j, are from ga, 'to go on,'
and those in h from ])a, ' to make,' ' cause to be.' The following
table will show the various possible forms in which a verb may
be found. The separaljle demonstrative particles inserted in the
table are: — he, ho\, yan, de,ji. Bo and be seem to add nothing
to the meaning ; yaii means 'there'; dt or ji means ' to ' or 'at.'
yVi? Saffixes as attached to the root-form of Verbs.
To the forms in italics, the spparahh demonstrative particles are added.
*1.
—Smiplc
-a, -e, -ade.
> r —
-ale
-ga.
npoiuid.
-gale.
-balle.
-ele.
-gga.
-ggale.
-erraf.
2.
-ala.
-alela.
-gala.
-galela.
-bulela.
-el a.
-elela.
-erralaf.
-g^ala.
-ggalela.
3.
-an.
-Ian.
-gan.
-anbe.
-ranf.
-ggan.
-anji.
4.
-anne.
-aliime.
-ga-uie.
-galinne.
-bulenne.
-inne.
-gcaane.
-ggalinne.
-unne.
5.
-oro.
-aloro.
-eloro.
-alorohy.
-galoro.
-ggalore.
-galorohy.
6.
-en.
-alien.
-gen.
-gallen.
-bulen.
-enynn.
-arenf.
-ggen.
-ggallen.
-bfdenji.
-allenjL
-yertji
-gaUeriji.
-hidenyun.
7. -inna ; 8. -ian ; 9. -ia, -aia, -e ; compound, -alia ; 10. -ai ;
compound, -bai ; 11. -enden ; compound, -genden, -ggenden ; -bun-
den.
■*Thc numbers indicate the Moods and Tenses ; thus, 1 is the Imperative
Mood; 2, T/te Present Tense; 3, Tlie Future Tense ; 4, T lie Past {unjimshed) ;
5, The Past {Jinished) ; 6, A Participle form {ojh-n pusf) ; 7, A Participle
form [rjeneraUy iiresent) ; 8, A Participle form {ojh-n ^vrtssh-e) ; 9, A Noun
form of Verbal action {tlie infiniUve) ; 10, Tlie Suhjunctive, i.e., the form,
I'jfiich thei'erb takes u-hen componnded tcifh Auxiliary Verbs ; 11, ^ Participle
form (gem rail If passive.) 2, 3, 4, and 5 are of the Indicative Mood.
Besides these, there are some other compound verbal suffixes
Avhich are formed from inda and ma, and from b and ha,, as shown
below. These are sometimes attached, not to the simple stem-form
of the verb, but to specially lengthened forms.
THE .MIXVU>rG DIALECT. 17
Kinda, ' make.'
This, as a principal verb, has all the forms of the simple suffixes
except Xo. 1 1, and many of the compound ones ; as, kinda-bulela,
kinda-galoroby, itc. It sometimes takes the form, though rarely,
of kigge, and, as such, enters into composition with other verbs ;
but the usual method of compounding it with verbs is to omit the
1c, and use only the terminations ; as, bo-ale, ' be great,' bo-indale,
'be made great.' In the Minyug dialect, when two words are
brought together, it is common for the second to lose its initial
consonant. Kinda itself is a derivative from da, which is in use
to turn nouns and adjectives into verbs; as, umbin, ' a house,'
umbin-da, ' make a house.'
Ba, 'cause to be.'
Ba, as a locative, is also a noun-suffix, but, like da, it helps to
convert other words into verbs ; as, kirriba, ' awake.' As already
noticed, it enters into comjiosition with verbs, lengthening their
forms, at times, without adding to or altering their meaning. As
part of a principal verb, it generally has the meaning of ' cause to
be'; as, nyarry, 'a name,' nyarri-ba, 'give a name' or 'cause to
have a name.' It is also attached to the past tense, and is often
used whena secondary verb isina sentence ; e.g., monno webaro
kunjillinneban nobo, 'that lire will be lighted' (made to burn)
to-morrow.'
Ma, 'make,' 'cause to be there,' 'cause' generally.
This is one of the most important vei-bal suffixes in the language.
As a noun-siiffix, it has the sense of 'in,' and many of its derivative
words have the idea of ' rest in a place,' and not of causation.
Maia means 'in a place,' while haia means 'go to a place.' Wai-
maia means 'it is above'; waikaia, 'go above.' It is evident
that ma originally meant both ' there ' and ' cause to be ' generally.
But, after all, there is nothing strange in this. Even now, with
all the variation of forms, a good deal of the meaning of a speaker
depends upon the tone of the voice or the gesture of the hand.
We can conceive of a demonstrative as meaning (1) 'there,' (2) 'go
there,' (3) 'be there,' (4) 'cause to he there,' according to the tone of
voice and the subject of conversation. Any adjective can take this
.■suffix; as, yilyul, 'sick,' yilyiil-ma, 'caiise to be sick'; dukkai,
'dead,' dukai-ma, 'to kill.' It enters into composition with adverbs
of place as well ; as, with wai, 'above,' and kully, kundy, q.v., it
gives waikalkullima, ' put crosswise,' waikxmdima, 'put on.'
It sometimes follows adjectives ; as, bunyarra-ma yerrubil,
'make a good song'; and sometimes pronouns; as, kaibi-ma
junag, 'make another handle.' With verbs, it is sometimes
attached to the imperative form ; as, kory, 'run,' kori-ma, 'make
h
18 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
to run'; sometimes it takes the particle liiu l^etween it and the
root form or the imperative form ; as, dugbin-ma, 'cause to lie
down.' Very often it is attached to a form in -illi ; as, dug-
gilli-ma, 'make to cry,' minjilli-ma, ' make to laugh.' Some-
times it is attached to two words ; as, bunyarra-ma warrim-ma,
' to make well by doctoring,' and each of these can take all the
forms in agreement; as, (yk
lUSiyERSITTj
20 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
G. Manner.
There is a class of Avords that fulfil the -luty of qualifying
action as adverbs of manner, but they have the forms of verbs ;
so that they may be called qualifying verbs. They agree in final
termination with the verbs they qualify. Karaia or karoe is
'to do anything in a great manner.' In the participal form it is
used thus : — gibbuni karandallen, ' full moon '; karandallen
kwog, 'heavy rain'; karandallen wibara, 'the fire is hot';
karaggen wvirrig, 'very cold.' With verbs it is used in a
different form ; as, wemully karaielly, 'speak loudly.'
Gumoe is 'in a small way'; as, gumundallen gibbiim, 'little
moon'; wemi;lly gumoelly, 'speak gently.' Magoe means 'to
continue'; as, magoale wemully, 'continue speaking.' Boe is
'to speak by oneself; as, boelly wemully, 'speak by yourself,'
or ' speak alone.' Others are, — karaharai-elly dugga, ' cry very
loudly '; nunnoelly dugga, 'cry very gently '; nugummanna
dugga, 'cry quickly'; niganna dugga ' stop crying.'
7. Affections of the mind.
'Doubt' is exjiressed by wunye, which sometimes takes the
form of bunye. Gaio wanye human, nobo wunye, 'I will
beat you, perhaps to-morrow.' 'Hope' is expressed by jim ; as,
mullaijun kulgai wibara, 'it is hoped that he will cut wood.'
'Fear' is expressed by the word twin; as, gaio twiggalla we bar a
kulgai, 'I am afraid to cut wood.' 'Pity' and 'sympathy' arc
often expressed by idioms meaning literally, ' smelling a bad or a
good smell'; e.g., gai mullagai kunlunny bogon, 'I for him
smell a bad smell,' or ' I pity him.'
8. The tose o/bunyarra.
Bunyarra, 'good,' means not only 'good,' but anything 'gi'eat.'
It sometimes means ' very '; as bunyarra jug, ' veiy bad.'
9. The use of karahan.
Reciprocal action is expx-essed by karaban; e.g., gully kara-
ban bum ma lie, 'Jet us paint one another.'
10. Comjyarison.
Gai koren karaialen, wunnanden wanye, ' I run fast, you
slowly'; that is, 'I am faster than 3'ou '; gai wanye gulug
paigal, 'I am a man before you '; that is, ' I am older than you.
The pronoun (wanye or any other) is always in the accusative.
11. Government of Verbs.
Sometimes the infiniti\e foi-m in -ia, and sometimes the form in
-hai or -ai, which may be calletl the subjunctive, is used to show
dependence on another verb ; but often the two verbs agree in
having the same final suffix. Examples are: — Avana yiinbai,
or wana yiina, ' do not go'; wana cabbai, ' do not eat '; wan a
THE MIXYUNG DIALECT.
21
mullanye cubbinmai, 'do not feed liim '; yiina gully cullum
kaggale means 'let us go to catch fish '; lit., ' let us go, let us
catch fish '; both verbs are in the imperativ?. Kia mullanye
bumalia, 'ask him to fight'; this is the more common form ; but
walo kia mullanye webara kundia, or walo mullanye kia
webara kunjeba, 'you ask him to light a fire '; here the endings
of the verbs will agree in all the tenses ; as, (imper.) kia kunjeba;
(^)rt6^<) kianne kunjebunne; {fut.) kian kunjeban.
Examples of the Formation op the Tenses of Verbs.
The numbers here are the Tenses as on page 16 of this Appendix.
Bunia, ' to fight, beat, kill.'
1, Buma, bumale, bumga, bumgale ; 2. Bumala, bumalela, bum-
gala, bumgalela ; 3. Buman, bumgan ; 4. Bumanne, bumalinne,
bumganne, buminne ; 5. Buraaloro, bumgaloro, bumaloroby ; 6.
Bumen, bumallen, bumgallen; 7. Buminna; 8. Bumian, bumalian;
9. Bumalia; 10. Bumai; 11. Bumenden. Comj^ound forms are : —
Bumaigerry, ' wish to fight '; bumejum {imper. neg.), 'fight
not'; karaban bumale {imper. reciprocal), 'fight one another';
bumille-ma, 'cause to fight,' which also, as above, may change
ma into -mala, -malela, -man; -munne, -men; -ma-ia, &c.
Kinda, 'make.'
1. Kinda, kindabale; 2. Kindalela, kindabulela; 3. Kindan ; 4.
Kindinne; 5. Kindaloro, kindabuloro; 6. Kinden, kindabulen, »tc.
Kinda does not take the forms in -ga ; nor buma those in ba.
TABLE OF RELATIONSHIPS m MINYUa.
(1-)
A blackf calls ^ father'' s brother.
,, is called in return . . .
A blackf calls a mother'' s sister.
,, is called in return . .
Native words.
biag*. . .
moiim .
waijug .
moi'un .
Equivalents.
pater, patruns.
illius Jili-us, -a ;
liujus nepos.X
onater, matertera.
illius fli-us, -a ;
hnjus nepos. %
avunculus.
ejus nepos.
amita.
ejus nepos.
A blacky calls a mother's brother kaog . . ,
,, is called in return .... bui'rijug
A blackf calls ?^ father's sister . . narrim .
„ is called in return .... ny6gon .
* Biag also means 'father,' and waijug ' mother.'
The child of biag or of waijug is 'brother (sister)' to moium ;
and a child of kag or narrun is cousin to burrijug and nyogon.
t Male or female. J For brevity, I make wpos^ncphev.i, niece. — Ed.
22
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
(2.)
Native words. Eijuivalents.
A man calls an ddur hrotlutr . . . kagog . . . elder brother.
,, is called in return bunam . . younger brother.
A man calls a younyer hrothnr . . bunam . . ,,
,, is called in return kagog . . . elder brother.
A man calls any sisUr nunnag. . sister.
„ is called in i-etuiii Ijunam . . brother.
A woman calls any hrotJier .... bunam . . brother.
,, is called in return . . . nunnag . . sister.
A woman calls an elder sister . . . nunnag . . elder sister.
„ is called in return . . . yirgag . . . younger sister.
A woman c&\\&?i. younger sister . yirgag. . . ,,
,, is called in return . . . nunnag . . elder sister.
A blackf calls a male cousin
„ ^ „ a female „
she is called in retiirn . . .
he
yirabiig or kujarug. ^ ^
yirabug-gun or kujarug-gun. ;. 2
yirabiig-gun or kujarug-gun. g.
yirabug or kujarug. j ~
(3.)
Grand relationshijfs.
A grandchildf calls a (jrand/ather, and is called by him naijog.
,, ,, father's mother, ,, ,, her kummi.
,, „ mother's „ „ ,, ,, baibug.
t \Miether male or female.
(4.)
A man calls his wife, his wife's sister, and some others . nubuggun.
,, is called by them in return nubug.
A man calls his v:ife's father women.
,, calls his ivife's mother bogai.
,, is called by them in return Avomen.
Other terms for relations-in-law are — weog, cumbug, yamljiiru.
Such relationships are very complicated, and require to he specially
investigated.
(5.)
When there is no specific term for a relationship, the terms foi-
'brother' and 'sister' are used ; for instance — a great-grandfather
is called kagog, 'elder brother,' and in reply to a male he says
bunam, 'younger brother.'
THE MINYUNG DIALECT. 23
TI. THE VOCABULARY.
Words, Phrases, and Sentences used by the Minyung Tribe.
1. Words and Phrases.
(The verbs are given in their shortest form, the imperative.)
Berrin — the south, the south people ; e.g., berrinba — to the south;
c;/. kokin — the north, the north people; e.g., kokmgal — from
the north. The aborigines on the Richmond River call the
Clarence River ' Berrin,' and the Tweed 'Kokin'; but, to
those on the Tweed River, the Richmond is 'Berrin,' and the
Logan is 'Kokin.'
Binnug — an ear; e.g., binnugma — make to hear; tell ; answer.
Birra — to cast through.
Birre — fly away ; e.g., birryalen garrig — crossed over.
Bugge — fall ; it is sometimes equivalent to 'gone away ' or ' dis-
appeared'; as, inji buggeloro mibin kurralbo wairabo?
' where have all the blacks been this long time "I If the im-
perative ends in a (as bugga), the word means 'kick,' 'stamp,'
' leave a mark,' as a foot-print. In the Pirripai dialect, spoken
by the natives on the Hastings River, buggen means 'killed,'
for they say bunno butan buggen, 'he killed a black snake..
In Minyug, nyugga bukkoyen means 'the sun has risen,'
nyugga buggen, 'the sun has set'; but with this compare the
Brisbane dialect, which says piki bog, 'the sun is dead.'
Buggo — (1) a native shield ; (2) the tree from which it is made.
Bujabuyai — a swallow. Bujarebin — a daisy. Bujagun — a quiet
girl. Bujaro — quiet ; e.g., yiran bujaro, ' whip-snakes (are)
harmless.'
Bu i a ra, Buj arabo — morning.
Bujare, Bujaro-bujaro — this morning, just before daybreak.
Buji, biijin — a little piece; bujigan — into little pieces.
Buma or buraga — strike, beat, fight, kill by fighting.
This is probably a derivative from bugge, just as wag, the-
noun for 'work,' becomes wamma, the verb ' to work.'
Burre — the top of a tree; with this compare culle, 'the barrel' or
' trunk' of a tree ; waian, ' the root '; cerrug, ' the branches ';
kunyal, ' the leaves.' (iulle is also a general name for a 'tree.'
It often means 'logs' lying down, and 'firewood'; e.^., kulga
culle w e b a r a g a i, ' cut wood for the fire. ' (5 e r r u g, besides, is
' the open palm of the hand,' ' a bird's claw,' or 'the paw of an
animal,' and it is the name of a constellation. Kunyal, 'leaf,'
may be allied to with kuggal, 'an arm ' or ' wing.' Waian
also means ' a road.' When a tree is cut down, the stump is
called gunun.
24 AN' AUSTRALIAK LANGUAGE.
Dukkai — dead; a dead man ; 'a dead woman' is touaragnn.
The word tabuUen is often used to mean 'dead,' instead of
dukkai and t o u a i' a g u n , It is a participle from some verl ) not
at present used. In some dialects, duggai, prol>abIy the same
word, means a kind of ' hsh '; in the Turrubul dialect it means
'man.' This may have given rise to the idea that some of the
aborigines believe that, when they die, they become fishes.
Ducffcerriicai — white man ; duggerrigaigun — white woman. Per-
haps this word comes from dukkai, 'dead,' but it does not mean
'ghost' or 'spirit.' For 'spirit,' there are two terras, guru and
wagai. After a man dies, he is spoken of as guru wanden,
* a spirit wp above.' All the guru go to waijog (from wai,
'above'), where they live on murrabil, a kind of celestial
food. Murrabil is from the Kamilaroi word murraba, 'good.'
■G-uru in some dialects means 'dark' or 'night,' and a word
derived from it means 'emu.' Dawson, in his "Australian
Aborigines " (page 51), states, that, if a native " is to die from
the bite of a snake, he sees his wraith in the sun ; but, in this
case, it takes the form of an emu." Wagai means 'shadow,' and
has a more superstitious use than guru. When a person is ill,
the warrima, 'wizard,' is sent for to throAV on him a good spell,
called bunyarama warrima. The warrima takes something
like a rope out of his stomach (!), and climbs up to waijog to
have an interview with the wagai. On his return, if the man
is to recover, he says, 'Your wagai has come back and you will
soon be well'; but if he is to die, he says, 'I could not get your
wagai.' The sick man is sure to die then. The w;igai are also
the spirits consulted, when anyone dies suddenly, to discover by
whose means the death was brought about. Yiralle is another
name used by the Nyug people for 'white man'; it means, the
' one who has come.'
Garre — dance; cf., yerrube — sing.
Gulug, gulugbo — first; before; e.r/., gai minjen gulugbo, 'I
laughed first,' i.e., before you. Gulug-gerry is 'immediately ';
nyugga bukkoyen gulug-gerry, 'the sun will be up imme-
diately '; gulugga we, or we gulugga buna means ' 'go thou
first'; waire gurrugin, or waire guluggurrugin are those
men in a tribe whom the colonists call ' kings '; each of these
gets a brass plate ^vith a suitable inscription, to wear on his
breast, as an emblem of his rank.
Gumma — teat. Giimmabil — milk.
Kibbara — (1) white or yellow ; (2) a half-caste, a yellow man or
woman; whence kib])argun, a half-caste girl; kibbarim, a
half-caste male ; (3) fig., anything young, small, or light; as,
kibbara pailela, which may either mean, 'light rain falling,'
or ' young lads fighting '; (4) a stringy-bark tree ; this word, in
the Kamilaroi dialect, is kuburu, a 'black-box tree'; (5) the
THE MIXIUXG DIALECT. 25
ceremony of man-making; possibly the name bora may come
from this, by drojiping the initial syllable, as nyug is for
minyug; or, bora may be comiected with the Mi nyug word
bul or bule, 'a rmg '; (6) 'a made-man,' that is, one who
has passed the kippara; and in this sense it is used in many
of the coast dialects. The names given to a male, at ditferent
stages of his life, are — taicum, ' a baby '; balun, balungai, 'a
'a boy '; cubbo, cubboyil, 'a youth'; murrawon, ' a lad ' who
is getting whiskers and has all his berrug or prescribed ' scars
on his back'; kumban-gerry, a lad who has received his
kumban or 'scars on his breast'; kibbara, 'one who had
been made a man'; paigal or mibin, 'a man'; kicom or
mobeg, ' an old man.'
Kuji — (1) a bee ; (2) honey ; (3) red ; cf. kujin — red.
Kunle — know, hear, feel, smell; e.g., gai kunlejum, 'I don't know.'
Moiiim, (I) a child, a son or daughter ; (2) the black cockatoo
with yellow feathers in its tail. The black cockatoo with red
feathers is called garerra, and the white cockatoo, kera.
Nyugga— (1) the regent bird; (2) the sun. Nyuggal-gerry —
summer ; cf. wurrig — cold ; wurrigbil — winter.
(!'a — eat; e.^/.jwalo ci, gaiyo, ' you eat (now), I (will eat) by-and-by.'
(?ubbinma — feed. (5 ukka — drink.
Webara — (1) a fire; (2) firewood; (.3) a camp. Examples: — (1)
kunji webara, 'light a fire'; kunji, by itself, would mean
' make it burn ' (bobbinda means 'make a light''; culloma,
' make smoke/ i.e., ' make a fire '; palloma, ' put out the fire');
(2) kulga webara, 'cut firewood'; this has the same meaning
as kulga culle ; (3) gai yiinbulela webA,ra 'I am going to
the camp'; lit, ' lam going to the fire.' The gunyas or 'wind-
shelters ' are gumbin ; and a large building like a church is
called kumai gumbin, which words, however, may mean, a
collection of houses, as a ' town ' or ' village.' The blankets
which are given to the aborigines on Queen's Birthday are
called gumbin, and so is a rag tied round the foot. A sock is
gumbin, but a boot is bonumbil. In some dialects a 'sheet
of bark,' 'a gunya,' and 'a canoe' have the same name, but
in the Minyug dialect ' a sheet of bark' is bagul, and ' a canoe '
is kundal or kulgerry.
Woram — sleep; woramlal — sleepy; e.g., wo ram buna, 'go to
sleep.' A mother will say to her child, woram-woram buna,
but to herself, gai woram yunan, 'I will lie down and sleep.'
Yaraba — marry; e.g., nanna yaraba, 'marry my sister.'
Yerrube — sing; yerrubil — song ; yerrabil-gin-gun — a singer (fern.).
Youai'a (also kirrin and wogoyia) — a ' karabari.'* Youara-
gurrugin — a maker of karabari songs.
*This I take to be the correct spelliug, not ' corrobboree. ' — Ed,
26 an austkalian language.
2. Sentences.
Minyugalela we — 'what are you doing'? Yogum gai liiuluru-
mullela — 'I am doing nothing'. Minyugaloro we nobo ? —
' what did you do yesterday '? Gaio kaggaloro cuUuni Noggug-
gai — ' I caught fish for Noggug.'
Gaio v.-anye bundau wianje, kulga cully gaia — ' I to you a tonia-
hawdv will give, (if) you cut down a tree for me ; or, cut down a
tree for me, (and) I will give you a tomahawk.' Yile bundan?
— ' where (i.s) the tomahawk '? Kunde bukkora — ' over there.'
Kulga culle koranna — 'cut down that high tree.' Yile w^alo
kulgajumgei'ry, wana — " if you do not like to cut it down,
leave it alone.' Gaio kulgunne kaba culle wda baijum bibbo
— *I cut down that ti-ee before you came.' Gaio wanye naienne
kulgabulenne — ' I saw you cutting (it).
Gaio w-anye monno webara gaia kunjilligerry — ' I would like
you to light that fire for me.' Walo kia muUanye kunjeba
— 'you ask him to light (it).' Gaio mullauye nobo kianne
kunjebunne — ' I asked him to light it yesterday.' Munno
webara kunjilloroljo — ' the fire is lighted.' Munno webara
kunjillinneban nobo — 'that fire will be lighted to-morrow.'
Gen kuggalela ? — 'who is calling'? Kera kuggalela — -'a wdiite
cockatoo is calling.' Mully kera mibin kialela — 'that cockatoo
speaks like a man.' Paian-jug giin — ' it is warm to-day.'
Kubberry gai paian — ' I am hungry to-day.' Wia kunlunne
bogon gai — ' I am sorry for you.' Walo ca, bunyarra-d-unda —
'you eat, (you) will be all right.'
Gaio naienne kurrunnebo manne, kenne; gaio buminne undui'-
runebyu ; undurr ben-anne. — 'I saw a number pf ducks and
white cockatoos ; I killed some ; some flew away.'
Loganda, cannaljigy gaio naienne webarabo. Cannaby yer-
I'ubilloro w'ebarabo. Yaburugen gaiaba kyuanne. Yaburugen
gullawonne, ' injeo we '? Gaio kiallen ' Brisbane-gobullen.' Gaio
naienne nogumme kakaba. (Cannaby bikbullen. Cannaby ko-
wallen nogumme webanno — ' On the Logan, I saw them in the
camp (lit., at the fire). They were singing in the camp. One
came to me. One asked me where I Avas going. I replied,
' Going to Brisbane.' I saw dogs there. They w-ere liarking.
They called them into the camp.'
Miscellaneous.
Gaio nan cuan bowan, 'I will see (one who) will throw a
speai'.' Gaio nan cuan bow^alen, ' I will see a spear thrown.'
Gaio nan cuan bongunneban nobo, 'I will see (that) a .spear
shall be thrown to-morrow.' Gaio naienne yunbulela undu-
runne poiolgo, 'I saw somebody going up the hill.' Gaio nai-
enne kamy cuan warre bulenne, ' I saw him carrying .spears.'
TIIK MINYUXG DIALECT. 27
Gaio kunleoro kamy yerrubiloroby, ' I heard them siuging.
Gaio kunlan kamy mendie, 'I will hear them laughmg.' Gaio
kunlunne kamy minjenne, 'I heai'd them laughmg'; if the
act of laughing is finished, this sentence would be, gaio kun-
lunne minjeloroby. Q-aio kunlela wemullenyun, 'I hear
speaking there.' Graio naienne korenyun taicumme, ' I saw
children running away.' Q-aio kunloigerry yerriibil kamy, 'I
like to hear them sing.' Wog wia bunyarra, 'working is good
for you.' Waggo wia gowenyen, 'working is making you tired.'
Paigal wammullen wallenyun, 'the man working is gone.'
3. Mythology.
Berrugen korilhibo, gerrig Mommom, Yabiirog. — ' Bennig came
long long ago, with Mommom (and) Yaburog.'
Tims begins a Minyiiny Legend to the folloicing effect : —
Long ago, Bernig, with his two brothers, Mommom and Yabu-
rog, came to this land. They came with their -wdves and children
in a great canoe, from an island across the sea. As they came
near the shore, a woman on the land made a song that raised a
storm which broke the canoe in pieces, but all the occupants, after
battling with the waves, managed to swim ashore. This is how
' the men,' the paigal black race, came to this land. The pieces of
the canoe are to be seen to this day. If any one ^^ill throw a stone
and strike a piece of the canoe, a storm will arise, and the voices
of Berrug and his boys will be heard calling to one another,
amidst the roaring elements. The pieces of the canoe are certain
rocks in the sea. At Ballina, Berrug looked around and said,
nyugl and all the paigal about there say nyug to the present
day, that is, they speak the Nyug dialect. Going north to the
Brunswick, he said, minyug, and the Brunswick Eiver paigal
say minyug to the present day. On the Tweed he said, gando 1
and the Tweed paigal say gando to the present day. This is how
the blacks came to have different dialects. Berrug and his
brothers came back to the Brunswick River, where he made a
fire, and showed the paigal how to make fire. He taught them
their laws about the kippara, and about marriage and food. After
a time, a quarrel arose, and the brothers fought and separated,
Mommona going south, Yaburog west, and Berrug keeping along
the coast. This is how the paigal were separated into tribes.
Note. — Each brother has his own ' karabari,' for there is the
youara Berrugna, the girran Momm6mna, and the wogo-
yia Yaburogna).
28 AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAGE.
(B.)
[ADSrUACT.]
GRAMMAll
OF THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN I3Y
THE NAERINYEEI TEIBE IN S. AUSTRALIA.
(By the late Bei: G, 2\tplin, Ahorti/tnea' Mlidonary, Point MacJeay,
South Audralia.)
[This fJrammar of the NaiTinyeri dialect is to be fouuil in a hook en-
titled " The Folklore, Manners, Customs, and Languages of the South
Australiai^f^borigines ; Adelaide, 1879." I have re-arranged and condensed
the material of the Grannnar, and adapted the whole to the sj-stem fol-
lowed in this present volume. — Ed.]
The Narrinyeri aborigines occupy a portion of tlie coast of South
Australia, near Adelaide. Their territory includes the shores of
Encounter Bay, Lakes Alexandrina and Albert, and the country
to the east of the Murray, for about 20 miles from its mouth.
The first attempt to master and commit to writing the grammar
of this language was made in 1843 by the Rev. H. E. Meyer, a
Lutheran Missionary. His sketch of the grammar is not free
from blunders. Nor can the present efTort expect to be faultless,
but it is approximately correct, being founded on a practical ac-
quaintance with the language.
1. Letters.
The Narrinyeri have not the sounds of y, r, s, ;~, but they have
the sonant sound of tit, (here written cJh), as in the English words
'this,' 'thine,' 'breathe,' and the surd th, as in 'thin,' 'breath.'
2. General Principles.
There is no article, but the numeral 'one ' is used as a sort of
indefinite article. Nouns, pronouns, and adjectives are declined
Ijy the use of affixes, and have forms for the singular, dual, and
plural numbers.
Number is indicated by a cliange of termination ; for example : —
'Man,: ' 3Ia)i.'
'Eye:
' Lip: ' Ear:
Sing. INIay-u. Komi.
Dual May-ula. Korn-egk.
Flu. May-una. Korn-ar.
Min-a.
]Min-ula.
Min-una.
Muna. Yur-e.
Mun-agge. Yur-illa,
'Eye:
' Eyehroiv:
' Trouser:
Sing. Pil-i.
Dual Pil-agge.
Pi-cha^ge.
Pi-ko.
Yerkocin-a.
Y''erkoan-ula.
THE KAERINVERI DIALECT. 29
In the declension of nouns the affixes used as case-endings may
be regarded as post-positions. There is no distinction of gender
in nouns and adjectives, but, for some words, there is a change of
termination to indicate the feminine ; as, yuga, ' brother,' yugti-
ta, 'sister.' This dialect likes to end its words with a vowel, es-
pecially the short i, which is here represented by i/.
3. Nouns.
Their Dscleusioii.^There are two declensions of nouns, the one
used for words denoting human relationships, and the other for
all nouns else.
(a.) Common Nouns.
Their cases. — For common nouns, the case-endings of the singu-
lar number are : —
The Genitive takes the affix -aid meaning 'of,' but, with place-
names, 'at,' 'in,' 'upon.' This affix is also used as a separate
word, with the sense of 'belonging to.'
Tlie Dative 1. takes -amby, which may be translated 'for/ 'for
the purpose of,' ' for the use of.'
The Dative 2. takes -agk, ' to,' ' by,' and -ugai, ' on,' ' by '; but
these two terminations seem to be interchangeable. The English
for this case is, ' to,' ' with,' ' by,' ' on,' ' at ' — either locative or
instrumental.
The Ablative 1. has the affix -il ; as, kornil mempir napagk,
' the man struck his wife '; from korni, ' man,' mempin, ' strik-
ing,' napy, ' wife '. This case means ' by,' * through,' ' because of
— either instrumental or causative.
The Ablative 2., if used to signify 'place from,' takes -anmant;
as, guk perk-anmant, ' water from the well '; but, when it i elates
to persons or things, it takes -inend; as, gum-anyir-inend pil-i-
nend, ' from your eye.' The English for this case is ' from.'
Another case-ending in the singular is -anyir; this I shall call
Ablative 6. It denotes ' from,' expressing a cause and a result ;
but with pronominal adjectives, it stands for the Genitive form.
These are the prmcipal cases, but the number of them may be
multiplied indefinitely by the use of any of the following : —
4. Post-Positions.
Amby, 'for.' Moru, 'down.'
Gugkura, 'before.' Tara^k, 'between.'
Giirn-kwar, ' oiitside.' Tepagk, 'close to.'
Loru, 'up.' Tuntagk, 'between two.'
Mare-muntunt, 'beneath.' Tunti, ' in the middle.'
Ugul, ugunel, ugunai, ' in front of.'
Some of these, Avhen used as post-positions to nouns, are con-
stant ; others vary their form when affixed to the dual or the plural.
30
an australian language.
Paradigm of the Declension of Common Nouns.
Komi, ' a man.''
Sinrjidar.
Dual.
Plural.
Norn.
1.
* Ivorii-i
Korn-egk
Korn-ar
Gen.
Korn-akl
Korn-egk-al
Koru-an
Dat.
2.
C Korn-agk
Korn-iigegun
Korn-ugar
Ace.
Korn
Korn-egk
Korn-ar
Voc.
Korn-incla.
Korn-ula
Korn-una
AM.
1.
Korn-il
Korn-eggul
Korn-ar
2.
Korn-anmant
Korn-ugegun
Korn-ugar
6.
Korn-anyir
Korji-iigegun
Porly, 'acJul'I.'
Korn-an
iSiyigidar.
Dual
Plural.
Nom.
1.
* Porl-y
Porl-egk
Porl-ar
Gen.
Porl-ald
Porl-egk-al
Porl-an
Dot.
2
j Porl-agk
\ Porl-ugar
Porl-ugegun
Porl-ugar
Ace.
Porl-y.
Porl-egk
Porl-ar
Voc.
Porl-inda
Porl-ula
Porl-una
Abl.
1.
Porl-il
Porl-eggul.
Porl-ar
2_
Porl-inend
Porl-(en)egguland
Porl-anand
(6.) Nouns of Relationshi]).
For nouns of relationship, the case-endings are :•
Ace, Gen.
—
-yin.f
Dative 1.
' for '
-yin-amby.
Dative 2.
'to'
-yin-agk.
Catisative.
'by'
-yin-inda.
Ablative 6.
' from '
-yin-anyir.
fThat is, -in or -an preceded by the euphonic y.
For nouns of this kind there are also special terminations to
express the nature of the relationship, whether 'mine,' ' yours,' cr
' his '; thus : —
Nag-gai, 'father,' 'my father.'
Yiko-wally, 'his father.' Gai-uwy, ' your father.'
N a g - k u - w y , ' mother, ' 'my mother. '
Nagku-wally, 'his mother.' Nagku-uwy, ' your mother.'
Kelan-owy, ' my (elder) brother.'
Kelan-wally, 'his brother.' Kelan-uwy, 'your In-other.'
*iSee foot note, p. 15 of appendix.
THE KARRINYERI DIALECT. 31
Naggai, ' my fatUev,' is tlius declined : — •
JS^om. Naggai, 'my father.'
Geii. I^Taggai-yin, 'of my father.'
Dot. 1. Naggai-yin-amby, 'for my father.'
Dat. 2. Naggai-yin-agk, 'to my father.'
Ace. Naggai-yin, 'my father.'
Cans. Naggai-yin-inda, ' by my father. '
Abl. 6. Naggai-yinanyir, ' from my father.'
All the other terms of relationship, with their possessive ad-
juncts, may be declined by adding these case-endings. But some-
times the Genitive of relationship puts the -aid of ordinary nouns
before its own ending ; as, tart-ald-an, ' of my (younger) brother.'
5. Derivatives from Nouns, itc.
Derivatives are formed from nouns by adding to them such
terminations as : —
1. - inyeri, 'belonging to'; as, kurl-inyeri, 'a hat,' from
kurly, 'head'; turn-inyeri, 'a boot,' from turny, 'foot';
kurr-inyer-egk, 'a pair of trousei"s,' from kurregk (dual) 'the
shins.' Such a derivative Avord, when declined, is treated as a
common noun, and the post-position is added to the adjective
termination; as, kurl-inyer-ald, 'of a hat,' kurr-inyer-egkal,
' of a pair of ti'ousers.'
2. -urumi or -urmi, which is added to the stem of a verb to
denote ' the instrument ' with which the action expressed by the
verb is done, or a thing which is used for some particular })ur-
pose ; as, tyety-urumi, 'oil, ointment,' from tyetyin, 'anoint-
ing'; kunk-urumi, 'pills,' from kunkun,' swallowing'; mutt-
urmi, 'a drink,' from muttun, 'drinking'; kalt-urmi, 'a spade,'
from k alt, ' to dig '; drek-urmi, 'a tomahawk,' from drek, 'to
cut or chip.' Here also the post-position is affixed to the form-
ative for the purposes of declension.
3. -amaldy, which is added to the stem of a verb, to denote
the agent or person who does the action; as, pett-amaldy, 'a
thief,' from pett, 'to steal'; yelpul-amaldy, 'a liar,' froui
yelpul, ' to tell a lie.' Here also the post-position is placed at
the end of the word.
■i. -watyeri means ' full of '; as, plogge-watyeri, ' posses.sed
of sorcery' ; tuni-watyeri, 'full of sand.'
5. "When yandy, 'old,' 'useless,' is vised with a noun, it
modifies the form of the noun, and attaches the case-ending to
itself; as, yandy orn fyb?* korn), 'an old man,' yant-ald orn
'of an old man'; yandy imin fyb>- miminy), 'an old woman,'
yant-ald mi n, 'of an old woman.'
32
AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE,
6. Peokouns.
(a.) Personal Pronouns.
The personal pronouns have two forms in the nominative, the
accusative, and the causative (Abh 1) cases, as shown in the para-
digm below ; the second form is used ordy as an affix to nouns, or
in rapid speaking. The third })ronoua is of all genders.
Paradigm of the Declension of the Personal Pronouns.
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
17 om
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
AU.
1.
1.
6,
Gape, ap
Gan-auwe*
, Gan-amby
, Gan-agk
Gan, an
Ginte, inde, ind
Gum-auwe
Gum-amby
Gum-agk
Gum, um
Ginta, inda
Ginte, inde
Gum-any ir
Kitye, itye, atye
Ivin-auwe
Kin-amby
Kin-agk
Kin, in, ityanian
Gaty, attyt
, Gan-anyir
Kil, il
Kin-anyir
1
1st.
-Dual
2nd.
3rd.
Norfi
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
All
1.
2.
1.
6.
Gel, agel
Lam-auwe*
Lam-amby
Lam-agk
Lam, alam
Gurl, ugurl
Lom auwe
Lom-amby
Lom-agk
Lom, olom
Gurla, ula
Gurl, ugurl
Lom-anyir
Kegk, egk
Keggun-auwe
Keggun-amby
Keggun-agk
Keg-gun, eg-gim
Gel, agelt
Lam-anyir
Kegk, egk
Keggun-anyir
Plural
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
All.
1.
2.
1.
6.
Gum, arn
Nam-auwe*
Nam-amby
Nam-agk
Nam, anam
Gun, ugiin
Nom-auwe
Nom-amby
Nom-agk
Nom, onom
Guna, una
Gun, ugun
Nom-anyir
Kar, ar
Kan-auwe
Kan-amby
Kan-agk
Kan, an
Gui-n, arnf
Nam-anyir
Kar, ar
Kan-anyir
*A variant for the geniti
re form in -auwe
is -auwurle.
+ This is the case which our author calls the Cavmthr-Ahlatlve ; I
have entered it in the paradigms as Ahl. 1. ; it is equivalent to Threlkeld's
A tjent-Komi native (Xom. 2), for which see page 11. — Ed.
THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 33
An adjective oi' a possessive pronoun, when used as an attribute
to a noun, is declined vv^itli the noun, and has its own case-endings;
thus : —
Wuiuli kmauwe, ' Jus spear.' Winuli nung-gari, ' good sjnuj;'
Singular.
Nom. "Wundi kin-auwe (nuggari)
Gen. Wund-ahl kin-anyir-akl (nuggar-ald).
Dat. 2. Wund-agk kin-anyir-agk (nuggar-ugar).
Ace. Wund kin-auwe (nuggari).
Abl. 1. Wund-il kin-anyir-il (nuggar-il).
2. Wund-inend kin-anyir-inend.
Dual.
Kom, "Wund-egk keggun-auwurle (nuggar-egk).
(Jen- "Wund-eggal keggun-anyir-ahl (nuggar-egkal).
Dat. 2, Wund-ugegun Iceggun-anyir-agk (nuggar-ugegun).
Ace. "VVund-egk keggun-auwe (nuggar-egk).
Ahl. 1. Wund-eggul keggun-anyir-il (nuigar-ugegul).
2. Wund-ugegun keggun-anyir-inend.
Plural.
Nom. Wund-ar kan-auwe (nuggar-ar).
Gen. Wund-an kan-anyir-akl (nuggar-an).
Dat. 2. AVund-ugar kan-anyir-eggun (nuggar-ugar),
J^cc. Wund-ar kan-auwe (nuggar-ar).
Ahl. 1. Wund-ar kan-anyir-il (nuggar-ar).
2. Wund-ugar kan-anyir-inend.
Kornar ngruwar, ' many men.'
Plural.
Kom. Ivorn-ar gruwar. •
Gen. Korn-an grunt-ugo.r.
Dat. Korn-ugar gruut-ugar.
Ace. Ivorn-ar gruwar
Voc. Korn-vina gruwiin.
Ahl. 1. Korn-ar grunt-ar.
2. Korn-ugar grunt-inend.
Peculiarities in the syntax of the pronouns are shown in such
sentences as : — gaty mempir kin-anyir-agk {not kin-auwe)
kurly, ' I struck his head '; here apparently the object of a transi-
tive verb is in the dative case; kil plep])in keggun-auwe,
pilar, ' he touched ths eyes of these two '; but here the accusative
case is used.
34 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
(h.) Demonstrative and Interrofjat'we Pronouns.
The demonstrative pronouns are: — hik-kai, hik-ke, 'this';
hitye-katye, 'this one' (emphatic) ; and nai-ye, 'that.' They
are tlius declined : —
Intitcmt.
Proximate.
Uimofc.
Kom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
AM.
Hikkai
Hin
Hi'l
Hitye-katye
Hityene katye
Dual
Kaiye
Orn-auwe
Orn-agk
Orne
iVom.
Heggegk
Heggene-kegk
Nakak
Ace.
AM.
Heggun
Heggul
Plural
Nam.
Ace.
AM.
Harar
Haran
Harar
Harnakar
Narar
Narai-
The interrogative pronouns are gagke, ' who'? minye, ' what 'i
They are thus declined : —
Ngang-ke, ' a-ho"! Minj^e, ' whaV.
Norn. Gagke Minye
Gen. Nauwe, nauwurle Mek
Dat. 1. Namby Mekimby
2. Nak (sing.)
jL^ak-an-agk (phi.)
AM. 1. Gande Mengye, 'how'?
Other forms of the interrogative minye are : — minyandai,
' how often ' (lit , ' what times '?) minyurti, ' what sort "? minyai
or minyarai, 'what number'? minde, ' why? for what reason'?
murel, ' with what intention '?
7. Vehus.
In the Narrinyeri dialect, the form of the verb is often parti-
cipial, and is closely allied to the adjective.
If we take the root-form lak, 'to spear,' as the example of a
transitive verb, the mootls and tenses with their meanings may Ije
shown thus : —
THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 35
Indicative Mood.
Tense. Meaning.
1. Present tense, I speai' him.
2. Fast tense, I speared him.
3. Remote jMst tense, I did spear him.
4 First {simple) future, I will spear him.
5. Second {intention) future, I will {i.e., intend to) spear him.
6. Third {lyredictive) future, I will spear him.
7. Repetitive tense. I spear again.
Reflexive Mood.
I speared myself.
Eeciprocal Mood.
Let us two spear each other.
Imperative Mood.
1. Simple imperative. Do thou spear.
2. Prohibitive imperative, Spear not.
3. Compulsory/ im2)erative. Thou must spear.
Optative Mood.
1. Present optative, I may spear him.
2. Imperfect ojytative. I could or would spear him.
Infinitive Mood.
To spear.
Participles.
Spearing ; speared.
Passive Voice.
I a;u speared.
DECLENSION of the VEEBS.
In the declension of the moods and tenses of the Transitive
and Intransitive "Verbs, five sets of modified forms of Personal
Pronouns are used as the subjects to the verb. They are : —
/. Thou.
He.
\"\'itli Transitive Verbs.
1.
2,
Gate (or gaty) kile
Atte {or atty) il
With Intransitive Verbs.
ginte
inde
3.
4.
5.
Ap inde
Ap inde
Gap gint
itye
itye
kity
36 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
We {two).
You (two).
With Transitive Verbs.
Th'y (ttcoj.
1.
Gel
giivl
kej'gul
2.
Agel
ugurl
With Intransitive Verbs.
egul
3.
Gel
ugurl
egk
4.
Agel
ugurl
egk
5.
Gel
gurl
Plural
kegk
We.
' Ygu.
With Transitive Verbs.
They.
1.
Guru
gun
kar
2.
Ugurn
UgUll
With Intransitive Verbs.
;,i
3.
Ugurn
ugune
ar
4.
Aril
ugune
ar
5.
Gurn
gun
kar
DECLENSION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB.
*Lak, *to spear.'
Exam2)le of the Declension of a Transitive Verb in the
Present Tense oj the Indicative Mood.
Any Tense may be declined in full in the same manner.
T. 1. Sing. Gate* yan lakkin I spear him.
Ginte ,, ,, Thou spearest him.
Kile „ ,, He spears him.
Dual. Gel ,, ,, We two spear him.
Gurl „ ,, You two spear him.
Keggul „ „ They two spear him.
Plu. Gurn ,, ,, We spear him.
Gun • ,, ,, You spear him,
Kar ,, ,, They spear him.
[*NoTE. — Yan, 'him,' is for ityau, an accusative form of the pronoun
itye, kitye, ' he.' Instead of yan, any pronoun or noun in the accusative
case may be used as the direct ol>ject of the transitive verl) ; and to
decline the tenses of the Indicative and other Moods, five sets of pronouns
are used, as shown aliove ; the particular set which ought to be used with
each tense is indicated by the ' superior ' numeral put after the subject in
the following paradigm of declension. Also, T. I, 2, 3, &c. indicates the
Tenses as shown on the previous page. — Ed.]
the narrikyeui dialect. 37
Indicative mood.
T. 1. G-atc' yan lakkin. T. 4. Gate^ yan lak-kani.
2. Gate* yan lakkir. 5. Gate* lak-el ityan.
3. Gate* yan lak-emb. 6. Lakkin-el atte" ityan.
T. 7. Gate lak-uganye.
Otlicr forms of the future are : —
Giute el our ityan lak, ' tliou must spear liim.'
Lak amb el ityan, ' sliall I spear liim '?
Tarno lak amb ityan, ' shall I not spear liim'1
Reflexive.
T. 2. Gap' anagk laggelir.
Eeciprocal.
T. 1. Gel' anagk laggel-amb.
Optative or Potential Mood.
T. 1. Gate* in-anyura lakkin T. 2. Lak-ilde atte" ityan
Imperative Mood.
Singular. Dual and Plural.
T. 1. Lak war ind Gel* war lakkin
II war lak Gurn* war lakkin
T. 2. Lak e (ityan, 'him.') Tauo lak ityan.
T. 3. Laggel-el our (or war) ap^
Infinitive Mood.
Lak, ' to spear '; lak uramb, ' for the purpose of spearing.'
Participles.
Laggelin, ' spearing '; laggelir, ' speared.
Passive Voice.
Indicative Mood.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
T. 1. Gan lakkir Lam lakkir Nam lakkir
Gum lakkir Lom lakkir Nom lakkir
Kin lakkir Keggun lakkir Kan lakkir
[Note. — This is not a real Passive Voice, but only a substitute for it ;
see page 33 of this volume. The pronoun forms used with lakkir show
this, for they are in the accusative. — Ed.]
DECLENSION OE AN INTRANSITIVE VERB.
Ng-ai, * to come.'
Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Gai-in ap\ T. 2. Puntir ap*. T. 3. Gai-el ap*.
38 an australian language.
Imperative Mood.
Koh, ' come '; gai war, 'do come'; gai akhi, ' come here.'
Optative or Potential Mood.
T. 1. Gap^ inanye gai.
Infinitive Mood.
Gai, ' to come.'
Participles.
Puntin, ' coming '; puntani, ' about to come.'
8. Observations on the use of the Verbs.
1. Lakkin properly signifies 'pieixing'; gate lakkin itye
koye means 'I make a basket,' lit.^ 'I pierce that basket,' by
piercing through and through the rushes of which it is made ;
but the word is mostly used to mean the casting of any missile,
as a spear, a dart, a stone.
2. The intransitive verbs take the simple nominative form of
the pronouns as, their subject ; the transitive verlis take the
causative form.
3. There appear to be two conjugations for verbs in the
Narrinyeri language : — (1.) those in which the form for the
present indicative is the same as the present participle ; as,
merippin, 'cutting,' gate yan merippin, 'I cut it'; (2.) those
that have another form for the present participle ; as, dretulun,
'chipping,' gate yan dre kin, 'I chip it.' Of the former class
aremempin, ' sti'iking' ; pempin, 'giving'; morokkin,' seizing.'
To the latter belong pornun, 'die,' pornelin, 'dying'; nam-
jj u 1 u m , ' hide, ' n a m p u n d e 1 i n, ' hiding '; n y r i p p i n, ' wash, '
n y r i b b e 1 i n, ' washing. '
4. Some intransitive verbs become transitive by changing the
sonant g into the surd k, or by adding -undun to the root ; as,
pigkin ap, 'I fall,' piggen atte ityan, 'I throw it down';
yelkulum ap, ' I move,' yelkundun atte ityan, 'I move it ';
nampulun ap, 'I hide,' nampundun atte ityan, 'I hide it.'
5. A causative meaning is given to vei'bal adjectives by adding
-mindin to them; as, guldaraulun, 'tired,' guldamulmindin,
' causing to be tired,' ' making tired.'
6. The most common auxiliary verbs are wallin, 'being,' and
warin, 'making' or 'causing.' Examples of these are: — nug-
gari, 'good', nugga-wallin, 'being good,' nunga-warin, ma-
king good'; piltegi, 'strong,' pilteg-wallin, 'being strong,'
pilteg-warin, 'making strong'; wirrag-wallin, 'being l)ad "
wirrag-warin, 'making bad.'
7. Verbs may therefore be arranged in four classes : — (1.) the
simple verbs as, m em pin, ' striking'; takin, 'eating'; goppun,
'walking'; lulun, 'breaking'; mampulun, 'hiding'; (2.)
verbs ending in -wallin, 'existing'; as, tunku-wallin, 'play-
THE XARRIXYERI DIALECT. 39
ing'; yuntu-wallin, 'crowding; (3.) verbs ending in -warin,
'causing/ 'making'; as, nunku-warin, ' doing right '; wirrag-
warin, ' doing wrong '; wurtu-warin, 'saturating with water';
(4.) verbs ending in -mindin; as, kildei-mindin, 'fetching.'
8. The word ellin means 'being,' 'state of being,' and some-
times 'doing'; but ennin is the proper word for 'doing'; el
appears to mean 'intention or tendency towards'; as, luk ap
atye ellir, 'thus I it did,' ' I did so'; gate yan ellani, ' I (em-
phatic) will do it'; gate yan ennani, ' I will do it '; en al yan,
' do with it,' i.e., 'doit'; kunitye ellir, 'enough he has been,'
i.e., ' he is dead.' The following are the meanings which belong
to ellin and ennin: — ellin, 'doing'; ellir, 'done'; ellani,
' about to do '; ellin, 'having'; ellin, 'being'; ellir, ' has been ';
ennin, 'doing'; ennir, 'done'; ennani, ' will do.'
9. The stem of the word warin is used with the imperatives
and interrogations; as. kug war, 'do hear'; nak war, 'do see';
gai war, 'do come'; ginte wara, 'get out of the way,' lit,
'do thou'; gint war,' do thou '(sc, it); mant war, 'do slowly ';
murrumil war, 'make haste'; yelkul war, 'do more'; mint
war, 'give me a bit,' lit., 'do to me thou'; kakin wara, 'put
it here '; yag wari, ' where do you go.'
10. There are idiomatic expressions in which the words 'go'
and 'come ' are omitted ; as, loldu el itye, or loru el ityc, 'up
will he,' i.e., ' he will go '; mare el itye, ' down will he,' i.e., ' he
will come'; loldan an, 'up it,' i.e., 'fetch it'; moru an, 'down
him,' ■i.e., 'he has gone down'; mare itye, 'down he,' i.e., 'he
has come '; moru el ap, ' down will I,' i.e., 'I will go down.'
Loru and loldu both mean 'up '; mare and moru, ' down.'
9. Adjectives.
(1) Simple adjectives are nuggari, 'good'; wirragi, bad';
and others ; some of these are declined like nouns. (2) Verbal
adjectives; as, talin, ' heavy'; balpin, 'white'; kinemin, 'dirty';
kinpin, 'sweet'; prittyin, 'strong.' Some adjectives have
both forms; as, balpe, balpin, 'white.'
The mode of declining adjectives has already been shown in
connection with the nouns.
Adjectives have no degrees of comparison, but the diminutive
particle -ol — used both with adjectives and nouns — is sometimes
added to the positive; as, m'urralappi, 'small '; murralappi-ol,
'very small.'
The numeral adjectives are : — yammalai or yammalaitye,
'one'; niggegk, ' two ', neppaldar, 'three'; beyond that, all
numbers else are gruwar, 'many.' Grunkar means 'first.' Some
adjectives are formed from adverbs ; as, karlo-inyeri, 'of to-day,'
'new,' from karlo,' to-day '; kaldan-inyeri, ' old,' from kaldan,
' a. long time'; kogk-inyeri, 'alone/ ' by itself,' from kogk,
' away. '
40 an australian language.
10. Adverbs.
There are numerous adverbs in the language, but the most
common are : —
Adverhs of Time.
Grekkakl, ' to-morrow.' Palli, ' while,' ' by-and-by.'
Grurintand, 'often.' ilauwul, 'a long time ago.'
Hik, ' now.' Ugunuk, ' when ' (relative).
Kaldau, ' a long time.' Wataggrau, ' yesterday.'
Karlo, ' to-day.' Yaral, ' when ' (interrogative).
Yun, ' by-and-by.'
Adverhs of Negation.
Nowaiye, 'none.' Tarnalo, ' no more '; ' nevei'.'
Nowaiye ellin, 'no more.' Tarno, 'no'; 'not.'
Tarnalin, ' not yet.' Tauo, ' don't ' (imperative),
Tarno el, ' don't' (do it).
Adverhs of Place.
Aiau, ' by (at) that place.' Yak, yauo, ' where to.'
Akhi, alye, alyikke, 'here.' Yagi, 'where'?
Alyenik, ' this place here.' Yagalli, ' where is he'?
Kiuau, 'where' (relative). Yarnd, 'whence'?
Ku-un, 'far off.' Yarnd inde, 'whence thou'?
Ondu, ' over there.' Yarnd ande, 'whither thou'?
Exam2)les of the use of Adverhs.
Yak al inde tantani, ' where wall you sleep '; gurlug aiau,
' at-the-place-where the hill' (is); manti kiuau tantani ap,
' the hut where I shall sleep'; gap tagulun ku-un, 'I stand far
off'; kegk tagulun ku-u, 'they two stand far off'; kar
tagulun kuar-un, 'they stand far off.'
The word wunye, ' then,' usually coalesces wdth the pronoun
or verb-sign which follows it ; as, wunyap, 'then I'; wunyar,
' then they '; wunyel itye, ' then will he.'
The words uk, ukke, luk, lun, 'so,' 'thus,' denote resemhiance ;
as, luk war lun u, 'so,' 'thus'; luk itye yarnin, 'thus he speaks';
lun ellin, 'so being,' i.e., 'like'; luk ugge, 'like this one';
hikkai ukke, 'this way '; hil amb uk, 'for this way,' i.e., 'be-
ecause '; lun uk, ' thus '; go uk ap, ' I go so.'
The word amby may be translated either 'instead of (prepo-
sition) or 'because' (conjunction) ; as, kaldau amb, 'for a long
time'; hil amb uk, 'because'; pinyatowe aid amb anai pel-
berri means 'sugar for my tea.'
11. Notes on Syntax.
1. The form of the verb is constant in its mood and tenses ;
only the pronoun-subjects vary.
THE NARRIXYERI DIALECT.
41
2. The postpositional suffixes to pronouns arc always attached
to the accusative case ; as, kan-agk, 'to them.'
3. Pronominal adjectives are ahvays (declined vrith their nouns ;
as, kin-anyir-agk taldumand-agk, 'to his hou.se'; and so also
hikkai korn, 'this man,' harnakar kornar, 'these men';
ornagk nuggugai, ' in that day.'
4. The diminutive is placed after the case-ending of the noun ;
as, porl-ald-ol, ' of a little child '; porl-ar-ol, ' of little children.'
5. When an adjective and its noun are declined together, the
case-ending is attached only to the adjective; nuggai--ald korn,
' of a good man.'
6. The post-position -uramb, 'for the purpose of,' is ahvays
attached to any verb which is put in the infinitive by anotlier
verb ; as, pempir il anagk nakkari tak-uramb, 'he gave me
a cluck to eat.'
12. Formation of Y\'ords.
This is effected by adding on various tei'minations, some of which
have already been noticed : —
(1) -wallin, 'being'; as, pilgeru-wallin, 'greedy.'
(2) -warin, 'making'; as, kogk-u-warin, 'sending away from,'
from kogk, 'apart'; anagk-warin, 'prepa.ring,' 'getting ready'
{lit., 'making towards it'), from anagk, kanagk, ityanagk, the
dative of the pronoun itye. .
(3) -aty eri, ' belonging to '; as, lamm-aty eri, 'wood for a fire,'
from lammin, ' carrying on the back.'
13. List of Prepositions, Adverbs, kc.
The prepositions are used
in this list are preceded by
Above — kerau, kiath.
After — ug.
Again — kagulandai.
mu ganyi.
-uganyi.
Agent— -urmi, -amaldy.
Ago, long time— kaldau, kl
Ah ! — yakkai ! takami !
Almost — gak.
Alone — naityi, -knotyerai.
Also — inye, -inyin.
Always — kaldau-amp.
Apart — yinbaik ul un.
As— luk.
At — warre.
as post-positions ; those words which
a hyphen are used as affixes.
Away from here andek.
,, from anywhere kogk.
,, apart — kogkinyeri.
Be off — lorn, lolden, gopwar.
Because — marnd, hil-amb-uk.
Before (of time) — ugunai, ugul.
„ (in front of) — guguragk.
,, — gunkuiti. [wan.
Behind — yarewar, waiag, karlo-
Below— nioru.
Beneath — maremuntunt.
Between — taragk.
Besides — kamanye, -anye.
Bv itself — kogkinyeri.
By— il, ile.
42
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
By-ancl-l)y — yun, ])alli, yuwu-
nuk.
.Can inyiiva.
Close by thee — unig-gai.
Close (near to) — tapagk.
Day, ' this day ' — hikkai nugge.
,, after — kinagkurnngk.
Day before yesterday — kagulun
nugge.
Down (in) — morn, loldu.
Don't — tauo.
Down— wald, niu^'gau.
Eh !— ke ! keh !
Enough — kunye, yikkowun.
Ever — kaldau-amix
Far ofF — ku-utyuu.
Fast (quickly) — tiwi-warin.
First — kagulandai.
Five — kuk-kuk-ki, koyakki,
For amby, arumi, -urumi.
,, -iirumi (for-to).
,, them — an -anyiril.
For mei-ly — k al dau .
For — kuk, kuko.
From, out of nend.
,, (because) — mare, marnd.
(place) anmant.
,, (causative) anyii".
Gently — m ant.
Go away — thrugkun, taiyin.
Go [imjier. ) — gowalwar.
Half — galluk, narliik, mirimp.
Hark ! — kugwar.
Hence — - -andi, -nend. [hi.
Here — kalyan, alye, alyalle, ak-
Here (this here)— alyenik, hik-
kai alye.
Here (that here) — anailyalye.
,, (close by) — ak-in-ik.
Hereafter — pallai, yun.
How 1 — megye, yarild %
How often ? — minyandai ?
How many 1 — minyai, minyarai ?
If — ugun.
Immediately — hikkai, hik, karlo.
In ugai.
In that — muggan.
In there — muggar.
Into — agk.
Is— el.
It, that is it — anailyalye. [lo.
Just now — yikkigge, hikkai, kar-
Like — (.similar) luk, lun.
,, (similar to) glalin
Long time ago — rande, ramvul.
Long ago — gulli. [war.
Make haste — murrunmil, tyiwe-
Many times — gurintand,
Many (too many) — multu-wariu.
May (optative) — ur.
,, (verl)al affix), -inanytira.
,, (postfix) urmi, -uramb.
Might (po.stiix) ant.
Morrow (to-) — grekkald.
Much — gruAvar.
Much more — gruinyerar.
Much (too much) — multu-wariu.
Must war or -our.
Near — mu ggau.
Near thee — tapagk.
Near me — hik alye(-nik), hikak.
Never — tarnalo.
No — tarno.
No (imper. neg.) — tauo.
Not — tarno, tauo, nowaiye.
Once more — kagulandai.
One more — yammalel.
One — yammalaitye.
Only on, -ai.
On the other side — laremuntunt.
Out of the way — nent-wara.
Outside— gurukwar.
Over there — wara.
Perhaps ant.
Quick — murrunmilin, tyiwewar.
Round about — laldilald.
Second — wyag, karlowan.
Single — yammalaitye, -ai.
So — lun.
Still («f^i'.)— thortuld.
Thanks — an-ugune.
That there — naive uwe.
That way — gauwok.
Then — wanye, wunye.
THE NARRINYERI DIALECT.
43
Then one — inna.
Then two — yikkuk.
There (being down) — oldau.
,, (up there) — wakle, warre.
,, (over there) — naiyuAve.
„ (from there) — ondu.
,, (in there) — niuggar.
,, — naiye uwe, muggau.
This way (road) — hikkai-yarhik.
,, (manner) — hikkai-iikke.
Three — neppahlar.
Thus— luku.
Time, a long time ago — kaldau.
,, a short time ago — karlo.
To anto)— agk.
,, (towards) — ugai.
To-day — hikkai nugge.
To-morrow — grekkakl.
Too far in — tumutyun.
Together — yunt.
Truly— katyil.
Two — nigkaiegk, puUatye.
Up above — kerau.
Up — loru, war, mari.
Up there — erouke, naiyewarre.
Upside doAvn — laremuntunt.
Very — pek.
Very near — gake.
Well — golde, guide.
While — pallai.
Whither — yauo ande. [anyir.
Why 1 — megye, mind, mindin-
With (a material) — ugai, ugar.
,, (instrument) — in agk ai.
With — aid, al, ugai.
Within — maremuntunt.
Without — indau.
Yes (truly) — katyil.
THE DIYERI DIALECT.
The Diyeri tribe occupies the region about Cooper's Creek, in
the heart of South Australia, about 630 miles north of Adelaide.
For comparison, their system of pronouns may be given here, as
furnished by the Rev. E. Homann, Lutheran Missionary : —
Personal Pronouns.
1st
2nd.
3rd.
Masc. Fern.
Nom.
1.
Nani
Yidni
Nanya Nania
2.
Nato
Yundru
Nulia Nandruya
Gen.
Nakani
Yinkani
Nunkaiii Nankani
Bat.
Nakagu
Yinkagu
Nunkagu Nankagu
Ace.
Nana
Yidnana
Nanya Nania
Voc.
Perlaia
Dual—
Nom.
1.
Nali, naliena
Yudla
Pudlaia
2.
Naldra
Yudla
Pudlali
Gen.
Nalina,
naldrani
Yudlani
Pudlani
Bat.
•
Naliga,
naldragi
\ Yudlagu
Pudlagu
Ace.
Nalina,
naldrana Yudlana
Pudlanaia
Voc.
Yudla
Pudlaia
41
AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE.
Nom. 1. Naiana, iiaiaui
Yura
Taiiaiia
2. Naiani
Yiira
Tauali
Gen. Kaianana
Yurani
Tanani
Dctt. Naiana^u
Yuragu
Tanagu
Ace. Naiaiiana
Yuraiia
Tanaiiaia
Yoc.
Yura
Tanani
The possessive pronouns, Avliich are the personal i»ronouns of
the genitive case, are declined also like substantives ; thus : —
Nom.\. — Nakani, 'my'; Nom. 2. — Nakanali ; Gen. — Na-
kanaia; Dat. — Nakanani; Ace. — Nakani; Voc. — JSTakanaia
]\Ir. Gason, -who is well acquainted with another portion of the
Diyeri tribe, gives their pronouns thus : —
Personal Pronouns.
First Proiioun.
Sinrjular,
N'om. 1. Althu
2. Athu
Ge7i. Ni
Dat. Akiiga
Ace. Ani
Second Pronoun.
Sin'jidar.
Kom. 2. Yondru
Ace. Ninna
riural
Kom. 1. Janana, uldra
Gen. Janani, uldrani
Ace. Ali
Plural.
Noin. 1. Yini
Gen. Yinkani
Third Pronoun.
Singular.
Masc.
JS'om. 1. ) -K-r T
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
iia
, Fern. , Neut. Plural.
Naniya, nundroya Ninna Thana
Thanani
Wirri, wurra.
Thaniya, gundru
Nunkani Nankani
Nulu Nania, naudriiya
Other pronouns are : — Ninna, ninnea, 'this'; ninna* 'that';
thaniya, gundrn, 'those'; warana, 'who'? wurni, 'whose'? wur-
oga, ' whom '? whi, wodau^ ' what '?
THE XAERIKYERI DIALECT.
45
Nouxs.
Nouns cire declined, as usual, by affixes ; after the following
manner : —
Kintalo-Tjutu
Dog-with
Bu6ii-ali
Blind-of
Kurna - undru
Man relatinsc-to.
A pa - n - undru
Water relating-to.
Kurna - thulka
]Man relating-to.
Yinkani - kii
Yours-to.
The Verb.
The Diyeri verbs, as in other Australian languages, have their
tense-forms based on the forms of the imperative and the present
participle, as shown in the paradigm below. The numbers indi-
cate the tenses quoted, which are : — 1. Infinitive Present ; 2.
Participle Present ; 3. Participle Past ; 4. Participle Reciprocal ;
5. Indicative, Perfect Definite ; 6. Indicative, Pluperfect ; 7. Indi-
cative, Future ; 8. Imperative, Singular ; 9. Im2)ercdive, Plurcd.
' Groic:
Ask.'
', Strike.'
1.
Acami^"
Diami
2_
Bunk
una Acanr
„
Diuna
5."
Blink
anaorif Acanaori
Dinaori
6.
Blink
anawonthi Acanj:
■wonthi
Dinawonthi
7.
Bdnkanalauni
Dialauni
8.
Bunk
a Acea
9.
1.
' Cover, huvj/,'
aSTumpani
'See.'
Dimarau
2.
Numpuna
Niuna
s!
Numpathuruna
4.
Nurapamulluna
Niamulluna
5.
Numpanaorif
Nianaori
6.
Numpunawonthi
Nianawon
thi
7.
Numpalauni
«.
Nii or nil
i
9.
Niamaran
*The post-position mi means 'to.' fTo decline any tense,
prefix the causative form of the personal pronouns as the suliject.
Some adjectives are participal in their form ; as, miincuruna,
' sick '; mundathuruna, 'lazy'; kukutharkuna, ' unlevel'; kiin-
kuna, 'lame'; mull una, 'alike.'
Some adjectives seem to have forms of comparison ; as, wordu,
'short,' wordu-murla, 'shorter,' wordu-muthu, 'shortest';
umu, 'good, umu-murla, 'better'; nuru, 'quick,' nuru-pina,
'very quick'; moa, 'hungry,' moa-pina, 'very hungry.'
46
AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
(From Ur. Moorhouse's Grammar.)
THE MURUNDI TRIBE.
From Manum to Overland Corner, on the River Murray, and
thirteen miles back from the river on each side ; Blanchetown is
their head-quarters.
Declension of Nouns.
Nguilpo, ' child. '
Dual.
Nom.
Gen.
Bat.
Singular.
G-uil-po
G-uil-yog
Guil-yanno
Gruil-pallarno
G-uil-po
Guil-pakul
Guil-yamakul
Giiil-yakullamann
Plural.
Guil-pa
Guil-yarago
Guil-yarumanno
Guil-pa
Guil-yara mainmudl
Ace. Guil-po Guil-yapakul
Abl. 2. Guil-yanmudl Guil-kakulla main
mudl
4. Guil-kulla manno Guil-yaramanno
6. Guil-yanna
Note. — AM. 2 means ' from'; Ahl. 4, ' at,' ' witli ' (a locative form) ; Ahl
6 is the Causative, and may be translated ' by.'
Declension of the Personal Pronouns.
iX 1 -\i / 1 1 1 1 n \*
^jLll'I'lflli
^
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
Nom.
Gape
Gurru
Ninni
Gen.
Gaiyo
Guri'ogo
Nunnago
Bat.
Ganne
Gurrunno
Ninnanno
Ace.
Gape
Gurru
ISTinni
Abl. 6.
Ganna
Gurra
Ninna
Bual
V
Nom.
Gedlu
.Gu})al
Dlano
Gen.
Gedlago
Gupalago
Dlanogo
Bat.
Gedlunno
Gujtalanno
Plural
Dlanunno
Nom.
Gennu
Gunnu
Nana
Gen.
Gennago
Gunnago
Nana go
Bat.
Genunno
Gununno
Nanunno
Note. — There are no abbreviated forms of the pronouns, and no gender
forms.
Declension of the A^erb.
The verbs p.arldkun, ' strike ' and terrin, ' stand,' may be ta-
ken as examples ; in form, both of these are Present Participles.
THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 47
1.
Present.
Parldkun
Terrin
2.
Aorist 1.
Parldka
Terra
.3.
Aorist 2.
Parldkul
4.
Future
Pariaia
Terridla
o.
Imperative
Parlka
Terra
G.
Conditional
Parldkuiina
Terrinna
7.
Prohibitive
Parldkumoi
Terriimi
,s.
Preventive
f Parldkulmun-
i nainmudl
1 Terrulmun-
1 nainmudl
9.
Optative
Parldla
Terridla
10.
11.
Infinitive
Past Participle
Parldlappa
Parldkulmugko
Terrilap[)a
Terrulmugko
Note. — The meanings are: — No. 2, ' did strike '; No. 8, 'struck '; No. 6.,
'would strike'; No. 7, 'strike not'; No. 8, ' that... may not strike'; No.
9, ' may strike '; No. 10, ' for-to strike '; No. 11, 'having struck.' And
similarly for the verb terrin.
THE MAROUPvA TRIBE.
System of kinship found amongst the Maroura tribe.
The Maroura inhabit the country at the junction of the River
Darling with the River Murray, and a considerable distance up
the Darling.
In the names for relationship, there are diiferent terminations
for those that are ' mine,' ' yours,' ' hers '; e.g.,
Kambiya, ' my father.' Grammugiyi, ' my mother.'
Kambiyanna, 'your father.' Grammugammu, 'your mother.'
Kambiyanna, 'his father.' Kittha gammu, 'his mother.'
These Marouras are the tribe which descended the Daiding
between the years 1831 and 1836 {cf. "Mitchell's Expedition").
The Narrinyeri have a tradition that they came down the Darling
and then across the desert to the head of Lake Albert.
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DIALECTS.
English. 1.* 2. 3. 4.
I Gaii g^P^i ^^V k^V^
We two Gadli gel ganal geli
We Gadlu gun nagan nagano
Thou Ninna ginte girit gii^t
You two Niwa gul gul gulo
You (phi,.) Ka gun gunnu gun
He, she, it Pa, padlo kitye kitye kitye
They two Purla kegge kegge kegge
They Purna kar kar kar
*NoTE. — The numbers indicate the localities where the words ai'e used ;
1. is the Adelaide dialect, 2. is Encounter Bay, 3. is Pomunda, 4. is the
dialect spoken to the west of Lake Alexandrina.
48
A^I ACSTRALIAX LANfil'AGE.
Head
Two lieads
Heads
0118
Two
Three
Four
1. 2. 3.
r^Iukarta kuli kuli
Mukartilla kuleg kuleg
Mukartanna kular kular
Kunna yammuli yammalaitye
Purlaitye neigeg ncigegi
Mankutye . niaalda luaalda
I Puriaitye-pur- ■( kukar4cukar | kiggarug or
\ laitye j \ kukar-kar
(C.)
[ABSTRACT.^
GEAMMAR
OF THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN BY
THE ABORIGINES OF YfESTERN AUSTRALIA.
[Tills short sketch of the Grammar of the language of Western Australia
is the only one that I can find anywhere. It is in " The Western Aus-
tralian Almanac for 1S42," and is printed there as an appendix, ' com-
piled by Chas. Symmons, Protector of the Aborigines, from material
furnished by Mr. Francis F. Armstrong, the native interpreter.' Some
portions of it are taken ' from the preface to Captain (Sir George) Grey's
vocabulary. ' I have al^ridged the material of the Grammar, and adapted
it to present uses. — Fd.]
1. Nouns.
The cases are indicated by inflections, thus : —
The Genitive takes the sulfix -ak, which means ' of ' or 'belonging
to '; some districts say -a g instead of -ak. Examples : — Kail a,
'fire,' kalla-r-ak, 'hot'j miki, 'moon,' mik-ag, 'moonlight ';
d t a, ' mouth,' d t a - 1 a g, ' tongue '; g a b b i, ' water, ' g a b b i -
lag, 'belonging to water'; budjor, 'ground,' budjor-lag,
'belonging to the ground'; mammarapak gidji, 'a man's
spear'; yagoak bokn, 'a woman's cloak.'
The Dative; its sign is -a 1, sometimes -ak; as, gadjo allija gulag-
al yogaga, 'I gave it to the child '; Pertli-ak bardiu, 'going
to Perth.'
The Accusative ends in -in; as, gadjo yan-gorin gan-gau bru,
' I do not see the kangaroo.'
The Ablative affixes -al to the nominative case; as, gadj o boat-al
Perth-ak bardaga, ' I went in a boat to Perth '; galata kai-
bra-al watto bardaga, ' we vrent away in a ship'; balgun-
al bumaga, 'she was killed by a gun '; durda cart-al bar-
duk bardaga, ' the dog went away with the cart.'
THE DIALECT OF W. ATJSTKALIA.
49
The Plural numbei' is indicated by adding the numerals, but all
beyond three are bula, ' much,' ' many.' The words for human
beings add -man, or -arra, or -garra to form the plural ; man
is an abbreviated form or man-da, 'altogether,' 'collectively.'
Woi'ds ending with a vowel take -man; those ending with a
consonant take -garra; as, kardo, 'a husband or wife,' j;/if.,
kardo-man; yago, 'a woman,' ^;?tt., yago-man; djuko,
' sister,' ^;Z^t., djuko-man; mammul, ' son,' ^;Zi6., mammul-
garra; gulag, ' a child,' ;;??(., gulag-garra.
Declexsiox of a ISToux.
Yago, 'a woman.'
Singular.
Plural.
Nom.
Yago
Yago-man
Gen.
Yago-ak
Yago-man-ak
Bat.
Yag-ol or Yago-al
Yago-man-al
Ace.
Yago-in
Yago-manin
Ahl.
Yago-dl
Yago-man-al
The Ablative means ' with,' ' by means of.'
Examples: — ^Yago maiak-al yugau bar dag a, 'a woman
came to the house'; n'y agga yago-ak wanna, ' that is a woman's
staff'; gadjo marain yago-al yogaga, 'I gave flour to a
woman'; gadjo yago-in djinnag-ga, ' Isaw a woman'; budjor
yago-al bianaga, ' the ground was dug by a woman.'
The commonest and most useful nouns are : —
Time, Weather, &c.
Cloud — m ar-gabbi.
Comet (meteor) — binnar.
Darkness — maiart.
Dawn — waulu.
Daylight — birait.
Lightning— babbag-win.
Mid-day — m aly a r u k .
Moon — raiki.
]Moonlight — mikag.
Rain — gabbi ; moko.
Sky — gudjait.
Stars — gan-gar.
Sun — gan-ga.
Sunshine — monak.
Thunder — raalgar.
To-day — aiyi.
To-morrow — morogoto ; binag.
Yesterday — mairh-ruk.
d
Elements.
Air (wind) — mar.
Earth — budj or.
Fire — kalla.
Water — gabbi.
Seasons.
Spring — jilba.
Summer — birok.
Autumn — burnuro.
Winter — ma g-goro.
Individuals.
A man — mammarap.
An old man — windo.
A young man — gulambiddi.
A woman — yago.
An old woman — Avindo.
A young woman-
50
AN AUSTEALIAK LANGUAGE.
A child — §ulag.
An infant — guclja.
Relations.
Ancestors — n'yettin-gal.
Aunt — miin-gat.
Brother — gundu.
„ (eldest) — guban;boran.
,, (middle) — kardijit.
„ (youngest) — guloain.
„ -in-law — deni.
Daughter — gwoairat.
Father — mamma n.
„ -in-law — kan-gun.
Husband, wife^kardo.
Mother — gan-gan.
„ -in-law — man-gat.
Nephew — maiur.
Niece — gambart.
Sister — djuko.
„ (eldest) — jindam.
,, (middle) — kauat.
,, (youngest) — giiloain.
,, (married) — mairak.
,, -in-law — deni.
Son — mammal.
Uncle — kan-gun.
Parts of the body.
Arm (upper) — wan-go.
,, (lower — marga.
,, (right) — gunman.
,, (left) — d'yu-ro.
Back — bogal.
Beard — gan-ga.
Blood — gubo.
Bone — kotye.
Bowels— kona g.
Breast (male)— mingo.
,, (female) — bibi.
Chin — gan-ga.
Countenance — dtamel ; minait.
Ear — ton-ka.
Elbow — nogait.
Excrement — kona g.
Eye — mel.
„ -brow — mimbat.
Eye-lash — mel-kambar.
,, -lids — mel-nalyak.
Elesh — ilain.
Foot— jina.
Forehead — bigaic.
Hair of head — kattamimgarra.
Hand^marhra.
Head — katta.
Heel — gardo.
Knee — bonnit.
Leg — matta.
Liver — maierri.
Mouth — dta.
Neck — wardo.
Nose — mulya.
Side— garril.
Stomach — kobbiilo.
Tear — mingalya.
Teeth — nalgo.
„ (upper)— gardak-yugauin.
,, (lower) — ii-a-yugauin.
Temples — yaba.
Thumb — marhra-gan-gan.
Tongue — dtalag.
Animals, Birds, kc.
Bat — bambi.
Bird (a) — jida.
Crow — wardag.
Dog — durda.
Flea, louse — kolo.
Fly — nurdo.
Lizard — jina-ara.
Pig — m a ggoro g.
Snake — wan- gal.
Miscellaneous.
Bark (of tree) — mabo.
Egg — nurdo.
Food (of all sorts) — dadja.
Grass — bobo.
Grave (a) — bogol.
Hill (a)— katta.
House (a)— maia.
Lake (large) — mulur.
,, (small) — gu-ra.
River — bilo.
THE DIALECT OF TV. AUSTRALIA. 51
Rock, stone — buyi. Tree — burnu.
Sand — goyarra. Water — gabbi.
Sea — odern. Water (fresh) — gabbi dji-kap.
Stick (wood) — garba. ,, (stream)— gabbi gurjait.
„ (fire-) — kalla-matta. Young (animal)— noba.
2. Adjectives.
The adjectives most commonly in use are: —
Alive — won-gin, doxxluk Hot — kallag.
Angry — garrag Like (similar) — mogin.
Arm (left) — n'yar'lo. Little — n'yu-map.
,, (right) — gun-man. Long, length — walaiadi.
Bad — djul. , • Low — gar-dak.
Big — gomon. Narrow — nulu.
Bitter — djallam. Near — barduk.
Black — moan. Old — windo.
Clear (as water) — karrail. Red — ^wilgilag.
Cold — nagga. Short — gorad (-da).
Dead — wonnaga. Sick — mendaik.
Dry (not wet) — ilar. Slow — dabbak.
Far away — urai". Soft — gunyak.
Fat — boain-gadak. Sweet — mulyit.
Fresh — milgar. Tall — urri.
Good — gwahha. Thin — kotyelarra.
Green — gerip-gerip. True — bundo.
Hard — murdoen. Wet — balyan.
Health (in) — barra-barra. White — wilban.
High — iragan. Wild — waii-waii.
A substantive acquires an adjective meaning by taking such
suffixes as -gadak, 'having, possessing,' -bru, 'without,' which
cori-esponds to the English suffix 'less'; as, jigala-gadak, 'having
horns,' 'a cow'; kardo-gadak, 'having a husband or wife,'
'married'; boka-bru, 'cloak-less'; gabbi-bru, 'without Avater.'
Comparison of Adjectives.
Some adjectives add jin for the comparative; as, from dabbak,
'slow,' dabbak-jin, 'slower'; gwidjir, 'shai'p,' gwidjir-jin
'sharper'; yerrak, ' high,' yerrak-j in, 'higher.' But usually a
reduplication makes the comparative, and -jil is added to the
base for the superlative; as, gwabba, 'good,' gwabba-gwabba,
' better'; gwabba-jil, ' best.' This intensive particle -j il, equiva-
lent to ' verily,' may be added to other parts of speech ; as,
kardo-jil, 'one who is in the direct line for marryiog with
another'; dadja-jil, 'it is certainly meat'; kannah-jil, 'is it
indeed so'? The English 'very' is rendered by a reduplication;
as, mulyit-mulyit, 'very sweet.'
AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
Numerals.
' One,' gain ; 'two,' gudjal ; ' three,' warli-rag ; 'four,' gud-
jal-gudjal; 'five' is marh-jin bag a, 'half the hands'; 'ten'
is belli-belli marhjin baga, 'the hand on either side.'
In reckoning time tlie natives say ' sleeps ' for days, and
* summers and winters ' for years. There is no Article,
3. Proxouns.
The pronouns must be carefully used, for a very slight change
in the termination of any one of them will alter altogether the
force and meaning of a sentence.
The 2')erso7ial jjronouns avo : —
Singular. Plural.
G-adjo or ganya, 'I.' Gala-ta, 'we.'
N'yundo or ginni, 'thou.' N'yurag, 'ye.'
Bal, 'he, she, it.' Balgun, 'they.'
They are thus declined :-
Nam,
Gen.
Daf.
Accu.
Ahl.
1st.
I G-adjo
) Ganya
Gannalak
Ganna
Ganyain
Singular.
2nd.
N'yundo
Ginni
Nyunnolak
jSI'yunno
Ginnin
Plural.
3rd.
I Bal
Balak
Bah\k
Balin
Balal
Nom, Galata N'yurag Balgun
Gen, Gannilak N'yuragak Balgundk
Lat. Gannilak N'yuragal Balgunak
Ace. Gannil (-in) N'yuragin Balgunin
Ahl. Gannilal N'yuragal Balgunal
There are thus two forms for the Sing. Kom. of the first and
second pi'onouns ; gad jo and n'yundo seem to be used with an
active sense of the verb, but ganya and ginni with a passive
sense; for there is no passive /or?)i of the verb, and there is no
verb ' to be'; ganya and ginni are always used with a parti-
cii)le or an adjective; gadjo and n'yundo are never so used.
Examples of their use: — Gadjo djinnag, 'I see,' but ganya
bardin, 'I am going '; gadjo dtan, 'I pierce,' but ganya gan-
nauin, ' I am eating.'; gadjo burno dendagaga, ' I climbed a
tree,' but ganya waugalal bukkanaga, 'I was bitten by a
snake'; ganya windo, 'I am old'; ganya garrag, 'I am
angry.' Similarly for the second pronouns ; as, n'yundo kattidj,
'do you undei'stand "? but y an ginni wan-gauin, 'what are
THE DIALECT OF W, ATTSTKALIA. 53
you talking about'"? n'yundo naitjak gabbi ganna gagau-
bru, ' why cio you not fetch me water'? but ginni naitjak
balin bumawin,- 'why are you beating me'?; ginni cljul,
* you are wicked'; ginni goradda, ' you are short.'
1st. 2nd. 3rd.
Kom. 1. G-alli Nubal Bula
2. Galla lilubal Bulala
3. Grannik Nubin Bulen.
Another form of gannik is gannana.
The forms marked nom. 1 are used by brothers and sisters or
two friends closely related; nom. 2., by parent and child or by
nephew and uncle ; nom. 3., by husband and wife or by two
persons of different sexes affectionately attached, or (gannana)
by two brothers-in-law.
The Possessive Pronouns are : —
Gr a n n a, ' my, ' g a n n a 1 a k, ' mine '; n'y u n n a, ' thy, ' n'y u n-
nalak, n'yunnalag, 'thine'; balak, balalak, 'his, her, its/
gannilak, 'our or ours'; n'yuragak, 'your or yours'; balgunak,
' their o?" theirs.' The Demonstrative Pronouns are: — N'yagga,
'that,' 'those'; nidj a, ' this,' 'these.' Tl\ie Interrogative Pronouns
iire: — Ganni, 'who'? i.e., 'who are you'? gando, 'who"? i.e.,
' who did that '? gannog, * whose '?
4. Veres.
The verbs in most common use are : —
Arise — irabin Fight — bakadju
Beat — buma Fl_y — bardag
Become — abbin Go — bardo; watto
Bite — ^bakkan Go away — kolbardo
Break — takkan Hear — kattidj
Bring; carry off; take Pain — bakkan
away — barrag Pierce — dtan
Marry — kardo barrag See— djinnag; gan-gau
Burn (tire) — burrariip Sit — ginnau
Bury — bianan Speak — wan-gau
Carry — gagau Spear — gidjil
Cook — dukun Stand — yugau
Cry — mirag Take — gagau
Cry out — mirau Tear — jeran
Dig — bian Throw — gwardo
Eat, drink — ganno ; nalgo. Tie — yutarn
Fear — waien Understand — kattidj
Walk — ganna u.
54 AN AUSTRALIANS' LANGL'AGE,
Imperatives are : —
Come here — koAva-kowa, yual Leave it alone — bal or waiija
Go on — gatti Listen — nah-nah
Get np — irap Take care — garrodjin
Go away — watto Stay, remain — nannup
Tenses.
\. Indie, present. — For this, use either the infinitive or tlie form
of the present participle ; as, gadjo djinnag, 'I see'; but
ganya buraawin, *I am beating.'
2. Ijidic. preterite. — Use the past participle, or add -ga to the in-
finitive ; the relative distance of the past periods of time is
indicated by prefixing to the tense the words gori, 'just now,'
karamb, ' a short time since,' gorah, ' a long time ago.'
3. Indie, future. — Here the first and second personal pronouns
singular become gadjul and n'yundul, ' I will,' ' you wulL'
The distance of the future time is indicated by placing before
the verb the adverbs bur da, 'presently,' and mila for any
more remote time.
4. Imperative mood. — Lay emphasis on the last vowel of the
present indicative.
5. Participle jn-esent. — Add -in or -win to the infinitive.
,, past, — Add -ga to the infinitive.
6. Passive voice. — Here the form of the sentence is elliptical ;
therefore ganya, ginni are used with the past participle and
the ablative of the instrument or cause.
DECLENSION of a TRANSITIVE VERB.
Buma, * to beat,' ' kill,' * blow as a flower.'
Infinite — Buma. Part. pres. — Bumawin.
Part. past. — Bumaga.
Tense 1. *bumawin. 1\ 2. *gori bumaga. T. 3. fburda buma.
T. 4. buma.
These numbers indicate the Tenses as shown above.
*The pronouns to be used here are: — Sing, ganya, ginni,
bal; Plur. galata, n'yurag, balgun ; but instead of ganya
and ginni, T. 2. takes gadjo and nyundo ; there use the forms
gadjul, n'yundul.
Passive Voice. — ^For the passive voice, use the same tense-forms
as in the active voice, that is, buma for the pres. and the/ut.,
and bumaga for the past, but prefix to them the accusative cases
of the personal pronouns ; thus, ganya-in gori bumaga, 'I was
THE DIALECT OF "W. ArSTBALIA. 5o
beaten lately'; lit., ' (some one) beat me lately.' But the ablative
of the cause or instrument may also be used to form a passive
voice; thus, ganya gidjial d tan nag a, 'I am pierced by a
spear.'
The substantive verh. — There does not appear to be any
copula; it is certainly not used in such sentences as ganya
yulap, 'I am hungry'; ginni kotyelara, 'thou art thin'; bal
windo, 'he is old'; galata gwabba, 'we are good'; n'yurag
djul, 'you are wicked'; balgun mindait, 'they are sick.'
5. Adverbs.
The adverb is placed before the verb ; useful adverbs are : —
After (behind) — golan-ga Never — yuatjil
Again — garro No — yuada
Already — gori Not — bart ; bru ; yuada
Always — dowir Now — yaii
Before (in front) — gwaicagat Perhaps^gabbain
Close to ; near — barduk So — winnirak
Continually — kalyagal So many — winnir
Enough — belak That way — wunno
Formerly — karamb Tlien — garro
Here — n'yal There (j)rox.) — yellinya
How many — namman „ (remote) — boko ; bokoja
Immediately — gwaic; ilak Where — winji; winjal; yan
Thus — wanno-ic Yes — qua
More — gatti-gatti Yonder — bokoja
6. Prepositions.
These are few in number : —
After {clat.) — golag On (upon) — gadja
Among (2Mrtitive) — manda To ak or -al
„ (mixed with) — kardagor With (in company with) —
By (affix) al „ gambarn (takes the ace);
In (within) — bura „ barduk (takes the dat.)
Of ak Without— bru
In use, they are all post-jjositions, and are always placed after
the noun or pronoun. Gradj a is used of one thing lying on another,
but never of anything lying on the ground.
7. Interrogation, Affirmation, Negation.
A question is asked by putting kannah at the end of the sen-
tence ; as, n'yundo tonka, kannah, 'do you hear"? An answer
may be given by qua, ' yes,' or by affixing -bak to the word used
in reply ; as, yallanait, 'what is that'? burnu-bak, 'it is a
tree.' If the reply is negative, put bart or bru after verbs, and
yuada after adjectives.
56 A>' AUSTEALIA^' LANGUAGE.
8. CONJUXCTIOXS.
G-udjir, 'and'; minnig, 'if; ka, 'or.' Tliore is no word for
' when,' but minnig and ka are used in its stead ; for instance,
' Avlien I see you to-moi'row ' will be expressed by 'if I see you
to-morrow'; and ' when did you come to Perth '? will be ' did you
come to Perth to-day or yesterday '?
9. Interjectioxs.
Nah— ah ! so ! (to indicate that a person is listening to what is
related), and n'yon — -'alas'!
GUAMMAE AND VOCABULARY
OF THE ABORIGINAL DIALECT CALLED
THE WIRRADHURI.
[The Wirradliiiri dialect, or, as I call it, the Wiradhari, covers the whole
heart of N. S. Wales ; its hmits are shown on the map of the native tribes.
I consider myself fortunate in having secured the pubhcation of the
Grammar and Vocabulary of so impoi'tant a tribe. The following manu-
script was written about fifty years ago by the late Archdeacon Giinther,
and is specially reliable because of its author's character and experience,
and because, at that time, the tribe had not j-et begun to decay, and its
language was entire. He was educated for the Ministry at Basle, in
Switzerland, attending lectures there at the University and the Missionary-
College ; suljsequently he prosecuted his studies at the C. M. Society's
College, Islington, London.
In 1S37, he commenced his missionary work among the aborigines of the
Wiradhari tribe at " "Wellington Valley," now Wellington, in Xew South
Wales. Here he compiled this Grammar and Vocabulary ; he also trans-
lated the Gospel by St. Luke and portions of the Prayer Book for the use
of the tribes on the Macquarie River and the neighbouring country. His
efforts and those of the mission party, in ameliorating the condition of the
natives and teaching them, met with considerable success. After the
mission was abandoned by the authorities, he was induced by Bishop
Broughton to accept the parish of Mudgee, where he laboured for many
years, and died in December, 1879.
These MSS. are the property of the late Mr. Giinther's son, the present
Archdeacon of Camden, New South Wales, who has kindly lent them to
me for this pui-pose. In editing them, I have retained the author's mode
of spelling the native words, and have made only some slight alterations in
the form of the matter of the Grammar and the Vocabulary, with the view
of securing greater symmetry throughout. — Ed.]
THE WIKADIIAEI DIALECT. 57
1. THE GRAMMAE.
1. The Declension of Nouns.
Tliei'e is, properly speaking, only one primary declension, Ijut the
principle of assimilation, to whicli the language has a strong
tendency, sometimes produces slight variations of the termin-
ations of the nouns before the case-endings ; similarly, when the
last letter but one of the stem is i.
In order to cover all these variations, the number of the de-
clensions will amount to eight. It must, however, be observed
that here the formation of cases differs anaterially from the modes
used in other languages, at least from that of the Latin and
Greek. The simple or nominative form undergoes no alteration,
but, to form the cases, it takes additions by means of posthxes.
The only apparent exception to this rule is that where the letter
i is cast out. The number of cases cannot easily be fixed, since
almost every relation in which a noun may be placed is signified
by some postfix or other ; those given in the examples below in-
clude the most common and essential relations.
A strange peculiarity of this language is the existence of two
nominative-forms — the one the simjole oiominative or nominative-
declarative, corresponding to the question ' who or what is it "?
and the other the nominative active, when the thing or person
spoken of is considered as an agent ; this answers to the question,
' who or what does it '"? The genitive and the dative are alike ;
the accusative is the same as the simple nominative ; the vocative
is known by the exclamatory word ' ya ' put before the simple
nominative, or by its termination, which is like that of the genitive.
The case-endings and their meanings may be shown thus : — •
Case.
Terminations.
Meaning.
1.
Nominative
the simple form.
2.
Nom. agent.
-du, -dyu, -gu, lu, -ru
the agent form.
3.
Genitive
-gu
'of; ' belonging to.'
4.
Dative
-gu
'to,' 'for,' 'tovmrds.'
6.
Accusative
the same as nom. 1.
the direct object.
6.
Vocative
prefixes ya to nom, 1.
7.
Locomotive
-dyi, -li, -ri
place from which.
8.
Conjunctive
-durai or -durei
' together with.'
9.
Locative
-da, -dya, -ya, -la, -ra
'in,' 'on,' 'at.'
.0.
Instrumental
-durada
' by means of.'
The numbering of the cases corresponds with that shov/n on the Paradigm.
The same word is both singular and plural without change ;
only when the idea of plurality is to be conveyed, the noun adds
the word galag and is then declined like w alia g of the paradigm.
58
AN ATJSTEALIAN LANQIJAGE.
-3 =: I bo
J* e4 ce J«
=a
=y
12;
o
o
<
P-l
m
a f^
-Cj
-*
pq
-Ci
D = — -2 tc ^
so
.SP •-
to
■73
c3
o
•_s
, o
^
'Oi
CS
«'3
'S
S
M
TS ft
^
cS
X
rt."
HH
0)
ef c3
"o
tOSj
c3
0)
o
s
^
02
^
■•- w
0}
u
-azl
u
o
§5
^
^
ei;
■*
^ a
>3
3
aj
f>>
3
>5
tifi
rr;
'O
•r!
f^^
^
a
j5
•S
c!
.3
3
*^
IS
O
IS
•-3
S
3
^
^
e
3
^
3
w
m
pq
>i
w
W
w
w m p3 pq
3
■:2 >,
3
3
bO
'2
T3
3
TJ
q
a
3
rt
cS
§
'5
'rt
cS
'S
•^
■^
2
•72
2
2
Is
Is
"^
Is
"cS
"cS
^
^
^
g
&
s
5
O
3
3
o
o
> ^ ^ -o ^ ^
b
P5 pq p:^ pq
p:i
13 P
j3 -S" ^" C P
P3
P5 pq pq pq
pq pq
.2 ^
^ MO
I ^.1
O CS
-^pq
^2
S 3
m 'o
=S 3
" CS
■^ ;^ _ cs .^
3 !* 3 c ^
cS r3 r3 •"./.
■5 '-'
c3r-
S"fq
^ ;S
teg en >
^3 -^ '^
05 to
o
a> '-I
Qi S
fccfq
3-^3
J-
-
3
. cS
'"i
3
3
a
-ki "73
•^
bO
•^
« 'S
3
3
C3
■■^ eS
w
cS
cS
3
rt
cS
^
■^
rS
n3
'^
S
S
•^
•^
cS
cS
'i
cS
c3
S
S '
S
S
>H
•S^Si
'0
F^
ci
-^
ITS
c rs "^ '^
S S IS s
THE WIHABHAEI DIALECT. 59
The examples given above show that the variations in declension
arise from assimilation. Thus, when r or I is the last sound of the
word, these letters assimilate the initial consonant of the postfix.
If the vowel of the last syllable is i, either ending the word or
syllable or followed by n, euphony adds the sound of y to the a
of the postfix ; thus, d]/a, cltju, dyi appear instead of da, dii, di.
"When i is ejected, this rule does not apply. The ejection of i pre-
ceded by a takes place in the Nom. 2 and in the Locative.
If the possessive pronoun is put before its noun, it is declined
Avith the same termination as the noun. But the more common
practice is to put the pronoun behind it in an abbreviated form as
a postfix ; as, buraigundi, 'to my boy'; buraigunu, ' to your
boy'; buraigugula, ' to his boy.' ' To my boy,' with the posses-
sive pronoun detached, would be gaddiguburaigu.
2. The Comparison of Adjectives.
There is no comparative form of the adjective, nor, properly
speaking, a superlative, though certain terminations, such as bag
'very,' bambilag 'exceedingly,' express a superlative or a very
high quality of the thing. Hence the comparisons on things are
expressed in an indistinct manner. To say, ' this is better than
that,' would be ginna marog, wirai gannalla ; lit., 'this is
good, not that '; nila garambag, gainguagual, ^if., 'this very
good, that also.' But to say, 'this is the be.st of all,' would be nila
marogbangan, wirai igianna ginnallal; lit., 'this is good
indeed, these are not like it.' Adjectives may be declined like
nouns, but in syntax they are not always declined.
3. The Verb.
The study of the verb is attended with some difficulty on ac-
count of its many tenses and modifications ; it is, however, con-
jugated in a very regular manner, and, excepting the imperative,
it is non-inflexional throughout all its tenses, all the persons, both
singular and plural, having the same form. The conjugations
may be reduced to about five, nor do these vary much, and, so far
as they do vary, they follow strict rules according to the ter-
mination of the last syllable and the vowel preceding it.
The verbs, then, are arranged in conjugations according to the
terminations of the present tense of the indicative ; thus : —
Terminations of Conjugations.
1. -dnna or -ana ; 2. -unna ; 3. -inga ; 4. -arra ; 5. -irra.
The vowel of the penultimate syllable may be said to terminate
the radical part of the verb, which is retained in all the tenses
and modifications, whilst the remainder is liable to be thrown oflf.
Those tenses where a becomes ai are only appai-ent exceptions to
the rule.
60 AN AUSTKALTAX LAXOUAOE.
Tn the formation of the tenses and modifications, the letter r
is changed into its rehitive liquid /, and n, for the sake of euphony,
is clianged into 7n by assimilation. Eupliony also requires an a
terminating the root to be modified into the diphthong ai ; and
nd, on account of the influence of the preceding i, becomes 7i(l)/.
The Texses.
There are . no fewer than ten tenses in the language ; besides
those common to most languages, some are peculiar tenses which
have an adverbial signification.
The following shows the conjugation of a simple verb : —
Buma, * beat,'
Indicative Mood.
T. 1. (Present Tense).
Sing. 1. Graddu* bumarra I beat.
2. Gindu* bumarra Thou beatest.
3. Gruin* bumarra He, she, beats.
Dual. G-alli bimiarra AVe (two) beat.
Galligu bumarra He and I beat.
Flu. 1. Greanni bumarra We beat.
2. Gindugir bumarra You beat.
3. Guaingulia bumarra They beat.
T. 2. G-addu bumalgarrin T. 6. Graddu bumalinni
3. Graddu bumalgurranni 7. (raddn bumalgirri
4. Graddu bumae 8. Graddu bumalgirriawagirri
5. Gaddu l)uma]guan 9. Gaddu Inunal garrigirri
T. 10. (Fut.-perf.) Gaddu bumalyigirri.
The T. numbers here indicate the Tenses as ou page 26 of this volume.
Infinitive.
Bumalli, 'to beat.'
Imperative.
Sing. 1. Bumallidyu, ' let me beat.'
2. Bumalla (fbuma), 'beat thou.'
3. Bumallaguin barri, ' let him beat. 'J
Dual Galli bumalli, ' let us two beat.'
Gulagalligunna bumalli, ' let him and me beat.'
Plu. 1. Bumalli geanni, ' let us beat.'
2. Gindugir bumalla (fbuma), 'beat you.'
3. Bumalla guaingulia barri, ' let them beat.'
*For emphasis use here — Sing. 1. yallu o?* baladu, o?- j'alludu ; 2.
balundu ; 3. balaguin. f This abbreviated form is often used. :{: The
verbs ending in -ana or -anna differ from this in Imj). sing. 1, 2, 3.
THE ■WIEADIIARI DIALECT.
61
Verbal Noun.
Bumalgidyal (bumagidyrtl), ' beating.'
This form, being a verbal noun, can never be nscd as a participle. In
the Greek language and the German, the infinitive serves as a verbal noun ;
so also the Latin supine and gerundive.
The forms which supply our participles are classed with the
modifications of the verb. The subjunctive is formed with mal-
1 ag, the optative with bag ; for there are no real subjunctive or
potential forms. Sentences of that description are expressed by a
kind of auxiliary, such as garra or mallag; or by the future
tense, with the conditional conjunction yandu attached : —
Yandundu dalgirri, ' if I should eat.'
G-addu garra dalgirri, 'I can or would eat.'
G-addu mallag de, 'I would or should eat' {or have eaten).
Yandundu mallag de, 'if you did eat' {or would eat).
Mallag here is not a verb but a mere subjunctive particle.
Nor is there a form for the passive. A kind of passive is some-
times expressed by putting the subject in the accusative, along
with the active form of the verb ; but the source whence comes
the action is not named, for that can only be put in the agent-
nominative case. Hence, it must be that this is not in reality a
passive, but an active sentence ; only, for the sake of laying more
emphasis on the action done, the agent is omitted.
Table op Conjugations, Principal Tenses, and Moods.
Present. Imperfect. Perfect.
1. Yannanna Yanne Yan-niin (-i.e., -naan)
Gruna Grune Graguain
2. Yunna Yunne Yunnan
3. Gumbiga Gumbinna Gmnbinnan
4. Baddarra Baddae Baddalguan
5. Gaddambirra Gaddambie Gaddambilguan
Future.
Yannagirri
Gragirri
Yungirri
Gumbigirri
Badalgirri
Gaddambil"
Infinitive.
Yannagi
Gagi _
Yungi
Gnmbigi
Badalli
Gaddambilli
Impierative.
Yannada*
Gaga
Yunga
Gumbidya
Badalla
Gaddambia
This table contains all the principal tenses — those in which
different conjugations vary. The other tenses of each conjugation
follow the model given for the verb bumarra. Of course, not
every verb is used in all the tenses; thus, yunne, the imper-
fect, is not used. The numbers indicate the conjugations.
* The imperative is often shortened j as, nada, na; galla, ga; malla, ma.
62 AN AUSTEALIAN LA^'GUAGE.
The conjugations of certain letters may occasionally, but rarely,
cause the general rules to be violated for the sake of euphony ;
thus, the verb mugana has in the i)erfect tense mugaiguun, not,
as might be expected, mugaguan, no doubt, on account of two
' g's' being so near each other.
4. Modifications of the Verb.
A characteristic feature and peculiarity of this aboriginal dia-
lect is the use of numerous postfixes. By means of these, the
noun shows an unusual number of cases, which supply in a certain
measure the absence of our prepositions. In a similar manner, the
verb takes additions or changes of its form, by which new forms
it expresses its modified significations according to the various
relations in which the simple verb may be placed. These tend to
enrich the language considerably, since the modified ideas im-
plied in them often produce quite a new kind of word or signifi-
cation. As new verbs, they may be adjusted to some one or other
of the examples already given, agreeably to their terminations.
Hence they can never be supposed to be merely conjugations.
For the sake of convenience, I shall carry one verb through
the modifications, though it cannot be expected that all verbs are
used or needed in every modification. I will take the root-form
buma, 'beat,' as the chief example of these modifications, but
another suitable one will be always added.
Some of the postfixes in those examples have doubtless lost or
changed their original signification in certain verbs.
Examples of the use of Suffixes to modify the meaning of Verbs.
1. Bianna, 'a constancy of action'; as, bumal-bianna, 'to
be always beating'; ga-bianna, 'to be always looking.
2. Gunnanna, 'a present continuance of action'; as, bumal-
gunnanna, ' to be now beating '; ga-gunnanna, 'now looking
on.'
Both of these are used for our participle, but in a definite and indicative
way ; but as, like other verbs, they are conjugated, and never employed as
adjectives, they cannot be considered as participial forms, but only as
modifications of the verbs.
3. Awaigunnanna, 'along continuance'; as, bumal-awai-
gunnanna, 'to be beating a longtime'; gagawaigunnanna,
'to be looking on long.' This does not much differ from No. 2.
4. Gar rim ana, ' a continuance of all day long'; bumal-gar-
rimana, ' to be beating all daylong'; bunba-gar.rimana, 'to
run about all day long.'
5. Guabianna, 'a continuance for the night'; bumallai-
guabianna, ' to beat (fight) all the night '; winai-guabianna,
' to sit up all night.'
6. Dillinga (r^ex'iw); as, bumangi-dillinga, ' to beat one's
self; mirama-dillinga, 'to defend one's self.'
THE WIEADHAEI DIALECT.
63
7. Lanna (^recAprocal) ; as, bunial-lanna,'to beat eacli other,'
Ho fight '; nurungamil-lanna, 'to love each other.'
8. Alinga {reiterative); as, bumal-alinga, 'to beat again';
yannai-alinga, 'to go again.'
9. Numinga implies that an action is to last for a little time
only before another ; as, bumal-numinga, 'to beat previously';
ganuminga, 'to see beforehand.'
10. Mambirra is causative and permissive; as, bumali-mam-
birra, 'to let beat'; yal-mambirra, 'to cause one to speak,'
*to teach.'
11. Gambirra, instrumental; meaning that a thing has been
done by means of an instrument, tool, 07" weapon; as, bumal-
gambirra (not used) ; bangal-gambirra, ' to break by throw-
ing at (or hitting) with something.'
12. Billinga, submissive; expressive of obedience to a com-
mand ; as, buma-billinga, 'to beat when told or ordered';
yanna-billinga, 'to go when ordered ofi.'
13. Eilinga implies a vicarious action — an action done on
behalf of, or instead of, another; as, bum-eilinga, 'to beat in-
stead of another'; barram-eilinga, 'to get or provide* for
another.'
14. Duringa seems to intimate a change of action, the turning
of one's attention from one thing to another, or to do a thing
well and thoroughly; as, bumal-duringa, 'to leave of the pre-
sent act of beating'; winnanga-duringa, ' to forget,' ' to think
of something else '; ' to reflect.'
15. Wanna probably signifies an aim at or a purpose to do a
thing ; or rather, to act in a kind of series of doings, one after
another, going all round, or to be just in the act of doing ; as,
bumalla-wanna, 'to beat one after another'; yannaia-wanna,
' to walk away,' ' to walk from one place to another.'
16. Danna means the resuming of an action after having
taken refreshment; as, bumal-danna, 'to beat again' after
eating; bumba-danna, 'to run off again' after a little refresh-
ment.
17. Grilanna indicates a kind of dual action; as, bumalu-
gilanna, 'two to beat together at once '; bumban-gilanna, ' two
to run together.'
18. Yarra is the verb ' to speak'; it can be put or joined to any
verb as a postfix, and is then expressive of a command ; ' ba ' is
put between as a uniting syllable; thus, yanna-ba-yarra, 'to
order to go', ' to send away '; bumal-ba-garra, ' to tell to beat.'
19. Birra, nirra, dirra, banirra, bamarra, bunmarra;
these particles, when joined to a neuter or an intransitive vei-b,
give it a transitive and causative signification ; thus, from
gannarra, 'to burn,' is formed gannal-birra, 'to set on fire 'j
ballunna, 'to die 'gives ballubunirra, 'to kill'; banganna,
Git A2f AL'STKALIAN LANGUAGE.
to break' (of itself), banga-dirra, 'to chop, smasli '; yannanna
'to go,' yannabanirra,' 'to make go,' 'to drive,' and yaniia-
buninarra, ' to cause to go away '; from malvbinga, 'to stay,
stop ' comes mabbi-bamarr a, ' to make one stay.' Bun man a
is a vei-b by itself signifiying ' to make, to do.'
20. Maranna implies a reference to a previous action, on
wliicli the action of the verb is dependent; as, bumal-maranna,
'to beat after' having caught one; dal-mavanna, 'to eat after'
having picked it up.
21. Nana implies the adverb 'after'; as, bumal-nana, 'to
beat after another '; bunban-ntlna, ' to run after another '; g an-
na n a, ' look after one.'
22. Einga implies ' precedent, before '; as, bumal-einga, ' to
beat first,' i.e., before another; golleng-einga, 'to return first.'
23. Naringa, joined to a few verbs, implies that the action is
done by ' falling '; also figuratively, it is expressive of a rest after
moving; as, (1.) banga-naringa, 'to break by falling'; dalba-
naringa, 'to be dashed by falling'; (2.) wi-naringa, 'to settle
down'; warran-naringa, ' to make a call and stay a little.'
24. Biliina or balana is ahvays preceded by m even after
I. It implies the idea of ' moving on' or going along, and gradual-
ly getting into, whilst engaged in an action; as, ya-mbilana, ' to
cry whilst going along'; de-mbilana, 'to eat Avhilst walking ';
gu-mbilana, 'to become or get gradually,'
25. Buoanna implies both coming back and giving back; as,
buogal-buoanna, 'to come back'; yanna-mbuoanna, ' to go
back'; gu-mbuoanna, 'to give back'; nanna-mbuoanna,' to
throw back.'
There are also some words that attach themselves to verbs as
auxiliaries ; as, —
1. Garra, ' to be,' used only with the present indicative. Its
abbreviation, ga, is used interrogatively.
2. "VVarre goes with present and future time. Its abbrevia-
tion is wa — also used interrogatively.
3. Bala, 'to be,' or ba, is more affirmative ; in its shorter form,
ba, it strengthens pronouns; as, baladu, ' I am '
4. Yamma is an interrogative word, like the English 'do';
it is most commonly joined to pronouns. None of these auxili-
aries has any effect on the structure of the sentence.
In the passive use of the verb, the subject is merely put in the
accusative, and the verb remains unaltered.
5. EOKMATION OF "WORDS.
Derivatives are formed from the roots of verbs by adding
various terminations. Thus, -dain denotes the agent who dos
the action e.^pressed by the verb; as, birbara, 'to bake,' birba
TUE "^'lEADIIAEI DIALECT. 65
daiu, 'abater.' The -tt'ord -gidyal forms participial nouns;
as, kabiuga, 'to begin,' kabin-gidyal, ' a beginning'; winan-
ganna, ' to know,' winan-gidyal, ' the knowing,' 'knowledge.'
The terminations -mubag and -mugu denote the absence of
some quality; as, uda, 'ear,' uda-mugu, 'deaf; maroug,
'good' marom-mubang, 'bad,' lit., 'good-less.'
Adjectives are formed from nouns by reduplication, or by
suffixes; as, wallang, 'stone,' walla-wallang, 'stony'; win,
'fire,' wi-win, 'hot'; ngarru, 'honey,' ngarru-ngarru,
'sweet.' Terminatives are, -durai; as, wallan-durai, 'having
stone,' 'stony'; -bang; as, win-munnilbang 'hollow fire-
wood,' from munnil, 'a hole ' ; -bang also signifies increase or
multitude and thus has a collective force; as, gibbir, 'man,'
gibbir-bang, 'many men,' 'mankind'; ingel, 'ill,' ingel-
bang, 'very ill.' Durai, as a suffix to a verb-stem, implies
ability to perform the action of the verb ; as, bambinga, 'to
swim,' bambi-durai, 'able to swim'; yanna, 'to walk,'
yannaidurai, ' able to walk ' ; with nouns it also denotes the
possession of the thing ; as, yamandu daluban-durai, 'have
you a soul,' lit., ' are you soul-having or soul-with ?'
Marra, 'to do,' 'to make,' joined to another verb, or, oitener,
to nouns and adjectives, answers exactly to the Latin facio ; as,
giwai, 'sharp,' giwai-marra, 'to sharpen'; giw a, 'wet, moist,'
giwa-marra, 'to moisten'; gullai, ' net,' gullai-marra, 'to net,
to make a net.' Hence the natives join -marra to English verbs ;
as, grind-marra, 'to grind'; ring-marra, ' to ring the bell.'
6. C0NJUXCTI0>'S A^D AdTEEBS.
Wargu, widdyua, ' what for,' 'why'? widdy ung, ' whicli
way'? widdy ugguor, ' which side (direction)'? widdyuggu,
'when'? widdyuggaga, ' I don't know when'; minyangan,
'how many'? minyanganga, 'I don't know how many';
minyanganda, 'how many times'? minyangandaga, 'I
don't know how many times'; warban (used with yamma-
garra), ' how much '?
Da (the d being sounded very soft) signifies locality ; as,
dag a, 'where'? dagu, 'of what place'? dagii, 'to what
place'? dagannibangalla, ' in what place'? dadibaggalli,
dadilabaggalli, 'whence'? dadiurruinbaggalli, 'through
what place'? dadibaggallingirriage, 'by what place did
he come' ? Each of these by the addition of -ga may become
an answer, equivalent to '1 don't know where,' &c. Other
a'iverbs of place are: — dain, 'this way,' 'hither'; yain, 'that
way,' 'thither'; ngidyi, 'here'; ngauniain, ' over there.'
7. XUMEEALS.
Ngunbai, 'one'; bula, ' two'; bulangunbai, 'three'; bungu,
'four' or ' many '; murrugai, 'first'; umbai, 'last.'
e
66 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
EXAMPLES of THE DECLENSION of VERBS and PnONOUNS.
1. The Verb.
Dara, 'to eat.'
The Tense numbers here ai'e the same as on page 26 of this volume.
Inbicatiye Mood.
1. Dara 6. Deinni
2. De 7. Dal^iiTi
3. Dalgurranui 8. AVari dalgarriawagirri
4. 9. Dalgarrigirri
5. Dalguaan 10. {Fut.-Ferf.) Degirri
Impeeatite Mood.
Singular.
Dalla, ' eat thou ' Dallidyu, ' let me eat '
Dallaguiu barri, ' let him eat.'
Dual.
Gullallgunnanna barri dalla, or ngaguala dalla barri, or gula-
ngalligunna dalli, ' let him and me eat together.'
Grula barri dalla bulagu, or dalla guain bulagu barri, ' let them
two eat together.'
]N"gallibul dalla, or iigindu bula dalla, ' you two eat.'
Plural.
Dalla ngeauni, 'let us eat.' jSTgindugir dalla, ' eat you.'
Dalla guaiugulia barri, ' let them eat.'
Grulagalanguudugir dalla, ' let me and many eat together.'
Subjunctive and Potential Moods.
These moods are frequently expressed by the future tense with
yandundu, 'if,' 'when,' added; by the auxiliary verb garra, and
especially by the word mallaug ; see page 01 of this appendix.
Paeticiples.
These are declined like verbs in all the tenses and moods.
There are two participles ; the one ends in -bianna, and the
other in -g unnann a ; the former seems to imply a longer con-
tinuance of time than the other.
Indicative.
1. Dalgunnana {or dalbianna), 'I am eating.'
2. Dalgunnani, ' I was eating.'
5. Dalguain, ' I have been eating.'
THE WIEADnAEI DIALECT.
67
Eeflexive Mood.
Dalgydyilliiiga
Dalgidyilliugarrinni
Dalgidyilliugurranui
Dalgidyillinyi
Dalgidyillin
G. Deingidyillin
7. Dalligidyilligirri [girri.
8. "Wari dalligidyillingarriawa-
9. Wari dalligidyillingarri
10. Wari deingidyilliugirri
By using other verbs from the Wiradhari Vocabulary, addi-
tional examples of the formation of tenses in the Indicative are: —
Pres. Dara — Tanna. Pcrf- Bumalguaan — TannJtan.
Imperf. Xgunne — Yunne. Fluperf. Mindallanni — Tannanni.
Incep.fut. "Widyalgirri — Tannigirri.
Tiidef. flit. Talgarrigirri — Tanngarrigirri.
Fut. I'erf. Gurragamegirri — Tannegirri.
Def.past (a). Badalgurranni — Yangurranni.
„ (h). Giwalgarrin — Yangarrin.
Def. fid. Baugamalgarriawagirri — Yangarriawagirri.
2. The Tronouns.
The mimbei'inc' of the cases here is the same as for the nouns.
Singular.
Gaddu, 'I'
Gaddi or gaddigu
G-anundaJ
Gannal
Gaddidyi
Gannundurai
Plural.
1. & 2. Geanni
3.
4. Geannigingut
Geannigingunnaga;J;
5. Geannigiugunna
7. Geannigindyi
8. Geanniffindurai
Gannunda milanda, ('near') 9. Geannigindya milanda
Gannundi, (' from ') Geaaniginbai
Flu.
o
Giudu, ' thou '
1. &2.
Gindugir
3.
Ginnu
3.
Ginnugir
4.
Ginyunda;]]
4.
Ginnundugir
5.
Ginyal
5.
Ginyalgir
8.
Ginnundigirdurai
Flu. 9.
Ginnundugira milanda
Pht.
2. Guin, gu, 'he'
3. Guggula or
Guaguwan
4. Guan, gagguan
5. Ginyal
7. Gannain-gulialla
1. & 2. Guin- {or -guain) gulia
3. Guinguliagu or
Guingulialla
4. Gaggu-lia (or -lialla)t
Gannigu-lia (or -lialla);J:
5. Gannaiagulialla
Plu. 8. Gannigulialladurai
* This portion of Mr. Glinther's manuscript is so imperfect that I cannot
say that the cases of these pronouns are all correct. — Ed.
t An ethical dative, as in 'give to me.' J Asort of locative, asin 'cometome.'
G8 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Dual pronouns are : —
Norn. — (1) Ngalli, 'thou and I'; (2) ngcan-ugalligunna,
'ho and I'; (3) ngindubula, 'you two'; (4) ngainbula,
'they two'; (5) bulagual, 'the other two'; (6) nginnabula,
'these two'; (7) ngilla bula, 'those two'; (8) ngalliguyuu-
ganba, ' our two selves.'
Ofthese, the inflexions of (3) are: — ^^7e?^.,ngindubulagu; dat.
(heal), nginyunda bulagu ; o£ (4) : — ffen. anddaf.^ ugaggu-
wanbulagu; ace, ngannainbula; ahlaiives, ugainbulabar,
('about'); ngaddainbuladi ('from'); ngannainbulaga,
('in'); the inflexions of (8) are: — gen., guyungangalligin-
bul ; fl'a^., ngalligingunnabul ; «c'dmexts.
1. Ngaddn bala Dirangalbang God nginnu iigunbai ; Ngan-
nunda nginda nginya wirai gualman God nginda.
2. Karia nginnunda maingulia bunma, wirai ingianna minyam-
bul nganuaiwal murrubirra, wirai ingianna dagunda birrabangga,
wirai ingianna ngannadarnguoia kalindya. Karia ngualla bung-
anga warradda, wirai buoyamadda: JS^gaddubial Diranggalbang
Godnu bala munnirgadain God, ngaddnbu gibainbilgirri uan-
giimalngidyal babbiudyila, buraigelang tliirdgu fcurthgubu gene-
ratiougu yandungaunalla dallaimalgirri ngannal, ngaddu binnal-
bang ngingirri thousandgu yandu nganuaUa murungamilbilgirri
ngaunal, ngaddibu ngiang malbilUrgirri.
3. Karia nannai yalla yuinga Godgu wiraibial Dirangalbanggn :
bangayalgirri ngannalla nannai yari a yuingulagu.
4. AVinnangaddu Sabbatba irimbang widya. Bullaga-bullaga-
bullaga irada minyambul malla, bunmallabu minyaminyambul
nginnunda bala bunmalligu; seventbabial irada bala Sabbath Dir-
angalbangu Godgunginnu. Graddialla wirai minyambulbial bun-
malla, wirai ngindu, wirai urrumannu, wirai ngamoriui, wirai ser-
vantgalang iigiinui gibbir inarbu, wirai cattle nginnu, wirai main-
gualbang ngannalla nginnudurai winya. Sixdabial irada Dirang-
albaugu murrubir, dagunbu, murriangbu, minyaminyambulba
nginalla nginya bunmae, guabinyebial seventha irada. JSilla irada
seventh bangan Dirangalbangu walluin yae, bunmaibu irimbang.
5. Indyamalla babbingunu gunnigunubu ; yala ngindu guayo
wiawaigunnagirri ngurambangga, ngannalla Goddu ngungirri.
6. Karia ballubuuia. 7. Karia garbaga bundidya.
8. Karia karrama. 9. Karia maindya dumbalma yambul.
10. Karia gurai nginga milmagu uiaingualbiranga, karia gurai
nginga inargu maingualbiranga, wiraibu gibbir servant, inar ser-
vantbu, wiraibu ox, wiraibu ass, wiraibu ngaguari nganuallagung.
120 att arstealian: laxguage.
5. The Lokd's Pbatlr.
Ngiannigin Babbin, ngindu murrubirra glnya (or iniuTubirra
ngiiiya). Yuiniiu walluiii yalla barri. Xgurambangaim barri
buogalla. Gurai nginnu {or guranii) iigia barri iigiinii vain da-
guiula, iiigiau wari murrubirra. Ngiiini irada va'Jabul ^vigge
nginuigiugunua uguuguuadda. Karia ugiaunigin naugumalngi-
dal ■\vi}iuangayalidya, ingiau iigianni "«irai wari ■\viuuaugayabuya
iigagguallabu uaugumarra ugiaunigiugunna. Karia ugiauuigin-
gunna gai:!;amaiiibia ; (lurwabiall u noiannigiugunna maromubandi ;
Ngiuuu bala ugurambaug, wallaubamba ; ngalgarambu, durrur-
durrurbuolin. Amen.
(E.)
PUAYEES
IN THE
AWABAKAL DIALECT.
[I have left the spelling just as I found it in the manuscript. The
reader, however, will recognise tlie syntax of the w"ords by comparing
them with those in the Gospel, The title in the manuscript runs thus : —
"A selection of prayers for the morning, from the service of the Church of
England, intended for the introduction of public worship amongst the
aborigines of Australia ; by the Venerable W. G. Broughton, xV. M., Arch-
deacon of New South Wales and its dependencies. Translated into the
Northumberland dialect by L. E. Threlkeld ; 1835." — Ed. J
Wiyella Ta Yirrhjirri Ta NgoroJcan Ka Ko.
Weyennux ngeen ba, keawai yarakai korien geen ba, nakoiyan
ngaiya ngeen bo ; wonto ba ngeen wiyennun ba yarakai ta ngea-
run ba, Murrorong ko tuloa ko Eloi-to warikulbko yarakai umulli
tangearunba, ngatun murrorong kakilli ko ngearun yarakai umulli
ta birung.
A! Eloi kaiyukan, Biynng-bai ngearun htx. Piriwul koba, Jesu
koba Krist koba, ngintoa ta umulli kan yantin koba, ngintoa ta
wiyelli kan to Piriwullo yantin kore koba ko ; wiyan ngeen nga-
tun minki Ian kuttan ngeen ngearun ba kowwul lin yarakai tin,
ngatun yarakai umulli tin ngeen yantin ta birung purreung ka
birung, kauwullan yarakai umalala kotulli kannei to, ngatun wiyelli
kan nei to, ngatun umulli kan nei to ngearun ba ko; ngiroung Pirri-
wul yirriyirri kan kin bukka pai ya bien kowwul ngeen kakilli
ko ngiroung kauwa yuna bota kakilli ko minki ngeen katan kau-
wul ngali tin yai'akai umulli tin ngearun ba tin, ngatun yarakai ta
kotalli ko ngearun ba ko umulli ta yarakai Kamunbilla ngearun.
Kamunbilla ngearun, ngintoa Biyungbai to murrorong tai ko, Yinal
PHATEES IX THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 121
lin ngironmba tin ngearun ba tin Pirriwullin Jesu tin Krist tin,
warikulla yantin tara umatoara yura ki kal, ngatun kamunbilla
yaraki ta birung ngurrauwil koa ngeen niroung, ngatun pital
iimauwil koa ngiroung yanti ko tia, Morron ta bungai kulla kau-
Avil koa ngii'oumba yitirra niurrorong wiyelli ko, ngatun killabin-
bin kakilli ko ngali tin Jesu kin, Krist tin Pirriwullin ngearun ba
kin. Amen.
A ! Pirriwul Biyungbai ngearun ba, Moroko ka ba, Eloi kaiyu
kan ta yanti ka tai, Ngintoa ta ngearun miroma ngorokan ta unti
ta purreung. Ngoloniulla bi ngearun unti purriung ka ngiro-
emba ko kaiyu kan ta ko kowwul Ian ta ko, ngatun kamunbilla,
yanoa wal umai yi kora yarakai ngeen, murra yikora yarakai kolang.
Wonto ba kauwil koa ngearun ba yantin umulli ta kakilli ko ngiro-
umba wiyelli ta birung murrorong umulli ko mikan ta giroung kin
ngali tin Jesu kin Krist kin, Piriwul lin ngearun ba kin. Amen.
Biyung-bai ngearun ba wokko ka ba moroko ka ba kuttan, kum-
munbilla ngiroung yitirra yirri-yirri kakilli ko. Paijnbunbilla
ngiroumba Pirriwul koba. Ngurrurbunbilla ngironmba wiyelli
kannei yanti moroko ka ba ngatun yanti purrai ta ba. Nguwa
ngearun purreung ka yanti katai takilli ko, Kgatun warekulla
ngearun ba yarakai umatoara ; yanti ta ngeen warika yantin to
wiyapaiyeen ngearun ba ; ngatun yuti yikora ngearun yarakai
umulli kan kolang ; miromuUa ngearun yarakai ta birung kulla
ta ngiroumba Pirriwul kannei, ngatun kaiyu kan, ngatun killi-
binbin yanti katai. Amen.
A ! Pirriwul potokuUea bi willing ngearun ba wiyelli ko ngatun
wiyennun wal kurraka ko ngearun ba ko murrorong ngiroumba.
Kauwa killabinbin kakilli ko gikoung Biyungbai ko, ngatun
ngikoung yinal ko, ngatun ngikoung Marai yirri-yirri kan ko.
Yanti kakulla ta kurri-kurri ka, yanti katan yakita, ngatun
kunnun wal yanti ka tai kakilli ko, yanti katai purrai wirran
korien. Amen.
Eloi kaiyu kan Biyungbai yantin ko ba murrorong ko ba,
Wirrobullikan ngeen ngiroumba, murrorong korien ta, wiyan
ngeen murrorong tuloa ngiroung yantin tin murrorong ngiroumba
kin, ngatun murrorong pittul umulli tin ngearun ngatun barun
yantin ko kore ko. Wiyan murrorong ngiroung ngeen ngali tin
umatoarin ngearun ba tin, ngali tin ngolomatoarin ngearun ba
tin, ngatun yantin tin murrorong umulli tin, ngali koba tin unti
morron tin, ngatun wiyan murrorong kowwul Ian ngeen ngiroung
ngali tin, pittul tin ngiroumba tin ko kowwul tin ngali tin Burung-
bungngulli tin yantin kore tin ngikoung kin pirriwullin aigearun ba
kin Jesu kin Krist tin ; ngatun ngali tin kaiyu kan tin, pittul
kakilli koba tin, ngatun ngali tin kotelli tin killibinbin kakilli
koba tin. Ngatun wiycllan ngeen bin kotelli ko ngearun kotauwil
koa ngeen tuloa yantin ta murrorong umulli tin ngiroumba tin.
122 AN ATJSTEALIAN LANGTAGE.
ngatun kauwil koa Ijulbul ngearun ba murrorong wiyelliko ;
ngatun tungunbiuwil koa iigeen ngiroumba murrorong wiyelli ta,
yanoa wal willing kabirung ngearun ba ka ta birung ngatun tan-
toa bota wal, wonto ba morron ngearunba kin birung ; nguki-
linnun ngeen ngearun ngiroung kakilli ko ngiroumba ko ; ngatun
kakillinnun mikan ta ngiroung kin yirri-yirri ka, ngatun mur-
rorong ka yantin ta purreung ka ngearun ba ngali tin Jesu tin
Krist tin, Pirriwullin ngearun ba tin ; kauwa ngikoung kakilli ko
ngatun ngiroung, ngatun Marai ta ko yirriyirri kan ta ko kakil-
li ko yantin murrorong wiyelli ko, ngatun killibinbin kakilli ko
yanti ka tai purrai wirran korien. Amen.
Eloi Kaiyu kan to ke, ngintoa ngearun ngukulla kaiyukan ka-
killi ko yaki ta ko wakol bota wal ujjulli ko wiyelli kanne ngearun
ba ngiroung, ngatun bi wiya buloara nga ngoro kautilinnun ba
yitirrin ngiroung ka ta ngunun ngaiya wal bi barun unnoa tara
bara wiyennun ; kauwa yanti yakita Pirriwullo kotatilli kanne
ngatun wiyelli kanne ngiroumba wirrobulli kan ko ba, yanti mur-
rorong kauwil barun kin ko ; ngukilli ta ngearun kin ko unti ta
purrai ta, ngurrulli ko ngiroumba wiyelli kanne tuloa ko, ngatun
unta ta tarai ta purrai ta morron kakilli ko yanti ka tai. Amen.
Kauwa ngearun kin ko murrorong umullita Piniwul koba
ngearun ba Jesu koba Krist koba, ngatun pittul mulli ta Eloi
koba, ngatun kakilli ta Marai koba yirri-yirri kan koba kakilli ko
ngearun katoa yantin toa ko. Amen.
Wii/a ta Jirri-Yirri Ta Yarea Kako.
Eloi-to noa pitul ma kowwul kore ngukulla ta noa wakol bo
ta yinal ngikoemba ngali ko yantien to ba ngurran ngikoung kin,
keawai wal bara tatti kunnun kulla wal yanti morron katai ba-
runba kako binnun.
Murrorong ta bara minki kan marai kan kulla barun ba, katan
pirriwal koba moroko ko ba.
Murrorong ta bara kapirri kan ngatun tambun kan murrorong
ko ; kulla bara wara punnun.
Murrorong ta bara murrorong kan biilbul kan ; kulla bara
nanun wal bon Eloi nung.
Murrong ta bara pitul umullikan ; kulla liarun wiyennun, won-
nai tara Eloi koba.
Murrorong ta bara wai'ikan yarakai umatoara barun ba, ngatun
wutea kan yarakai umatoara barun ba.
Murrorong ta kore wiya-yemma korien bon noa ba ba Pirriwul
lo yarakai umatoara.
Wiyan bang ngiroung yarakai umatoai'a emmeomba, ngatun kea-
wai wal bang yuro pa korien emmoemba yarakai. Wiya bang
niakai wiyennun bang yarakai umatoara emmoemba PirriwoUa;
ngatun bi warika yarakai umalli ta birung emmoumba.
Eloi, gintoa kaiyukan, &.C., &c.
PRATERS IN THE AWABAKAL DFALECT. 123
A ! Eloi, ngala koba yanti ka tai niurrorong umuUi kan nei
ngatun wavekulli kan nei, ngurrulla bi wiyelli kan nei karra
kannei ngearun ba, ngatun ngeen ba ngiratoara katan tipung ko
yarakai uniatoara koba, ngearun ba; kumniunbilla minki ko kow-
woUo ngiroumba ko burungbungulla ngaiya ngearun, ngali tin
murrorong tin Jesu koba tin Krist tin, ngearun ba wokkol bo ta
Kamulli kan ngatun Wiyellikan. Amen.
A ! Eloi kaiyu kan ngatun murrorong umullikan wiyalan ngeen
ngiroung ngali tin ngiroemba tin murrorong kowwol lin miromuUi
ko ngearun, yantin ta birung yarakai umulli ta birung ngearun ;
kingngereen kowwil koa ngeen buloara bo kurrabung ngatun
marai, pitul kowwil koa umulli kolang ngeen unnoa tara yantin
wiyatoara ngiroemba umulli ko ngali tin Jesu tin Krist tin
ngearunba Pirriwul lin. Amen,
A ! Mirromulli kan to kore ko ba, wirea ngearun tulling ka-
billi ko ngatun ngiroung ko yirriyirri ko ngiroemba ko ; a ! Pirri-
wul, pirriral man bien ngeen kara man mirromulli ko ngearun
ngatun umulli ko ngearun.
Kauwa killibienbien kakilli ko, &c., &c,
Biyungbai ngearunba wokka kaba, moi'oko kaba katan, &c., e.' Many men, many women, were weeping. Immanuel
to the grave went ; a stone the grave covered. Immanuel said : ' Ye the
stone take away.' They the stone lifted up. Immanuel cried aloud :
' Lazarus, come forth.' Then Lazarus alive became ; he came forth. The
two sisters were very glad.
11. Garageduli, miediil wibil ginyi ; gumba boiyoi wune ; kamil
miedul murruba ginyi; murru ginyi wibil, guilimun baluni. Buba
yanani Immanuel gummillego ; gir gummi ; goe : ' luda barai
taiyanuga ; murruba gimbildi gai miedul ; gai miedul burul wibil
guilimun baluni ; inda taiyanuga gai kundigo.' Immanuel goe:
' Guile yauoai kundigo.' Ila yanani bular kundigo. Gumba duri ;
yugillona ; goe : ' Gii ! gii ! gai miedul baluni.' Burula inar
SENTENCES IN THE KAMALAEAI DIALECT. 129
yugillona; goe : 'Gii! miodul baliiui.' Immanuel goe : ' Kurria
yi'iga; kamilmiedul baluni ; yeal babillona.' Burulabu giudami ;
garma gir balundai wiiiugl. Immanuel murra kawani miedul ;
goe : ' Miedul, waria.' Ihi miedul moron ginyi ; wariae ; gurre
goe. Gumba, buba ellibu, burul guiye.
At another time, a little girl sick became ; the mother pennyroyal
gave ; not the little girl well became ; much she grew sick, almost dead.
The father went Immanuel to see ; truly he found Him ; he said : ' Thou
quickly come ; well make my little girl. Mj' little girl is very sick, almost
dead ; you come to my house.' Immanuel said : ' We two will go to the
house.' Then went the two to the liouse. The mother came ; she wept ;
said : 'Alas ! alas ! my little girl is dead.' Many women were weeping,
said : ' Alas ! the little girl is dead.' Immanuel said : ' Cease weex^ing ; not
the girl is dead ; only she is asleep.' All of them laughed ; they verily her
to-be-dead knew. Immanuel by hand took the girl ; said : ' Damsel, arise'.
Then the girl alive became ; arose ; words spoke. The mother, father also»
very glad.
12. Gai'ageduli, bular giwir miiga guddelona turrubulda. Im-
manuel aro yauani. Bular miiga winugi ; kakuldone : ' Im-
manuel, Diirunmi, AYurume Davidu, gummilla ! gurraga geane.'"
Burula giwir goe : ' Kurria ! kurria gindai kakullego.' Giwir
muga yealo kakiildone : ' Durunmi, Wut-ume Davidu, gummilla !
gurraga geane.' Ua Immanuel warine ; goe : ' Minua giudai goal-
ie ? minna gaia murramulle '? Garma goe : ' Durunmi, wuna
geane gummildai.' Ila Immanuel garma mil tamiilda ; baianbu
garma murru gummillego.
Another time, two men lalind sat by the way. Immanuel there came.
The two blind heard ; thej' cried aloud : ' Immanuel, King, Son of David,
look ! pity us.' Many people said : 'Have done ! cease ye to cry aloud.'
The men blind again cried aloud : 'King, Son of David, look! pity us'!
Then Immanuel stood still ; said : ' What you will say ? What I shall do '?
They said : ' King, grant us to see.' Then Immanuel them eyes touches ;
instantly they are able to see.
13. Burula kagil giwir Immanuel kunmulta. Garma kaogo
bindea yulalle. Ciarma gir tulu wimi ; garagedul tulu ganbir
wimi ; garma gir Immanuel wimi ; murra biru-dun ; idinna biru-
diini ; tului wirri. Garma tulu tiome, Immanuel tului pindelun-
dai. Tenila Immanuel baluni. Tenila, giwir pilari turrur duni ;
gue dulirri.
Many bad men Immanuel seized. They on his head thornsi bound.
They indeed a log laid ; another log across they laid ; they indeed Immanuel
laid down ; hands they pierced ; feet they pierced ; on cross fastened. They
the cross raised, Immanuel on the cross hanging. Soon Immanuel died.
Soon after, a man witli a spear his side pierced ; blood flowed.
14. BuUului, garma gir Immanuel taonda wimi, kundawi. Im-
manuel guru babine baliin taonda; yealo malo babine balun ta-
onda ; yealo garagedul guru babine baliin taonda; garagedul
guruko moron ginyi, warine. Terala giinagullago yanani. Te-
ladu Immanuel gunagullada guddela ; germa kanugo gummilda ;
kanugo winugulda.
In evening, they verily Immanuel in ground laid, covered. Immanuel
the night lay dead in ground ; also one day he lay dead in ground ; also
130 Alf AL'STBALIAIS' LANGUAGE.
another niglit he lay dead in gronnd ; next morning alive he became, arose.
Soon after to heaven he ■went. Now Inmianuel in heaven dwells ; he all
sees ; all knows.
15. Murniba Immanucl ; liamil gara^edul murruba yealokwai
germa. Yerala Immanuel yealo taongo taiyanille; geaiie kanugo
gLimmille. Iramanuel kaia goalie ; ila kanugo bahui, giwir, iuar,
kaigal kariiigo inoroii gigi. Immanucl goalie : ' Minna inda gi-
mobi ? minna inda gimobi ? indamurruba gimobi ? inda gununda
taiyanuga gnnagullago ; inda kagil gimobi? inda biru yanuga,
urribvi yanuga.' .
Good is Immanuel; not another is good like Him. Hereafter Immanuel
again to earth will come ; we all shall see. Immanuel aloud will speak ;
then all the dead, men, women, and children, all alive shall liecome.
Immanuel will say : 'What hast thou done? what hast thou done? thou
good hast done ? thou to me come to heaven ; thou evil hast done ?
thou far go, very far go a-way.'
16. Griru ginda kagil ginyi ; inda warawara yanani ; giru Baia-
me yili ginyi. Baiame yalvvuga murruba ; gcane kanugo wara-
wara yanani. "Winugulla : kamil gaia yal goalda; giru gaia go-
alda. Immanuel girribatai yarine, gunagulladi taongo. Kanugo
giwir k:igil ginyi ; Immanuel gandil murruba ; Immanuel ba-
luni, giwir moron gigigo.
Truly thou bad hast become ; thovT astray hast gone ; truly God angry
is. God always is good ; we all astray have gone. Hearken : not I lies tell;
truth I tell. Immanuel from above came down, from heaven to earth.
All men bad are become ; Immanuel only is good ; Immanuel died, men
alive for to l>e.
17. Teladu Baiame goalda: ' Gindai, kanugo giwir, kurria kagil
gigile, beriidi warraia ; geane murru irurnle ; kamil gaia yili
gigila ; murruba Immanuel baluni.' Yeladu Immanuel goalda :
' Taiyanuga gununda, kanugo gindai iggil, ila gaia gindai tubbia-
mulle.' Inda taiyanuga Immanuelgo.
Now (iod saith : ' Ye, all men, cease bad to be, turn ye ; we will be
reconciled. Not I angry am. Good Immanuel died.' Now Immanuel
saith : ' Come unto me, all ye weary, then I you will cause to rest." You
come to Immanuel.
18. Giwir guddelona Littraga ; bain dinna tuggor, gurribu bain
ge bain ; kamil yaneliua. Paul, Barnaba cllibu, aro yanani. Paul
goaldone ; baindul germa winugailone. Paul knia gnmmildone ;
kaknldone : ' Waria gui'riba dinnaga.' Tuggordul parine, yanani
cllibu.
A man dwelt at Lystra ; with sick foot diseased, very ill indeed ; not
he could walk. Paul, Barnabas also, there came. Paul was speaking ; the
lame man him was hearing. Paul earnestly looked ; he cried aloud : ' Stand
upright on feet.' The lame man leapt, walked also.
19. Burulabu giwir gummi ; goe 'gipai'! kakiildone : 'Bai-
ame bularyari]ie yealokwai giwir.' Paul, Barnaba ellibu, bunna-
gunne, kakuldone : ' Kurria ! kamil geane Baiame ; geane giwir
yealokwai gindai; geane guiye duri ; geane budda ginyi; geane
yili ginyi ; yealo geane murru gurrigiUone ; geane murru goalda
burulabu: kurria gindai vealo kagil gigile ; berudi warraia, gum-
FIRST SPECIMEN OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 131
milla Baiame moron ; Baiame gir gunagulla, taon, burul kolle,
kanugo miimaininnabul gimobi; Baiame yalwiiga Baiame.'
All the people saw ; they wondered ; they cried aloud : ' Gods two. are
come down like men.' Paul, Barnabas also ran, cried aloud : ' Have done !
not we gods ; we men like you. We glad become, we sorry become, we
angi'y become, again we are reconciled. We good tell to all ; cease ye any
more evil to he ; turn ye, look to God the living. God verily heaven,
earth, the great water, all, everything made. God always is God, (the same
ever).
(G.)
SPECIMENS or A DIALECT
OF THE
ABOEIGMNES OE NEW SOUTH WALES
BEING THE FIRST ATTEMPT TO FORM THEIR SPEECH INTO
A WRITTEN LANGUAGE.
[I print this, because it is the earliest attempt to exhibit the structure
of the aboriginal languages. The date is 1827. I have omitted the
numbering of the sentences, the accents, and the table of sounds, referred
to in the Author's preface. Natiirallj', there are some errors in such a first
attempt as this. iSuch of these errors as were likely to mislead a reader, I
have removed' or altered ; in other respects I have left the pamphlet very
much as I found it. But, from its early date and its use of the English
system of pronunciation, it cannot be quoted as an authority.
I print also the Author's Preface to this pamphlet. — Ed.]
In" submitting a specimen of a dialect of tbe aborigines of
New Soutli Wales, no speculative arrangement of grammar is
attempted. Out of upwards of fifteen hundred sentences, the
most satisfactory ones are selected. The English is in a separate
column on the right side of the page, and underneath the
aboriginal sentences is placed, word for word, the Euglisli
meaning, without regard to English arrangement or grammar,
in order to show the idiom of the aboriginal tongue. The sen-
tences are numbered for easy reference, should any friend wish
to make any remark tending to simplify the present adopted
mode. As one of my objects in applying to the language is to
pave the way for the rendering into this tongue the sacred
132 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Scriptures, every friendly hint will be most thankfully received-
The accents are not marked for want of type, but the last
arrangement of the verb will, it is hoped, be a sufficient guide.
A table of the sounds, being an epitome of the plan pursued in
the orthography of the language, will also be sufficient, it is
presumed, to show the nature of the syllables ; it would have
increased the work to an inconvenient size had it been further
explained. To ascertain the ellipsis with which the language
abounds is the best means to obtain satisfaction in the use of the
particles, and without the knowledge of this it appears very often
a mere jargon. Ma-ko-ro te-a, ' fish to me,' is all they say for
' give me some fisli ' ; but no possible mistake can arise, as in the
English, using the nouns in a verbal sense. A double use of the
preposition ' from ' puzzled me exceedingly ; but one day when
the signal for a vessel was hoisted up at the signal-post, the
remarks of a black man proved that it was from, on account of
the vessel, the ball was hoisted from that cause. TJie cutting
down a tree in the woods similarly showed from what part the
log was to be chopped. I would also remark that we often think
there is a difference in the language because the names of sub-
!^tantives differ ; e.g., a man was asked one day what he had got ;
' ta-ra-kul,' was the reply — I.e.., peaches. But they had no peaches
formerly ; whence came the new name ? — from a word ' to set
the teeth, on edge !' Now, at the Hawkesbury, the natives may
call it by a name meaning rough skin, or any other quality.
At the Hawkesbury, the English say that 'kob-ba-ra' is what the
natives call 'head,' but the blacks told me to say 'wol-lung,' and
it was only by an anatomical drawing my black teacher showed
that by ' kob-ba-ra ' he understood the ' skull bone.' ]N"o doubt
there are provincialisms, but perhaps the language is radically
the same. In presenting a copy to those in this colony who are
connected with other societies, I beg to assure them that what-
ever knowledge I may obtain of the aboriginal tongue shall be
always available to them with cheerful readiness, the noble
principles of Christianity forbidding the indulgence of any selfish
motive or party feeling in those who profess to be the promul-
gators of its precepts. An anxiety to satisfy the friends of
humanity that our employment is not altogether without hope,
as it respects attaining the language of the blacks, and that
success may ultimately be expected, with the Divine aid, have
suggested and urged the putting of these imperfect specimens to
the press.
Eighteen months less interrupted than the time past will, it is
hoped, enable me to make known salvation to the aborigines in
their own tongue. To attempt instruction before I can argue
with them as men would be injurious, because Christianity does
not make its votaries mere machines, but teaches them how to
FIBST SPECIMEN" OF THE AWABAKAL DIADECT. 133
give an answer to every one that asketh a reason of their hope.
My time, therefore, must be devoted wholly to that single object
until I am competent ; and whatever may be the expenses, or
whatever may be the privations of individuals to reclaim sinners,
whether black or white, the remembrance of it will be no more,
or, if it exist, it will excite only a song of praise when we shall
behold the great multitude which no man could number, of all
nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues standing before
the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands,
saying, " Thou hast redeemed us to God by Thy blood, out of
every kindred and tongue and people and nation, and hast made
us unto our God kings and priests for ever. Amen."
Doctor Johnson observes that the orthography of a new
langiuage formed by a synod of grammarians upon principles
of science would be to proportion the number of letters to that of
sounds, that every sound may have its own character, and every
character a single sound. Doctor Lowth's rule hath been
attended to in syllabication — namely, " Divide the syllables in
spelling, as they are naturally divided in a right pronunciation,"
so that, to use the words of another author, " Syllabication shall
be the picture of actual pronunciation."
The English alphabet is used with little variation of sound,
The table (an abridgement) shews the fixed sounds of tlie letters
and syllables agreeably to the English, examples, leaving nothing
arbitrary.
The attempt to form the aboriginal speech into a written
language with perspicuity is made on the above principles ; time
only can decide on its practicability.
L. E. THRELKELD.
ABOEIGINAL SENTENCES TEEBALLT RENDEEED INTO ENGLISH
UNDERNEATH THE EESPECTITE WORDS.
1. Nga-to-a. — The pronoun I in answer to a question, as,
it is Z; it is used also in a relative sense, it is I tvJio.
The pronunciation of the n^ is very soft, but exactly
the same as nfj in hanq, hang. The pronoun J, when
forming the simple subject to the verb, is lang, I.
Nganke un-nung ? ngatoa un-ne; m., who is there? itisi
Who (is) there I this.
I^gatoa man-nun; man-nun bang; «?., it is I who will take.
I take-will ; take-will I.
Ngatoa un-te ka-tan; un-te bang ka-tan; m., I am
I at this place am. at this place I am. here.
Ngatoa weya-leyn; wean bang; m., I am speaking; I
I speak-iiig ; speak I. speak.
134 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
jS'gatoa iima-lcaan unne, rif^orokan; ot., it is I who made
I made-have this, thismonnug. this, this morning.
Unne bang uma-kaan, ngorokan; m., I have made this.
This I made-have, this morning. this morning.
K"gatoa wa-leyn iin-ta-ring; wa-leyn hang un-te-ring.
I move-ing to that place ; move-ing I to this place.
m., I am going to that place ; I am coming to this place.
Ngatoa bo wal wea bounuoun ; m., I myself spoke to her.
I myself spoke her.
Ngatoa bo wal bounnoun bun-ka-lcyu ; ?«., I myself am
I myself her striking. beating her.
Ngatoa bo wa-le-a-la wa-kol ; m., I myself vrent alone.
I "went one.
2. !N^gin-to-a — the pronoun tlwi( in answer to a question,
it is tliou lolio. The pronoun used to the verb in simple
form is be, tJiou.
Ngan-ka be unne? ugintoa-ta unne ; m., who art thou now?
Vvlio thou this ? thou this. it is thou, emph.
Ngeroung koa ban-nu wean ngurra-le-ko.
For thee why I-it speak for to hear.
«?., I speak it in order for thee to hear.
Ngintoa tatte ba-niin ; in., it is thou who wilt be dead.
Thou dead ■ be-will.
Ngintoa'kinta, ngatoa kaawaran; m., it is thou who fearest.
Thou fear, I not. I do not.
Ngatoa'.bo wal yaraki, ngintoa kaawaran ; m., I myself am
I myself evil, thou not. evil, thou art not.
Ngintoa kinta; kinta be; m., it is thou who fearest; thou
Thou fear ; fear thou. fearest.
Ngintoa kinta ka-nun ; kinta be ka-nun.
Thou fear be-\vill ; fear thou be-will.
in., it is thou who wilt fear; thou wilt be afraid.
3. New-wo-a — the pronoun lie, in answer to a question, u7ifo
is it ? The pronoun for the verb is no a, he or it.
Newwoa kinder; kinder noa; m., it is he who laughs; he
He laugh ; laugh he. laughs.
Newwoa wal kore yarai ; m., it is he who is a bad man.
He man bad.
Newwoa warekul nowwi ta ba; w?., the dog is in the canoe.
He the dog canoe. in.
NeAvwoa-bo keyu kokon ta ba; m., it is he himself in the
He being water in. water.
4. Bo-uu-to-a — the feminine pronoun, slie.
Unne bountoa Patty ammoung kin-ba; m., this is Patty
This she Patty me with. with me.
PIRST SPECTMEX OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 135
Ammoung katoa bountoa, wa-niin; m., slie willgo witli me.
Me with she move-will.
Wonni bountoa tea unuuiig tatte ammouu-ba;
Child she to me there dead miue.
on., my cliild, there is dead.
iNgan-ke bountoa unue? unnoa? unnung? m., who is she?
^Yho she this ? that ? there ? (here, there) ?
5. Nga — the pronoun it or it is, in answer to a question.
"Wea, unnoa boat kowwol? nga-ba unnang kowwol-au»
Say, that boat large ? it is that large-being.
m., is that a large boat ? it is a large boat.
"Wea, unnoa murrorong? nga-ba unnoa murrorong.
Say, that good? it is that good.
m., is that good ? it is it that is good.
Ngan-to bon bun-ka-la? nga-le noa bon bun-kala.
Who liim struck ? this he him strike-did.
in., who struck him ? it is he that struck him.
Nffa-la noa bon bunkala; nga-la noa *ya.
That he him struck ; that he there close at hand.
«?., it was. he that struck him ; ifc was he there.
"Won-nung? nga-la noa wea-leyn unnung.*
Where ? that he speaH-ing there.
m., where ? it was he speaking there.
6. Xga-an — the plural pronoun, tee.
Ka-bo! ngaan wa-nun; «?., stop, Ave will go presently.
Stop ! we move-will.
Ka-i ! w^ita ngaan; in., come, w^e depart, i.e., let us go.
Ho ! depart we.
Ka-i! be yan-ta, ta-nan, wita ngaan; w., comethouhither;
Ho ! thou hither, approach, depart we. approach, we depart.
Ka-bo, ka-bo, wa-ow-wil koa ngaan ngeroung kafcoa.
Be still, be still, move may that we you witii.
m., stop, stop, that we may go too with you.
AVita ngaan nowwi-ta wing-ow-wil; ■;«., we depart to row
Depart we canoe riiay row. the canoe.
Wita-lang ngaan; wita wal ngaan; ra., we do depart ; we
Depart wc ; depart shall we. are about to depart.
Ta-ko-un-ta ka ngaan wa-nun Kuttai kolang?
When we move will Sydney towards ?
in., when shall we depart for iSydney ?
Ta-ko-un-ta kan ngaan f; »?•, we do not know when.
When being we.
Ta-ko-un-ta ngatongf; m., when is it to be? (a negative.)
When that ?
*Note — U n n u n g, ' there,' means at a greater distance than y a, ' there. '
t In this collection of sentences, the f shows that the phrase is an idiom.
13G AK AL'STEALIAIf LA>'GrAGE.
7. Nu-rur — the plural pronoun ye. The r as in rogue.
Wea, nu-rur wa-nun Muhiloinba ko-lang; w., will ye go to
Say, ye move-will Newcastle to. Newcastle.
Wea-la nurur, ngatoa wita; wz., do ye talk and I will go.
Speak ye, I depart.
Kari nurur ta-kaan ngoro-kan-ta; «?., ye have eaten kan-
Kangaroo ye eaten-have this morning. garoo this morning.
8. Ba-rur — the plural pronoun, tlicij.
Ngan-bo barur uwah? ngan-bo kanf; barur napal.
Who they moved? who being ; they woman.
?«., Avho are they gone? Idon't know; they are women.
Wea-lang barur; wea-leyn barur; «?., they talk; they are
Speak they ; speak-ing they. talking.
"Wita ka-ba barur; ««., they are in the act of departing.
Depart in they.
9. Ba-le — dual pronoun iliou and J, loe tico.
"Wita ba-le wah-ow-wil ya-ka-ta; ?»., thou and I will go
Depart we-two move to at this time. now.
Min-na-ring ko-lang ba-le bon wea-la?
What towards we-tjvo him speak?
OT., art thou and I to speak to him ? about what art, &c.
"Wea bula tanan wa-nun? a-a, wa-nun bale?
Say, ye-two approach move-will? yes, move-will we-two.
OT.jWillyetwo come? yes, we will come.
10. Bu-la — dual pronoun, ye two or the two.
A-la! bula; ka-bo! won-ta ko-lang bula?
Hallo! ye two; be still! whither for ye two?
9H., hallo I ye two; stop ; whither are ye two going?
11. Bu-la bu-lo-a-ra — dual pronoun, they two.
"Won-ta ko-lang bula unnung buloara? m., whither are
Whither the two there two? they two going?
12. Min? (an interrogative) m., wJtat?
Min-na-ring unne ? minnaring kan.f
What this? What being?
m, what is this ? I don't know, lit., what (is it) being ?
Minnaring unnoa? minnaring ngatong?
What that ? what the thing
OT., what is that ? I don't know.
Minnaring tin ba unnoa? murrenowwa tin unnoa
What from that ship because of that,
w, what is that for ? on account of the ship that.
Minnaring tin bountoa unnung tun-ka-leyn?
AVhat from she there cry-ing ?
711., why does she cry there?
FIRST SPECIMEN" OP THE AWABAKAL DIALECT.
137
Minnaring tin kanPmamuya tin bountoa tunkaleyn?
What from being? corpse from she cry-ing.
m., I don't know ; on account of the corpse she is crying.
Minnaring ka unnoa-nung? minnaring kan be wean?
What that there what being thou speak.
m., what is that there? what dost thou say?
Minnaring ko ka unnoa-nung? w., what is that there for ?
What for that - there?
Makoro ko-lang tura-nun bang; w., it is for fish I will spear.
Fish towards spear-will I.
Minnaring be unnoa kurra-leyn? w.,what are you carrying?
What thou that carry-ing?
Minnaring ko be iinnoa kurra-leyn? m., why art thou
What for thou that carry-ing carrying that?
Minnaring be unnoa petan? kokoin bang unne petan.
What thou that drink ? water I this _ drink.
m., what is that thou drinkest ? this is water I drink.
Minnaring be unnoa ta-ka-leyn? «z., what is that thou art
What thou that eat-ing? eating?
Kari bang unne takaleyn; w., this is kangaroo I am eating.
Kangaroo I this eat-ing
Minnaring berung uma unnoa? m., what is that made of?
What from made that
Koli berung; brass berung ta unne ; w., of wood; of brass,
Wood from ; brass from this. this.
Minnaring berung kan? «j., what can it be made of ?
W^hat from being.
Minnaring tin be ka-ka-la buk-ka? w., on what account
W'hat from thou wast furious ? was't thou SO angry ?
Minnaring tin ngatongt; ngukung tin bang bukka.
What from nothing ; wife from I furious.
m., from no cause; on account of wife I (am) furious.
Minnaring-ko bonoun tura? kota-ro, ware-ko, bibi-to.
What her pierced? waddy, spear, axe.
m., what didst thou pierce her with ? with a waddy, spear, axe.
Minnaring tin be-no un tura? m., from what cause didst
What from thou-her pierced ? thou spear her ?
New-wara-kan-to bang tura bounnoun; w., through anger
Angry being I pierced her. I speared her.
Minn-an beyn wonni? wonni korean.
How-many to thee child ? child not.
m., how many children hast thou? none.
Minn-an beyn terrakul ngeroamba? kowwol-kowwolo.
How many to thee peaches thine much much.
m., how many peaches hast thou with thee ? a great many.
Minn-an kol-bun-te-nun ? wa-ra-a kol-bun-te-la.
How-much cut-will? little cut do
m., how much is to be cut ? let a little be cut.
138 a:!^ AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Kowwol-lfowwol kolbunte-a ; minn-an kanf?
Much much cut; how many being.
m., a great qnautity is cut ; I don't know (how much).
Min-nung baniin \>q bungi? on., what wilt thou be about
What will-do thou to-day? to-day?
Min-nung banuu beyn bungi? «?.,' what will be done to
What will-do to thee to-day ? you to-day ?
Min-nung [ba-nuu bul bungi noa-y'a be-loa?
What do-will to-day he thee-with.
?»., what will become of thee to-day ?
Min-nunf kan? wonkul be ka-nuu ; w., I don't know;
What being; stupid thou be-wilt. thou wilt be a fool.
Min-nung-ba beyn unnoa mattara^? w., what is the matter
What to thee that hand ? with thy hand ?
Teir-nuug-a; kun- a ; kulla-ba'; m., it is broken; it is
Broken; burnt; cut (it is.) burnt ; it is cut.
Min-nung u'-pa-leyn be unnoa? «?., what is that thou art
What do-ing thou that? doing?
Mirre-leyn bang ware ; ka-a-wi, yalla-w^a-leyn bang.
Sharpen-ing ' I spear ; no, resting I.
m., I am sharpening a spear ; no, I am sitting still.
Min-nung ba-nun be bungi? m., what wilt thou make
What do-will thou present time ? to-day?
U-pa-nun bang ware bungi; m., I will make a spear
Will make I spear present time. to-day.
U-pa wal bang ware bungi; m., certainly, I shall make a
Make shall I spear to-day. spear to-day.
Min-na-ring' ko makoro? ta-kc-le-"ko; m., wdiat is fish for?
What for fish ? eat-for. to be eaten.
Minnaring iinne bungi ka-tau? «?.., what is to-day ?
What this to-day is ?
Minnaring ko unnung upaa ? {or wu-pe-a).
What for there put?
on., what is (it) put there for ? (two^balls as a signal.)
Ya-re, upaa murrenowwi ko buloara ko.
Truly, put ship for two for.
on., it has been put for two ships (as a signal).
Minnaring be unnoa tatan? ?«., what is that thou eatest?
AVhat thou that eatest ?
Makoro unne bang ta-tan; won; m., fish is what I eat j
Fish this I cat ; where ? where ?
"Won-ta tin koa horse? Sydney tin.
Where from why horse? Sydney from
on., from what place is the horse ? from Sydney.
"Won-ta ko-lang unne (sc, uwan)? «?., whither does this go?
Where towards this (move) ?
"Won-ta ko-lang unnoa nowwi wa-leyn?
Where towards that canoe move-ing ?
;;»., Avhither does the ca,noe no ?
TIEST SPECIMEN OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 139
"Won - ta-i'ing noa uwa? koeyong bountoa uunam-'bo.
Where he moved ? camp she that.
m., w'liitlieris he gone ? she is at the camp.
"Won-ta ko-lang be? Sydney ko-lang bang.
Where towards thou ? Sydney towards I
OT., Avhither art thou (going) ? to Sydney I am (goirg).
"Won-ta-ring ngurur uwa? nn-te-ko ngaan uwa.
Where ye moved ? this-place for we moved.
m., where have you moved to ? to here.
Won-ta-ring we-reyn wibbe ko? pa-ki tin wibbe.
Whei-e blowing wind for ? southward from wind.
m., whither is the wind blowing? from the southward is the wind.
Won-ta berung be? nov/wi-ta berung bang.
Where from thou ? canoe fi-om I.
m.^ where hast thou come from ? Irom the canoe.
Won-ta-ko ka bang unne kur-reyn; m., whither am I
Where for I this carry-ing. carrying this?
Un-to-a ko yong; koke-ra ko ; w., to that place there; to
That place for there ; house for. tlie house.
"Won-ta tin unnoa? wokka tin; ot., whence that? from up.
Where from that ? up from.
Won-nung ka beyu kari? unne-bo ; «?., where i« thy kan-
Where at to thee kangaroo ? this. garoo? this is (it).
Won-nung ka beyu ngukung? unne-bo bountoa.
Where at to thee wife ? this she.
?«., where is thy wife? this is she.
Won-ta tin-to bang Sydney na-nun? ot., at what place can
Where from I Sydney shall see ? see Sydney ?
Won-nong kowwol? unne kowwol; m.., which, is big;
Where big? this big (or much). this is big.
Unnoa ba-ta kowAvol; w., that is the biggest.
That certainly big.
AYon-ta-ring bountoa uwan? w., Avhilher does she go ?
Where she jnove ?
Un-ta-ring; Mulubinba ko-lang; w., to that place; to New-
Thither; Newcastle towards. castle.
Won-nung ka Bun-umba kokera katan? w., where is Bun's
Where Bun's house is? house?
Won-nung tea katan boat ammoamba? w., where is my
W'here tome is boat mine? boat?
W o n-n u n g b u n 1 a u n n u n g ? m., which is she there ?
Where she there ?
Won-nung be man-nun, unne? unnoa ta uman bang.
Where thou take-will, this ? that take I.
m., which wilt thou take, this ? I take that.
Won-nung be a? unne bang; w., where art thou, ay ?
Where , thou ay? this I, here I am.
140 AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGTJAOE.
"Won-nayn xinnoa yeterra? Trelkeld ye-terra-bul bang.
Which way he named? ,, named I.
m., which way is he named ? I am named Threlkeld.
Won-nayn be bereke-a? ngeakai bang bereke-a.
Which-vvay thou sleep (about to) ? here I about to sleep.
m., where wilt thou sleep ? I shall sleep here.
"Won-nayn noa uwa ? ngaa noauwa; won-naynt kan?
Which way he moved ? forward he moved ; which way.
on., which way is he gone ? forward he is gone; I don't know.
"Won-nayn bang unne wean yeterra? 7W., which way am I to
Which way I this speak named? call this?
"Won-nayn unne purri yeterra ? Pami-kau ; m., what is this
Which way this land named? Pahmi. land called ?
"Won-nayn ngaan wa-la? ngea-ka-i ngaan wa-la.
Which way we move-do ? here we move-do.
«j., which way shall we go ? this way we shall go.
Won-nayn bale wa-la? ugea-ka; m., which way shalt thou
Which way we two move-do ? this way. and I go ? this way.
Won-ta-kaleen unnoa napal? v«., where does that woman
Of what place that woman ? belong to ?
Won-ta tin unnoa man-tan? m., where is that taken from?
Where from that take ?
Won-ta nurur bun-ke-lang? «?., where do ye fight?
Where ye fight-now-do ? *
TJn-te ngaan bun-ke-lang un-te; «?., here we fight.
Here we fight-now-do here.
"Wonnung beyn bun-ka-la? «?., what part of thee was
Where to thee struck ? struck ?
Unne tea buu-ka-la wollung; m., this, my head was
This to me struck head. struck.
Won-ta be unnoa man'-ka-la? m., where was it thou
Where thou that tookest? didst catch that ?
Mulubinbakaleen bountoa; «?., she belongs to Newcastle.
Woman-of-Newcastle she.
Unne bountoa I r el and kale en ; w., she is an Irishwoman.
This she woman-of-Ireland.
"Won-ta ko-lang?korung ko-lang; 7?t., whither? to the bush.
Where towards the bush towards.
"Wonnam bountoa ? unambo bountoa; ot., whereat is she?
Whereat she ? at that she. at that place she is.
Wonnam bara ? unambo Sydney; m., where are they at ; at
Whereat they ? at that Sydney. Sydney they are.
Wonnam bountoa (noa, kore, napal)? w., where is she at
Whereat she (ho, man, woman) ? (he, man, woman) ?
13. Ngan? (an interrogative) icho ? lolio is ?
Ala! ngan be yeterra ? ngan unnung?
Hallo ! who thou named ? who there ?
m., hallo ! what is thy name ? who is there ?
FIRST SPECIMEX OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 141
Nffan unnang? ngaiif ngatoiig ? ngatoa Beraban.
Who at this place ? wlio then ? I Eaglehawk.
m., who is that ? don't know ; it is I, Eaglehawk.
Patty bountoa; kaaran Patty korean; 7?i.,it is Patty ; no,
Patty she ; no, Patty not it is not Patty.
Ncan noa unne (i^nnoa, nnnang, unnung)?
Who he this (that, at this place, there)?
m., who is this here (that, at this place, there)?
Ngan bula uwa? Dismal bula Jem; m., which two went?
Who the two moved ? Dismal the two Jem. Dismal and Jem.
^^[an noa unnung? mureung (korung) kolang?
Who he there ? the sea (the bush) towards ?
m., who is he there ? towards the sea ? the bush ?
Ngan-to tura bounnoun? nga-le noa; vi., who has speared
Who pierced her ? this he _ _ her ? he has.
Nga-le noa ya ; nga-la noa yo,ng ; m., it is he here ; it is he
This he here; that he there; there.
iSTgan-to unne uma? ma, u-ma-la ; m., who has done
Vho this done ? do (thon) do. this ? do thou it.
Ngan-to beyn uma koparo? ngatoa uma-laan.
Who to thee done red ochre ? I done.
m., who has colored thee with red ochre ? it is I have done it.
Ngannung-ka uma-nuu bang? unnoa bon uma-la.
Whom do-will I ? that _ him do.
m., whom shall T do ? do him.
jSTgan-to man-nun kurre-kurre? m., who will catch the first
Who take-will the-very-lirst? (in fishing)?
Nga-la noa ma-nun ; 711., that is he who will have (it).
'•■ That he take-will
Kaawaran be man-nun ; newwoa man-nun.
Not thou take-will ; he take-will.
m., it is not thou wilt take; it is he will.
Ngan-bo perewol un-te? ngintoa; m., who is the chief
Who • chief this thou. here ? it is thou.
Kaawaran bang perewol korean; m., I am not chief.
Not I chief not.
Unnenoa? a-a, unnoa-ta noa ; OT.,thishe? yes, that is he.
This he? yes, that ' he.
Nga unnoa ngeroamba? kaawi; nga-le ko ba bon.
Is it that thine ? no. this belonging to him.
m., is it thine that ? no ; it belongs to him.
Ngan-umba kawarekul? ammoamba-ta unnoa.
Whose dog? mine that.
on., whose is the dog? it is mine, that.
Bumburukan-um-ba warckul? ngau-umba-kanf?
B.'s dog? whose ?
m., Bumburukans dog ? I don't know.
Note. — Ngale noa, 'this is he who '; ngala noa, 'that is he who.
142 A^^ AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Is'gan-um-ba-ka unnoa napal? m., whose is that woman?
Whose that woman ?
Kgan kin-berung be unnoa man-ka-la? w., from whom didst
Whom from thou that tookest? thou take that?
Mr. Brooks kin-berung; Mulubinba ka-berung.
Mr. Brooks from ; Newcastle from.
on., from Mr. Brooks ; from jS'ewcastle.
Ngannung be wean? ngeroung bang wean.
Whom thou speakest ? thee I speak.
on., to whom speakest thou ? to thee I speak.
Ammoung be wean? kaawi; nge-ko-ung bang wean.
Me thou speakest? no; him I speak.
on., is it to me you speak? no ; to him I speak.
Ngan-bo wingun-nun nowwi-ta? on., who will paddle the
Who paddle-will canoe ? canoe ?
14. Ta-ko-un-ta? on.,irJieii? at icliat time?
Ta-ko-un-ta be noun na-kala Patty-uung ? OT.,whGn didst
W' hen thou her see-did Patty ? thou see Patty ?
Taketa, bungi, bang nakala; buloara-ka-la; korowarung.
Now, to-day, I saw ; two at ; a long time since.
on., I saw her just now, to-day; two (days) past; long ago.
Yurak'3 bang-nung na-ka-la; m., some time ago I saw (her).
Some time ago I-her see did.
Korowarung ka-ta-a-la; yuraki ta ka-ta-a-la.
on., it was a long time back ; it was formerly.
Ta-ko-unta kurre be wan-nun tanan? on., when wilt thou
When first thou move-will approach? come again ?
Kumba be ba-la wan-nun unte-ko; m., to-morrow thou
To-morrow thou must move-will here-for. must come here.
A-la! tanan, wea-wil koa bang-nu; on., hallo! come that
Hallo ! approach, speak-maj'^ tliat I-it. I may tell it.
A-la! wa-mun-billa tea; w., hallo ! let me go.
Hallo ! move-let me. •
Ta-ko-un-ta ka be makoro ko-lang? on., when dost thou
When at thou fish towards ? fish ?
Kumba koa bang wa-kayn ; on., why, to-morrow I am coming.
To-morrow, why, I move-ing.
Tura-ke-ta-0 ; yura-ke-ta bang; korowarung ka bang.
Long ago ; a long time since I ; long while at I.
on., a long while ; I shall be a long while ; a long time since I have.
Ya-ko-un-ta ka be yan-tara (yante) uma-nun?
When at thou like as that (like as this) make-will?
on., when wilt thou make like that ? like this ?
Ya-ke-ta bang uma-nun ; m., I will make it now.
Now I make-will.
Yakounta be-nii na-kala, Bun-nung?
When thou-him see-did. Bun ?
m., when didst thou see Bun.
FIRST SPECIMEN- OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 143
Kora koa be wa-ba xinambo kumba? ko-rako-a?
Not Avhy thou was at this yesterday? not why?
in., why wast thou not at this place yesterday ?
Kora koa be tatan untoa-kal? m., why dost thou not eat
^Not why thou eat there-of ? some of that ?
Kora koa be tea wea-ya-leyn? m., why dost thou not
Kot why thou me speaking ? answer me ?
Wonkul kora be; Avea-ya-la tea ; «j., do not be afool ; answer
Fool not thou ; speak to me. me.
Kora koa be tea wean? m., why dost thou not speak to me ?
Not why thou me speak ?
Kora koa be ammoung katoa uwan ? m., why dost thou not
Not why thou me with move? come with me?
Kora koa be tea ban tea kan? ma ! ba-la, wea-la.
Not why thou me strike me again ? do ! come ! speak.
m., why dost thou not strike me again ? do ! speak you must.
Kora koa be tanan uwan? kora koa be wita uwan?
Not why thou approach move ? not why thou depart move?
on., why dost thou not draw nigh ? why dost thou not depart ?
Kora koa be man-tan makoro? ot., why dost thou not catch.
Not why thou take fish ? fish ?
Kaawi bon bang bunuba; «?., I did not strike him.
Not him I struck.
15. "We-a (used interrogatively); vi., do, spealc, say,icll ;
wea is the imperative of the verb ' to speak.'
"Wea, be unte-kal makoro man-nun? a-a, man-nun bang.
Saj^ thou here-of fish take-will ? yes, take-will I.
m., wilt thou take some of the fish here ? yes, I will take some.
"Wea, be unte-kal ta-ow-wa? a-a, ta-nun bang untoa-kal.
Say, thou here-of eat ? yes, eat-will I that of.
m., wilt thou take some of this here? yes, I will eat of that.
Wea, be unte yalla-wa-nun ? yalla-wa-nun bang unte.
Say, tlK)u here rest will ? to rest-move-will I here.
m., wilt thou rest here ? I w^ill rest here.
Talla-wan bang unte; unte bang unte yalla-wan.
To rest-move I here ; here I here to rest-move.
■m., I rest here ; here I rest.
"W e a, b e u n 1 a b e r e k e-n u n ? m., wilt thou sleep on that place ?
Say, thou that sleep-will ?
Kaawi bang untoa ; unte-bo bang bereke-nun.
Not I that ; here I sleep-will.
m., no, not at that place ; here is where I will sleep.
"Wea, be unnoa peta-nun? ta-nun? m., wilt thou drink
Say, thou that drink-will? eat-will; that? eat?
"Wea, be tanan wa-nun unte-bo ? 5«., wilt thou come here; to
Saj-, thou approach move-will here ? this place ?
Wea, ngaan Mulubinba ko-lang wa-nun? m., shall we go to
Say, we Newcastle towards move-will? Newcastle ?
144! AN AUSTKALIAX LAXaUAGE.
"Wea, be uiine man-nun? man-niin bang; «?., wilt thou take
Say, thou this take-will ? take-will I, this ? I will take.
Kaaran bang man-nun; m., I will not take.
Not I take-will.
"Wea, unnemurrong?murrorong-ta unnoa; ?«., is this good?
Say, this good ? good that. that is good.
Wea, unne murron warekul? murron-ta unnoa.
Say, this tame dog. tame that.
m., is this a tame dog? that is tame.
"Wea, unne buk-ka ? buk-ka-ta unnoa; w?., is this savage?
Say, this savage ? savage that. that is savage.
Wea, unte-wan-ta pibelo? unn-am-bo-ta.
Say, here there pipe? there.
m., is the pipe here? it is, at this place.
"Wea, ba-le wa-la? won-ta-ring? Sydney ko-ba.
Say, thoii-I move-do ? where ? Sydney to.
on., shall thou and I go ? where ? to Sydney.
Wea, unnoa porol? porol-ta unnoa; w., is that heavy ? it is
Say, that heavy ? heavy this. heavy this.
Ivaawi; wir-wir-ran-ta unne ; m., it is not (heavy) ; it is light
No ; light this. this.
AVea, tea be ngu-nun ? ?«., (what) wilt thou give me ?
Say, to me thou give-will?
Ngu-nun bang-nu ngeroung; m., I will give it thee.
Give-will I-it for-thee.
AVea, bula tanan wa-la? wea, ngaan tanan wa-la?
Say, ye two approach move-do ? say, we approach move-do?
111., will ye two come ? shall we come ?
Wea, be wa-nun ammoung katoa ? «2.,wiltthou go withme?
.Say, thou move-will me with ?
Wea, bountoa wa-nun* ngeroung katoa? w., will she go
Say, she move-will thee with ? with thee ?
Wea, bountoa unnung ka-nun ngeroung kin?
Say she there be-will thee with.
in., will she live with thee?
IG. Ka-i ; Ka-bo ; m., come ; siop, remain, he still, lialL
Ka-i! unte-ko tanan wa-la; m., be thou here, approach,
Come! here-to approach move-do. move.
Ka-bo! unnambo yalla\va-la unnoa ;«?., be thou where thou
Stop! there rest there art; rest thou there.
Tanoa! be bunke yekora; kaaran bang bun korean.
Let be! thou strike not; not I strike not.
•;».., let it be ; do not thou strike; I am not about to strike.
Yanoa, be bunke yekora bounnoun; m., let be; do not
Let be, thou strike not her. thou strike her.
*It isnot yet exactly decided whether wa-nun or waw-nun or wan-nun.
Wa is a verb of motion. Hence it means ' to come or to go.' The verbs
tanan, 'to ajjproach,' and wita, 'to depart, ' determins 'the sense.'
FIEST SPECIMEN OF THE AWABAKAL DIALECT. 145
Kaaran! kaawi ko-lang bang-nu bun-tau; wi., no! I am not
No! not towards I - it strike. going to strike it.
Wita koa, bang memi yekora; w., do not detain, for I depart.
Depart why, I detain not.
Ma! kipulla; yanoa, kipi yekora; tunke yekora, yanoa.
Do ! call out ; let be, call not ; cry not, let be.
w., do call out; do not call out; do not weep, leave off.
Turing, be wala, minke yekora kare be.
Away, thou move do, stay not first thou.
m., away with thee, go, stay not ; be first.
Bun-nun bang ba-la unne warekul; bun-nun bon bang.
Beat-will I must this dog; beat-will him I.
on., I must beat this dog ; I will beat him.
Tanoa, tea bunke yekora ; «?., let be, do not strike me.
Let be, me strike not.
Kinta-lang bang bunkele tin; m., I do fear being struck.
Fearful I strike at.
Tauan ka-i; na-ow-wil koa unne; wi., draw nigh; come to
Approach come; see-may that this. see this.
Boung-ka-lea nakele-ko; na-ow-wa! na-ow-wa nurur.
Stand to see for ; see ! see ? ye !
m., stand up to see or stand up and look ; look ye !
B o u n g-k a-1 e a n g u r-r o w-w i 1 ; w , stand up (that) (you) may see.
Stand (thou) hear-may that.
Wea-la, tea ngurrow-wil koa bang-nu; w., tell me that I
Speak, me hear - may that I - it. may know it.
Tura-la be-nu; be-bounnoun; ammouug be tura-la.
Spear thou-it ; thou-her. me thou spear.
?«., spear thou him ; spear her; spear thou me.
Ka-i! unte-ko yalla wa-ow-wil koa be; murra yekora.
Come ! here-to rest move-may that thou ; run not.
m., come hither in order that thou mayest rest ; run ; do not run.
Wea-la be-nu unnung tanan ; in., tell him there to come.
Speak thou-it there approach.
Ngan-nuug-ka ? yeterra-bul-nung ; m., to whom? to such
Whom to? such a one there (to). a one.
Kai! unne ta-ow-wil; ta-o-wa kirun ; w., come to eat this ;
Come ! this eat-may-that ; eat all. eat it all.
Ma! bu-wi tea ya-ke-ta; bu-a be-tea; kinterye kora.
Do ! strike me now ; strike thou me ; laugh not.
m., go on ! strike me now ; strike me ; do not laugh.
Wute-lea wal be; wutea bang; w., thou art covered ; I am.
Covered shalt thou ; covered I.
Ammoung be wea-la; wea-la be tea; m., speak to me ;
Me thou speak; speak thou me. do tell me.
17. Mun-billi, ihQ permissive \Qxhdl.
Ta-mun-billa tea; wa-mun-billa tea; man-muu-billa tea.
Eat-let me ; move-let me ; take-let me.
m., let me eat ; let me go ; let me take.
Jc
146 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.
Tura-mun billa tea; wita tea wa-mun-billa.
Pierce-lct me; depart nie move-let.
OT., let me spear; let me depart.
Bereke-bun-billa tea; yalla-wa-bun-billa tea.
Sleep-let me ; rest move-let me.
OT., let me sleep ; let me go to rest .
Wea-bun-billa tea; ugurrur-bun-billa tea.
Speak-let me ; hear-let me.
m., let me speak ; let me hear.
Tanan tea wa-mun-billa koeyung kako.
Approach me move-let fire to.
7«., let me draw nigli to the fire.
Tatte-ba buu-billa tea ; ?«., let me die.
Dead let me.
Yan-te kore murrong, tatte-ba bun-billa tea.
Like-as man good, dead let me.
m., let me die, like as a good mau.
Yuring ba-la bula wa-la; m., away ye two must go.
Away must ye-two move.
Bu-wa bou kore unne ; buwa noun napal unnoa.
Beat him man this ; beat her woman that.
m., beat this man ; beat that woman.
Bu-wa be-nu warekul unnung ; kai! wa-la, wa-la, wa-la.
Beat thou it dog there ; come ! move, move, movf>.
«?., beat thou the dog there ; come move, make haste.
Ka-bo yarai ka ; m., stop till the evening.
Stop evening to.
Yanoa! take yekora be; yai! take korji, yanoa.
Let be ! eat not thou ; let be ! eat not let be.
m., thou shalt not eat ; let it be ; on no account eat ; let it be,
18. Ya-no-ow, m., I remain ; I loill not.
Mau-ke yekora; bunke yekora; peta yekora; peta-la.
Take not ; smite not ; drink not ! drink- do.
m., do not steal ; do not kill ; do not drink ; drink.
Yake! beyn petayeka; ;«., serve tliee right if thou art drunk.
Let be ! to thee drunken.
Ya ke! beyn m ur ray eka ; w., serve thee right if thou wilt run.
Be as it is ! to thee a runner.
Wea, be tanan; unte bang ka-tan; »«., wilt thou draw nigh?
Say, thou approach ; here I am.
Wita korean bang; kaawi bang nga-le ko; nga-la ko.
Depart not I ; not I this for ; that for.
m.^ I depart not ; I am not for this ; for that.
Kabo, kabo! me-tela tea; yanoa! me-te yekora.
Stop ! wait me ; let be ! wait . do not.
in., stop, stop ! wait for me ; never mind ; do not wait.
Kakul-ba-taunne; kakul koreannan unne; »?., this is nice;
Nice this j nice not this. this is not.
FIRST SPECIMEN OF THE AWABAHAL DIALECT. 147
Koeyung tea marae; yake-ta koa uma-la.
Fire me bring (take); now why do.
w., bring some fire to me ; why! do it immediately.
Yan-te ko-lang uwau; yan-te barur-ba uwau.
Thus toM'ards move ; thus they move.
m., to this it moves ; thus they move.
Tan-te-ta ngeroamba; yau-te unne-ba.
Thus thine ; thus this.
111., to this it is like thine ; it is like this.
Yau-te-bo kore ko-ba wean ; m., let it be thus, as a black
Thus man belonging-to speak. man speaks.
Tan-te-bo tea ngu-wa; yan-te wan-ta wea be.
Thus me give ; thus as say thou.
?«., just as it is, give it to me ; just so as thou sayest.
Tupa-la unnoa yan-te; w., do it like this.
Do, do that thus as.
Upan noa yante unnoa-ba; uma-la unnoa yan-te.
Does he thus-as that ; make that thus as.
«j., it is done like that ; make it like this.
Uma noa yante-ta; vi., he made it as this.
Made he thus as.
Ngu-ke-la nurur yan-teyn ko; kulla-ba-lea kote.
Give ye alike for ; cut own.
ni., give equally to all ; cut thine own.
Bun-nun noa tea ba, tura-la be-nu; «?., if he strikes me,
Strike-will he rne if, spear thou him. do thou spear him.
Purrul beyn ugora ; purrul-lea purrul.
White to-thee face ; whitened white.
m., whiten thy face ; it is whitened.
An — the sign of the present tense; as, we-an bang, 'I speak.'
Man-tau be, 'thou takest'; kow-woJ,to be 'great,' or 'much,'
or 'large'; kow-wol-lan unnoa, 'that is large'; kur-kur,
'cold'; kur-kur-ran bang, 'I am cold'; takur-rara, 'it
is cold.' The consonants are doubled, in order to preserve
their full sound, and to divide the syllables for pronouncing.
Eyn — forms the present participle; as, wa-leyn, 'moving';
tu-ra-leyn, ' spearing '; wa-leyn bang nar-ra-bo ka ko, 'I
am getting to sleep,' ?iV., 'lam moving for-to sleep'; bun-
key n noa, 'he being to be beaten.'
A — the sign of the past tense ; as, wea bon bang, 'I told him';
na-ka-la bang, 'I saw ' or 'did see'; bun-ka-la noa, 'he
smote,' or ' struck,' or ' fought.'
An — the sign of the perfect ; as, ta-ka-an bang, 'I have eaten ';
ta-ka-an wal bang, 'I have just eaten'; wi-ta wa-la-an
ngaan, 'we have departed'; ta-nan wa-la-an wal ba-rur,
' they have just arrived.'
148 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
Nun — forms the future; as, bun-nuu boii bang, 'I will baat
him'; kum-ba-bo wita bang wa-nun, *I shall dej art to-
morrow'; wita wal bang wa-nun, 'I am about to depart.'
wita wal bang pa-la wa-nun, 'I must depart.'
La — forms the active imperative ; as, wea-la, ' speak '; ngurra-
la, 'do hear': bu-mun-bil-la tea, 'let me smite'; ngur-
ra-bun-bil-la tea bon, 'let him hear me.'
Wa — imperative of motion; as, bu-wa tea-be, ' smite thou me';
na-ow-wa, ' look.'
Ea — as in ra, imperatively used. Thus, kai be, 'be thou
here'; kabobe, 'be thou where thou art,' 'stand still,' 'be
still,' ' wait,' 'halt.' The bo reflects the verb on itself.
Ya — appears to be the imperative passive 'to be'; a.s, yanoa;
weaye kora, 'let it be as it is'; 'do not speak,' This is
often used with the negative imperative, yai, 'do not trouble
me '; ' let me be as I am.'
AVil or o w-wil — this, whenever used, expresses a wish or desire ;
as, bu-wil bang gero-ung, 'I wish to beat thee'; pe-re-ke-
wil be, 'thou wishest to sleep'; pe-ta-o w-wil no a, 'he
wishes to drink.'
Ko-a — has the same force ; thus, bu-wil koa bang, 'in order
that I may beat'; pe-re-ke-wil koa be, 'in order that thou
mightest sleep'; pe-ta-ow-wil koa noa, 'in order that he
may drink '; we-a-o w-wil koa bang, ' that I may speak.'
Ke-le-ko or le-ko — this forms the infinitive-; thus, unne uma
ammoung ta-ke-le-ko, 'this is made for me to eat'; tura-
le-ko, ' to spear.' The idiom requires ko to form the infini-
tive ; as, murrorong ta ta-ke-le-ko, 'it is good for-to eat.'
Eyn or Ke-leyn — this forms the present participle; as, ta-ke-
leyn, 'to be eating'; tat-te-ba-leyn, 'to be dying.'
Sjdney : Charles Potter, Goverumeiit Printer.— 1892.
;»;■•' V •■■■■ '^^?v^:*tT^iW^
^^w^^'W^s^m:^-
-o',' ,-^y ' . ■ ' '
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
CD^7DD^7^s
ypn